CLAOperator's Manual

Order no. 6515 5219 13 Part no. 117 584 21 00 Edition E 2014

É1175842100tËÍ1175842100

CLA-C

lassO

perat

or'sM

anual

Publication detailsInternet

Further information about Mercedes-Benzvehicles and about Daimler AG can be foundon the following websites:http://www.mbusa.com (USA only)http://www.mercedes-benz.ca (Canadaonly)

Editorial office

©Daimler AG: Not to be reprinted, translatedor otherwise reproduced, in whole or in part,without written permission from Daimler AG.

Vehicle manufacturer

Daimler AGMercedesstraße 13770327 StuttgartGermany

SymbolsRegistered trademarks:RBluetooth® is a registered trademark ofBluetooth SIG Inc.RDTS is a registered trademark of DTS, Inc.RDolby and MLP are registered trademarksof DOLBY Laboratories.RBabySmart™, ESP® and PRE-SAFE® areregistered trademarks of Daimler AG.RHomeLink® is a registered trademark ofJohnson Controls.RiPod® and iTunes® are registeredtrademarks of Apple Inc.RLogic7® is a registered trademark ofHarman International Industries.RMicrosoft® and Windows media® areregistered trademarks of MicrosoftCorporation.RSIRIUS is a registered trademark of SiriusXM Radio Inc.RHD Radio is a registered trademark ofiBiquity Digital Corporation.RGracenote® is a registered trademark ofGracenote, Inc.RZAGATSurvey® and related brands areregistered trademarks of ZagatSurvey,LLC.

In this Operator's Manual you will find thefollowing symbols:

G WARNINGWarning notes make you aware dangerswhich could pose a threat to your health orlife, or to the health and life of others.

H Environmental noteEnvironmental notes provide you withinformation on environmentally aware actionsor disposal.

! Notes on material damage alert you todangers that could lead to damage to yourvehicle.

i Practical tips or further information thatcould be helpful to you.

X This symbol indicates aninstruction that must be followed.

X Several of these symbols insuccession indicate an instructionwith several steps.

(Y page) This symbol tells you where youcan find more information about atopic.

YY This symbol indicates a warning oran instruction that is continued onthe next page.

DisplayDisplay This font indicates a display in themultifunction display/COMANDdisplay.

Parts of the software in the vehicle areprotected by copyright © 2005The FreeType Projecthttp://www.freetype.org. All rightsreserved.

As at 29.10.2012

Welcome to the world of Mercedes-BenzWe urge you to read this Operator's Manualcarefully and familiarize yourself with thevehicle before driving. For your own safetyand a longer vehicle life, follow theinstructions and warning notices in thismanual. Ignoring them could result in damageto the vehicle or personal injury to you orothers.Vehicle damage caused by failure to followinstructions is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.The equipment or product designation of yourvehicle may vary depending on:RModelROrderRCountry specificationRAvailabilityMercedes-Benz therefore reserves the rightto introduce changes in the following areas:RDesignREquipmentRTechnical featuresThe equipment in your vehicle may thereforediffer from that shown in the descriptions andillustrations.The following are integral components of thevehicle:ROperator's ManualRMaintenance BookletREquipment-dependent supplementsKeep printed copies of the documents in thevehicle at all times. If you sell the vehicle,always pass the documents on to the newowner.The technical documentation team atDaimler AG wishes you safe and pleasantmotoring.Mercedes-Benz USA, LLCMercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.A Daimler Company

1175842100 É1175842100tËÍ

Index ....................................................... 4

Introduction ......................................... 21

At a glance ........................................... 29

Safety ................................................... 39

Opening and closing ........................... 75

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors .... 93

Lights and windshield wipers .......... 107

Climate control ................................. 123

Driving and parking .......................... 139

On-board computer and displays .... 197

Stowage and features ...................... 259

Maintenance and care ...................... 285

Breakdown assistance ..................... 299

Wheels and tires ............................... 317

Technical data ................................... 349

Contents 3

1, 2, 3 ...12 V socket

see Sockets4ETS

see ETS/4ETS (ElectronicTraction System)

4MATIC (permanent all-wheeldrive)

Display message ............................ 2454MATIC (permanent four-wheeldrive) .................................................. 178

AABS (Anti-lock Braking System)

Display message ............................ 218Function/notes ................................ 64Important safety notes .................... 64Warning lamp ................................. 249

Activating/deactivating coolingwith air dehumidification ................. 129Active Parking Assist

Canceling ....................................... 186Detecting parking spaces .............. 183Display message ............................ 238Exiting a parking space .................. 185Function/notes ............................. 182Important safety notes .................. 182Parking .......................................... 184

ADAPTIVE BRAKE ................................. 72Adaptive Brake Assist

Display message ............................ 226Function/notes ................................ 66

Adaptive Highbeam AssistDisplay message ............................ 233Function/notes ............................. 112Switching on/off ........................... 113Switching on/off (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 211

Additional speedometer ................... 210Additives (engine oil) ........................ 354Air bags

Deployment ..................................... 41Display message ............................ 229Front air bag (driver, frontpassenger) ....................................... 45Important safety notes .................... 43

Knee bag .......................................... 45PASSENGER AIR BAG OFFindicator lamp .................................. 47Safety guidelines ............................. 42Side impact air bag .......................... 46Window curtain air bag .................... 47

Air-conditioning systemsee Climate control

Air ventsImportant safety notes .................. 136Rear ............................................... 137Setting ........................................... 136Setting the center air vents ........... 136Setting the side air vents ............... 136

Alarm systemsee ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)

Ambient lightingSetting the brightness (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 211

AMGPerformance Seat ............................ 99

AMG menu (on-board computer) ..... 213Anti-lock braking system

see ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)Anti-theft alarm system

see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)Ashtray ............................................... 268Assistance display (on-boardcomputer) .......................................... 207Assistance menu (on-boardcomputer) .......................................... 207ASSYST PLUS

Displaying a service message ........ 291Hiding a service message .............. 291Notes ............................................. 290Resetting the service intervaldisplay ........................................... 291Service message ............................ 290Special service requirements ......... 291

ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)Activating/deactivating ................... 72Function ........................................... 72Switching off the alarm .................... 72

ATTENTION ASSISTActivating/deactivating ................. 209Display message ............................ 236Function/notes ............................. 190

4 Index

Audio menu (on-board computer) .... 204Audio system

see separate operating instructionsAuthorized Centers

see Qualified specialist workshopAuthorized Mercedes-Benz Center

see Qualified specialist workshopAuthorized workshops

see Qualified specialist workshopAUTO lights

Display message ............................ 233see Lights

Automatic engine start (ECOstart/stop function) .................................... 144Automatic engine switch-off (ECOstart/stop function) .......................... 143Automatic headlamp mode .............. 109Automatic transmission

Automatic drive program ............... 151Changing gear ............................... 149DIRECT SELECT lever ..................... 146Display message ............................ 243Drive program display .................... 147Driving tips .................................... 149Emergency running mode .............. 155Engaging drive position .................. 148Engaging neutral ............................ 148Engaging park position (AMGvehicles) ........................................ 149Engaging reverse gear ................... 147Engaging the park position ............ 147Holding the vehicle stationary onuphill gradients .............................. 149Kickdown ....................................... 150Manual drive program .................... 152Overview ........................................ 146Problem (malfunction) ................... 155Program selector button ................ 150Pulling away ................................... 142Selector lever ................................ 148Starting the engine ........................ 142Steering wheel paddle shifters ...... 151Transmission position display 147, 148Transmission positions .................. 149

Automatic transmissionemergency mode ............................... 155

BBackup lamp

Changing bulbs .............................. 118Display message ............................ 232

BAS (Brake Assist System) ................. 64Battery (SmartKey)

Checking .......................................... 78Important safety notes .................... 78Replacing ......................................... 78

Battery (vehicle)Charging ........................................ 307Display message ............................ 235Important safety notes .................. 305Jump starting ................................. 309

Belt force limiterActivation ......................................... 55Function ........................................... 55

Blind Spot AssistActivating/deactivating ................. 209Display message ............................ 238Notes/function .............................. 192

Brake Assistsee BAS (Brake Assist System)

Brake fluidDisplay message ............................ 224Notes ............................................. 354

Brake lampsChanging bulbs .............................. 118Display message ............................ 231

BrakesABS .................................................. 64Adaptive Brake Assist ...................... 66BAS .................................................. 64Brake fluid (notes) ......................... 354Display message ............................ 218Driving tips .................................... 162Important safety notes .................. 162Maintenance .................................. 163Parking brake ................................ 158Warning lamp ................................. 249

Breakdownsee Flat tiresee Towing away/tow-starting

Bulbssee Replacing bulbs

Index 5

CCalling up a malfunction

see Display messagesCar

see VehicleCare

Carpets .......................................... 298Car wash ........................................ 292Display ........................................... 296Exhaust pipe .................................. 296Exterior lights ................................ 295Gear or selector lever .................... 297Interior ........................................... 296Matte finish ................................... 294Notes ............................................. 291Paint .............................................. 293Plastic trim .................................... 296Power washer ................................ 293Rear view camera .......................... 295Roof lining ...................................... 298Seat belt ........................................ 298Seat cover ..................................... 297Sensors ......................................... 295Steering wheel ............................... 297Trim pieces .................................... 297Washing by hand ........................... 292Wheels ........................................... 293Windows ........................................ 294Wiper blades .................................. 294Wooden trim .................................. 297

Cargo compartment enlargement . . . 263Cargo tie down rings ......................... 264Car wash (care) ................................. 292Center console

Lower section .................................. 35Upper section .................................. 34

Central lockingAutomatic locking (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 212Locking/unlocking (SmartKey) ........ 76

Changing bulbsBrake lamps ................................... 118Cornering light function ................. 117High-beam headlamps ................... 117Low-beam headlamps .................... 116Rear fog lamp ................................ 118Reversing lamps ............................ 118

Turn signals (front) ......................... 117Turn signals (rear) .......................... 118

Child-proof locksImportant safety notes .................... 62Rear doors ....................................... 63

ChildrenIn the vehicle ................................... 56Restraint systems ............................ 56Special seat belt retractor ............... 59

Child seatLATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seatanchors ............................................ 60On the front-passenger seat ............ 60Top Tether ....................................... 61

Cigarette lighter ................................ 268Climate control

Automatic climate control ............. 125Automatic climate control (dual-zone) .............................................. 127Controlling automatically ............... 131Cooling with air dehumidification . . 129Defrosting the windows ................. 133Defrosting the windshield .............. 133Important safety notes .................. 124Indicator lamp ................................ 131Maximum cooling .......................... 133Notes on using automatic climatecontrol ........................................... 128Notes on using dual-zoneautomatic climate control .............. 126Overview of systems ...................... 124Problems with cooling with airdehumidification ............................ 131Problem with the rear windowdefroster ........................................ 135Refrigerant ..................................... 356Refrigerant filling capacity ............. 357Setting the air distribution ............. 132Setting the airflow ......................... 132Setting the air vents ...................... 136Setting the temperature ................ 131Switching air-recirculation modeon/off ............................................ 135Switching on/off ........................... 129Switching residual heat on/off ...... 135

6 Index

Switching the rear windowdefroster on/off ............................ 134Switching the ZONE function on/off .................................................. 132

CockpitOverview .......................................... 30see Instrument cluster

COLLISION PREVENTION ASSISTActivating/deactivating thedistance warning function .............. 208Display message ............................ 218Operation/notes .............................. 65

COLLISION PREVENTION ASSISTPLUS

Activating/deactivating ................. 208Display message ............................ 225Operation/notes .............................. 67

COMANDsee separate operating instructions

Combination switch .......................... 110Compass

Calibrating ..................................... 282Calling up ....................................... 282Setting ........................................... 282

Consumption statistics (on-boardcomputer) .......................................... 201Convenience closing feature .............. 88Convenience opening feature ............ 88Coolant (engine)

Checking the level ......................... 289Display message ............................ 234Filling capacity ............................... 356Important safety notes .................. 355Temperature (on-board computer) . 213Temperature gauge ........................ 198Warning lamp ................................. 255

Coolingsee Climate control

Copyright ............................................. 27Cornering light function

Changing bulbs .............................. 117Display message ............................ 230Function/notes ............................. 111

Crash-responsive emergencylighting ............................................... 114

Cruise controlActivation conditions ..................... 167Cruise control lever ....................... 166Deactivating ................................... 168Display message ............................ 240Driving system ............................... 166Function/notes ............................. 166Important safety notes .................. 166Setting a speed .............................. 167Storing and maintaining currentspeed ............................................. 167

Cup holderCenter console .............................. 266Important safety notes .................. 266Rear compartment ......................... 267

Customer Assistance Center (CAC) ... 25Customer Relations Department ....... 25

DDashboard

see Instrument clusterDashboard lighting

see Instrument cluster lightingData

see Technical dataDaytime running lamps

Display message ............................ 232Switching on/off (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 210Switching on/off (switch) .............. 109

Dealershipssee Qualified specialist workshop

Declarations of conformity ................. 24Delayed switch-off

Exterior lighting (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 211Interior lighting .............................. 212

Diagnostics connection ...................... 24Digital speedometer ......................... 202DIRECT SELECT lever

see Automatic transmissionDisplay (cleaning instructions) ........ 296Display messages

ASSYST PLUS ................................ 290Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 217Driving systems ............................. 236Engine ............................................ 234

Index 7

General notes ................................ 217Hiding (on-board computer) ........... 217Lights ............................................. 230Safety systems .............................. 218SmartKey ....................................... 247Tires ............................................... 241Vehicle ........................................... 243

Distance recorder ............................. 201see Odometersee Trip odometer

Distance warning functionActivating/deactivating ................. 208Function/notes ................................ 65Warning lamp ................................. 257

DISTRONIC PLUSActivation conditions ..................... 170Cruise control lever ....................... 170Deactivating ................................... 173Display message ............................ 239Displays in the multifunctiondisplay ........................................... 174Driving tips .................................... 174Function/notes ............................. 168Important safety notes .................. 168Setting the specified minimumdistance ......................................... 172Warning lamp ................................. 257

DoorsAutomatic locking (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 212Automatic locking (switch) ............... 83Central locking/unlocking(SmartKey) ....................................... 76Control panel ................................... 37Display message ............................ 246Emergency locking ........................... 83Emergency unlocking ....................... 83Important safety notes .................... 81Opening (from inside) ...................... 81

Drinking and driving ......................... 161Drinks holder

see Cup holderDrive program

Automatic ...................................... 151Display ........................................... 148Display (DIRECT SELECT lever) ...... 147Manual ........................................... 152SETUP (on-board computer) .......... 214

Driver's doorsee Doors

Driving abroadMercedes-Benz Service ................. 291Symmetrical low beam .................. 108

Driving on flooded roads .................. 165Driving safety systems

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ....... 64ADAPTIVE BRAKE ............................. 72Adaptive Brake Assist ...................... 66BAS (Brake Assist System) .............. 64COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST .... 65COLLISION PREVENTION ASSISTPLUS ................................................ 67Distance warning function ............... 65Electronic brake force distribution ... 71ESP® (Electronic StabilityProgram) .......................................... 68ETS/4ETS (Electronic TractionSystem) ........................................... 68Important safety information ........... 63Overview .......................................... 63STEER CONTROL ............................. 72

Driving systemsActive Parking Assist ..................... 182ATTENTION ASSIST ........................ 190Blind Spot Assist ............................ 192Cruise control ................................ 166Display message ............................ 236DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 168HOLD function ............................... 176Lane Keeping Assist ...................... 194Lane Tracking package .................. 192PARKTRONIC ................................. 179RACE START (AMG vehicles) .......... 177Rear view camera .......................... 186Speed Limit Assist ......................... 191

Driving tipsAutomatic transmission ................. 149Brakes ........................................... 162Break-in period .............................. 140Checking brake lining thickness .... 164DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 174Downhill gradient ........................... 162Drinking and driving ....................... 161Driving abroad ............................... 108Driving in winter ............................. 165Driving on flooded roads ................ 165

8 Index

Driving on wet roads ...................... 165Exhaust check ............................... 161Fuel ................................................ 161General .......................................... 160Hydroplaning ................................. 165Icy road surfaces ........................... 165Limited braking efficiency onsalted roads ................................... 163Snow chains .................................. 321Symmetrical low beam .................. 108Wet road surface ........................... 163

DVD audio (on-board computer) ...... 205DVD video (on-board computer) ...... 205

EEASY-VARIO-PLUS system

Cargo compartment enlargement .. 263EBD (electronic brake forcedistribution)

Display message ............................ 220Function/notes ................................ 71

ECO displayFunction/notes ............................. 161On-board computer ....................... 202

ECO start/stop functionAutomatic engine start .................. 144Automatic engine switch-off .......... 143Deactivating/activating ................. 144General information ....................... 143Important safety notes .................. 143Introduction ................................... 143

Electronic Stability Programsee ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)

Emergency releaseDriver's door .................................... 83Trunk ............................................... 86Vehicle ............................................. 83

Emergency Tensioning DevicesActivation ......................................... 41Function ........................................... 55Safety guidelines ............................. 42

Emissions controlService and warranty information .... 22

EngineCheck Engine warning lamp ........... 255Display message ............................ 234ECO start/stop function ................ 143

Engine number ............................... 351Irregular running ............................ 145Jump-starting ................................. 309Starting problems .......................... 145Starting the engine with theSmartKey ....................................... 142Switching off .................................. 158Tow-starting (vehicle) ..................... 314

Engine electronicsProblem (malfunction) ................... 145

Engine oilAdding ........................................... 288Additives ........................................ 354Checking the oil level ..................... 287Checking the oil level using thedipstick .......................................... 288Display message ............................ 235Filling capacity ............................... 354Notes about oil grades ................... 354Notes on oil level/consumption .... 287Temperature (on-board computer) . 213Viscosity ........................................ 354

ESP® (Electronic StabilityProgram)

AMG menu (on-board computer) . . . 214Deactivating/activating (AMGvehicles) .......................................... 69Deactivating/activating (exceptAMG vehicles) ................................ 208Deactivating/activating (notes;except AMG vehicles) ...................... 69Display message ............................ 218ETS/4ETS ........................................ 68Function/notes ................................ 68General notes .................................. 68Important safety information ........... 68Trailer stabilization ........................... 71Warning lamp ................................. 251

ETS/4ETS (Electronic TractionSystem) ................................................ 68Exhaust check ................................... 161Exhaust pipe (cleaning instructions) 296Exterior lighting

Setting options .............................. 108see Lights

Exterior mirrorsAdjusting ....................................... 102Dipping (automatic) ....................... 103

Index 9

Folding in/out (automatically) ....... 103Folding in/out (electrically) ........... 102Folding in when locking (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 213Out of position (troubleshooting) ... 103Setting ........................................... 103Storing settings (memory function) 104Storing the parking position .......... 103

Eyeglasses compartment ................. 261

FFiller cap

see Fuel filler flapFirst-aid kit ......................................... 300Flat tire

MOExtended tires .......................... 301Preparing the vehicle ..................... 301TIREFIT kit ...................................... 302

Floormats ........................................... 283Fog lamps

Extended range .............................. 112Switching on/off ........................... 109

Front fog lampsDisplay message ............................ 231Switching on/off ........................... 109

FuelAdditives ........................................ 353Consumption statistics .................. 201Displaying the currentconsumption .................................. 202Displaying the range ...................... 202Driving tips .................................... 161Fuel gauge ....................................... 31Grade (gasoline) ............................ 352Important safety notes .................. 352Notes for AMG vehicles ................. 353Premium-grade unleaded gasoline . 352Problem (malfunction) ................... 157Refueling ........................................ 155Tank content/reserve fuel ............. 352

Fuel filler flapOpening/closing ............................ 156

Fuel levelCalling up the range (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 202

Fuel tankCapacity ........................................ 352Problem (malfunction) ................... 157

FusesAllocation chart ............................. 315Before changing ............................. 314Fuse box in the enginecompartment ................................. 314Fuse box in the front-passengerfootwell .......................................... 315Important safety notes .................. 314

GGarage door opener

Clearing the memory ..................... 281Important safety notes .................. 279Opening/closing the garage door .. 281Programming (button in the rear-view mirror) ................................... 279

Gear indicator (on-board computer) 213Gear or selector lever (cleaningguidelines) ......................................... 297Genuine parts ...................................... 21Glove box ........................................... 261

HHandbrake

see Parking brakeHazard warning lamps ...................... 111

Display message ............................ 247Headlamps

Fogging up ..................................... 113see Automatic headlamp mode

Head restraintsAdjusting ......................................... 97Adjusting (electrically) ..................... 98Adjusting (manually) ........................ 97Adjusting (rear) ................................ 98Installing/removing (rear) ................ 98

Heatingsee Climate control

High-beam headlampsChanging bulbs .............................. 117Display message ............................ 231Switching on/off ........................... 110

Hill start assist .................................. 142

10 Index

HOLD functionDeactivating ................................... 177Display message ............................ 237Function/notes ............................. 176

HoodClosing ........................................... 287Display message ............................ 246Important safety notes .................. 286Opening ......................................... 286

Hydroplaning ..................................... 165

IIgnition lock

see Key positionsImmobilizer .......................................... 72Indicator lamps

see Warning and indicator lampsInstrument cluster

Overview .......................................... 31Settings ......................................... 210Warning and indicator lamps ........... 32

Instrument cluster lighting .............. 198Interior lighting ................................. 113

Automatic control .......................... 114Delayed switch-off (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 212Emergency lighting ........................ 114Manual control ............................... 114Overview ........................................ 113Reading lamp ................................. 113Setting the brightness of theambient lighting (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 211

JJack

Storage location ............................ 300Using ............................................. 343

Jump starting (engine) ...................... 309

KKickdown

Driving tips .................................... 150Manual drive program .................... 154

Knee bag .............................................. 45

LLamps

see Warning and indicator lampsLane Keeping Assist

Activating/deactivating ................. 209Display message ............................ 237Function/information .................... 194

Lane Tracking package ..................... 192Lap time (RACETIMER) ...................... 214LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seatanchors ................................................ 60License plate lamp (displaymessage) ............................................ 231Light function, active

Display message ............................ 233Lighting

Light switch ................................... 108Lights

Activating/deactivating theinterior lighting delayed switch-off . 212Automatic headlamp mode ............ 109Cornering light function ................. 111Display message ............................ 230Driving abroad ............................... 108Fog lamps ...................................... 109Fog lamps (extended) .................... 112Hazard warning lamps ................... 111High beam flasher .......................... 111High-beam headlamps ................... 110Low-beam headlamps .................... 109Parking lamps ................................ 110Rear fog lamp ................................ 110Setting the brightness of theambient lighting (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 211Standing lamps .............................. 110Switching Adaptive HighbeamAssist on/off ................................. 211Switching the daytime runninglamps on/off (on-board computer) 210Switching the daytime runninglamps on/off (switch) .................... 109Switching the exterior lightingdelayed switch-off on/off (on-board computer) ............................ 211

Index 11

Switching the surround lightingon/off (on-board computer) .......... 211Turn signals ................................... 110see Interior lightingsee Replacing bulbs

Light sensor (display message) ....... 233Loading guidelines ............................ 260Locking

see Central lockingLocking (doors)

Automatic ........................................ 83Emergency locking ........................... 83From inside (central lockingbutton) ............................................. 82

Locking centrallysee Central locking

Locking verification signal (on-board computer) ............................... 212Low-beam headlamps

Changing bulbs .............................. 116Display message ............................ 230Setting for driving abroad(symmetrical) ................................. 108Switching on/off ........................... 109

Lumbar supportAdjusting the 4-way lumbarsupport ............................................ 98

MM+S tires ............................................ 320Malfunction message

see Display messagesMatte finish (cleaning instructions) 294mbrace

Call priority .................................... 274Display message ............................ 224Downloading destinations(COMAND) ..................................... 274Downloading routes ....................... 278Emergency call .............................. 271General notes ................................ 270Geo fencing ................................... 278Locating a stolen vehicle ............... 276MB info call button ........................ 273Remote vehicle locking .................. 276Roadside Assistance button .......... 272Search & Send ............................... 275

Self-test ......................................... 271Speed alert .................................... 278System .......................................... 270Triggering the vehicle alarm ........... 278Vehicle remote malfunctiondiagnosis ....................................... 277Vehicle remote unlocking .............. 276

Mechanical keyFunction/notes ................................ 77Locking vehicle ................................ 83Unlocking the driver's door .............. 83

Memory card (audio) ......................... 205Memory function ............................... 104Message memory (on-boardcomputer) .......................................... 217Messages

see Display messagesMirrors

see Exterior mirrorssee Rear-view mirrorsee Vanity mirror (in the sun visor)

Mobile phoneMenu (on-board computer) ............ 205

Modifying the programming(SmartKey) ........................................... 77MOExtended tires .............................. 301Mounting wheels

Lowering the vehicle ...................... 346Mounting a new wheel ................... 345Preparing the vehicle ..................... 342Raising the vehicle ......................... 343Removing a wheel .......................... 345Securing the vehicle againstrolling away ................................... 343

MP3Operation ....................................... 205see separate operating instructions

Multifunction displayFunction/notes ............................. 200Permanent display ......................... 210

Multifunction steering wheelOperating the on-board computer . 199Overview .......................................... 33

12 Index

NNavigation

Menu (on-board computer) ............ 203see separate operating instructions

Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle 140

OOccupant Classification System(OCS)

Faults ............................................... 51Operation ......................................... 47System self-test ............................... 50

Occupant safetyChildren in the vehicle ..................... 56Important safety notes .................... 40

OCSFaults ............................................... 51Operation ......................................... 47System self-test ............................... 50

Oilsee Engine oil

On-board computerAMG menu ..................................... 213Assistance menu ........................... 207Audio menu ................................... 204Convenience submenu .................. 213Displaying a service message ........ 291Display messages .......................... 217DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 174Factory settings submenu ............. 213Important safety notes .................. 198Instrument cluster submenu .......... 210Lighting submenu .......................... 210Menu overview .............................. 201Message memory .......................... 217Navigation menu ............................ 203Operation ....................................... 199RACETIMER ................................... 214Service menu ................................. 209Settings menu ............................... 209Standard display ............................ 201Telephone menu ............................ 205Trip menu ...................................... 201Vehicle submenu ........................... 212Video DVD operation ..................... 205

Opening and closing the side trimpanels ................................................. 117Operating safety

Declaration of conformity ................ 24Important safety notes .................... 23

Operating systemsee On-board computer

Operator's ManualVehicle equipment ........................... 22

Outside temperature display ........... 199Overhead control panel ...................... 36Override feature

Rear side windows ........................... 63

PPaint code number ............................ 350Paintwork (cleaning instructions) . . . 293Panic alarm .......................................... 40Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel

Opening/closing the rollersunblind ........................................... 91Problem (malfunction) ..................... 92Resetting ......................................... 92

Panorama sliding sunroofImportant safety notes .................... 89

Parcel net ........................................... 263Parking ............................................... 157

Important safety notes .................. 157Parking brake ................................ 158Position of exterior mirror, front-passenger side ............................... 103Rear view camera .......................... 186see Active Parking Assistsee PARKTRONIC

Parking aidActive Parking Assist ..................... 182see Exterior mirrorssee PARKTRONIC

Parking brakeDisplay message ............................ 221Electric parking brake .................... 158Warning lamp ................................. 254

Parking lampsSwitching on/off ........................... 110

Index 13

PARKTRONICDeactivating/activating ................. 181Driving system ............................... 179Function/notes ............................. 179Important safety notes .................. 179Problem (malfunction) ................... 182Range of the sensors ..................... 179Warning display ............................. 180

PASSENGER AIR BAG OFFProblems (malfunction) .................. 229

PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF indicatorlamp ...................................................... 47Plastic trim (cleaning instructions) . 296Power washers .................................. 293Power windows

see Side windowsProgram selector button .................. 150Protection of the environment

General notes .................................. 21Pulling away

Automatic transmission ................. 142

QQualified specialist workshop ........... 25

RRACE START (AMG vehicles) ............. 177RACETIMER (on-board computer) .... 214Radar sensor system

Activating/deactivating ................. 213Display message ............................ 237

RadioSelecting a station ......................... 204see separate operating instructions

Radio-wave reception/transmission in the vehicle

Declaration of conformity ................ 24Reading lamp ..................................... 113Rear compartment

Setting the air vents ...................... 137Rear fog lamp

Changing bulbs .............................. 118Display message ............................ 232Switching on/off ........................... 110

Rear lampssee Lights

Rear seatsFolding the backrest forwards/back ............................................... 264

Rear view cameraCleaning instructions ..................... 295Function/notes ............................. 186Switching on/off ........................... 187

Rear-view mirrorAnti-glare (manual) ........................ 102Dipping (automatic) ....................... 103

Rear window defrosterProblem (malfunction) ................... 135Switching on/off ........................... 134

Refrigerant (air-conditioningsystem)

Important safety notes .................. 356Refueling

Fuel gauge ....................................... 31Important safety notes .................. 155Notes for AMG vehicles ................. 353Refueling process .......................... 156see Fuel

Remote controlGarage door opener ....................... 279Programming (garage door opener) 279

Replacing bulbsImportant safety notes .................. 114Overview of bulb types .................. 115Removing/replacing the cover(front wheel arch) .......................... 116

Reporting safety defects .................... 25Reserve (fuel tank)

see FuelReserve fuel

Display message ............................ 235Warning lamp ................................. 255see Fuel

Residual heat (climate control) ........ 135Restraint system

see SRS (Supplemental RestraintSystem)

Reverse gear (selector lever) ........... 148Reversing feature

Panorama sliding sunroof ................ 90Roller sunblinds ............................... 91Side windows ................................... 87

Roadside Assistance (breakdown) . . . . 23

14 Index

Roller sunblindOpening/closing .............................. 91Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel ..................................... 91

Roof carrier ........................................ 265Roof lining and carpets (cleaningguidelines) ......................................... 298Roof load (maximum) ........................ 357Route (navigation)

see Route guidance (navigation)Route guidance (navigation) ............ 203

SSafety

Children in the vehicle ..................... 56Child restraint systems .................... 56Occupant Classification System(OCS) ............................................... 47

Safety systemsee Driving safety systems

SeatAdjusting (Performance Seat) .......... 99

Seat beltsAdjusting the height ......................... 54Belt force limiters ............................ 55Cleaning ......................................... 298Correct usage .................................. 52Emergency Tensioning Devices ........ 55Fastening ......................................... 53Important safety guidelines ............. 52Releasing ......................................... 54Safety guidelines ............................. 42Warning lamp ................................. 247Warning lamp (function) ................... 55

SeatsAdjusting (electrically) ..................... 97Adjusting (manually) ........................ 96Adjusting the 4-way lumbarsupport ............................................ 98Adjusting the head restraint ............ 97Cleaning the cover ......................... 297Correct driver's seat position ........... 94Folding the backrest (rearcompartment) forwards/back ....... 264Important safety notes .................... 95Seat heating problem .................... 101

Storing settings (memory function) 104Switching seat heating on/off ......... 99

Sensors (cleaning instructions) ....... 295Service menu (on-board computer) . 209Service products

Brake fluid ..................................... 354Coolant (engine) ............................ 355Engine oil ....................................... 354Fuel ................................................ 352Important safety notes .................. 351Refrigerant (air-conditioningsystem) .......................................... 356Washer fluid ................................... 356

Service worksee ASSYST PLUS

SettingsFactory (on-board computer) ......... 213On-board computer ....................... 209

Setting the air distribution ............... 132Setting the airflow ............................ 132SETUP (on-board computer) ............. 214Side impact air bag ............................. 46Side marker lamp (displaymessage) ............................................ 232Side windows

Cleaning ......................................... 294Convenience closing feature ............ 88Convenience opening feature .......... 88Important safety information ........... 86Opening/closing .............................. 87Problem (malfunction) ..................... 89Resetting ......................................... 88

Sliding sunroofsee Panorama roof with powertilt/sliding panel

SmartKeyChanging the battery ....................... 78Changing the programming ............. 77Checking the battery ....................... 78Convenience closing feature ............ 88Convenience opening feature .......... 88Display message ............................ 247Door central locking/unlocking ....... 76Important safety notes .................... 76Loss ................................................. 80Mechanical key ................................ 77Positions (ignition lock) ................. 141

Index 15

Problem (malfunction) ..................... 80Starting the engine ........................ 142

SmartKey positions (ignition lock) . . 141Snow chains ...................................... 321Sockets

Center console .............................. 269Points to observe before use ......... 269Rear compartment ......................... 270Trunk ............................................. 270

Specialist workshop ............................ 25Special seat belt retractor .................. 59Speed, controlling

see Cruise controlSpeed Limit Assist

Activating/deactivating thewarning function ............................ 207Displaying ...................................... 207Display message ............................ 236Display message in themultifunction display ..................... 191Function/notes ............................. 191Important safety notes .................. 191

SpeedometerActivating/deactivating theadditional speedometer ................. 210Digital ............................................ 202In the Instrument cluster ................. 31Segments ...................................... 199Selecting the unit of measurement 210see Instrument cluster

SPORT handling modeActivating/deactivating (AMGvehicles) .......................................... 69Warning lamp ................................. 252

SRSsee SRS (Supplemental RestraintSystem)

SRS (Supplemental RestraintSystem)

Display message ............................ 226Introduction ..................................... 40Warning lamp ................................. 254Warning lamp (function) ................... 41

Standing lampsDisplay message ............................ 232Switching on/off ........................... 110

Start/stop functionsee ECO start/stop function

Starting (engine) ................................ 141STEER CONTROL .................................. 72Steering (display message) .............. 246Steering wheel

Adjusting (manually) ...................... 101Button overview ............................... 33Buttons (on-board computer) ......... 199Cleaning ......................................... 297Important safety notes .................. 101Paddle shifters ............................... 151

Steering wheel paddle shifters ........ 151Stopwatch (RACETIMER) ................... 214Stowage areas ................................... 260Stowage compartments

Armrest (front) ............................... 262Armrest (under) ............................. 262Center console .............................. 261Cup holders ................................... 266Eyeglasses compartment ............... 261Glove box ....................................... 261Important safety information ......... 260Parcel net ...................................... 263Under driver's seat/front-passenger seat .............................. 262

Stowage spaceCenter console (rear) ..................... 262

Stowage well beneath the trunkfloor .................................................... 265Summer tires ..................................... 320Sun visor ............................................ 267Surround lighting (on-boardcomputer) .......................................... 211Switching air-recirculation modeon/off ................................................. 135Switching off the alarm (ATA) ............ 72

TTachometer ........................................ 199Tail lamps

Display message ............................ 231see Lights

Tank contentFuel gauge ....................................... 31

Technical dataCapacities ...................................... 351Information .................................... 350

16 Index

Tires/wheels ................................. 346Vehicle data ................................... 357

TELEAIDCall priority .................................... 274Downloading destinations(COMAND) ..................................... 274Downloading routes ....................... 278Emergency call .............................. 271Geo fencing ................................... 278Locating a stolen vehicle ............... 276MB info call button ........................ 273Remote vehicle locking .................. 276Roadside Assistance button .......... 272Search & Send ............................... 275Self-test ......................................... 271Speed alert .................................... 278System .......................................... 270Triggering the vehicle alarm ........... 278Vehicle remote malfunctiondiagnosis ....................................... 277Vehicle remote unlocking .............. 276

Tele AidGeneral notes ................................ 270

TelephoneAccepting a call ............................. 206Display message ............................ 246Menu (on-board computer) ............ 205Number from the phone book ........ 206Redialing ........................................ 206Rejecting/ending a call ................. 206

TemperatureCoolant .......................................... 198Coolant (on-board computer) ......... 213Engine oil (on-board computer) ...... 213Outside temperature ...................... 199Setting (climate control) ................ 131

Theft deterrent systemsATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 72Immobilizer ...................................... 72

Through-loading ................................ 263Through-loading feature ................... 263Time

see separate operating instructionsTiming (RACETIMER) ......................... 214TIREFIT kit .......................................... 302Tire pressure

Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 326Checking manually ........................ 325

Display message ............................ 241Important safety notes .................. 326Maximum ....................................... 324Notes ............................................. 323Not reached (TIREFIT) .................... 304Reached (TIREFIT) .......................... 304Recommended ............................... 322

Tire pressure loss warningsystem

General notes ................................ 325Important safety notes .................. 325Restarting ...................................... 325

Tire pressure monitoring systemChecking the tire pressureelectronically ................................. 328Function/notes ............................. 326General notes ................................ 326Important safety notes .................. 326Restarting ...................................... 328Warning lamp ................................. 258Warning message .......................... 328

TiresAspect ratio (definition) ................. 341Average weight of the vehicleoccupants (definition) .................... 339Bar (definition) ............................... 339Changing a wheel .......................... 342Characteristics .............................. 339Checking ........................................ 319Definition of terms ......................... 339Direction of rotation ...................... 342Display message ............................ 241Distribution of the vehicleoccupants (definition) .................... 341DOT, Tire Identification Number(TIN) ............................................... 338DOT (Department ofTransportation) (definition) ............ 339GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)(definition) ..................................... 340GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight)(definition) ..................................... 340GVWR (Gross Vehicle WeightRating) (definition) ......................... 340Important safety notes .................. 318Increased vehicle weight due tooptional equipment (definition) ...... 339Kilopascal (kPa) (definition) ........... 340

Index 17

Labeling (overview) ........................ 335Load bearing index (definition) ...... 341Load index ..................................... 338Load index (definition) ................... 340M+S tires ....................................... 320Maximum loaded vehicle weight(definition) ..................................... 340Maximum load on a tire (definition) 340Maximum permissible tirepressure (definition) ....................... 340Maximum tire load ......................... 333Maximum tire load (definition) ....... 340MOExtended tires .......................... 320Optional equipment weight(definition) ..................................... 341PSI (pounds per square inch)(definition) ..................................... 340Replacing ....................................... 342Service life ..................................... 320Sidewall (definition) ....................... 341Speed rating (definition) ................ 340Storing ........................................... 342Structure and characteristics(definition) ..................................... 339Summer tires ......................... 165, 320Temperature .................................. 335TIN (Tire Identification Number)(definition) ..................................... 341Tire bead (definition) ...................... 341Tire pressure (definition) ................ 341Tire pressures (recommended) ...... 339Tire size (data) ............................... 346Tire size designation, load-bearingcapacity, speed rating .................... 336Tire tread ....................................... 319Tire tread (definition) ..................... 341Total load limit (definition) ............. 341Traction ......................................... 334Traction (definition) ....................... 341Tread wear ..................................... 334Uniform Tire Quality GradingStandards ...................................... 334Uniform Tire Quality GradingStandards (definition) .................... 339Unladen weight (definition) ............ 340Wear indicator (definition) ............. 341Wheel rim (definition) .................... 339see Flat tire

Top Tether ............................................ 61Towing

Important safety guidelines ........... 311Installing the towing eye ................ 312Removing the towing eye ............... 312

Towing a trailerESP® (Electronic Stability Program) . 71

Towing awayWith both axles on the ground ....... 313With front axle raised ..................... 313

Tow-startingEmergency engine starting ............ 314Important safety notes .................. 311Installing the towing eye ................ 312Removing the towing eye ............... 312

Transmissionsee Automatic transmission

Transmission position display ......... 147Transporting the vehicle .................. 313Trim pieces (cleaning instructions) . 297Trip computer (on-board computer) 201Trip odometer

Calling up ....................................... 201Resetting (on-board computer) ...... 202

TrunkEmergency release .......................... 86Emergency release button ............... 86Important safety notes .................... 84Opening/closing (manually fromoutside) ............................................ 84Opening (automatically fromoutside) ............................................ 85Opening automatically from inside . . 85

Trunk emergency release button ....... 86Trunk lid

Display message ............................ 245Opening dimensions ...................... 357

Trunk load (maximum) ...................... 357Turn signals

Changing bulbs (front) ................... 117Changing bulbs (rear) .................... 118Display message ............................ 230Switching on/off ........................... 110

Type identification platesee Vehicle identification plate

18 Index

UUnlocking

Emergency unlocking ....................... 83From inside the vehicle (centralunlocking button) ............................. 82

VVanity mirror (in the sun visor) ........ 268Vehicle

Correct use ...................................... 25Data acquisition ............................... 26Equipment ....................................... 22Individual settings .......................... 209Limited Warranty ............................. 26Loading .......................................... 329Locking (in an emergency) ............... 83Locking (SmartKey) .......................... 76Lowering ........................................ 346Maintenance .................................... 22Parking for a long period ................ 160Pulling away ................................... 142Raising ........................................... 343Reporting problems ......................... 25Securing from rolling away ............ 343Towing away .................................. 311Tow-starting ................................... 311Transporting .................................. 313Unlocking (in an emergency) ........... 83Unlocking (SmartKey) ...................... 76Vehicle data ................................... 357

Vehicle data ....................................... 357Vehicle dimensions ........................... 357Vehicle emergency locking ................ 83Vehicle identification number

see VINVehicle identification plate .............. 350Vehicle maintenance

see ASSYST PLUSVehicle tool kit .................................. 300Video (DVD) ........................................ 205VIN ...................................................... 350

WWarning and indicator lamps

ABS ................................................ 249Brakes ........................................... 249

Check Engine ................................. 255Coolant .......................................... 255Distance warning ........................... 257DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 257ESP® .............................................. 251ESP® OFF ....................................... 252Fuel tank ........................................ 255Overview .......................................... 32PASSENGER AIR BAG OFFindicator lamp .................................. 47Reserve fuel ................................... 255Seat belt ........................................ 247SPORT handling mode ................... 252SRS ................................................ 254Tire pressure monitor .................... 258

Warranty ............................................ 350Washer fluid

Display message ............................ 246Wheel bolt tightening torque ........... 346Wheel chock ...................................... 343Wheels

Changing a wheel .......................... 342Checking ........................................ 319Cleaning ......................................... 293Cleaning (warning) ......................... 342Important safety notes .................. 318Interchanging/changing ................ 342Mounting a new wheel ................... 345Mounting a wheel .......................... 342Removing a wheel .......................... 345Storing ........................................... 342Tightening torque ........................... 346Wheel size/tire size ....................... 346

Window curtain air bagDisplay message ............................ 227Operation ......................................... 47

Windowssee Side windows

WindshieldDefrosting ...................................... 133

Windshield washer systemAdding washer fluid ....................... 290Notes ............................................. 356

Windshield wipersDisplay message ............................ 247Problem (malfunction) ................... 121

Index 19

Replacing the wiper blades ............ 119Switching on/off ........................... 118

Winter drivingSlippery road surfaces ................... 165Snow chains .................................. 321

Winter operationGeneral notes ................................ 320

Winter tiresM+S tires ....................................... 320

Wiper bladesCleaning ......................................... 294Important safety notes .................. 119Replacing (windshield) ................... 119

Wooden trim (cleaning instructions) 297Workshops

see Qualified specialist workshop

ZZONE function

Switching on/off ........................... 132

20 Index

Protection of the environment

General notes

H Environmental noteDaimler's declared policy is one ofcomprehensive environmental protection.The objectives are for the natural resourcesthat form the basis of our existence on thisplanet to be used sparingly and in a mannerthat takes the requirements of both natureand humanity into account.You too can help to protect the environmentby operating your vehicle in anenvironmentally responsible manner.Fuel consumption and the rate of engine,transmission, brake and tire wear are affectedby these factors:Roperating conditions of your vehicleRyour personal driving styleYou can influence both factors. You shouldbear the following in mind:Operating conditions:Ravoid short trips as these increase fuelconsumption.Ralways make sure that the tire pressuresare correct.Rdo not carry any unnecessary weight.Rremove roof racks once you no longer needthem.Ra regularly serviced vehicle will contributeto environmental protection. You shouldtherefore adhere to the service intervals.Ralways have service work carried out at aqualified specialist workshop.

Personal driving style:Rdo not depress the accelerator pedal whenstarting the engine.Rdo notwarmup the enginewhen the vehicleis stationary.Rdrive carefully and maintain a safe distancefrom the vehicle in front.Ravoid frequent, sudden acceleration andbraking.

Rchange gear in good time and use each gearonly up toÔ of its maximum engine speed.Rswitch off the engine in stationary traffic.Rkeep an eye on the vehicle's fuelconsumption.

Environmental concerns andrecommendationsWherever the operating instructions requireyou to dispose of materials, first try toregenerate or re-use them. Observe therelevant environmental rules and regulationswhen disposing of materials. In this way youwill help to protect the environment.

Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts

H Environmental noteDaimler AG also supplies reconditionedmajorassemblies and parts which are of the samequality as new parts. They are covered by thesame Limited Warranty entitlements as newparts.

! Air bags and Emergency TensioningDevices, as well as control units andsensors for these restraint systems,may beinstalled in the following areas of yourvehicle:RdoorsRdoor pillarsRdoor sillsRseatsRcockpitRinstrument clusterRcenter consoleDo not install accessories such as audiosystems in these areas. Do not carry outrepairs or welding. You could impair theoperating efficiency of the restraintsystems.

Introduction 21

Z

Have aftermarket accessories installed ata qualified specialist workshop.

You could jeopardize the operating safety ofyour vehicle if you use parts, tires and wheelsas well as accessories relevant to safetywhich have not been approved by Mercedes.This could lead to malfunctions in safety-relevant systems, e.g. the brake system. Useonly genuine Mercedes-Benz parts or parts ofequal quality. Only use tires, wheels andaccessories that have been specificallyapproved for your vehicle.Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts are subject tostrict quality control. Every part has beenspecifically developed, manufactured orselected for and adapted to Mercedes-Benzvehicles. Only genuine Mercedes-Benz partsshould therefore be used.More than 300,000 different genuineMercedes-Benz parts are available forMercedes-Benz models.All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centersmaintain a supply of genuine Mercedes-Benzparts for necessary service and repair work.In addition, strategically located partsdelivery centers provide quick and reliableparts service.Always specify the vehicle identificationnumber (VIN) (Y page 350) when orderinggenuine Mercedes-Benz parts.

Operator's Manual

Vehicle equipmentThis Operator's Manual describes all modelsand all standard and optional equipment ofyour vehicle available at the time of going toprint. Country-specific differences arepossible. Bear in mind that your vehicle maynot feature all functions described here. Thisalso applies to safety-relevant systems andfunctions. The equipment in your vehicle maytherefore differ from that shown in thedescriptions and illustrations.

The original purchase agreement lists allsystems installed in your vehicle.Should you have any questions concerningequipment and operation, please consult anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.The Operator's Manual and MaintenanceBooklet are important documents and shouldbe kept in the vehicle.

Service and vehicle operation

Service and literatureYour vehicle is covered under the terms of thewarranties printed in the Service andWarranty Information booklet. Yourauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center willexchange or repair any defective partsoriginally installed in the vehicle inaccordance with the terms of the followingwarranties:RNew Vehicle Limited WarrantyREmission Systems WarrantyREmission Performance WarrantyRCalifornia, Connecticut, Maine,Massachusetts, New York, Pennsylvania,Rhode Island and Vermont EmissionControl Systems WarrantyRState warranty enforcement laws (lemonlaws)

MaintenanceThe Service and Warranty Booklet describesall the necessary maintenance work whichshould be done at regular intervals.Always have the Service and WarrantyBooklet with you when you bring the vehicleto an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Theservice advisor will record every service foryou in the Service and Warranty Booklet.

22 Introduction

Roadside AssistanceThe Mercedes-Benz Roadside AssistanceProgram offers technical help in the event ofa breakdown. Calls to the toll-free RoadsideAssistance Hotline are answered by ouragents 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372)(USA)1-800-387-0100 (Canada)For additional information, refer to theMercedes-Benz Roadside AssistanceProgram brochure (USA) or the "RoadsideAssistance" section in the Service andWarranty booklet (Canada). You will find bothin your vehicle literature portfolio.

Change of address or change ofownershipIn the event of a change of address, pleasesend us the "Notification of Address Change"in the Service and Guarantee booklet orsimply call the Mercedes-Benz CustomerAssistance Center (USA) at the hotlinenumber1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) orCustomer Service Center (Canada) at1-800-387-0100. This will assist us incontacting you in a timely manner should theneed arise.If you sell your Mercedes, please leave theentire literature in the vehicle so that it isavailable to the next owner.If you have purchased a used car, please sendus the "Notification of Used Car Purchase" inthe Service and Guarantee booklet or simplycall the Mercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter (USA) at the hotline number1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) orCustomer Service (Canada) at1-800-387-0100.

Vehicle operation outside the USAand CanadaIf you plan to operate your vehicle in foreigncountries, please be aware that:Rservice facilities or replacement parts maynot be readily available.Runleaded fuel for vehicles with a catalyticconvertermay not be available. Leaded fuelmay cause damage to the catalyticconverter.Rthe fuel may have a considerably loweroctane rating. Unsuitable fuel can causeengine damage.

Some Mercedes-Benz models are availablefor delivery in Europe through our EuropeanDelivery Program. For details, consult anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center or write toone of the following addresses.In the USAMercedes-Benz USA, LLCEuropean Delivery DepartmentOne Mercedes DriveMontvale, NJ 07645-0350In CanadaMercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.European Delivery Department98 Vanderhoof AvenueToronto, Ontario M4G 4C9

Operating safety

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you do not have the prescribed service/maintenance work or any required repairscarried out, this can result in malfunctions orsystem failures. There is a risk of an accident.Always have the prescribed service/maintenance work as well as any requiredrepairs carried out at a qualified specialistworkshop.

Introduction 23

Z

G WARNINGIf you switch off the ignition while driving,safety-relevant functions are only availablewith limitations, or not at all. This could affect,for example, the power steering and the brakeboosting effect. You will require considerablymore effort to steer and brake. There is a riskof an accident.Do not switch off the ignition while driving.

G WARNINGModifications to electronic components, theirsoftware as well as wiring can impair theirfunction and/or the function of othernetworked components. In particular,systems relevant to safety could also beaffected. As a result, these may no longerfunction as intended and/or jeopardize theoperating safety of the vehicle. There is anincreased risk of an accident and injury.Never tamper with the wiring as well aselectronic components or their software. Youshould have all work to electrical andelectronic equipment carried out at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

! There is a risk of damage to the vehicle if:Rthe vehicle becomes stuck, e.g. on a highcurb or an unpaved roadRyou drive too fast over an obstacle, e.g.a curb or a hole in the roadRa heavy object strikes the undercarriageor parts of the chassis

In situations like this, the body, theundercarriage, chassis parts, wheels ortires could be damaged without thedamage being visible. Componentsdamaged in this way can unexpectedly failor, in the case of an accident, no longerwithstand the strain they are designed to.If the underbody paneling is damaged,combustible materials such as leaves,grass or twigs can gather between theunderbody and the underbody paneling. Ifthese materials come in contact with hot

parts of the exhaust system for anextended period, they can catch fire.In such cases, have the vehicle checkedand repaired immediately at a qualifiedspecialist workshop. If on continuing yourjourney you notice that driving safety isimpaired, pull over and stop the vehicleimmediately, paying attention to road andtraffic conditions. In such cases, visit aqualified specialist workshop.

Declarations of conformity

Vehicle components which receiveand/or transmit radio wavesUSA: "The wireless devices of this vehiclecomply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.Operation is subject to the following twoconditions: 1) These devices may not causeharmful interference, and 2) These devicesmust accept any interference received,including interference that may causeundesired operation. Changes ormodifications not expressly approved by theparty responsible for compliance could voidthe user’s authority to operate theequipment."Canada: "The wireless devices of this vehiclecomply with Industry Canada license-exemptRSS standard(s). Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions: (1) These devicesmay not cause interference, and (2) Thesedevices must accept any interference,including interference that may causeundesired operation of the device."

Diagnostics connectionThe diagnostics connection is only intendedfor the connection of diagnostic equipment ata qualified specialist workshop.

G WARNINGIf you connect equipment to the diagnosticsconnection in the vehicle, it may affect theoperation of the vehicle systems. As a result,

24 Introduction

the operating safety of the vehicle could beaffected. There is a risk of an accident.Do not connect any equipment to adiagnostics connection in the vehicle.

G WARNINGObjects in the driver's footwell can restrict thepedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal.The operating and road safety of the vehicleis jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident.Make sure that all objects in the vehicle arestowed correctly, and that they cannot enterthe driver's footwell. Install the floormatssecurely and as specified in order to ensuresufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not useloose floormats and do not place floormats ontop of one another.

! If the engine is switched off andequipment on the diagnostics connectionis used, the starter battery may discharge.

Connecting equipment to the diagnosticsconnection can lead to emissions monitoringinformation being reset, for example. Thismay lead to the vehicle failing to meet therequirements of the next emissions testduring the main inspection.

Qualified specialist workshopAn authorized Mercedes-Benz Center is aqualified specialist workshop. It has thenecessary specialist knowledge, tools andqualifications to correctly carry out the workrequired on your vehicle. This is especially thecase for work relevant to safety.Observe the notes in the MaintenanceBooklet.Always have the following work carried out atan authorized Mercedes-Benz Center:Rwork relevant to safetyRservice and maintenance workRrepair work

Ralterations, installation work andmodificationsRwork on electronic components

Correct useIf you remove any warning stickers, you orothers could fail to recognize certain dangers.Leave warning stickers in position.Observe the following information whendriving your vehicle:Rthe safety notes in this manualRthe Technical Data section in this manualRtraffic rules and regulationsRlaws and safety standards pertaining tomotor vehicles

Problems with your vehicleIf you should experience a problem with yourvehicle, particularly one that you believe mayaffect its safe operation, we urge you tocontact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Centerimmediately to have the problem diagnosedand rectified. If the problem is not resolved toyour satisfaction, please discuss the problemagain with a Mercedes-Benz Center orcontact us at one of the following addresses.In the USACustomer Assistance CenterMercedes-Benz USA, LLCOne Mercedes DriveMontvale, NJ 07645-0350In CanadaCustomer Relations DepartmentMercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.98 Vanderhoof AvenueToronto, Ontario M4G 4C9

Reporting safety defectsUSA only:

Introduction 25

Z

The following text is published as required ofmanufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S.Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the"National Traffic andMotor Vehicle Safety Actof 1966".If you believe that your vehicle has a defectwhich could cause a crash or could causeinjury or death, you should immediatelyinform the National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration (NHTSA) in addition tonotifying Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it mayopen an investigation, and if it finds that asafety defect exists in a group of vehicles, itmay order a recall and remedy campaign.However, NHTSA cannot become involved inindividual problems between you, yourdealer, or Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.To contact NHTSA, you may call the VehicleSafety Hotline toll-free at1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); goto http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street,SW., Washington, DC 20590.You can also obtain other information aboutmotor vehicle safety fromhttp://www.safercar.gov

Limited Warranty! Follow the instructions in this manualabout the proper operation of your vehicleas well as about possible vehicle damage.Damage to your vehicle that arises fromculpable contraventions against theseinstructions is not covered either by theMercedes-Benz Limited Warranty or by theNew or Used-Vehicle Warranty.

Data stored in the vehicle

Information about electronic dataacquisition in the vehicle(Including notice pursuant to California Code§ 9951)

Please note that your vehicle is equippedwithdevices that can record vehicle systems data.If your vehicle is equipped with mbrace(Canada: TELE AID), data is transmitted in theevent of an accident.This information helps, for example, to testvehicle systems after an accident and tocontinually improve vehicle safety.Daimler AG can access these data and submitthem:Rfor safety research or vehicle diagnosispurposesRwith the consent of the vehicle ownerRon the instruction of prosecutingauthoritiesRfor use in arbitration of disputes thatinvolve Daimler AG, its subsidiaries or itssales and service organizationsRas otherwise required or permitted by lawPlease check your mbrace (Canada: TELEAID) purchase agreement to find out moreabout data that can be recorded andtransmitted by this system.This vehicle is equipped with an event datarecorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDRis to record data that will assist inunderstanding how a vehicle’s systemsperformed in certain crash or near crash-likesituations, such as during air bag deploymentor when hitting a road obstacle. The EDR isdesigned to record data related to vehicledynamics and safety systems for a shortperiod of time, typically 30 seconds or less.The EDR in this vehicle is designed to recordsuch data as:Rhow various systems in your vehicle areoperatingRwhether or not the driver and passengerseat belts are fastenedRhow far (if at all) the driver is depressing theaccelerator and/or brake pedal andRhow fast the vehicle is travelingThis data can help provide a betterunderstanding of the circumstances in whichcrashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data

26 Introduction

is recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivialcrash situation occurs; no data is recorded bythe EDR under normal driving conditions andno personal data (e.g., name, gender, age,and crash location) are recorded. However,other parties, such as law enforcement, cancombine the EDR data with the type ofpersonal identification data routinelyacquired during a crash investigation.To read data recorded by an EDR, specialequipment is required, and access to thevehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition tothe vehicle manufacturer, other parties, suchas law enforcement, who have the specialequipment, can read the information if theyhave access to the vehicle or the EDR.

Information on copyright

General informationInformation on license for free and open-source software used in your vehicle and itselectronic components is available on thefollowing website:http://www.mercedes-benz.com/opensource

Introduction 27

Z

28

Dashboard ........................................... 30Instrument cluster .............................. 31Multifunction steering wheel ............. 33Center console .................................... 34Overhead control panel ...................... 36Door control panel .............................. 37

29

Ataglance

Dashboard

Function Page: Steering wheel paddle

shifters 151

; Combination switch 110

= Instrument cluster 31

? Horn

A DIRECT SELECT lever 146

B PARKTRONIC warningdisplay 179

C Overhead control panel 36

D Climate control systems 124

Function PageE Ignition lock 141

F Adjusting the steeringwheel 101

G Cruise control lever 166

H Electric parking brake 158

I Light switch 108

J Diagnostics connection 24

K Opening the hood 286

30 DashboardAt

aglance

Instrument cluster

Displays and controls

Function Page: Speedometer with

segments 199

; Multifunction display 200

= Tachometer 199

Function Page? Coolant temperature 198

A Fuel gauge

B Instrument cluster lighting 198

Instrument cluster 31

Ataglance

Warning and indicator lamps

Function Page: L Low-beam

headlamps 109

; T Parking lamps 110

= K High-beamheadlamps 110

? ÷ ESP® 251

A Electric parking brake (red)F (USA only)! (Canada only) 254

B ! Electric parking brake(yellow) 254

C · Distance warning 257

D #! Turn signals 110

E 6 SRS 254

F ü Seat belt 247

Function PageG M SPORT handling

mode in AMG vehicles 252

H ? Coolant 255

I R Rear fog lamp 110

J N Fog lamps 109

K ; Check Engine 255

L h Tire pressure monitor 258

M æ Reserve fuel 255

N å ESP® OFF 251

O ! ABS 249

P Brakes 249$ (USA only)J (Canada only)

32 Instrument clusterAt

aglance

Multifunction steering wheel

Function Page: Multifunction display 200

; Audio/COMAND display;see the separate operatinginstructions

= ?

Switches on the VoiceControl System; see theseparate operatinginstructions

? ~

Rejects or ends a call 205Exits phone book/redialmemory6

Makes or accepts a callSwitches to the redialmemoryWX

Adjusts the volume8

Mute

Function PageA =;

Selects a menu 1999:

Selects a submenu orscrolls through lists 199a

Confirms your selection 199Hides display messages 217

B %

Back 199Switches off the VoiceControl System; see theseparate operatinginstructions

Multifunction steering wheel 33

Ataglance

Center console

Center console, upper section

Function Page: Audio system/COMAND;

see the separate operatinginstructions

; c Seat heating 99

= c PARKTRONIC 179

? ¤ ECO start/stopfunction 143

Function PageA £ Hazard warning

lamps 111

B 4 PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF indicator lamp 47

C Ú Selects the driveprogram 150å AMG vehicles: ESP® 69

34 Center consoleAt

aglance

Center console, lower section

Function Page: Ashtray 268

Cigarette lighter 268Socket 269Stowage compartment 260

; Stowage compartment 260

Function Page= Cup holder 266

? Stowage compartment 260

A Audio/COMANDcontroller; see the separateoperating instructions

Center console 35

Ataglance

Overhead control panel

Function Page: u Switches the rear

compartment interiorlighting on/off 114

; p Switches the right-hand reading lamp on/off 113

= | Switches the frontinterior lighting/automaticinterior lighting control off 114

? ï MB Info call button(mbrace system) 273

A Rear-view mirror 102

B Buttons for the garage dooropener 281

C G SOS button (mbracesystem) 271

Function PageD F Roadside Assistance

call button (mbracesystem) 272

E Eyeglasses compartment 261

F 3 Opens/closes thepanorama roof with powertilt/sliding panel with rollersunblinds 90

G c Switches the frontinterior lighting on 114

H p Switches the left-hand reading lamp on/off 113

36 Overhead control panelAt

aglance

Door control panel

Function Page: Opens the door 81

; %& Unlocks/locksthe vehicle 82

= r45= Savesthe seat and exterior mirrorsettings 104

? Adjusts the seatselectrically 97

A 7Zö\Adjusts and folds theexterior mirrors in/outelectrically 102

Function PageB W Opens/closes the

side windows 87

C n Activates/deactivates the overridefeature for the sidewindows in the rearcompartment 63

D o Opens the trunk 85

Door control panel 37

Ataglance

38

Useful information .............................. 40Panic alarm .......................................... 40Occupant safety .................................. 40Children in the vehicle ........................ 56Driving safety systems ....................... 63Theft deterrent locking system ......... 72

39

Safety

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optionalequipment of your vehicle available at thetime of publication of the Operator'sManual. Country-specific differences arepossible. Please note that your vehicle maynot be equipped with all featuresdescribed. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions.

i Read the information on qualifiedspecialist workshops: (Y page 25).

Panic alarm

X To activate: press! button: for atleast one second.An alarm sounds and the exterior lightingflashes.

X To deactivate: press! button:again.

orX Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.

Occupant safety

Important safety notes

G WARNINGModifications to the restraint systems couldresult in them not functioning properly anymore. The restraint systems could then no

longer protect vehicle occupants as they aredesigned to do and could fail in the event ofan accident or activate unexpectedly, forexample. There is an increased risk of injury.Never modify parts of the restraint systems.Do not attempt to modify the wiring as well aselectronic components or their software.If it is necessary to modify an air bag systemto accommodate a person with disabilities,contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz center.USA only: for further information contact ourCustomer Assistance Center at1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1800-367-6372).

In this section, you will learn the mostimportant facts about the restraint systemcomponents of the vehicle.The restraint system consists of:RSeat beltsRChild restraint systemsRLATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat securingsystem

Additional protection is provided by:RSRS (Supplemental Restraint System)RAir bag system components with:

- PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF indicator lamp- Front-passenger seat with OccupantClassification System (OCS)

Although the systems are independent, theirprotective functions work in conjunction witheach other. Not all air bags are alwaysdeployed in an accident.

i For information on infants and childrentraveling with you in the vehicle restraintsystems for infants and children, see"Children in the vehicle" (Y page 56).

SRS (Supplemental Restraint System)

IntroductionSupplemental Restraint System (SRS) with:RThe 6 SRS warning lampRAir bags

40 Occupant safetySafety

RAir bag control unit (with crash sensors)REmergency Tensioning Device for the frontseat belts and the outer seat belts in therearRSeat belt force limiter for the front seatbelts and the outer seat belts in the rear

SRS reduces the risk of vehicle occupantscoming into contact with parts of thevehicle's interior in the event of an accident.It can also reduce the forces to which vehicleoccupants are subjected during an accident.

SRS warning lamp

G WARNINGIf SRS is malfunctioning, child restraintsystem components may be triggeredunintentionally or might not be triggered at allin the event of an accident with a high rate ofvehicle deceleration. There is an increasedrisk of injury, possibly even fatal.Have SRS checked and repaired immediatelyat a qualified specialist workshop.

SRS functions are checked regularly whenyou switch on the ignition and when theengine is running. Therefore, malfunctionscan be detected in good time.The6 SRSwarning lamp in the instrumentcluster lights up when the ignition is switchedon. It goes out no later than a few secondsafter the engine is started.The SRS components are in operationalreadiness when the 6 SRS indicator lampgoes out while the engine is running.There is a malfunction if:Rthe 6 SRS warning lamp does not lightup when the ignition is switched onRthe engine is running and the 6 SRSwarning lamp does not go out after a fewsecondsRthe engine is running and the 6 SRSwarning lamp lights up again

Triggering of Emergency TensioningDevices and air bagsDuring the first stage of a collision, the air bagcontrol unit evaluates important physicaldata relating to vehicle deceleration oracceleration, such as:RdurationRdirectionRmagnitudeBased on the evaluation of this data, the airbag control unit pre-emptively triggers theEmergency Tensioning Device in the firststage.If there is an even higher rate of vehicledeceleration or acceleration in a longitudinaldirection, the front air bags are also deployed.Your vehicle has adaptive, two-stage front airbags. The air bag control unit evaluatesvehicle deceleration or acceleration in theevent of a collision. In the first deploymentstage, the front air bag is filled with enoughpropellant gas to reduce the risk of injuries.The front air bag is fully deployed if a seconddeployment threshold is reached within a fewmilliseconds.The Emergency Tensioning Device and air bagtriggering thresholds are variable and areadapted to the detected rate of decelerationor acceleration of the vehicle. This process ispre-emptive in nature. The triggering processmust take place in good time at the start ofthe collision.The rate of vehicle deceleration oracceleration and the direction of the force areessentially determined by:Rthe distribution of forces during thecollisionRthe collision angleRthe deformation characteristics of thevehicleRthe characteristics of the object with whichthe vehicle has collided

Factors that can only be seen and measuredafter a collision has occurred do not play a

Occupant safety 41

Safety

Z

decisive role in the deployment of an air bag,nor do they provide an indication of air bagdeployment.The vehicle may be deformed significantly,e.g. the hood or the fender, without an air bagbeing deployed. This is the case if only partswhich are relatively easily deformed areaffected and the rate of deceleration is nothigh. Conversely, air bags may be deployedeven though the vehicle suffers only minordeformation. This is the case if, for example,very rigid vehicle parts such as longitudinalbody members are hit, and sufficientdeceleration occurs as a result.

i The front Emergency Tensioning Devicescan only be triggered if the seat belttongues on the front seats are correctlyengaged in the seat belt buckles.

i Not all air bags are deployed in anaccident. The different air bag systemswork independently of each other.How the air bag system works isdetermined by predicting the severity ofthe accident, especially vehicledeceleration or acceleration, and the typeof accident:Rhead-on collisionRside impactRrollover

Safety guidelines for seat belts,Emergency Tensioning Devices (ETDs)and air bags

G WARNINGRDamaged seat belts or seat belts that havebeen subjected to stress in an accidentmust be replaced. Their anchoring pointsmust also be checked. Only use seat beltsinstalled or supplied by an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.RAir bags and pyrotechnic EmergencyTensioning Devices (ETDs) containperchlorate material, which may requirespecial handling and regard for the

environment. Check your national disposalguidelines. In California, seewww.dtsc.ca.gov/HazardousWaste/Perchlorate/index.cfm.RAir bags and ETDs are designed to functionon a one-time-only basis. An air bag or ETDthat has deployed must be replaced.RDo not pass seat belts over sharp edges.They could tear.RDo not make any modification that couldchange the effectiveness of the seat belts.RDo not bleach or dye seat belts, as this mayseverely weaken them. In a crash, theymaynot be able to provide adequate protection.RDo not make any modifications to the SRSwiring or components.RDo not modify or remove any componentsor parts of the SRS.RDo not install additional trim material, seatcovers, badges, etc. to the:- padded steering wheel boss- knee bag covers- front-passenger air bag cover- outer side of front seat bolsters- outer seat bolsters of the rear bench seatbackrest

- roof frame trimRDo not install additional electrical/electronic equipment on or near SRScomponents and wiring.RKeep the area between the air bags andoccupants free of objects (e.g. packages,handbags, umbrellas etc.).RDo not hang any objects such as coathangers on the coat hooks or the grabhandle above the door. These itemsmay bethrown around in the vehicle and causehead and other injuries when the windowcurtain air bag is deployed.RAir bag systemcomponentswill be hot afteran air bag has inflated. Do not touch them.RNever rest your feet on the dashboard orthe seat. Always keep both feet on the floorin front of the seat.

42 Occupant safetySafety

RImproper repair work on the SRS creates arisk of rendering the SRS inoperative orcausing unintended air bag deployment.Work on the SRS must therefore only beperformed by qualified technicians.Consult an authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter.RFor your protection and the protection ofothers, when scrapping the air bag unit orETD, our safety instructions must befollowed. These are available from anyauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.RGiven the considerable deployment speed,required inflation volume, and the materialof the air bags, there is the possibility ofabrasions or other, potentiallymore seriousinjuries resulting from air bag deployment.

If you sell your vehicle, Mercedes-Benzstrongly recommends that you inform thesubsequent owner that the vehicle isequipped with SRS. Also, refer them to theapplicable section in the Operator's Manual.

Air bags

Important safety notesNEVER use a rearward facing child restraintsystem on a seat protected by an ACTIVE AIRBAG in front of it, DEATH or SERIOUS INJURYto the CHILD can occur.

G WARNINGUsing unsuitable seat covers could restrict oreven prevent deployment of the air bagsintegrated into the seats. Consequently, theair bags cannot protect vehicle occupants asthey are designed to do. In addition, thefunction of the air bag deactivation systemcould be restricted. This poses an increasedrisk of injury or even fatal injury.You should only use seat covers that havebeen approved for the respective seat byMercedes-Benz.

G WARNINGThe air bag parts are hot after the airbag hasbeen deployed. There is a risk of injury.Do not touch the air bag parts. Have thedeployed air bags replaced at a qualifiedspecialist workshop as soon as possible.

G WARNINGAir bags are designed to reduce the potentialof injury and fatality in certain:Rfrontal impacts (driver's/front-passengerair bags and knee bags)Rside impacts (side impact air bags andwindow curtain air bags)Rrollover (window curtain air bags)However, no system available today cancompletely eliminate injuries and fatalities.When the air bags are deployed, a smallamount of powder temporarily comes out ofthe air bags. This dust, however, is generallyneither harmful to your health, nor does itindicate a fire in the vehicle. In order toprevent potential breathing difficulties, youmay wish to get out of the vehicle as soon asit is safe to do so. If you have any breathingdifficulty but cannot get out of the vehicleafter the air bag inflates, then get fresh air byopening a window or door.

G WARNINGIn order to reduce the potential danger ofinjuries caused during the deployment of thefront air bags, the driver and front passengermust always be correctly seated and weartheir seat belts.For maximum protection in the event of acollision, you must always be in the normalseat position with your back against thebackrest. Fasten your seat belt andmake surethat it is correctly positioned on your body.

Occupant safety 43

Safety

Z

As the air bag inflates with considerablespeed and force, a proper seating positionand correct positioning of the hands on thesteering wheel will help to keep you at a safedistance from the air bag. Occupants who arenot wearing their seat belt, are not seatedproperly or are too close to the air bag can beseriously injured or killed by an air bag, as itinflates with great force instantaneously:Rsit with the seat belt fastened correctly andin a position that is as upright as possiblewith your back against the backrest.Rmove the driver's seat as far back aspossible, still permitting proper operationof vehicle controls. The distance from thecenter of the driver's chest to the center ofthe air bag cover on the steering wheelmust be at least 10 inches (25 cm). Youshould be able to accomplish this byadjusting the seat and steering wheel. Ifyou have any difficulties, please contact anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.Rdo not lean your head or chest close to thesteering wheel or dashboard.Ronly hold the steering wheel on the outside.Placing hands and arms inside the rim canincrease the risk and potential severity ofhand/arm injury if the driver front air baginflates.Radjust the front-passenger seat as far backas possible from the dashboard when theseat is occupied.Roccupants, especially children, shouldnever place their bodies or lean their headsin the area of the door where the sideimpact air bag inflates. This could result inserious or fatal injuries should the sideimpact air bag be deployed. Always sit asupright as possible, wear the seat beltproperly and use an appropriately sizedinfant restraint, toddler restraint or boosterseat recommended for the size and weightof the child.

Failure to follow these instructions can resultin severe injuries to you or other occupants.

If you sell your vehicle, it is important that youmake the buyer aware of this safetyinformation. Be sure to give the buyer thisOperator's Manual.

If the air bags are deployed, you will hear abang, and a small amount of powder may alsobe released. Only in rare cases will the bangaffect your hearing. The powder that isreleased generally does not constitute ahealth hazard and does not indicate that thereis a fire in the vehicle. The dust might causesome temporary breathing difficulty forpeople with asthma or other breathingtrouble. To avoid this, youmay wish to get outof the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.You can also open the window to allow freshair to enter the vehicle interior. The 6 SRSwarning lamp lights up.The air bag installation locations areidentified by the AIR BAG symbol.The air bags are deployed if the air bag controlunit detects the need for deployment. Only inthe event of such a situation will the air bagsprovide their supplemental protection.If the driver and front passenger do not weartheir seat belts, it is not possible for the airbags to provide their supplementalprotection.In the event of other types of impacts andimpacts below air bag deploymentthresholds, the air bags will not deploy. Thedriver and passenger will then be protectedto the extent possible by a properly fastenedseat belt. A properly fastened seat belt is alsoneeded to provide the best possibleprotection in a rollover.Air bags provide additional protection; theyare not, however, a substitute for seat belts.All vehicle occupants must fasten their seatbelts regardless of whether your vehicle isequipped with air bags or not.It is important for your safety and that of yourpassenger to have deployed air bags replacedand to have any malfunctioning air bagsrepaired. This will help to make sure the airbags continue to perform their protective

44 Occupant safetySafety

function for the vehicle occupants in theevent of a crash.

i After an air bag has been deployed, havethe vehicle towed to the nearest qualifiedspecialist workshop, even if your vehicle isready to drive.

Front air bags

Driver's air bag: deploys in front of thesteering wheel; front-passenger front airbag; deploys in front of and above the glovebox.The front air bags increase protection for thedriver's and front passenger's head andchest.They are deployed:Rat the start of an accident with a high rateof vehicle acceleration or deceleration in alongitudinal directionRif the system determines that air bagdeployment can offer additional protectionto that provided by the seat beltRindependently of other air bags in thevehicle

The release time of the front air bags isdependent upon the use of the seat belt.If the vehicle rolls over, the front air bags aregenerally not deployed.Your vehicle has adaptive, two-stage front airbags. The air bag control unit evaluatesvehicle deceleration or acceleration in theevent of a collision. In the first deploymentstage, the front air bag is filled with part of thetotal available propellant gas, thereby

reducing the risk of injury. If the air bagcontrol unit recognizes within a fewmilliseconds that the vehicle is being brakedor accelerated faster than originallypredicted, the front air bag is filled with themaximum amount of propellant gas available.The deployment of the front-passenger frontair bag is also influenced by the weightcategory of the front passenger, which isdetermined by the Occupant ClassificationSystem (OCS) (Y page 47).The lighter the passenger-side occupant, thehigher the vehicle deceleration rate required(predicted at the start of the impact) forsecond stage inflation of the front-passengerfront air bag. In the second stage, the frontair bags are inflated with the maximumamount of propellant gas available.The front air bags are not deployed insituations where a low impact severity ispredicted. You will then be protected by thefastened seat belt.The front-passenger front air bag will onlydeploy if:Rthe system, based on the OCS weightsensor readings, detects that the front-passenger seat is occupiedRthe PASSENGER air bag OFF indicator lampon the center console is not lit(Y page 47)Rthe air bag control unit predicts a highimpact severity

Knee bags

Occupant safety 45

Safety

Z

Driver's knee bag: deploys underneath thesteering column and front-passenger kneebag; underneath the glove box. Theydeploy together with the front air bags. Theyare designed to operate together with thefront air bags in frontal impacts if certainthresholds are exceeded. The knee bagsoperate at best in conjunction with correctlypositioned and fastened seat belts.Knee bags provide increased protection forthe driver and front passenger against the riskof:Rknee injuriesRthigh injuriesRlower leg injuries

Side impact air bags

G WARNINGUsing unsuitable seat covers could restrict oreven prevent deployment of the air bagsintegrated into the seats. Consequently, theair bags cannot protect vehicle occupants asthey are designed to do. In addition, thefunction of the air bag deactivation systemcould be restricted. This poses an increasedrisk of injury or even fatal injury.You should only use seat covers that havebeen approved for the respective seat byMercedes-Benz.

G WARNINGSensors to control the air bags are located inthe doors. Modifications or work notperformed correctly to the doors or doorpaneling, as well as damaged doors, can leadto the function of the sensors being impaired.The air bags might therefore not functionproperly anymore. Consequently, the air bagscannot protect vehicle occupants as they aredesigned to do. There is an increased risk ofinjury.Never modify the doors or parts of the doors.Always have work on the doors or doorpaneling carried out at a qualified specialistworkshop.

You should only use seat covers that havebeen approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. The seat covers must have a specialtear seam for side impact air bags. Otherwise,the side impact air bags cannot deploycorrectly and therefore cannot provide theintended protection in the event of anaccident.

Front side impact air bags: and rear sideimpact air bags; deploy next to the outerseat cushions.When deployed, the side impact air bags offeradditional protection of the thorax foroccupants on the front seats as well as alsoof the pelvis for the vehicle occupants on theside of the vehicle on which the impactoccurs. However, they do not protect the:RheadRneckRarmsThe side impact air bags are deployed:Ron the side on which an impact occursRat the start of an accident with a high rateof lateral vehicle deceleration oracceleration, e.g. in a side impactRindependently of the use of the seat beltRindependently of the front air bagsRindependently of the ETDsIf the vehicle rolls over, the side impact airbags are generally not deployed. Side impactair bags are deployed if the system detectshigh vehicle deceleration or acceleration in alateral direction and determines that sideimpact air bag deployment can offer

46 Occupant safetySafety

additional protection to that provided by theseat belt.Side impact air bags will not deploy in sideimpacts which do not exceed the system'spreset deployment thresholds for lateralacceleration/deceleration. You will then beprotected by the fastened seat belt.The side impact air bag on the front-passenger side is not deployed in thefollowing situations:ROCS has detected that the front-passengerseat is unoccupied.Rthe front-passenger seat belt is notfastened.

The side impact air bag on the front-passenger side will deploy if the front-passenger seat belt is fastened, regardless ofwhether the front-passenger seat is occupiedor not.

Window curtain air bags

Window curtain air bags: enhance the levelof protection for the head, but not chest orarms, of the vehicle occupants on the side ofthe vehicle on which the impact occurs.Window curtain air bags: are integratedinto the side of the roof frame and deployedin the area from the A-pillar to the C-pillar.Window curtain air bags are deployed:Rat the start of an accident with a high rateof lateral vehicle deceleration oracceleration, e.g. in a side impactRon the side on which an impact occurs

Ron the driver's side and passenger side, inthe event of a vehicle rollover and if thesystemdetermines that air bag deploymentcan offer the vehicle occupants additionalprotection to that provided by the seat beltRindependently of the use of the seat beltRregardless of whether the front-passengerseat is occupiedRindependently of the front air bagsWindow curtain air bags: will not deploy inthe event of impacts which do not exceed thesystem's preset deployment thresholds forvehicle acceleration/deceleration. You willthen be protected by the fastened seat belt.

Occupant Classification System(OCS)

Method of operation

G WARNINGIf the 45 indicator lamp illuminateswhen an adult or someone larger than a smallindividual is in the front-passenger seat, havethe front passenger reposition himself orherself in the seat until the 45indicator lamp goes out.In the event of a collision, the air bag controlunit will not allow front-passenger front airbag deployment when the OCS has classifiedthe front-passenger seat occupant asweighing as much as or less than a typical 12-month-old child in a standard child restraintor if the front-passenger seat is classified asbeing empty.When the OCS senses that the front-passenger seat occupant is classified asbeing up to or less than the weight of a typical12-month-old child in a standard childrestraint, the 45 indicator lamp willilluminate when the engine is started andremain illuminated, indicating that the front-passenger front air bag is deactivated.When the OCS senses that the front-passenger seat is classified as being empty,

Occupant safety 47

Safety

Z

the 45 indicator lamp will illuminatewhen the engine is started and remainilluminated, indicating that the front-passenger front air bag is deactivated.When the OCS senses that the front-passenger seat occupant is classified asbeing heavier than the weight of a typical 12-month-old child seated in a standard childrestraint or as being a small individual (suchas a young teenager or a small adult), the45 indicator lamp will illuminate forapproximately 6 seconds when the engine isstarted and then, depending on occupantweight sensor readings from the front-passenger seat, remain illuminated or go out.With the 45 indicator lampilluminated, the front-passenger front air bagis deactivated. With the 45 indicatorlamp out, the front-passenger front air bag isactivated.When the OCS senses that the front-passenger seat occupant is classified as anadult or someone larger than a smallindividual, the 45 indicator lamp willilluminate for approximately 6 seconds whenthe engine is started and then go out,indicating that the front-passenger front airbag is activated.If the 45 indicator lamp is illuminated,the front-passenger front air bag isdeactivated and will not be deployed.If the 45 indicator lamp is notilluminated, the front-passenger front air bagis activated and will be deployed:Rin the event of certain frontal impactsRif impact exceeds a preset deploymentthresholdRindependently of the side impact air bagsIf the front-passenger front air bag isdeployed, the rate of inflation will beinfluenced by:Rthe rate of relevant vehicle deceleration asassessed by the air bag control unitRthe front passenger's weight category asidentified by OCS

G WARNINGAccording to accident statistics, children aresafer when properly restrained on the rearseats than on the front-passenger seat. Thus,we strongly recommend that children beplaced in the rear seats whenever possible.Regardless of seating position, children 12years old and under must be seated andproperly secured in an appropriate infantrestraint, toddler restraint, or booster seatrecommended for the size and weight of thechild.The infant or child restraint must be properlysecured with the vehicle's seat belt, the seatbelt and Top Tether strap, or lower anchorsand Top Tether strap, fully in accordance withthe child seat manufacturer's instructions.Occupants, especially children, should alwayssit as upright as possible, wear the seat beltproperly and use an appropriately sized infantrestraint, toddler restraint, or booster seatrecommended for the size and weight of thechild.Children can be killed or seriously injured byan inflating air bag. Note the followingimportant information when circumstancesrequire you to place a child in the front-passenger seat:RYour vehicle is equipped with air bagtechnology designed to deactivate thefront-passenger front air bag in your vehiclewhen the system senses the weight of atypical 12-month-old child or less alongwith the weight of a standard appropriatechild restraint on the front-passenger seat.RA child in a rear-facing child restraint on thefront-passenger seat will be seriouslyinjured or even killed if the front-passengerfront air bag inflates in a collision whichcould occur under some circumstances,even with the air bag technology installedin your vehicle. The only means to eliminatethis risk completely is never to place a childin a rear-facing child restraint in the front-passenger seat. We therefore stronglyrecommend that you always place a child

48 Occupant safetySafety

in a rear-facing child restraint on the rearseat.RIf you install a rear-facing child restraint onthe front-passenger seat, make sure the45 indicator lamp is illuminated,indicating that the front-passenger front airbag is deactivated. Should the 45indicator lampnot illuminate or go outwhilethe restraint is installed, please checkinstallation. Periodically check the45 indicator lamp while driving tomake sure that the 45 indicatorlamp is illuminated. If the 45indicator lamp goes out or remains out, donot transport a child on the front-passengerseat until the system has been repaired.A child in a rear-facing child restraint on thefront-passenger seat will be seriouslyinjured or even killed if the front-passengerfront air bag inflates.RIf you place a child in a forward-facing childrestraint on the front-passenger seat:- move the seat as far back as possible- use the proper child restraintrecommended for the age, size andweight of the child

- secure child restraint with the vehicle'sseat belt according to the child seatmanufacturer's instructions

RFor children larger than the typical 12-month-old child, the front-passenger frontair bag may or may not be activated.

G WARNINGIf the red 6 SRS warning lamp in theinstrument cluster and the 45indicator lamp light up simultaneously, theOCS is malfunctioning. The front passengerfront air bag will be deactivated in this case.Have the system checked by qualifiedtechnicians as soon as possible. Contact anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.Only have the seat repaired or replaced at anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

In order to ensure proper operation of the airbag system and OCS:RSit with the seat belt properly fastened in aposition that is as upright as possible withyour back against the seat backrest.RWhen seated, a passenger should notposition him/herself in such a way as tocause the passenger's weight to be liftedfrom the seat cushion as this may result inthe OCS being unable to correctlyapproximate the passenger's weightcategory.RRead and observe all warnings in thischapter.

If the SmartKey is removed from the ignitionlock or is in position 0, PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF indicator lamp: does not light up.The Occupant Classification System (OCS)categorizes the occupant on the front-passenger seat using a weight sensor.The front-passenger front air bag isdeactivated automatically for certain weightcategories.The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lampshows you the current status.The system does not deactivate:Rthe side impact air bagRthe window curtain air bagRthe Emergency Tensioning Devices

Occupant safety 49

Safety

Z

To be classified correctly, the front passengermust sit:Rwith the seat belt fastened correctlyRin a position that is as upright as possiblewith their back against the seat backrestRwith their feet on the floorThe OCS weight sensor reading is affected ifthe occupant's weight is transferred, e.g. byleaning on the armrest.If the front-passenger seat, the seat cover orthe seat cushion are damaged, have thenecessary repair work carried out at aqualified specialist workshop.For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benzrecommends that you only use seataccessories that have been approved byMercedes-Benz.Both the driver and the front passengershould always observe the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp as an indication ofwhether or not the front passenger ispositioned correctly. Observe also the air bagdisplaymessages that can be displayed in theinstrument cluster (Y page 229).If the driver's air bag deploys, this does notmean that the front-passenger front air bagwill also deploy.The OCS may have detected that the seat:Ris empty or occupied by the weight of atypical child up to twelve months old,seated in a child restraint system.Ris occupied by a small individual, such as ayoung teenager or a small adult.Ris occupied by a child in a child restraintsystem whose weight is greater than thatof a typical twelve month old child.

These are examples of when the OCSdeactivates the front-passenger front air bag.Deactivation takes place although thecollision fulfills the criteria for deploying thedriver's air bag.For further information, see "Air bag displaymessages" (Y page 229).

System self-test

G WARNINGIf the 4 5 indicator lamp does notilluminate, the system is not functioning. Youmust contact an authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter before seating any child on the frontpassenger seat.

G WARNINGNever place anything between seat cushionand child seat (e.g. a pillow), since it reducesthe effectiveness of the OCS. The undersideand rear side child restraint system must beplaced entirely on the seat cushion and thebackrest of the front-passenger seatbackrest.If necessary, adjust the tilt of the passengerseat backrest.An incorrectlymounted child seat could causeinjuries to the child in case of an accident,instead of increasing protection for the child.Follow the manufacturer's instructions forinstallation of child restraint systems.

The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamplights up:Rif you turn the SmartKey in the ignition lockto position 1 or 2Rif an adult is seated properly on the front-passenger seat and the OCS classifies theoccupant as an adultThe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicatorlamp goes out again after approximately sixseconds.If the seat is not occupied and the OCSdetects that the front-passenger seat isempty, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFFindicator lamp will continue to light up. ThePASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lampwill not go out.

For further information, see "Problems withthe Occupant Classification System"(Y page 51).

50 Occupant safetySafety

Problems with the Occupant Classification System

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

The PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicatorlights up and remainson.The person on thefront-passenger seat:Rhas the weight of atypical adultRhas been determinedby the system not tobe a child

The OCS is malfunctioning.X Make sure that the front passenger is sitting in a correct, uprightposition.

X Have the OCS checked as soon as possible at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay (Y page 229).

G WARNINGIf the 45 indicator lamp illuminates and remains illuminated when the weight of a typicaladult or someone larger than a small individual has been detected on the passenger seat, do notallow any occupant to use the passenger seat until the system has been repaired.

Problem Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions

The PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicatorlamp does not light upand/or stays on.The front-passengerseat is:RunoccupiedRoccupied with theweight of a child upto twelve months oldin a child restraintsystem

The OCS is malfunctioning.X Make sure there is nothing between the seat cushion and thechild seat.

X Make sure that the backrest and base of the child restraintsystem are resting securely on the front-passenger seat. Ifnecessary, adjust the position of the front-passenger seat.

X When installing the child restraint system, make sure that theseat belt is tight. Do not pull the seat belt tight with the front-passenger seat adjustment. This could result in the seat beltbeing pulled too tightly.

X Check the installation of the child restraint system.X Make sure that no objects are applying additional weight ontothe seat.

X If the PASSENGERAIR BAGOFF indicator lamp remains off, havethe OCS checked immediately at a qualified specialistworkshop. Do not transport a child on the front-passenger seatuntil the OCS has been repaired.

X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay (Y page 229).

Occupant safety 51

Safety

Z

G WARNINGIf the 45 indicator lamp does not illuminate or remains out with the weight of a typical12-month-old child in a standard child restraint or less, or is unoccupied, on the front-passengerseat, do not transport a child on the front-passenger seat until the system has been repaired.

Seat belts

Important safety notes

G WARNINGThe seat belt does not offer the intended levelof protection if the backrest is not in theupright position. When braking or in the eventof an accident, you could slide underneath theseat belt and sustain abdomen or neckinjuries, for example. This poses an increasedrisk of injury or even fatal injury.Adjust the seat properly before beginningyour journey. Always make sure that the seatis in the upright position.

G WARNINGSeat belts cannot protect as intended, if:Rthey are damaged, extremely dirty,bleached or dyedRthe seat belt buckle is damaged orextremely dirtyRthe Emergency Tensioning Devices or thebelt anchorage has been modified.

Damage caused to seat belts in an accidentmay not be visible, e.g. by splinters of glass.Modified or damaged seat belts can tear orfail, for example in the event of an accident.Modified Emergency Tensioning Devices maybe deployed unintentionally or fail to bedeployed when required. There is anincreased risk of injury, possibly even fatal.Never modify seat belts, EmergencyTensioning Devices, seat belt anchorages andinertia reels. Ensure that seat belts are notdamaged or worn and are clean.

Only use seat belts that have been approvedfor your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.

The use of seat belts and infant and childrestraint systems is required by law in:Rall 50 statesRthe U.S. territoriesRthe District of ColumbiaRall Canadian provincesEven where this is not required by law, allvehicle occupants should correctly fastentheir seat belts before starting the journey.

i See "Children in the vehicle"(Y page 56) for further information oninfants and children traveling in the vehicleas well as on child restraint systems.

Proper use of the seat belts

G WARNINGUSE SEAT BELTS PROPERLYRSeat belts can only work when usedproperly. Never wear seat belts in any otherway than as described in this section, asthat could result in serious injuries in theevent of an accident.REach occupant should wear their seat beltat all times, because seat belts help reducethe likelihood of and potential severity ofinjuries in accidents, including rollovers.The integrated restraint system includesSRS (driver front air bag, driver's side kneebag, front-passenger front air bag, sideimpact air bags, window curtain air bags forthe side windows), Emergency TensioningDevices, seat belt force limiters, and frontseat knee bolsters.The system is designed to enhance theprotection offered to properly beltedoccupants in certain frontal (front air bags,driver's side knee bag and ETDs) and side(side impact air bags, window curtain air

52 Occupant safetySafety

bags, and ETDs) impacts which exceedpreset deployment thresholds and incertain rollovers (window curtain air bagsand ETDs).RNever wear the shoulder belt under yourarm, across your neck or off your shoulder.In a frontal crash, your body would movetoo far forward. That would increase thechance of head and neck injuries. The seatbelt would also apply too much force to theribs or abdomen, which could severelyinjure internal organs such as your liver orspleen.Adjust the seat belt so that the shouldersection is located as close as possible tothe middle of the shoulder. It should nottouch the neck. Never pass the shoulderportion of the seat belt under your arm. Forthis purpose, you can adjust the height ofthe seat belt outlet.RPosition the lap belt as low as possible onyour hips and not across the abdomen. Ifthe lap belt is positioned across yourabdomen, it could cause serious injuries ina crash.RNever wear seat belts over rigid orbreakable objects in or on your clothing,such as eyeglasses, pens, keys etc., asthese might cause injuries.RMake sure the seat belt is always fittedsnugly. Take special care of this whenwearing loose clothing.RNever use a seat belt for more than oneperson at a time. Do not fasten a seat beltaround a person and another person orother objects at the same time.RSeat belts should not be worn twisted. In acrash, you would not have the full width ofthe seat belt to distribute impact forces.The twisted seat belt against your bodycould cause injuries.RPregnant women should also always use alap-shoulder belt. The lap belt portionshould be positioned as low as possible onthe hips to avoid any possible pressure onthe abdomen.

RPlace the seat backrest in a position that isas upright as possible.RCheck your seat belt during travel to makesure it is properly positioned.RNever place your feet on the instrumentpanel, dashboard, or on the seat. Alwayskeep both feet on the floor in front of theseat.RWhen using a seat belt to secure infantrestraints, toddler restraints, or children inbooster seats, always follow the child seatmanufacturer's instructions.

G WARNINGDo not pass seat belts over sharp edges. Theycould tear.Do not allow the seat belt to get caught in thedoor or in the seat adjustment mechanism.This could damage the seat belt.Never attempt to make modifications to seatbelts. This could impair the effectiveness ofthe seat belts.

Fastening seat belts

G WARNINGAccording to accident statistics, children aresafer when properly restrained on the rearseats than on the front-passenger seat. Thus,we strongly recommend that children beplaced in the rear seat whenever possible.Regardless of seating position, children 12years old and under must be seated andproperly secured in an appropriately sizedchild restraint system or booster seatrecommended for the size and weight of thechild. For additional information, see the"Children in the vehicle" section.A child's risk of serious or fatal injuries issignificantly increased if the child restraintsare not properly secured in the vehicle and/or the child is not properly secured in the childrestraint.

Occupant safety 53

Safety

Z

X Adjust the seat and move the backrest toan almost vertical position (Y page 94).

X Pull the seat belt smoothly through beltsash guide:.

X Without twisting it, guide the shouldersection of the seat belt across the middleof your shoulder and the lap section acrossyour pelvis.

X Engage belt tongue; in buckle=.X If necessary, adjust the seat belt to theappropriate height (Y page 54).

X If necessary, pull upwards on the shouldersection of the seat belt to tighten the beltacross your body.

All seat belts in the vehicle with the exceptionof the driver's seat belt are equipped with aspecial seat belt retractor, with which a childrestraint system can be secured. For furtherinformation on special seat belt retractors,see (Y page 59).Information on releasing the seat belt withrelease button?(Y page 54).

Belt height adjustment

You can adjust the seat belt height on thefront seats. Adjust the belt to a height thatallows the upper part of the seat belt to berouted across the center of your shoulder.X To raise: slide the belt sash guide upwards.The belt sash guide engages in variouspositions.

X To lower: press and hold belt sash guiderelease:.

X Slide the belt sash guide downwards.X Release belt sash guide release: andmake sure that the belt sash guide hasengaged.

Releasing seat belts! Make sure that the seat belt is fully rolledup. Otherwise, the seat belt or belt tonguewill be trapped in the door or in the seatmechanism. This could damage the door,the door trim panel and the seat belt.Damaged seat belts can no longer fulfilltheir protective function and must bereplaced. Visit a qualified specialistworkshop.

54 Occupant safetySafety

X Press release button? on belt buckle=.X Guide belt tongue; back to belt sashguide:.

Belt warning for the driver and frontpassengerEvery time the engine is started, the 7seat belt warning lamp lights up for sixseconds. It lights up regardless of whetherthe driver's and front-passenger seat beltshave already been fastened. If the driver'sand front-passenger seat belts have alreadybeen fastened, the 7 seat belt warninglamp then goes out.If the driver's seat belt is not fastened whenthe engine is started, an additional warningtone will sound. This warning tone stops aftera maximum of six seconds or once thedriver's seat belt is fastened.If after six seconds, the driver or frontpassenger have not fastened their seat beltsand the doors are closed:Rthe 7 seat belt warning lamp remains litas long as the driver's or front-passenger'sseat belt is not fastenedandRif a vehicle speed of 15 mph (25 km/h) isexceeded, the 7 seat belt warning lampbegins to flash. A warning tone also sounds

with increasing intensity for a maximum of60 seconds or until the driver or frontpassenger have fastened their seat belts.

If the driver/front passenger unfasten theirseat belt while the vehicle is in motion, the7 seat belt warning lamp lights up and awarning tone sounds again.The warning tone ceases even if the driver orfront-passenger seat belt has still not beenfastened after 60 seconds. The7 seat beltwarning lamp stops flashing but remainsilluminated.After the vehicle comes to a standstill, thewarning tone is reactivated. The 7 seatbelt warning lamp flashes again if the vehiclespeed exceeds 15 mph (25 km/h).The 7 seat belt warning lamp only goesout if:Rboth the driver and the front passengerhave fastened their seat belts.orRthe vehicle is stationary and a door is open.

i For more information on the 7 seatbelt warning lamp, see "Warning andindicator lamps in the instrument cluster,seat belts" (Y page 247).

Emergency Tensioning Devices, seatbelt force limiters

G WARNINGPyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning Devicesthat have been deployed are no longeroperational and are unable to perform theirintended protective function. This poses anincreased risk of injury or even fatal injury.Therefore, have pyrotechnic EmergencyTensioning Devices which have beentriggered immediately replaced at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

! If the front-passenger seat is notoccupied, do not engage the seat belttongue in the buckle on the front-passenger seat. Otherwise, the Emergency

Occupant safety 55

Safety

Z

Tensioning Device could be triggered in theevent of an accident.

The front seat belts and the outer seat beltsin the rear are equipped with EmergencyTensioning Devices and seat belt forcelimiters.The ETDs tighten the seat belts in an accident,pulling them close against the body.The ETDs do not correct incorrect seatpositions or incorrectly fastened seat belts.The ETDs do not pull vehicle occupants backtowards the backrest.The ETDs can only be activated when:Rthe ignition is switched on.Rthe restraint systems are operational; see"6 SRS warning lamp" (Y page 41).Rthe belt tongue is engaged in the buckle oneach of the front seat belts.

The ETDs on the outside seats in the rearcompartment are triggered independently ofthe lock status of the seat belts.The ETDs are triggered depending on the typeand severity of an accident:Rin the event of a head-on or rear-endcollision if the vehicle decelerates oraccelerates rapidly in a longitudinaldirection during the initial stages of theimpact.Rin the event of a side impact if the vehicledecelerates or accelerates rapidly in alateral direction on the side opposite to theimpact.Rin certain situations where the vehicle rollsover if the system determines that it canprovide additional protection.

If the ETDs are deployed, you will hear a bang,and a small amount of powder may also bereleased. Only in rare cases will the bangaffect your hearing. The powder that isreleased generally does not constitute ahealth hazard and does not indicate that thereis a fire in the vehicle. The dust might causesome temporary breathing difficulty forpeople with asthma or other breathingtrouble. To avoid this, youmay wish to get out

of the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.You can also open the window to allow freshair to enter the vehicle interior. The 6 SRSwarning lamp lights up.If the seat belt is also equipped with a seatbelt force limiter and this is triggered, theforce exerted by the seat belt on the vehicleoccupant is reduced.The seat belt force limiters for the front seatsare synchronized with the front air bags,which take on a part of the deceleration force.This results in the force exerted on theoccupant being distributed over a greaterarea.

Children in the vehicle

Child restraint systems

Important safety notes

G WARNINGAccording to accident statistics, children aresafer when properly restrained in the rearseating positions than in the front seatingposition. Thus, we strongly recommend thatchildren be placed in the rear seats wheneverpossible. Regardless of seating position,children 12 years old and under must beseated and properly secured in an appropriateinfant restraint, toddler restraint, or boosterseat recommended for the size and weight ofthe child.The infant or child restraint must be properlysecured with the vehicle's seat belt, the seatbelt and top tether strap, or lower anchors andtop tether strap, fully in accordance with thechild seat manufacturer's instructions.Occupants, especially children, should alwayssit as upright as possible, wear the seat beltproperly and use an appropriately sized infantrestraint, toddler restraint, or booster seatrecommended for the size and weight of thechild.

56 Children in the vehicleSafety

Children can be killed or seriously injured byan inflating air bag. Note the followingimportant information when circumstancesrequire you to place a child in the frontpassenger seat:RYour vehicle is equipped with air bagtechnology designed to deactivate the frontpassenger front air bag in your vehiclewhen the system senses the weight of atypical 12-month-old child or less alongwith the weight of a standard appropriatechild restraint on the front passenger seat.RFor children larger than the typical12-month-old child, the front passengerfront air bag may or may not be activated.Always make sure the 4 5 indicatorlamp is illuminated, indicating that the frontpassenger front air bag is deactivated.RA child in a rear-facing child restraint on thefront passenger seat will be seriouslyinjured or even killed if the front passengerfront air bag inflates in a collision whichcould occur under some circumstances,even with the air bag technology installedin your vehicle. The only means tocompletely eliminate this risk is to neverplace a child in a rear-facing child restraintin the front seat. We therefore stronglyrecommend that you always place a childin a rear-facing child restraint in a backseat.RIf you must install a rear-facing childrestraint on the front passenger seatbecause circumstances require you to doso, make sure the 4 5 indicatorlamp is illuminated, indicating that the frontpassenger front air bag is deactivated.Should the 4 5 indicator lamp notilluminate or go out while the restraint isinstalled, please check installation.Periodically check the 4 5 indicatorlamp while driving to make sure the 45 indicator lamp is illuminated. If the4 5 indicator lamp goes out orremains out, do not transport a child on thefront passenger seat until the system hasbeen repaired.

A child in a rear-facing child restraint on thefront passenger seat will be seriouslyinjured or even killed if the front passengerfront air bag inflates.RIf you have to place a child in a forward-facing child restraint on the front passengerseat, move the seat as far back as possible,use the proper child restraintrecommended for the age, size and weightof the child, and secure child restraint withthe vehicle's seat belt according to thechild seat manufacturer's instructions.

G WARNINGIf the child restraint system is installedincorrectly on a suitable seat, it cannotprotect as intended. The child cannot then berestrained in the event of an accident, heavybraking or sudden changes of direction. Thereis an increased risk of injury, possibly evenfatal.Make sure that you observe the child restraintsystem manufacturer's installationinstructions and the notes on use. Pleaseensure, that the base of the child restraintsystem is always resting completely on theseat cushion. Never place objects, e.g.cushions, under or behind the child restraintsystem. Only use child restraint systems withthe original cover designed for them. Onlyreplace damaged covers with genuine covers.

G WARNINGIf the child restraint system is installedincorrectly or is not secured, it can comeloose in the event of an accident, heavybraking or a sudden change in direction. Thechild restraint system could be thrown about,striking vehicle occupants. There is anincreased risk of injury, possibly even fatal.Always install child restraint systemsproperly, even if they are not being used.Make sure that you observe the child restraintsystem manufacturer's installationinstructions.

Children in the vehicle 57

Safety

Z

G WARNINGChild restraint systems or their securingsystems which have been damaged orsubjected to a load in an accident can nolonger protect as intended. The child cannotthen be restrained in the event of an accident,heavy braking or sudden changes of direction.There is an increased risk of injury, possiblyeven fatal.Replace child restraint systems which havebeen damaged or subjected to a load in anaccident as soon as possible. Have thesecuring systems on the child restraintsystem checked at a qualified specialistworkshop, before you install a child restraintsystem again.

G WARNINGInfants and small children should never sharea seat belt with another occupant. In the eventof an accident, they could be crushedbetween the occupant and seat belt.A child's risk of serious or fatal injuries issignificantly increased if the child restraintsare not properly secured in the vehicle and/or the child is not properly secured in the childrestraint.Children that are too large for a child restraintmust travel in seats using normal seat belts.Position the shoulder belt across the chestand shoulder, not the face or neck. A boosterseat may be necessary to achieve proper seatbelt positioning for children over 41 lbs(18 kg) until they reach a height where a lap/shoulder belt fits properly without a boosterseat.When the child restraint is not in use, removeit from the vehicle or secure it with the seatbelt to prevent the child restraint frombecoming a projectile in the event of anaccident.

G WARNINGIf children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,they could:Ropen the doors, thus endangering otherpeople or road users.Rget out and disrupt traffic.Roperate the vehicle's equipment.Additionally, children could set the vehicle inmotion if, for example, they:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshifting the automatic transmission out ofpark position PRStart the engine.There is a risk of an accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children or animals unattended in thevehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out ofreach of children.

G WARNINGIf persons, particularly children are subjectedto prolonged exposure to extreme heat orcold, there is a risk of injury, possibly evenfatal. Never leave children unattended in thevehicle.

G WARNINGIf the child restraint system is subjected todirect sunlight, parts may get very hot.Childrenmay burn themselves on these parts,particularly on the metal parts of the childrestraint system. There is a risk of injury.If you leave the vehicle, taking the child withyou, always ensure that the child restraintsystem is not exposed to direct sunlight.Protect it with a blanket, for example. If thechild restraint system has been exposed todirect sunlight, let it cool down beforesecuring the child in it. Never leave childrenunattended in the vehicle.

58 Children in the vehicleSafety

If an infant or child is traveling in the vehicle:RSecure the child with a child or infant seatrestraint system appropriate to the age andweight of the child.RMake sure that the infant or child isproperly secured at all times while thevehicle is in motion.

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you alwaysproperly secure all infants and children witha child or infant seat restraint system for thetrip.The use of seat belts and infant and childrestraint systems is required by law in:Rall 50 statesRthe U.S. territoriesRthe District of ColumbiaRall Canadian provincesInfants and childrenmust always be seated inan appropriate infant or child restraint systemrecommended for the size and weight of thechild. The infant or child restraint systemmust be properly secured in accordance withthe manufacturer's instructions.All infant or child restraint systemsmustmeetthe following standards:RU.S. Federal Motor Vehicle SafetyStandards 213 and 225RCanadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards213 and 210.2

Confirmation that the child restraint systemcorresponds to the standards can be foundon an instruction label on the child restraintsystem. This confirmation can also be foundin the installation instructions that areincluded with the child restraint system.Always read and follow the manufacturer'sinstructions when using an infant or childrestraint system or booster seat.Observe the warning labels in the vehicleinterior or on the infant or child restraint.

Special seat belt retractor

G WARNINGIf you release the seat belt when driving, thespecial seat belt retractor is deactivated.The released seat belt cannot be engagedagain while driving, because the inertia reelpulls in the seat belt a small distance. Thechild restraint system is no longer properlysecured. There is an increased risk of seriousinjury or even fatal injury.Always keep the seat belt of the activatedspecial seat belt retractor engaged whendriving.

All seat belts except the driver's seat belt areequipped with a special seat belt retractor.When activated, the special seat beltretractor ensures that the seat belt will notslacken once the child restraint system hasbeen secured.Installing a child restraint system:X Always comply with the manufacturer'sinstallation instructions.

X Pull the seat belt smoothly from the seatbelt retractor.

X Engage the seat belt tongue in the beltbuckle.

Activating the special seat belt retractor:X Pull the seat belt out fully and let the seatbelt retractor retract it again.While the seat belt is retracting, you shouldhear a ratcheting sound. The special seatbelt retractor is activated.

X Push down on the child restraint system totake up any slack.

Removing a child restraint system/deactivating the special seat belt retractor:X Always comply with the manufacturer'sinstallation instructions.

X Press the seat belt release button andguide the belt tongue to the belt outlet.The special seat belt retractor isdeactivated.

Children in the vehicle 59

Safety

Z

Child restraint system on the front-passenger seat

G WARNINGIf the front-passenger front air bag is notdeactivated:Ra child secured in a child restraint systemon the front-passenger seat could beseriously or even fatally injured by the front-passenger air bag deploying. This isespecially a risk if the child is in theimmediate vicinity of the front-passengerair bag when it deploys.Rnever secure a child on the front-passengerseat in a rearward-facing child restraintsystem. Only secure a rearward-facingchild restraint system on a suitable rearseat.Rand you secure a forward-facing childrestraint system to the front-passengerseat, you must move the front-passengerseat as far back as possible. When doingso, ensure that the shoulder belt strap fromthe belt outlet on the vehicle is routedtowards the front to the shoulder belt guideon the child restraint system. Set the beltheight adjustment so that the belt strap isrouted towards the front along the bottom.

The front-passenger air bag is notdeactivated:Ron vehicles without an air bag deactivationsystem on the front-passenger seat.Ron vehicles with an air bag deactivationsystem on the front-passenger seat, unlessa child restraint system with transpondersfor an air bag deactivation system isinstalled on the front-passenger seat.Ron vehicles with an air bag deactivationsystem on the front-passenger seat, if the4 PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicatorlamp is not lit.

To make you aware of this danger, acorresponding warning sticker has beenaffixed to the side of the dashboard and onboth sides of the sun visor on the front-passenger side.

Information about recommended childrestraint systems is available at anyauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Example: warning notice on the front-passengersun visor

Warning symbol for a rearward-facing childrestraint system

NEVER use a rearward facing child restrainton a seat protected by an ACTIVE AIR BAG infront of it, DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to theCHILD can occur.

LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat anchorsin the rear

G WARNINGLATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint systemsdo not offer sufficient protective effect forchildren whose weight is greater than 48 lbs(22 kg) who are secured using the safety beltintegrated in the child restraint system. In theevent of an accident, a child might not berestrained correctly. This poses an increasedrisk of injury or even fatal injury.

60 Children in the vehicleSafety

If the child weighs more than 48 lbs (22 kg),only use LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraintsystems with which the child is also securedwith the vehicle seat belt. Also secure thechild restraint system with the Top Tetherbelt, if available.

When installing a child restraint system, besure to observe the manufacturer'sinstallation instructions and the instructionsfor correct use of the child restraint system.

! When installing the LATCH-type (ISOFIX)child restraint system, make sure that theseat belt for the center seat does not gettrapped. Otherwise, the seat belt could bedamaged.

X Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) childrestraint system. Comply with the childrestrain system manufacturer'sinstructions when installing the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system.

LATCH-type (ISOFIX) is a standardizedsecuring system for specially designed childrestraint systems on the rear seats. Securingrings: for two LATCH-type (ISOFIX) childrestraint systems are installed on the left andright of the rear seats.Non-LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seats mayalso be used and can be installed using thevehicle's seat belt system. Install the childseat according to the manufacturer'sinstructions.

Top Tether

Important safety notesG WARNINGAlways engage the rear seat backrests in anupright position before installing the TopTether belt. Push and pull the rear seatbackrests to check whether they are engagedcorrectly. If the seat backrest is not lockedproperly, the seat backrest could fold. Thechild seat would no longer be supportedproperly or positioned to provide its intendedbenefit. That could cause serious or even fatalinjuries.

Example: Top Tether belt with one belt strap

Top Tether provides an additional connectionbetween the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) childrestraint system secured with LATCH-type(ISOFIX) and the rear seat. This helps reducethe risk of injury even further. If the childrestraint system is installed with Top Tether,this should always be used.

Children in the vehicle 61

Safety

Z

The Top Tether anchorage points are installedin the rear compartment behind the outerhead restraints on the parcel shelf.There is also another Top Tether anchoragepoint behind the central rear seat.X Press down the rear of cover; in thedirection of the arrow.Cover; is raised slightly at the front.

X Fold up cover; of Top Tether anchorage=.

X TopTether beltwith onebelt strap: routeTop Tether beltA centrally over headrestraint:.

X Top Tether belt with two belt straps:route Top Tether beltsA on the left andright past the side of head restraint:.

X Hook Top Tether hook? into Top Tetheranchorage=.

X Make sure that Top Tether beltA is nottwisted.

X Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) childrestraint system with Top Tether. Alwayscomply with the child restraint systemmanufacturer's installation instructionswhen doing so. Make sure that Top TetherbeltA is tight.

Child-proof locks

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,they could:Ropen the doors, thus endangering otherpeople or road users.Rget out and disrupt traffic.Roperate the vehicle's equipment.

Additionally, children could set the vehicle inmotion if, for example, they:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshifting the automatic transmission out ofpark position PRStart the engine.There is a risk of an accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children or animals unattended in thevehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out ofreach of children.

G WARNINGIf persons, particularly children are subjectedto prolonged exposure to extreme heat orcold, there is a risk of injury, possibly evenfatal. Never leave children unattended in thevehicle.

G WARNINGIf children are traveling in the vehicle, theycould:Ropen doors, thus endangering other peopleor road usersRexit the vehicle and be caught by oncomingtrafficRoperate vehicle equipment and becometrapped

There is a risk of an accident and injury.Always activate the child-proof locks andoverride feature if children are traveling in thevehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always takethe key with you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unattended in the vehicle.

You can activate the following child-prooflocks:Rrear doors (Y page 63)Rrear side windows (Y page 63)

62 Children in the vehicleSafety

Child-proof locks for the rear doors

G WARNINGChildren could open a rear door from insidethe vehicle. This could result in seriousinjuries or an accident. Therefore, whenchildren ride in the rear always secure the reardoors with the child-proof locks.

You secure each door individually with thechild-proof locks on the rear doors. A doorsecured with a child-proof lock cannot beopened from inside the vehicle. When thevehicle is unlocked, the door can be openedfrom the outside.X To activate: press the child-proof locklever up in the direction of arrow:.

X Make sure that the child-proof locks areworking properly.

X To deactivate: press the child-proof locklever down in the direction of arrow;.

Override feature for the rear sidewindows

G WARNINGWhen children ride on the vehicle's rear seats,activate the override switch. Otherwise, thechildren could be injured, e.g. by trappingthemselves in the rear side window.

X To activate/deactivate: press button:.If indicator lamp; is lit, operation of therear side windows is disabled. Operation isonly possible using the switches in thedriver's door. If indicator lamp; is off,operation is possible using the switches inthe rear compartment.

Driving safety systems

Overview of driving safety systemsIn this section, you will find information aboutthe following driving safety systems:RABS (Anti-lock Braking System)(Y page 64)RBAS (Brake Assist System) (Y page 64)RCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST (distancewarning function and adaptive BrakeAssist) (Y page 65)RESP® (Electronic Stability Program)(Y page 68)REBD (Electronic Brake force Distribution)(Y page 71)RADAPTIVE BRAKE (Y page 72)RSTEER CONTROL (Y page 72)

Important safety notesIf you fail to adapt your driving style orbecome distracted, the driving safetysystems can neither reduce the risk ofaccident nor override the laws of physics.Driving safety systems are merely aids

Driving safety systems 63

Safety

Z

designed to assist driving. You areresponsible for the distance to the vehicle infront, for vehicle speed and for braking ingood time. Always adapt your driving style tosuit the prevailing road, weather and trafficconditions and maintain a safe distance fromthe vehicle in front. Drive carefully.

i The driving safety systems described onlywork as effectively as possible when thereis adequate contact between the tires andthe road surface. Pay particular attentionto the information regarding tires,recommended minimum tire tread depthsetc. in the "Wheels and tires" section(Y page 318).In wintry driving conditions, always usewinter tires (M+S tires) and if necessary,snow chains. Only in this way will thedriving safety systems described in thissection work as effectively as possible.

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)

General informationABS regulates brake pressure in such a waythat the wheels do not lock when you brake.This allows you to continue steering thevehicle when braking.The!ABSwarning lamp in the instrumentcluster lights up when the ignition is switchedon. It goes out when the engine is running.

Important safety notesi Observe the "Important safety notes"section for driving safety systems(Y page 63).

G WARNINGIf ABS is faulty, the wheels could lock whenbraking. The steerability and brakingcharacteristics may be severely impaired.Additionally, further driving safety systemsare deactivated. There is an increased dangerof skidding and accidents.

Drive on carefully. Have ABS checkedimmediately at a qualified specialistworkshop.

When ABS is malfunctioning, other systems,including driving safety systems, will alsobecome inoperative. Observe the informationon the ABS warning lamp (Y page 249) anddisplay messages which may be shown in theinstrument cluster (Y page 218).ABS works from a speed of about 5 mph(8 km/h), regardless of road-surfaceconditions. ABS works on slippery roads,even if you only brake gently.

BrakingX If ABS intervenes: continue to depress thebrake pedal vigorously until the brakingsituation is over.

X To make a full brake application:depress the brake pedal with full force.

If ABS intervenes when braking, you will feela pulsing in the brake pedal.The pulsating brake pedal can be anindication of hazardous road conditions, andfunctions as a reminder to take extra carewhile driving.

BAS (Brake Assist System)

General informationBAS operates in emergency brakingsituations. If you depress the brake pedalquickly, BAS automatically boosts the brakingforce, thus shortening the stopping distance.

Important safety notesi Observe the "Important safety notes"section (Y page 63).

G WARNINGIf BAS is malfunctioning, the braking distancein an emergency braking situation isincreased. There is a risk of an accident.

64 Driving safety systemsSafety

In an emergency braking situation, depressthe brake pedal with full force. ABS preventsthe wheels from locking.

BrakingX Keep the brake pedal firmly depressed untilthe emergency braking situation is over.ABS prevents the wheels from locking.

The brakes will function as usual once yourelease the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated.

COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST

General notesCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST consists ofthe Adaptive Brake Assist and the distancewarning function, which are described in thefollowing.

Distance warning function

Important safety notesi Observe the "Important safety notes"section (Y page 63).

G WARNINGThe distance warning function does not react:Rto people or animalsRto oncoming vehiclesRto crossing trafficRwhen corneringThus, the distance warning function cannotprovide a warning in all critical situations.There is a risk of an accident.Always pay careful attention to the trafficsituation and be ready to brake.

G WARNINGThe distance warning function cannot alwaysclearly identify objects and complex trafficsituations.

In such cases, the distance warning functionmay:Rgive an unnecessary warningRnot give a warningThere is a risk of an accident.Always pay careful attention to the trafficsituation and donot rely solely on the distancewarning function.

FunctionX To activate/deactivate: activate ordeactivate the distance warning function inthe on-board computer (Y page 208).

If the distance warning function is activated,theÄ symbol appears in the assistancegraphics display.The distance warning function can help youto minimize the risk of a front-end collisionwith a vehicle ahead or reduce the effects ofsuch a collision. If the distance warningfunction detects that there is a risk of acollision, you will be warned visually andacoustically. Without your intervention, thedistance warning function cannot prevent acollision.Starting at a speed of around 4 mph(7 km/h), the distance warning functionwarns you if you rapidly approach a vehicle infront. An intermittent warning tone will thensound, and the· distance warning lampwill light up in the instrument cluster.X Brake immediately in order to increase thedistance from the vehicle in front.

orX Take evasive action provided it is safe to doso.

Due to the nature of the system, particularlycomplicated but non-critical drivingconditions may also cause the system todisplay a warning.With the help of the radar sensor system, thedistance warning function can detectobstacles that are in the path of your vehiclefor an extended period of time.

Driving safety systems 65

Safety

Z

From a speed of around 40 mph (70 km/h),the distance warning function can also reactto stationary obstacles, such as stopped orparked vehicles.If you approach an obstacle and the distancewarning function detects a risk of a collision,the system will initially alert you both visuallyand acoustically.In particular, the detection of obstacles canbe impaired if:Rdirt on the sensors or anything else iscovering the sensorsRthere is snow or heavy rainRthere is interference by other radar sourcesRthere are strong radar reflections, forexample in parking garagesRa narrow vehicle is traveling in front, e.g. amotorbikeRa vehicle is traveling in front on a differentline relative to the center of your vehicle

Following damage to the front end of thevehicle, have the configuration and operationof the radar sensor checked at a qualifiedspecialist workshop. This also applies tocollisions at low speeds where there is novisible damage to the front of the vehicle.

Adaptive Brake Assisti Observe the "Important safety notes"section for driving safety systems(Y page 63).

G WARNINGAdaptive Brake Assist cannot always clearlyidentify objects and complex trafficsituations. In these cases, Adaptive BrakeAssist may not intervene. There is a risk of anaccident.Always pay careful attention to the trafficsituation and be ready to brake.

G WARNINGAdaptive Brake Assist does not react:Rto people or animalsRto oncoming vehiclesRto crossing trafficRto stationary obstaclesRwhen corneringAs a result, Adaptive Brake Assist may notintervene in all critical conditions. There is arisk of an accident.Always pay careful attention to the trafficsituation and be ready to brake.

Due to the nature of the system, particularlycomplicated but non-critical drivingconditions may also cause Brake Assist tointervene.Adaptive Brake Assist aids you in brakingduring hazardous situations at speeds above4 mph (7 km/h) and uses the radar sensorsystem to evaluate the traffic situation.With the help of a sensor system, adaptiveBrake Assist can detect obstacles that are inthe path of your vehicle for an extendedperiod of time.Should you approach an obstacle andAdaptive Brake Assist has detected a risk ofcollision, Adaptive BrakeAssist calculates thebraking force necessary to avoid a rear-endcollision. Should you apply the brakesvigorously, Adaptive Brake Assist willautomatically increase the braking force to alevel suitable for the traffic conditions.X Keep the brake pedal depressed until theemergency braking situation is over.ABS prevents the wheels from locking.

The brakes will work normally again if:Ryou release the brake pedalRthere is no longer any danger of a rear-endcollision.Rno obstacle is detected in front of yourvehicle

Adaptive Brake Assist is then deactivated.

66 Driving safety systemsSafety

Up to vehicle speeds of around 155 mph(250 km/h), adaptive Brake Assist is capableof reacting to moving objects that havealready been recognized as such at least onceover the period of observation. AdaptiveBrake Assist does not react to stationaryobstacles.If Adaptive Brake Assist is not available dueto a malfunction in the radar sensor system,the brake system remains available with fullbrake boosting effect and BAS.In particular, the detection of obstacles canbe impaired if there is:Rdirt on the sensors or anything elsecovering the sensorsRsnow or heavy rainRinterference by other radar sourcesRthere are strong radar reflections, forexample in parking garagesRa narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. amotorbikeRa vehicle traveling in front on a different linerelative to the center of your vehicle

Following damage to the front end of thevehicle, have the configuration and operationof the radar sensor checked at a qualifiedspecialist workshop. This also applies tocollisions at low speeds where there is novisible damage to the front of the vehicle.

COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS

General informationCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS isonly available on vehicles with DISTRONIC.COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUSextends the functionality of COLLISIONPREVENTION ASSIST with an automaticbraking function. COLLISION PREVENTIONASSIST PLUS can help you to minimize therisk of a front-end collision with a vehicleahead or reduce the effects of such acollision. If COLLISION PREVENTION ASSISTPLUS detects that there is a risk of a collision,you will be warned visually and acoustically.In critical situations COLLISION PREVENTION

ASSIST PLUS also initiates automaticbraking.

FunctionX To activate/deactivate: activate ordeactivate COLLISION PREVENTIONASSIST PLUS in the on-board computer(Y page 208).

If COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS isactivated, theÄ symbol appears in theassistance graphics display.If the driver's seat belt is fastened,COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS canbrake automatically within a speed range ofbetween 4 mph (7 km/h) and 124 mph(200 km/h).COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS canalso react to stationary obstacles withautomatic braking within a speed range ofbetween 4 mph (7 km/h) and 19 mph(30 km/h).In particular, the detection of obstacles canbe impaired if:Rdirt on the sensors or anything elsecovering the sensorsRsnow or heavy rainRinterference by other radar sourcesRthere are strong radar reflections, forexample in parking garagesRa narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. amotorbikeRa vehicle traveling in front on a different linerelative to the center of your vehicle

Following damage to the front end of thevehicle, have the configuration and operationof the radar sensor checked at a qualifiedspecialist workshop. This also applies tocollisions at low speeds where there is novisible damage to the front of the vehicle.

Driving safety systems 67

Safety

Z

ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)

General notesi Observe the "Important safety notes"section (Y page 63).

ESP® monitors driving stability and traction,i.e. power transmission between the tires andthe road surface.If ESP® detects that the vehicle is deviatingfrom the direction desired by the driver, oneor more wheels are braked to stabilize thevehicle. The engine output is also modified tokeep the vehicle on the desired course withinphysical limits. ESP® assists the driver whenpulling away on wet or slippery roads. ESP®can also stabilize the vehicle during braking.

ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System)i Observe the "Important safety notes"section (Y page 63).

ETS/4ETS traction control is part of ESP®.ETS brakes the drive wheels individually ifthey spin. This enables you to pull away andaccelerate on slippery surfaces, for exampleif the road surface is slippery on one side. Inaddition, more drive torque is transferred tothe wheel or wheels with traction.ETS remains active when you deactivateESP®.

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® is unable tostabilize the vehicle. Additionally, furtherdriving safety systems are deactivated. Thisincreases the risk of skidding and an accident.Drive on carefully. Have ESP® checked at aqualified specialist workshop.

! When testing the electric parking brakeon a braking dynamometer, switch off theignition. Application of the brakes byESP® may otherwise destroy the brakesystem.

! Vehicles with 4MATIC: switch off theignition when the electric parking brake isbeing tested on a brake dynamometer.Application of the brakes by ESP® mayotherwise destroy the brake system.

! Vehicles with 4MATIC: function orperformance tests may only be carried outon a 2-axle dynamometer. Before youoperate the vehicle on such adynamometer, please consult a qualifiedworkshop. You could otherwise damagethe drive train or the brake system.

! Do not tow vehicles with 4MATIC with thefront or rear axle raised.

Vehicles without 4MATIC: please observe thenotes regarding ESP® when towing yourvehicle with the front axle raised(Y page 313).Vehicles with 4MATIC: please observe thenotes regarding ESP® when towing yourvehicle with both axles on the ground(Y page 313).ESP® is deactivated if the å ESP® OFFwarning lamp in the instrument cluster lightsup continuously when the engine is running.If the ÷ ESP® warning lamp and theå ESP® OFF warning lamp are litcontinuously, ESP® is not available due to amalfunction.Observe the information on warning lamps(Y page 251) and display messages whichmay be shown in the instrument cluster(Y page 218).

i Only use wheels with the recommendedtire sizes. Only then will ESP® functionproperly.

Characteristics of ESP®

General informationIf the ÷ ESP warning lamp goes out beforebeginning the journey, ESP® is automaticallyactive.

68 Driving safety systemsSafety

If ESP® intervenes, the ÷ ESP® warninglamp flashes in the instrument cluster.If ESP® intervenes:X Do not deactivate ESP® under anycircumstances.

X Only depress the accelerator pedal as faras necessary when pulling away.

X Adapt your driving style to suit theprevailing road and weather conditions.

ECO start/stop functionThe ECO start/stop function switches theengine off automatically when the vehiclestops moving. The engine startsautomatically when the driver wants to pullaway again. ESP® remains in its previouslyselected status. Example: if ESP® wasdeactivated before the engine was switchedoff, ESP® remains deactivated when theengine is switched on again.

Deactivating/activating ESP® (exceptAMG vehicles)

Important safety notesYou can select between the following statesof ESP®:RESP® is activated.RESP® is deactivated.

G WARNINGIf you deactivate ESP®, ESP® no longerstabilizes the vehicle. There is an increasedrisk of skidding and an accident.Only deactivate ESP® in the situationsdescribed in the following.

It may be best to deactivate ESP® in thefollowing situations:Rwhen using snow chainsRin deep snowRon sand or gravel

i Activate ESP® as soon as the situationsdescribed above no longer apply. ESP® will

otherwise not be able to stabilize thevehicle if the vehicle starts to skid or awheel starts to spin.

! Avoid spinning the driven wheels for anextended period with ESP® deactivated.You could otherwise damage the drivetrain.

Deactivating/activating ESP®

You can deactivate or activate ESP® via theon-board computer.X To deactivate:(Y page 208).The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in theinstrument cluster lights up.

X To activate:(Y page 208).The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in theinstrument cluster goes out.

Characteristics when ESP® is deactivatedIf ESP® is deactivated and one ormorewheelsstart to spin, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp inthe instrument cluster flashes. In suchsituations, ESP® will not stabilize the vehicle.If you deactivate ESP®:RESP® no longer improves driving stability.Rengine torque is no longer limited and thedrive wheels are able to spin.The spinning of the wheels results in acutting action for better traction on loosesurfaces.Rtraction control is still activated.RESP® still provides support when youbrake.

Deactivating/activating ESP® (AMGvehicles)

Important safety notesi Observe the "Important safety notes"section (Y page 63).

Driving safety systems 69

Safety

Z

You can select between the following statesof ESP®:RESP® is activated.RSPORT handling mode is activated.RESP® is deactivated.

G WARNINGWhen SPORT handling mode is activated,there is a greater risk of skidding andaccidents.Only activate SPORT handling mode in thesituations described in the following.

G WARNINGIf you deactivate ESP®, ESP® no longerstabilizes the vehicle. There is an increasedrisk of skidding and an accident.Only deactivate ESP® in the situationsdescribed in the following.

In the following situations, it may be better toactivate SPORT handling mode or deactivateESP®:Rwhen using snow chainsRin deep snowRon sand or gravelRon designated roads when the vehicle'sown oversteering and understeeringcharacteristics are desired

Driving in SPORT handling mode or withoutESP® requires an extremely qualified andexperienced driver.

i Activate ESP® as soon as the situationsdescribed above no longer apply. ESP® willotherwise not be able to stabilize thevehicle if the vehicle starts to skid or awheel starts to spin.

! Avoid spinning the driven wheels for anextended period with ESP® deactivated.You could otherwise damage the drivetrain.

Deactivating/activating ESP®

X To activate SPORT handling mode:briefly press button:.TheM SPORT handling mode warninglamp in the instrument cluster lights up.The SPORT handling modeSPORT handling mode messageappears in the multifunction display.

X To deactivate SPORT handling mode:briefly press button:.TheM SPORT handling mode warninglamp in the instrument cluster goes out.

X To deactivate ESP®: press button: untilthe å ESP® OFF warning lamp lights upin the instrument cluster.The ÷OFFOFF message appears in themultifunction display.

X To activate ESP®: briefly press button:.The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in theinstrument cluster goes out. The ÷ESP®ONON message appears in themultifunction display.

Characteristics of activated SPORThandling modeIf SPORT handling mode is activated and oneor more wheels start to spin, the ÷ ESP®warning lamp in the instrument clusterflashes. ESP® only stabilizes the vehicle to alimited degree.When SPORT handling mode is activated:RESP® only improves driving stability to alimited degree.Rtraction control is still activated.

70 Driving safety systemsSafety

Rengine torque is only restricted to a limiteddegree, and the drive wheels are able tospin.The spinning of the wheels results in acutting action for better traction on loosesurfaces.RESP® still provides support when youbrake.

Characteristics when ESP® is deactivatedIf ESP® is deactivated and one ormorewheelsstart to spin, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp inthe instrument cluster does not flash. In suchsituations, ESP® will not stabilize the vehicle.If you deactivate ESP®:RESP® no longer improves driving stability.Rengine torque is no longer limited and thedrive wheels are able to spin.The spinning of the wheels results in acutting action for better traction on loosesurfaces.Rtraction control is still activated.RPRE-SAFE® is no longer available, nor is itactivated if you brake firmly and ESP®intervenes.RCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST is nolonger available; nor is it activated if youbrake firmly with assistance from ESP®.RCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST is nolonger available; nor is it activated if youbrake firmly with assistance from ESP®.RESP® still provides support when youbrake.

ESP® trailer stabilization

General informationIf your vehicle/trailer combination begins toswerve, ESP® assists you in this situation.ESP® slows the vehicle down by braking andlimiting the engine output until the vehicle/trailer combination has stabilized.

Important safety notesG WARNINGIf road and weather conditions are poor,trailer stabilization will not be able to preventthe vehicle/trailer combination fromswerving. Trailers with a high center of gravitycan tip over before ESP® can detect this.There is a risk of an accident.Always adapt your driving style to theprevailing road and weather conditions.

If your vehicle with trailer (vehicle/trailercombination) begins to lurch, you can onlystabilize the vehicle/trailer combination bydepressing the brake firmly.ESP® trailer stabilization is active abovespeeds of about 40 mph (65 km/h).ESP® trailer stabilization does not work ifESP® is deactivated or disabled because of amalfunction.

EBD (electronic brake forcedistribution)

General informationEBD monitors and controls the brakepressure on the rear wheels to improvedriving stability while braking.

Important safety notesi Observe the "Important safety notes"section for driving safety systems(Y page 63).

G WARNINGIf EBD hasmalfunctioned, the rear wheels canstill lock, e.g. under full braking. Thisincreases the risk of skidding and an accident.You should therefore adapt your driving styleto the different handling characteristics. Havethe brake system checked at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

Driving safety systems 71

Safety

Z

Observe information regarding indicator andwarning lamps (Y page 249) as well asdisplay messages (Y page 220).

ADAPTIVE BRAKEADAPTIVE BRAKE enhances braking safetyand offers increased braking comfort. Inaddition to the braking function, ADAPTIVEBRAKE also has the HOLD function(Y page 176) and hill start assist(Y page 142). For further information, seeDriving tips (Y page 162).

STEER CONTROL

General informationSTEER CONTROL helps you by transmitting anoticeable steering force to the steeringwheel in the direction required for vehiclestabilization.This steering assistance is provided inparticular if:Rboth right wheels or both left wheels are ona wet or slippery road surface when youbrake.Rthe vehicle starts to skid.

Important safety notesIf ESP® is malfunctioning, you will not receivesteering support from STEER CONTROL.Power steering will, however, continue tofunction.

Theft deterrent locking system

ImmobilizerThe immobilizer prevents your vehicle frombeing started without the correct SmartKey.X To activate: remove the SmartKey fromthe ignition lock.

X To deactivate: switch on the ignition.

When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Theengine can be started by anyone with a validSmartKey that is left inside the vehicle.

i The immobilizer is always deactivatedwhen you start the engine.In the event that the engine cannot bestarted when the starter battery is fullycharged, the immobilizer may be faulty.Contact an authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in theUSA) or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).

ATA (anti-theft alarm system)

X To arm: lock the vehicle with theSmartKey.Indicator lamp: flashes. The alarmsystem is armed after approximately15 seconds.

X To disarm: unlock the vehicle with theSmartKey.

orX Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.A visual and audible alarm is triggered if thealarm system is armed and you open:Rthe vehicle with the mechanical keyRa doorRthe trunk lidRthe hood

72 Theft deterrent locking systemSafety

X To stop the alarm: insert the SmartKeyinto the ignition lock.The alarm is switched off.

orX Press the% or& button on theSmartKey.The alarm is switched off.

The alarm is not switched off, even if youclose the open door that triggered it, forexample.

i If the alarm stays on for more than30 seconds, the mbrace emergency callsystem automatically sends a message tothe Customer Assistance Center by textmessage or data connection. Theemergency call system sends the messageprovided that:Ryou have subscribed to the mbraceservice.Rthe mbrace service has been activatedproperly.Rthe necessary mobile phone network isavailable.

Theft deterrent locking system 73

Safety

Z

74

Useful information .............................. 76SmartKey ............................................. 76Doors .................................................... 81Trunk .................................................... 84Side windows ...................................... 86Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel ........................................ 89

75

Openingandclosing

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optionalequipment of your vehicle available at thetime of publication of the Operator'sManual. Country-specific differences arepossible. Please note that your vehicle maynot be equipped with all featuresdescribed. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions.

i Read the information on qualifiedspecialist workshops: (Y page 25).

SmartKey

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,they could:Ropen the doors, thus endangering otherpeople or road users.Rget out and disrupt traffic.Roperate the vehicle's equipment.Additionally, children could set the vehicle inmotion if, for example, they:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshifting the automatic transmission out ofpark position PRStart the engine.There is a risk of an accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children or animals unattended in thevehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out ofreach of children.

G WARNINGIf persons, particularly children are subjectedto prolonged exposure to extreme heat orcold, there is a risk of injury, possibly evenfatal. Never leave children unattended in thevehicle.

G WARNINGIf you attach heavy or large objects to theSmartKey, the SmartKey could beunintentionally turned in the ignition lock. Thiscould cause the engine to be switched off.There is a risk of an accident.Do not attach any heavy or large objects tothe SmartKey. Remove any bulky key ringsbefore inserting the SmartKey into theignition lock.

! Keep the SmartKey away from strongmagnetic fields. Otherwise, the remotecontrol function could be affected.Strong magnetic fields can occur in thevicinity of powerful electrical installations.

Do not keep the SmartKey:Rwith electronic devices, e.g. a mobilephone or another SmartKeyRwith metallic objects, e.g. coins or metalfoilRinside metallic objects, e.g. a metal case

SmartKey functions

: & To lock the vehicle; F To open the trunk lid= % To unlock the vehicleX To unlock centrally: press button=.

76 SmartKeyOp

eningandclosing

If you do not open the vehicle withinapproximately 40 seconds of unlocking:Rthe vehicle is locked again.Rthe theft deterrent locking system is armedagain.

X To lock centrally: press button:.

The SmartKey centrally locks/unlocks:Rthe doorsRthe trunk lidRthe fuel filler flapThe turn signals flash once when unlockingand three times when locking.

i When it is dark, the surround lighting alsocomes on if it is activated in the on-boardcomputer (Y page 211).

i You can also set an audible signal toconfirm that the vehicle has been locked.The audible signal can be activated anddeactivated using the on-board computer(Y page 212).

X To open the trunk lid automatically:press and hold button; until the trunk lidopens (Y page 85).

Changing the settings of the lockingsystemYou can change the settings of the lockingsystem. When you then unlock the vehicleonly the driver's door and the fuel filler flapare unlocked. This is useful if you frequentlytravel on your own.X To change the setting: press and holddown the% and& buttonssimultaneously for approximately sixseconds until the battery check lamp(Y page 78) flashes twice.i If the setting of the locking system ischanged within the signal range of thevehicle, pressing the& or% button:Rlocks orRunlocks the vehicle

The SmartKey now functions as follows:X To unlock the driver's door: press the% button once.

X To unlock centrally: press the%button twice.

X To lock centrally: press the& button.X To restore the factory settings: pressand hold down the% and& buttonssimultaneously for approximately sixseconds until the battery check lampflashes twice (Y page 78).

Mechanical key

General notesIf the vehicle can no longer be unlocked withthe SmartKey, use the mechanical key.If you use the mechanical key to unlock andopen the driver's door, the anti-theft alarmsystem will be triggered (Y page 72).There are several ways to turn off the alarm:X Press the% or& button on theSmartKey.

orX Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.If you unlock the vehicle using themechanicalkey, the fuel filler flap will not be unlockedautomatically.X To unlock the fuel filler flap: insert theSmartKey into the ignition lock.

Removing the mechanical key

SmartKey 77

Openingandclosing

Z

X Push release catch: in the direction ofthe arrow and at the same time removemechanical key; from the SmartKey.

For further information about:Runlocking the driver's door (Y page 83)Runlocking the trunk (Y page 86)Rlocking the vehicle (Y page 83)

SmartKey battery

Important safety notes

G WARNINGBatteries contain toxic and corrosivesubstances. If batteries are swallowed, it canresult in severe health problems. There is arisk of fatal injury.Keep batteries out of the reach of children. Ifa battery is swallowed, seekmedical attentionimmediately.

The SmartKey batteries contain perchloratematerial, which may require special handlingand regard for the environment. Nationalguidelines must be observed during disposal.In California, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/HazardousWaste/Perchlorate/index.cfm.Mercedes-Benz recommends that you havethe batteries replaced at a qualified specialistworkshop.

Checking the battery

X Press the& or% button.The battery is working properly if batterycheck lamp: lights up briefly.The battery is discharged if battery checklamp: does not light up briefly.

X Change the battery (Y page 78).

i If the SmartKey battery is checked withinthe signal reception range of the vehicle,pressing the& or% button:Rlocks orRunlocks the vehicle

i You can get a battery at any qualifiedspecialist workshop.

Replacing the batteryYou require a CR 2025 3 V cell battery.X Take the mechanical key out of theSmartKey (Y page 77).

X Press mechanical key; into the openingin the SmartKey in the direction of thearrow until battery tray cover: opens.When doing so, do not hold cover: shut.

X Remove battery tray cover:.

78 SmartKeyOp

eningandclosing

X Repeatedly tap the SmartKey against yourpalm until battery= falls out.

X Insert the new battery with the positiveterminal facing upwards. Use a lint-freecloth to do so.

X Make sure that the surface of the battery isfree from lint, grease and all other forms ofcontamination.

X Insert the front tabs of battery traycover: and then press to close it.

X Insert the mechanical key into theSmartKey.

X Check the function of all SmartKey buttonson the vehicle.

SmartKey 79

Openingandclosing

Z

Problems with the SmartKey

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

You cannot lock orunlock the vehicleusing the SmartKey.

The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.X Try again to lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote controlfunction of the SmartKey. Point the tip of the SmartKey at thedriver's door handle from close range and press the% or& button.

If this does not work:X Check the SmartKey battery and replace it if necessary(Y page 78).

X Unlock (Y page 83) or lock (Y page 83) the vehicle using themechanical key.

There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves.X Try again to lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote controlfunction of the SmartKey. Point the tip of the SmartKey at thedriver's door handle from close range and press the% /& button.

The SmartKey is faulty.X Unlock (Y page 83) or lock (Y page 83) the vehicle using themechanical key.

X Have the SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

You have lost aSmartKey.

X Have the SmartKey deactivated at a qualified specialistworkshop.

X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.X If necessary, have the locks changed as well.

You have lost themechanical key.

X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.X If necessary, have the locks changed as well.

80 SmartKeyOp

eningandclosing

Problem Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions

The engine cannot bestarted using theSmartKey.

The on-board voltage is too low.X Switch off non-essential consumers, e.g. seat heating or interiorlighting, and try to start the engine again.

If this does not work:X Check the starter battery and charge it if necessary(Y page 305).

orX Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 309).orX Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The engine cannot bestarted using theSmartKey.

The steering lock is mechanically blocked.X Remove the SmartKey and reinsert it into the ignition lock.Whiledoing this, turn the steering wheel in both directions.

Doors

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,they could:Ropen the doors, thus endangering otherpeople or road users.Rget out and disrupt traffic.Roperate the vehicle's equipment.Additionally, children could set the vehicle inmotion if, for example, they:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshifting the automatic transmission out ofpark position PRStart the engine.There is a risk of an accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children or animals unattended in thevehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out ofreach of children.

G WARNINGIf persons, particularly children are subjectedto prolonged exposure to extreme heat orcold, there is a risk of injury, possibly evenfatal. Never leave children unattended in thevehicle.

You should preferably place luggage or loadsin the cargo compartment. Observe theloading guidelines (Y page 260).

Unlocking and opening doors fromthe insidei When a door is opened, the side windowon that side opens slightly. When the dooris closed, the side window closes again.

! The side windows will not open/close ifthe battery is discharged or if the sidewindows have iced up. It will then not bepossible to close the door. Do not attemptto force the door closed. You couldotherwise damage the door or the sidewindow.

Doors 81

Openingandclosing

Z

X To unlock a front door: pull doorhandle;.Locking knob: pops up.The door is unlocked and can be opened.

X To open a front door: pull doorhandle;.

X To unlock a rear door: pull up lockingknob:.The door is unlocked and can be opened.

X To open a rear door: pull door handle;.

You can open a door from inside the vehicleeven if it has been locked. You can open therear doors from inside the vehicle unless theyare secured by the child-proof lock(Y page 63).If the vehicle has previously been locked withthe SmartKey, opening a door from the insidewill trigger the anti-theft alarm system.Switch off the alarm (Y page 72).

Centrally locking and unlocking thevehicle from the insideYou can centrally lock or unlock the vehiclefrom the inside. This can be useful if you wishto lock the vehicle before pulling away, forexample.

X To unlock: press button:.X To lock: press button;.If all the doors and the trunk lid are closed,the vehicle locks.

Meanwhile, the fuel filler flap will not belocked or unlocked.You cannot unlock the vehicle centrally fromthe inside if the vehicle has been locked withthe SmartKey.You can open a door from inside the vehicleeven if it has been locked. You can open therear doors from inside the vehicle unless theyare secured by the child-proof lock(Y page 63).If the vehicle has previously been locked withthe SmartKey, opening a door from the insidewill trigger the anti-theft alarm system.Switch off the alarm (Y page 72).If the vehicle has been locked using thelocking button for the central locking, or hasbeen locked automatically, and a door isopened from the inside:Rthe vehicle will be fully unlocked if it hadpreviously been fully unlockedRonly the door which has been opened formthe inside is unlocked if only the driver'sdoor had been previously unlocked

82 DoorsOp

eningandclosing

Automatic locking feature

X To deactivate: press and hold button:for about five seconds until a tone sounds.

X To activate: press and hold button; forabout five seconds until a tone sounds.

i If you press one of the two buttons anddo not hear a tone, the relevant setting hasalready been selected.

The vehicle is locked automatically when theignition is switched on and the wheels areturning.You could therefore lock yourself out if:Rthe vehicle is being pushed.Rthe vehicle is being towed.Rthe vehicle is on a roller dynamometer.You can also switch the automatic lockingfunction on and off using the on-boardcomputer (Y page 212).

Unlocking the driver's door(mechanical key)If the vehicle can no longer be unlocked withthe SmartKey, use the mechanical key.If you use the mechanical key to unlock andopen the driver's door, the anti-theft alarmsystem will be triggered (Y page 72).X Take the mechanical key out of theSmartKey (Y page 77).

X Insert the mechanical key into the lock ofthe driver's door as far as it will go.

X Turn themechanical key counter-clockwiseto position1.The door is unlocked.

X Turn the mechanical key back and removeit.

X Insert the mechanical key into theSmartKey.

Locking the vehicle (mechanical key)If the vehicle can no longer be locked with theSmartKey, use the mechanical key.X Open the driver's door.X Close the front-passenger door, the reardoors and the trunk lid.

X Press the locking button (Y page 82).X Check whether the locking knobs on thefront-passenger door and the rear doorsare still visible. Press down the lockingknobs manually, if necessary (Y page 81).

X Close the driver's door.X Take the mechanical key out of theSmartKey (Y page 77).

X Insert the mechanical key into the lock ofthe driver's door as far as it will go.

Doors 83

Openingandclosing

Z

X Turn the mechanical key clockwise as faras it will go to position1.

X Turn the mechanical key back and removeit.

X Make sure that the doors and the trunk lidare locked.

X Insert the mechanical key into theSmartKey.

i If you lock the vehicle as described above,the fuel filler flap is not locked. The anti-theft alarm system is not armed.

Trunk

Important safety notes

G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaustgases can enter the vehicle interior if thetrunk lid is open when the engine is running,especially if the vehicle is in motion. There isa risk of poisoning.Always switch off the engine before openingthe trunk lid. Never drive with the trunk lidopen.

G WARNINGIf persons, particularly children are subjectedto prolonged exposure to extreme heat orcold, there is a risk of injury, possibly evenfatal. Never leave children unattended in thevehicle.

! The trunk lid swings upwards whenopened. Therefore, make sure that there issufficient clearance above the trunk lid.

i The opening dimensions of the trunk lidcan be found in the "Vehicle data" section(Y page 357).

You should preferably place luggage or loadsin the cargo compartment. Observe theloading guidelines (Y page 260).Do not leave the SmartKey in the trunk. Youcould otherwise lock yourself out.The trunk lid can be:Ropened and closed manually from outsideRunlocked from inside with the mechanicalkey

Opening/closing manually fromoutside

OpeningX Press the% button on the SmartKey.

X Pull handle:.X Raise the trunk lid.

84 TrunkOp

eningandclosing

Closing

X Pull down the trunk lid using handle:.X Let the trunk lid drop into the lock.X If necessary, lock the vehicle with the& button on the SmartKey.

Opening automatically from outside

Important safety notes

G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaustgases can enter the vehicle interior if thetrunk lid is open when the engine is running,especially if the vehicle is in motion. There isa risk of poisoning.Always switch off the engine before openingthe trunk lid. Never drive with the trunk lidopen.

! The trunk lid swings upwards whenopened. Therefore, make sure that there issufficient clearance above the trunk lid.

i Opening dimensions of the trunk lid(Y page 357).

OpeningYou can open the trunk lid automaticallyusing the SmartKey or the handle in the trunklid.

X Press and hold theF button on theSmartKey until the trunk lid opens.

orX If the trunk lid is unlocked, pull the trunk lidhandle and let it go again immediately.

Opening automatically from inside

Important safety notes

G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaustgases can enter the vehicle interior if thetrunk lid is open when the engine is running,especially if the vehicle is in motion. There isa risk of poisoning.Always switch off the engine before openingthe trunk lid. Never drive with the trunk lidopen.

! The trunk lid swings upwards whenopened. Therefore, make sure that there issufficient clearance above the trunk lid.

i Opening dimensions of the trunk lid(Y page 357).

Opening

You can open the trunk lid from the driver'sseat when the vehicle is stationary andunlocked.X To open: pull remote operating switch fortrunk lid: until the trunk lid opens.

Trunk 85

Openingandclosing

Z

Emergency releaseIf the trunk lid can no longer be opened fromoutside the vehicle, use the emergencyrelease on the inside of the trunk lid.

! The trunk lid swings upwards whenopened. Therefore, make sure that there issufficient clearance above the trunk lid.

i The opening dimensions of the trunk lidcan be found in the "Vehicle data" section(Y page 357).

You can reach the emergency release via thetrunk. Fold the rear backrests forward(Y page 264).

X Insert suitable tool;, e.g. a screwdriver,horizontally on the left-hand side intoemergency release slot:.

X Push tool; evenly in the direction of thearrow and open the trunk lid.

i When you lock the vehicle (Y page 83),the trunk is also locked.

Emergency release buttonYou can open the trunk lid from inside thevehicle with the emergency release button.

X Press emergency release button: briefly.The trunk lid unlocks and opens.

The trunk lid can be unlocked and openedwith the trunk lid emergency release whenthe vehicle is stationary or while driving.The trunk lid emergency release does notopen the trunk lid if the battery isdisconnected or discharged.Trunk lid emergency release light:Remergency release button: flashes for30 minutes after the trunk lid is openedRemergency release button: flashes for60 minutes after the trunk lid is closed.

Side windows

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWhile opening the side windows, body partsin the closing area could become trapped.There is a risk of injury.Make sure that no body parts are in closeproximity during the closing procedure. Ifsomebody becomes trapped, release theswitch or press the switch to open the sidewindow again.

G WARNINGIf children operate the side windows theycould become trapped, particularly if they areleft unsupervised. There is a risk of injury.Activate the override feature for the rear sidewindows. When leaving the vehicle, always

86 Side windowsOp

eningandclosing

take the SmartKey with you and lock thevehicle. Never leave children unsupervised inthe vehicle.

Side window reversing featureThe side windows are equipped with anautomatic reversing feature. If a solid objectblocks or restricts a side window during theclosing process, the side window opens againautomatically. However, the automaticreversing feature is only an aid and does notrelieve you of the responsibility of payingattention when closing a side window.

G WARNINGThe reversing feature does not react:Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. smallfingersRover the last 1/6 in(4 mm) of the closingmovementRduring resettingRwhen closing the side window againmanually immediately after automaticreversing

This means that the reversing feature cannotprevent someone being trapped in thesesituations. There is a risk of injury.Make sure that no body parts are in closeproximity during the closing procedure. Ifsomeone becomes trapped, press the switchto open the side window again.

Opening and closing the sidewindowsThe switches for all side windows are locatedon the driver's door. There is also a switch oneach door for the corresponding sidewindow.The switches on the driver's door takeprecedence.

: Front left; Front right= Rear right? Rear left

i When the override feature for the sidewindows is activated (Y page 63), the sidewindows cannot be operated from the rear.

X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock.

X To open: press the corresponding switch.X To open fully: press the correspondingswitch beyond the point of resistance.Automatic closing is started.

X To close: pull the corresponding switch.X To close fully: pull the correspondingswitch beyond the pressure point.Automatic closing is started.

X To interrupt the automatic opening/closing: press/pull the correspondingswitch again.i If you press the switch beyond the pointof resistance, an automatic opening/closing process is started in thecorresponding direction. You can stopautomatic operation by operating theswitch again.

i You can continue to operate the sidewindows after you switch off the engine orremove the SmartKey. This function isavailable for up to five minutes or until thedriver's or front-passenger door is opened.

Side windows 87

Openingandclosing

Z

Convenience openingYou can ventilate the vehicle before you startdriving. To do this, the SmartKey is used tocarry out the following functionssimultaneously:Runlock the vehicleRopen the side windowsRopen the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel and the roller sunblinds

i The convenience opening feature canonly be operated using the SmartKey. TheSmartKey must be close to the driver'sdoor handle.

X Point the tip of the SmartKey at the driver'sdoor handle.

X Press and hold the% button until theside windows and the panorama roof withpower tilt/sliding panel are in the desiredposition.If the roller sunblinds of the panorama roofwith power tilt/sliding panel are closed, theroller sunblinds are opened first.

X Press and hold the% button again untilthe panorama roof with power tilt/slidingpanel is in the desired position.

X To interrupt convenience opening:release the% button.

Convenience closing feature

G WARNINGWhen the convenience closing feature isoperating, parts of the body could becometrapped in the closing area of the side windowand the sliding sunroof. There is a risk ofinjury.Observe the complete closing procedurewhen the convenience closing feature isoperating. Make sure that no body parts arein close proximity during the closingprocedure.

When you lock the vehicle, you cansimultaneously:Rclose the side windowsRclose the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel

On vehicles with a panorama roof with powertilt/sliding panel, you can then close theroller sunblinds.

i The SmartKey must be close to thedriver's door handle.

X Point the tip of the SmartKey at the driver'sdoor handle.

X Press and hold the& button until theside windows and the panorama roof withpower tilt/sliding panel are fully closed.

X Make sure that all the sidewindows and thepanorama roof with power tilt/slidingpanel are closed.

On vehicles with a panorama roof with powertilt/sliding panel:X Press and hold the& button again untilthe roller sunblinds of the panorama roofwith power tilt/sliding panel close.

X To interrupt convenience closing:release the& button.

Resetting the side windowsYou must reset each side window if:Rthe side window opens again slightly afterbeing closed fully.Rthe side window can no longer be fullyopened or closed.

X Close all the doors.X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock.

X Pull the corresponding switch on the doorcontrol panel until the side window iscompletely closed (Y page 87).

X Hold the switch for an additional second.

88 Side windowsOp

eningandclosing

If the side window opens again slightly:X Immediately pull the corresponding switchon the door control panel until the sidewindow is completely closed (Y page 87).

X Hold the switch for an additional second.X If the corresponding side window remainsclosed after the button has been released,the side window has been reset correctly.If this is not the case, repeat the stepsabove again.

Problems with the side windows

G WARNINGIf you close a side window again immediatelyafter it has been blocked or reset, the sidewindow closes with increased or maximumforce. The reversing feature is then not active.Parts of the body could be trapped in theclosing area in the process. This poses anincreased risk of injury or even fatal injury.Make sure that no parts of the body are in theclosing area. To stop the closing process,release the switch or push the switch again toreopen the side window.

Problem: a side window cannot be closedbecause it is blocked by objects, e.g.leaves in the window guide.X Remove the objects.X Close the side window.

Problem: a side window cannot be closedand you cannot see the cause. If a sidewindow is obstructed during closing andreopens again slightly:X Immediately after the window blocks, pullthe corresponding switch again until theside window has closed.The side window is closed with increasedforce.

If a side window is obstructed again duringclosing and reopens again slightly:X Immediately after the window blocks, pullthe corresponding switch again until theside window has closed.The side window is closed without the anti-entrapment feature.

Panorama roofwith power tilt/slidingpanel

Important safety notesIn the following section, the term "slidingsunroof" refers to the panorama roof withpower tilt/sliding panel.

G WARNINGWhile opening and closing the sliding sunroof,body parts in close proximity could becometrapped. There is a risk of injury.Make sure that no body parts are in closeproximity during the opening and closingprocedures.If somebody becomes trapped:Rrelease the switch immediately, orRduring automatic operation, push theswitch briefly in any direction

The opening or closing procedure will bestopped.

G WARNINGIf children operate the sliding sunroof theycould become trapped, particularly if they areleft unsupervised. There is a risk of injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

G WARNINGAt high speeds the raised sliding sunroofautomatically lowers slightly at the rear. Thiscould trap you or other persons. There is a riskof injury. Make sure that nobody reaches into

Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel 89

Openingandclosing

Z

the sweep of the sliding sunroof whilst thevehicle is in motion.If somebody becomes trapped, reduce speedimmediately, paying attention to road andtraffic conditions. The sliding sunroof opensagain to its original position.If the sliding sunroof is not completely raised,you can then raise it further with the switch.

! Only open the sliding sunroof if it is freeof snow and ice. Otherwise, malfunctionsmay occur.Do not allow anything to protrude from thesliding sunroof. Otherwise, the seals couldbe damaged.

! The weather can change abruptly. It couldstart to rain or snow. Make sure that thesliding sunroof is closedwhen you leave thevehicle. The vehicle electronics can bedamaged if water enters the vehicleinterior.

i Resonance noises can occur in additionto the usual airflow noises when the slidingsunroof is open. They are caused by minorpressure fluctuations in the vehicle interior.Change the position of the sliding sunroofor open a side window slightly to reduce oreliminate these noises.

Sliding sunroof reversing featureThe sliding sunroof is equipped with anautomatic reversing feature. If a solid objectblocks or restricts the sliding sunroof duringthe closing process, the sliding sunroof opensagain automatically. However, the automaticreversing feature is only an aid and does notrelieve you of the responsibility of payingattention when closing the sliding sunroof.

G WARNINGThe reversing feature does not react:Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. smallfingersRover the last 1/6 in(4 mm) of the closingmovementRduring resettingRwhen closing the sliding sunroof againmanually immediately after automaticreversing

This means that the reversing feature cannotprevent someone being trapped in thesesituations. There is a risk of injury.Make sure that no body parts are in closeproximity during the closing procedure.If somebody becomes trapped:Rrelease the switch immediately, orRduring automatic operation, push theswitch briefly in any direction

The closing process is stopped.

Operating the sliding sunroof

Overhead control panel: To raise; To open= To close/lower

90 Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panelOp

eningandclosing

X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock.

X Make sure that the roller sunblinds areopen.

X Press or pull the3 switch in thecorresponding direction.i If you press the3 switch beyond thepoint of resistance, an automatic opening/closing process is started in thecorresponding direction. You can stopautomatic operation by operating theswitch again.The automatic raising feature is availableonly when the sliding sunroof is closed.

i You can continue to operate the slidingsunroof after switching off the engine orremoving the SmartKey from the ignitionlock. This function remains active for fiveminutes or until you open a front door.

Operating the roller sunblinds for thesliding sunroof

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWhen opening or closing the roller sunblind,parts of the body could be trapped betweenthe roller sunblind and the frame or slidingsunroof. There is a risk of injury.When opening or closing make sure that noparts of the body are in the sweep of the rollersunblind.If somebody becomes trapped:Rrelease the switch immediately, orRduring automatic operation, push theswitch briefly in any direction

The opening or closing procedure will bestopped.

The roller sunblinds shield the vehicle interiorfrom sunlight. The two roller sunblinds canonly be opened and closed together when thesliding sunroof is closed.

Roller sunblind reversing featureThe roller sunblinds are equipped with anautomatic reversing feature. If a solid objectblocks or restricts a roller sunblind during theclosing process, the roller sunblind opensagain automatically. However, the automaticreversing feature is only an aid and does notrelieve you of the responsibility of payingattention when closing the roller sunblinds.

G WARNINGThe reversing feature does not react:Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. smallfingersRwhen closing the roller sunblind againmanually immediately after automaticreversing

This means that the reversing feature cannotprevent someone being trapped in thesesituations. There is a risk of injury.When closing make sure that no parts of thebody are in the sweep of the roller sunblind.If somebody becomes trapped:Rrelease the switch immediately, orRduring automatic operation, push theswitch briefly in any direction

The closing process is stopped.

Opening and closing

Overhead control panel: To open; To open= To close

Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel 91

Openingandclosing

Z

X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock.

X Press or pull the3 switch in thecorresponding direction.i If you press the3 switch beyond thepoint of resistance, an automatic opening/closing process is started in thecorresponding direction. You can stopautomatic operation by operating theswitch again.

i After opening the sliding sunroof, theroller sunblind closes slightlyautomatically. This reduces drafts in thevehicle interior.

Resetting the sliding sunroof and theroller sunblindsIf the sliding sunroof or the roller sunblindsdo not move smoothly, reset the slidingsunroof and the roller sunblinds:X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock.

X Pull the3 switch repeatedly to the pointof resistance in the direction of arrow=until the sliding sunroof is fully closed.

X Keep the3 switch pulled for anadditional second.

X Pull the3 switch repeatedly to the pointof resistance in the direction of arrow=until the roller sunblinds are fully closed.

X Keep the3 switch pulled for anadditional second.

X Make sure that the sliding sunroof(Y page 90) and the roller sunblinds(Y page 91) can be fully opened and closedagain.

X If this is not the case, repeat the stepsabove again.

Problems with the sliding sunroof

G WARNINGIf you do not reset the sliding sunroof after amalfunction or voltage supply interruption,then the backing up function will malfunctionor not work. The sliding sunroof closes withincreased or maximum force. Parts of thebody could be trapped in the closing area inthe process. This poses an increased risk ofinjury or even fatal injury.In such or similar situations alwaysmake surethat no parts of the body are in the closingarea. Always reset the sliding sunroof after amalfunction or voltage supply interruption.

! If the sliding sunroof still cannot beopened or closed as a result of amalfunction, contact a qualified specialistworkshop.

Problem: the sunroof cannot be closedand you cannot see the cause. If the slidingsunroof is obstructed during closing andreopens again slightly:X Immediately after it blocks, pull the3switch down again to the point ofresistance until the sliding sunroof isclosedThe sliding sunroof is closedwith increasedforce.

If the sliding sunroof is obstructed againduring closing and then reopens slightly:X Immediately after it blocks, pull the3switch down again to the point ofresistance until the sliding sunroof isclosedThe sliding sunroof is closed without theanti-entrapment feature.

92 Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panelOp

eningandclosing

Useful information .............................. 94Correct driver's seat position ............ 94Seats .................................................... 95Steering wheel .................................. 101Mirrors ............................................... 102Memory functions ............................. 104

93

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optionalequipment of your vehicle available at thetime of publication of the Operator'sManual. Country-specific differences arepossible. Please note that your vehicle maynot be equipped with all featuresdescribed. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions.

i Read the information on qualifiedspecialist workshops: (Y page 25).

Correct driver's seat position

G WARNINGYou could lose control of your vehicle if youdo the following while driving:Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint,steering wheel or mirrorsRfasten the seat beltThere is a risk of an accident.Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint,steering wheel and mirror and fasten yourseat belt before starting the engine.

Observe the safety guidelines on seatadjustment (Y page 95).

X Make sure that seat= is adjustedproperly.Manual seat adjustment (Y page 96)Electrical seat adjustment (Y page 97)When adjusting the seat, make sure that:Ryou are as far away from the driver's airbag as possible.Ryou are sitting in a normal uprightposition.Ryou can fasten the seat belt properly.Ryou have moved the backrest to analmost vertical position.Ryou have set the seat cushion angle sothat your thighs are gently supported.Ryou can depress the pedals properly.

X Check whether the head restraint isadjusted properly (Y page 97).When doing so, make sure that you haveadjusted the head restraint so that the backof your head is supported at eye level bythe center of the head restraint.

Observe the safety guidelines on steeringwheel adjustment (Y page 101).X Make sure that steering wheel: isadjusted properly.Adjusting the steering wheel(Y page 101)When adjusting the steering wheel, makesure that:Ryou can hold the steeringwheel with yourarms slightly bent.Ryou can move your legs freely.Ryou can see all the displays in theinstrument cluster clearly.

Observe the safety guidelines for seat belts(Y page 52).X Check whether you have fastened seatbelt; properly (Y page 53).

94 Correct driver's seat positionSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

The seat belt should:Rfit snugly across your bodyRbe routed across the middle of yourshoulderRbe routed in your pelvic area across thehip joints

X Before starting off, adjust the rear-viewmirror and the exterior mirrors(Y page 102) in such a way that you havea good view of road and traffic conditions.

X Vehicles with a memory function: savethe seat and exterior mirror settings(Y page 104).

Seats

Important safety notes

G WARNINGChildren could become trapped if they adjustthe seats, particularly when unattended.There is a risk of injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

G WARNINGYou could lose control of your vehicle if youdo the following while driving:Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint,steering wheel or mirrorsRfasten the seat beltThere is a risk of an accident.Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint,steering wheel and mirror and fasten yourseat belt before starting the engine.

G WARNINGIf you adjust the seat height carelessly, you orother vehicle occupants could be trapped andthereby injured. Children in particular couldaccidentally press the electrical seatadjustment buttons and become trapped.There is a risk of injury.

While moving the seats, make sure that yourhands or other body parts do not get underthe lever assembly of the seat adjustmentsystem.

G WARNINGWhen you adjust a seat, you or other vehicleoccupants could become trapped, e.g. on theseat guide rail. There is a risk of injury.Make sure when adjusting a seat that no onehas any body parts in the sweep of the seat.

G WARNINGThe seat belt does not offer the intended levelof protection if the backrest is not in theupright position. When braking or in the eventof an accident, you could slide underneath theseat belt and sustain abdomen or neckinjuries, for example. This poses an increasedrisk of injury or even fatal injury.Adjust the seat properly before beginningyour journey. Always make sure that the seatis in the upright position.

G WARNINGIf head restraints are not installed andadjusted correctly, they cannot provideprotection as intended. There is an increasedrisk of injury in the head and neck area, e.g.in the event of an accident or when braking.Always drive with the head restraintsinstalled. Before driving off, make sure forevery vehicle occupant that the center of thehead restraint supports the back of the headat about eye level.

G WARNINGAccording to accident statistics, children aresafer when properly restrained on the rearseats than on the front-passenger seat. Thus,we strongly recommend that children beplaced in the rear seat whenever possible.Regardless of seating position, children 12years old and under must be seated andproperly secured in an appropriately sizedchild restraint system or booster seat

Seats 95

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

recommended for the size and weight of thechild. For additional information, see the"Children in the vehicle" section.A child's risk of serious or fatal injuries issignificantly increased if the child restraintsare not properly secured in the vehicle and/or the child is not properly secured in the childrestraint.

! To avoid damage to the seats and the seatheating, observe the following information:Rkeep liquids from spilling on the seats. Ifliquid is spilled on the seats, dry them assoon as possible.Rif the seat covers are damp or wet, do notswitch on the seat heating. The seatheating should also not be used to drythe seats.Rclean the seat covers as recommended;see the "Interior care" section.Rdo not transport heavy loads on theseats. Do not place sharp objects on theseat cushions, e.g. knives, nails or tools.The seats should only be occupied bypassengers, if possible.Rwhen the seat heating is in operation, donot cover the seats with insulatingmaterials, e.g. blankets, coats, bags,seat covers, child seats or booster seats.

! Make sure that there are no objects in thefootwell or behind the seats when resettingthe seats. There is a risk that the seatsand/or the objects could be damaged.

i The head restraints in the front and rearseats can be removed.1

For more information, contact a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

i Further related subjects:RLuggage compartment enlargement(folding down the rear seats)(Y page 263)

Adjusting the seats manually

Seat fore-and-aft adjustmentX Lift handle: and slide the seat forwardsor backwards.

X Release lever: again.Make sure that you hear the seat engage inposition.

Backrest angleX Relieve the pressure on the backrest.X Turn handwheel? forwards or backwards.

Seat heightX Pull handle= upwards or push it downrepeatedly until the seat has reached thedesired height.

Seat cushion angleAdjust the angle so that your thighs are lightlysupported.X Turn handwheel; forwards or backwards.

1 Not on vehicles with sports seats.

96 SeatsSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Adjusting the seats electrically

: Head restraint height2; Seat cushion angle= Seat height? Seat fore-and-aft adjustmentA Backrest angle

i You can store the seat settings using thememory function (Y page 104).

Adjusting the head restraints

G WARNINGYou could lose control of your vehicle if youdo the following while driving:Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint,steering wheel or mirrorsRfasten the seat beltThere is a risk of an accident.Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint,steering wheel and mirror and fasten yourseat belt before starting the engine.

G WARNINGIf head restraints are not installed andadjusted correctly, they cannot provideprotection as intended. There is an increasedrisk of injury in the head and neck area, e.g.in the event of an accident or when braking.Always drive with the head restraintsinstalled. Before driving off, make sure forevery vehicle occupant that the center of the

head restraint supports the back of the headat about eye level.

General notesFor vehicles with sports seats, you cannotadjust the head restraints or remove andinstall the rear head restraints.

Adjusting the head restraints manually

Adjusting the head restraint height

X To raise: pull the head restraint up to thedesired position.

X To lower: press release catch: in thedirection of the arrow and push the headrestraint down to the desired position.

Adjusting the fore/aft position of thehead restraint

2 Not available on vehicles with sports seats.

Seats 97

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

With this function you can adjust the distancebetween the head restraint and the back ofthe seat occupant's head.X To adjust forwards: pull the head restraintforwards in the direction of the arrow untilit engages.There are several notches.

X To move backwards: press and holdrelease button: and push the headrestraint backwards.

X When the head restraint is in the desiredposition, release the button and make surethat the head restraint is engaged inposition.

Adjusting the height of the headrestraints electricallyX To adjust the head restraint height: slidethe switch for head restraint adjustment(Y page 97) up or down in the direction ofthe arrow.

Rear seat head restraints

Adjusting the rear seat head restraintheight

X To raise: pull the head restraint up to thedesired position.

X To lower: press release catch: and pushthe head restraint down until it is in thedesired position.

Removing and installing the rear seathead restraintsG WARNINGIf head restraints are not installed andadjusted correctly, they cannot provideprotection as intended. There is an increasedrisk of injury in the head and neck area, e.g.in the event of an accident or when braking.Always drive with the head restraintsinstalled. Before driving off, make sure forevery vehicle occupant that the center of thehead restraint supports the back of the headat about eye level.

The rear head restraints on the outer seatscan be removed and re-installed.

X Fold the seat backrest slightly forwards inorder to remove the head restraint(Y page 264).

X To remove: pull the head restraint up tothe stop.

X Press release catch: and pull the headrestraint out of the guides.

X To re-install: insert the head restraint sothat the notches on the bar are on the leftwhen viewed in the direction of travel.

X Push the head restraint down until you hearit engage in position.

Adjusting the 4-way lumbar supportYou can adjust the contour of the front seatbackrests individually to provide optimumsupport for your back.

98 SeatsSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

: To raise the backrest contour; To soften the backrest contour= To lower the backrest contour? To harden the backrest contour

AMG Performance SeatTo adjust the contour of the seat and forimproved lateral support, you can individuallyadjust the front seats.

Adjusting the seat cushion lengthX To extend the seat cushion: pressbutton:.

X To retract the seat cushion: pressbutton;.

Adjusting the side bolsters of the seatcushionX To set the side bolsters of the seatcushion narrower: press button=.

X To set the side bolsters of the seatcushion wider: press button?.

Adjusting the seat backrest sidebolstersX To set the side bolsters of the seatcushion narrower: press buttonA.

X To set the side bolsters of the seatcushion wider: press buttonB.

Switching the seat heating on/off

Activating/deactivating

G WARNINGRepeatedly switching on the seat heating cancause the seat cushion and backrest pads tobecome very hot. The health of persons withlimited temperature sensitivity or a limitedability to react to excessively hightemperatures may be affected or they mayeven suffer burn-like injuries. There is a riskof injury.Therefore, do not switch the seat heating onrepeatedly.

The three red indicator lamps in the buttonindicate the heating level you have selected.

Seats 99

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

The system automatically switches downfrom level 3 to level 2 after approximatelyeight minutes.The system automatically switches downfrom level 2 to level 1 after approximately tenminutes.The system automatically switches offapproximately 20 minutes after it is set tolevel 1.X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock (Y page 141).

X To switch on: press button: repeatedlyuntil the desired heating level is set.

X To switch off: press button: repeatedlyuntil all the indicator lamps go out.

i If the battery voltage is too low, the seatheating may switch off.

100 SeatsSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Problems with the seat heating

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

The seat heating hasswitched offprematurely or cannotbe switched on.

The on-board voltage is too low because too many electricalconsumers are switched on.X Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such asthe rear window defroster or interior lighting.Once the battery is sufficiently charged, the seat heating willswitch back on automatically.

Steering wheel

Important safety notes

G WARNINGYou could lose control of your vehicle if youdo the following while driving:Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint,steering wheel or mirrorsRfasten the seat beltThere is a risk of an accident.Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint,steering wheel and mirror and fasten yourseat belt before starting the engine.

G WARNINGChildren could injure themselves if theyadjust the steering wheel. There is a risk ofinjury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

Adjusting the steering wheel

G WARNINGIf the steering wheel is unlocked while thevehicle is in motion, it could change positionunexpectedly. This could cause you to losecontrol of the vehicle. There is a risk of anaccident.

Before starting off, make sure the steeringwheel is locked. Never unlock the steeringwheel while the vehicle is in motion.

: Release lever; To adjust the steering wheel height= To adjust the steering wheel position

(fore-and-aft adjustment)X Push release lever: down completely.The steering column is unlocked.

X Adjust the steering wheel to the desiredposition.

X Push release lever: up completely.The steering column is locked.

X Check if the steering column is locked.When doing so, try to push the steeringwheel up or down or try to move it in thefore-and-aft direction.

Steering wheel 101

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

Mirrors

Rear-view mirror

X Anti-glare mode: flick anti-glare lever:forwards or back.

Exterior mirrors

Adjusting the exterior mirrors

G WARNINGThe exterior mirror on the front-passengerside reduces the size of the image. Visibleobjects are actually closer than they appear.This means that you could misjudge thedistance from road users traveling behind,e.g. when changing lane. There is a risk of anaccident.For this reason, always make sure of theactual distance from the road users travelingbehind by glancing over your shoulder.

X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock (Y page 141).

X Press button: for the left-hand exteriormirror or button; for the right-handexterior mirror.The indicator lamp in the correspondingbutton lights up in red.The indicator lamp goes out again aftersome time. You can adjust the selectedmirror using adjustment button= as longas the indicator lamp is lit.

X Press adjustment button= up, down, orto the left or right until you have adjustedthe exterior mirror to the correct position.You should have a good overview of trafficconditions.

The convex exterior mirrors provide a largerfield of vision.The exterior mirrors are automatically heatedafter starting the vehicle if the rear windowdefroster is switched on and the outsidetemperature is low.Heating takes amaximumof 10 minutes.

i You can also heat up the exterior mirrorsmanually by switching on the rear windowdefroster.

Folding the exterior mirrors in or outelectrically

X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock (Y page 141).

X Briefly press button:.Both exterior mirrors fold in or out.

102 MirrorsSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

i Make sure that the exterior mirrors arealways folded out fully while driving. Theycould otherwise vibrate.

i If you are driving faster than 30 mph(47 km/h), you can no longer fold in theexterior mirrors.

Setting the exterior mirrorsIf the battery has been disconnected orcompletely discharged, the exterior mirrorsmust be reset. The exterior mirrors willotherwise not fold in when you select the"Fold in mirrors when locking" function in theon-board computer (Y page 213).X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in theignition lock (Y page 141).

X Briefly press button:.

Folding the exterior mirrors in or outautomaticallyIf the "Fold in mirrors when locking" functionis activated in the on-board computer(Y page 213):Rthe exterior mirrors fold in automatically assoon as you lock the vehicle from theoutside.Rthe exterior mirrors fold out againautomatically as soon as you unlock thevehicle and then open the driver's or front-passenger door.

i If the exterior mirrors have been folded inmanually, they do not fold out.

Exterior mirror pushed out of positionIf an exterior mirror has been pushed out ofposition, proceed as follows:X Vehicles without electrically foldingexterior mirrors:move the exterior mirrorinto the correct position manually.

X Vehicles with electrically foldingexterior mirrors: press and hold mirror-folding button (Y page 102) until you hear

a click and then the mirrors engage inposition.The mirror housing is engaged again andyou can adjust the exterior mirrors as usual(Y page 102).

Automatic anti-glare mirrorsThe "Automatic anti-glare mirrors" function isonly available if the vehicle is equipped withthe "Mirrors package".The rear-view mirror and the exterior mirroron the driver's side automatically go into anti-glare mode if:Rthe ignition is switched on andRincident light from headlamps strikes thesensor in the rear-view mirror.

The mirrors do not go into anti-glare mode ifreverse gear is engaged or the interior lightingis switched on.

Parking position for the exteriormirror on the front-passenger side

General notesThe "Parking position of the exterior mirror onthe front-passenger side" function is onlyavailable if the vehicle is equipped with the"Mirrors package".

Setting and storing the parking position

Using reverse gearYou can position the front-passenger sideexterior mirror in such a way that you can seethe rear wheel on that side as soon as youengage reverse gear. You can store thisposition.

Mirrors 103

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary.X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in theignition lock (Y page 141).

X Press button; for the exterior mirror onthe front-passenger side.

X Engage reverse gear.The exterior mirror on the front-passengerside moves to the preset parking position.

X Use adjustment button= to adjust theexterior mirror. You should see the rearwheel and the curb in the exterior mirror.The parking position is stored.

i If you shift the transmission to anotherposition, the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side returns to the drivingposition.

Using the memory buttonYou can position the front-passenger sideexterior mirror in such a way that you can seethe rear wheel on that side as soon as youengage reverse gear. You can store thisposition. This setting can be stored usingmemory button M?.X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary.X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in theignition lock (Y page 141).

X Press button; for the exterior mirror onthe front-passenger side.

X Use adjustment button= to adjust theexterior mirror. You should see the rearwheel and the curb in the exterior mirror.

X Press memory buttonM? and one of thearrows on adjustment button= withinthree seconds.The parking position is stored if the exteriormirror does not move.

X If the mirror moves out of position, repeatthe steps.

Calling up a stored parking positionsettingX Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in theignition lock (Y page 141).

X Adjust the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side with the correspondingbutton (Y page 102).

X Engage reverse gear.The exterior mirror on the front-passengerside moves to the stored parking position.

The exterior mirror on the front-passengerside moves back to its original position:Ras soon as you exceed a speed of 9 mph(15 km/h)Rabout ten seconds after you havedisengaged reverse gearRif you press button: for the exteriormirror on the driver's side

Memory functions

Storing settings

G WARNINGIf you use thememory function on the driver'sside while driving, you could lose control ofthe vehicle as a result of the adjustmentsbeing made. There is a risk of an accident.Only use the memory function on the driver'sside when the vehicle is stationary.

G WARNINGWhen the memory function adjusts the seat,you and other vehicle occupants – particularlychildren – could become trapped. There is arisk of injury.

104 Memory functionsSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

While the memory function is makingadjustments, make sure that no one has anybody parts in the sweep of the seat. Ifsomebody becomes trapped, immediatelyrelease the memory function position button.The adjustment process is stopped.

G WARNINGChildren could become trapped if theyactivate the memory function, particularlywhen unattended. There is a risk of injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

With the memory function, you can store upto three different settings, e.g. for threedifferent people.The following settings are stored as a singlememory preset:Rposition of the seat, backrest and headrestraintRdriver's side: position of the exteriormirrors on the driver's and front-passengersides

X Adjust the seat (Y page 97).X Adjust the exterior mirror on the driver'sside (Y page 102).

X Briefly press the M memory button andthen press storage position button 1, 2 or3 within three seconds.The settings are stored in the selectedpreset position. A tone sounds when thesettings have been completed.

Calling up a stored settingX Press and hold the relevant storageposition button 1, 2 or 3 until the seat andexterior mirrors are in the stored position.

i The setting procedure is interrupted assoon as you release the storage positionbutton.

Memory functions 105

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

106

Useful information ............................ 108Exterior lighting ................................ 108Interior lighting ................................. 113Replacing bulbs ................................. 114Windshield wipers ............................ 118

107

Lightsandwindshieldwipers

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optionalequipment of your vehicle available at thetime of publication of the Operator'sManual. Country-specific differences arepossible. Please note that your vehicle maynot be equipped with all featuresdescribed. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions.

i Read the information on qualifiedspecialist workshops: (Y page 25).

Exterior lighting

General notesFor reasons of safety, Mercedes-Benzrecommends that you drive with the lightsswitched on even during the daytime. In somecountries, operation of the headlamps variesdue to legal requirements and self-imposedobligations.

Driving abroad

Conversion to symmetrical low beamSwitch the headlamps to symmetrical lowbeam in countries in which traffic drives onthe opposite side of the road from the countrywhere the vehicle is registered. This preventsglare to oncoming traffic. When usingsymmetrical lights, the edge of the road is notlit as widely and as far ahead as normal.Have the headlamps converted at a qualifiedspecialist workshop as close to the border aspossible before driving in these countries.

Conversion to asymmetrical low beamafter returningHave the headlamps converted back toasymmetrical low-beam headlamps at aqualified specialist workshop as soon aspossible after crossing the border again.

Setting the exterior lighting

Setting optionsExterior lighting can be set using:Rthe light switchRthe combination switch (Y page 110)Rthe on-board computer (Y page 210)

Light switch

Operation

1W Left-hand standing lamps2X Right-hand standing lamps3T Parking lamps, license plate and

instrument cluster lighting4Ã Automatic headlamp mode,

controlled by the light sensor5L Low-beam/high-beam headlampsBR Rear fog lampCN Fog lamp (only vehicles with front fog

lamps)If you hear a warning tone when you leave thevehicle, the lights may still be switched on.X Turn the light switch toÃ.The exterior lighting (except the parking/standing lamps) switches off automatically ifyou:Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lockRopen the driver's door with the SmartKeyin position 0.

108 Exterior lightingLightsandwindshieldwipers

Automatic headlamp modeG WARNINGWhen the light switch is set toÃ, the low-beam headlamps may not be switched onautomatically if there is fog, snow or othercauses of poor visibility due to the weatherconditions such as spray. There is a risk of anaccident.In such situations, turn the light switch toL.

The automatic headlamp feature is only anaid. The driver is responsible for the vehicle'slighting at all times.Ã is the favored light switch setting. Thelight setting is automatically selectedaccording to the brightness of the ambientlight (exception: poor visibility due to weatherconditions such as fog, snow or spray):RSmartKey in position 1 in the ignition lock:the parking lamps are switched on or offautomatically depending on the brightnessof the ambient light.RWith the engine running: if you haveactivated the daytime running lampsfunction via the on-board computer, thedaytime running lamps or the low-beamheadlamps and parking lamps are switchedon or off automatically depending on thebrightness of the ambient light.

X To switch on automatic headlampmode: turn the light switch toÃ.

The daytime running lamps improve thevisibility of your vehicle during the day. Thedaytime running lamps function is required bylaw in Canada.When the engine is running and the vehicle isstationary: if youmove the selector lever froma drive position to P, the daytime runninglamps/low-beam headlamps go out afterthree minutes.When the engine is running, the vehicle isstationary and in bright ambient light: if youturn the light switch to T, the daytimerunning lamps and parking lamps switch on.

If the engine is running and you turn the lightswitch to L, the manual settings takeprecedence over the daytime running lamps.

Low-beam headlampsEven if the light sensor does not detect thatit is dark, the parking lamps and low-beamheadlamps switch on when the ignition isswitched on and the light switch is set to theL position. This is a particularly usefulfunction in the event of rain and fog.X To switch on the low-beam headlamps:turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock toposition 2 or start the engine.

X Turn the light switch to L.The green L indicator lamp in theinstrument cluster lights up.

Front fog lampsIn conditions where visibility is poor due tofog, snow or rain, the fog lamps improvevisibility as well as making it easier for otherroad users to see you. They can be operatedtogether with the parking lamps or togetherwith the parking lamps and low-beamheadlamps.X To switch on the front fog lamps: turnthe SmartKey in the ignition lock to position2 or start the engine.

X Turn the light switch to L orÃ.X Press the N button.The green N indicator lamp in theinstrument cluster lights up.

X To switch off the front fog lamps: pressthe N button.The green N indicator lamp in theinstrument cluster goes out.

Only vehicles with front fog lamps areequipped with the "fog lamp" function;information on the fog lamp function forvehicles with Intelligent Light System(Y page 112).

Exterior lighting 109

Lightsandwindshieldwipers

Z

Rear fog lampThe rear fog lamp improves visibility of yourvehicle for the traffic behind in the event ofthick fog. Please take note of the country-specific regulations for the use of rear foglamps.X To switch on the rear fog lamps: turn theSmartKey in the ignition lock to position 2or start the engine.

X Turn the light switch to L orÃ.X Press the R button.The yellow R indicator lamp in theinstrument cluster lights up.

X To switch off the rear fog lamp: press theR button.The yellow R indicator lamp in theinstrument cluster goes out.

i When the rear fog lamp is switched on,the center brake lamp in the tail lampswitches off due to a legal requirement.

Parking lamps! If the battery has been excessivelydischarged, the parking lamps or standinglamps are automatically switched off toenable the next engine start. Always parkyour vehicle safely and sufficiently litaccording to legal standards. Avoid thecontinuous use of the T parking lampsfor several hours. If possible, switch on theX right or the W left standing lamp.

X To switch on: turn the light switch toT.The green T indicator lamp in theinstrument cluster lights up.

Standing lampsSwitching on the standing lamps ensures thecorresponding side of the vehicle isilluminated.

X To switch on the standing lamps: theSmartKey is not in the ignition lock or it isin position 0.

X Turn the light switch toW (left-hand sideof the vehicle) or X (right-hand side ofthe vehicle).

Combination switch

Turn signal

: High-beam headlamps; Turn signal, right= High-beam flasher? Turn signal, leftX To indicate briefly: press the combinationswitch briefly to the pressure point in thedirection of arrow; or?.The corresponding turn signal flashes threetimes.

X To indicate: press the combination switchbeyond the pressure point in the directionof arrow; or?.

High-beam headlampsX To switch on the high-beamheadlamps:turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock toposition 2 or start the engine.

X Turn the light switch to L orÃ.

110 Exterior lightingLightsandwindshieldwipers

X Press the combination switch beyond thepressure point in the direction ofarrow:.In theà position, the high-beamheadlamps are only switched on when it isdark and the engine is running.The blue K indicator lamp in theinstrument cluster lights up when the high-beam headlamps are switched on.

X To switch off the high-beamheadlamps:move the combination switchback to its normal position.The blue K indicator lamp in theinstrument cluster goes out.i Vehicles with Adaptive Highbeam Assist:when Adaptive Highbeam Assist is active,it controls activation of the high-beamheadlamps (Y page 112).

High-beam flasherX To switch on: turn the SmartKey in theignition lock to position 1 or 2 or start theengine.

X Pull the combination switch in the directionof arrow=.

Hazard warning lamps

The hazard warning lamps automaticallyswitch on if:Ran air bag is deployedRthe vehicle decelerates rapidly from aspeed of more than 45mph (70 km/h) andcomes to a standstill

X To switch on the hazardwarning lamps:press button:.All turn signals flash. If you now switch ona turn signal using the combination switch,only the turn signal lamp on thecorresponding side of the vehicle will flash.

X To switch off the hazard warninglamps: press button:.

The hazard warning lamps switch offautomatically if the vehicle reaches a speedof over 6mph (10km/h) again after a fullbrake application.

i The hazard warning lamps still operate ifthe ignition is switched off.

Cornering light function

The cornering light function improves theillumination of the road over a wide angle inthe direction you are turning, enabling bettervisibility in tight bends, for example. Thecornering light function can only be activatedwhen the low-beam headlamps are switchedon.Active:Rif you are driving at speeds below 25 mph(40 km/h) and switch on the turn signal orturn the steering wheel.Rif you are driving at speeds between25 mph (40 km/h) and 45 mph (70 km/h)and turn the steering wheel.

Not active: if you are driving at speeds above25 mph (40 km/h) or switch off the turn

Exterior lighting 111

Lightsandwindshieldwipers

Z

signal or turn the steering wheel to thestraight-ahead position.The cornering lamp may remain lit for a shorttime, but is automatically switched off afterno more than three minutes.

Extended range fog lamps

The extended range fog lamps reduce theglare experienced by the driver and improvethe illumination of the edge of the road.Active: if you are driving at speeds below40mph (70 km/h) and you switch on the rearfog lamp.Not active: if, following activation, you aredriving at speeds above 60 mph (100 km/h)or if you switch off the rear fog lamp.

Adaptive Highbeam Assist

Important safety notes

G WARNINGAdaptive HighbeamAssist does not recognizeroad users:Rwho have no lights, e.g. pedestriansRwho have poor lighting, e.g. cyclistsRwhose lighting is blocked, e.g. by a barrierIn very rare cases, Adaptive Highbeam Assistmay fail to recognize other road users thathave lights, or may recognize them too late.In this or similar situations, the automatichigh-beam headlamps will not be deactivated

or activated regardless. There is a risk of anaccident.Always carefully observe the traffic conditionsand switch off the high-beam headlamps ingood time.

Adaptive Highbeam Assist cannot take intoaccount road, weather or traffic conditions.Adaptive Highbeam Assist is only an aid. Youare responsible for adjusting the vehicle'slighting to the prevailing light, visibility andtraffic conditions.In particular, the detection of obstacles canbe restricted if there is:Rpoor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain orsnowRdirt on the sensors or the sensors areobscured

General notesYou can use this function to set theheadlamps to change between low beam andhigh beam automatically. The systemrecognizes vehicles with their lights on, eitherapproaching from the opposite direction ortraveling in front of your vehicle, andconsequently switches the headlamps fromhigh beam to low beam.The system automatically adapts the low-beam headlamp range depending on thedistance to the other vehicle. Once thesystem no longer detects any other vehicles,it reactivates the high-beam headlamps.The system's optical sensor is located behindthe windshield near the overhead controlpanel.

112 Exterior lightingLightsandwindshieldwipers

Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assiston/offX To activate: activate the AdaptiveHighbeam Assist function using the on-board computer (Y page 211).

X Turn the light switch toÃ.X Press the combination switch beyond thepressure point in the direction of arrow:(Y page 110).The _ indicator lamp in themultifunction display lights up if it is darkand the light sensor activates the low-beamheadlamps.If you are driving at speeds aboveapproximately 28 mph (45 km/h):The headlamp range is set automaticallydepending on the distance between thevehicle and other road users.If you are driving at speeds aboveapproximately 35 mph (55 km/h) and noother road users have been detected:The high-beam headlamps are switched onautomatically. The K indicator lamp inthe instrument cluster also lights up.If you are driving at speeds belowapproximately 30 mph (45 km/h) or other

road users have been detected or the roadsare adequately lit:The high-beam headlamps are switched offautomatically. The K indicator lamp inthe instrument cluster goes out. The _indicator lamp in the multifunction displayremains lit.

X To deactivate: move the combinationswitch back to its normal position.The _ indicator lamp in themultifunction display goes out.

Headlamps fogged up on the insideThe headlamps may fog up on the inside ifthere is high atmospheric humidity.

X Switch on the lights and drive off.The level of moisture diminishes,depending on the length of the journey andthe weather conditions (humidity andtemperature).

If the level of moisture does not diminish:

X Have the headlamps checked at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

Interior lighting

Overview of interior lighting

Front overhead control panel: p To switch the left-hand front reading

lamp on/off; c To switch the front interior lighting

on

Interior lighting 113

Lightsandwindshieldwipers

Z

= v To switch the on/off? | To switch the front interior lighting/

automatic interior lighting control offA p To switch the right-hand front

reading lamp on/offB To switch the automatic interior lighting

control on

Rear-compartment overhead control panel: p To switch the left-hand reading lamp

on/off; p To switch the right-hand reading

lamp on/off

Interior lighting control

Important notesIn order to prevent the vehicle's battery fromdischarging, the interior lighting functions areautomatically deactivated after some timeunless the SmartKey is in position 2 in theignition lock.The brightness of the ambient lightingmay beset using the on-board computer(Y page 211).

Automatic interior lighting controlX To switch on: set the switch to centerpositionB.

X To switch off: set the switch to the |position.

The interior lighting automatically switcheson if you:Runlock the vehicleRopen a doorRremove the SmartKey from the ignitionlock.

The interior light is activated for a short whilewhen the SmartKey is removed from theignition lock. You can activate this delayedswitch-off using the on-board computer(Y page 212).

Manual interior lighting controlX To switch the front interior lighting on:set the switch to the c position.

X To switch the interior lighting off: set theswitch to the | position or (if the dooris closed) to the center position.

X To switch the interior lighting on/off:press the u button.

X To switch the reading lamps on/off:press the p button.

Crash-responsive emergency lightingThe interior lighting is activated automaticallyif the vehicle is involved in an accident.X To switch off the crash-responsiveemergency lighting: press the hazardwarning lamp button.

orX Lock and then unlock the vehicle using thekey.

Replacing bulbs

Important safety notes

Xenon bulbs

G DANGERXenon bulbs carry a high voltage. You can getan electric shock if you remove the cover of

114 Replacing bulbsLightsandwindshieldwipers

the Xenon bulb and touch the electricalcontacts. There is a risk of fatal injury.Never touch the parts or the electricalcontacts of the Xenon bulb. Always have workon the Xenon bulbs carried out at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

If your vehicle is equipped with Xenon bulbs,you can recognize this by the following: thecone of light from the Xenon bulbs movesfrom the top to the bottom and back againwhen you start the engine. For this to beobserved, the lights must be switched onbefore starting the engine.Bulbs and lamps are an important aspect ofvehicle safety. You must therefore make surethat these function correctly at all times.Have the headlamp setting checked regularly.

Other bulbs

G WARNINGBulbs, lamps and connectors can get very hotwhen operating. If you change a bulb, youcould burn yourself on these components.There is a risk of injury.Allow these components to cool down beforechanging a bulb.

Do not use a bulb that has been dropped or ifits glass tube has been scratched.The bulb may explode if:Ryou touch itRit is hotRyou drop itRyou scratch itOnly operate bulbs in enclosed lampsdesigned for that purpose. Only install sparebulbs of the same type and the specifiedvoltage.Marks on the glass tube reduce the servicelife of the bulbs. Do not touch the glass tubewith your bare hands. If necessary, clean theglass tubewhen coldwith alcohol or spirit andrub it off with a lint-free cloth.

Protect bulbs from moisture duringoperation. Do not allow bulbs to come intocontact with liquids.There are bulbs other than the Xenon bulbsthat you cannot replace. Replace only thebulbs listed (Y page 115). Have the bulbs thatyou cannot replace yourself changed at aqualified specialist workshop.If you require assistance changing bulbs,consult a qualified specialist workshop.If the new bulb still does not light up, consulta qualified specialist workshop.Bulbs and lamps are an important aspect ofvehicle safety. You must therefore make surethat these function correctly at all times.Have the headlamp setting checked regularly.

Overview: changing bulbs/bulb typesYou can change the following bulbs. The bulbtype can be found in the legend.

Vehicles with halogen headlamps: Turn signal lamp: PY 21 W; Low-beam headlamp/daytime running

lamp/parking lamp/standing lamp:H15 55 W/15 W

= Low-beam headlamp: H7 55 W

Replacing bulbs 115

Lightsandwindshieldwipers

Z

Vehicles with Bi-Xenon headlamps: Cornering lamp: H7 55 W

Tail lamps (vehicles with halogen headlamps): Rear fog lamp: P 21 W; Brake lamp: W 16 W= Brake lamp: W 16 W? Turn signal lamp: PY 21 WA Backup lamp: W 16 W

Changing the front bulbs

Removing and installing the cover in thefront wheel housingYou must remove the cover from the frontwheel housing before you can change thefront bulbs.

X To remove: switch off the lights.X Turn the front wheels inwards.X Turn rotary knob: through 90°.Cover; is released.

X Push cover; down.X To install: push cover; up.X Turn rotary knob: through 90°.Cover; is locked.

Low-beam headlamps (halogenheadlamps)

X Remove the cover in the front wheelhousing (Y page 116).

X Turn housing cover: counter-clockwiseand pull it out.

X Turn bulb holder; counter-clockwise andpull it out.

X Take the bulb out of bulb holder;.X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder;.X Insert bulb holder; into the lamp and turnit clockwise.

116 Replacing bulbsLightsandwindshieldwipers

X Align housing cover: and turn itclockwise until it engages.

X Replace the cover in the front wheelhousing (Y page 116).

High-beam headlamps/daytimerunning lamps/parking lamps/standing lamps (vehicles with halogenheadlamps)

X Switch off the lights.X Open the hood.X Turn housing cover: counter-clockwiseand pull it out.

X Turn bulb; counter-clockwise and pull itout.

X Insert the new bulb and engage it to thestop.

X Align housing cover: and turn itclockwise until it engages.

Turn signals (halogen headlamps)

X Switch off the lights.X Open the hood.X Turn bulb holder: counter-clockwise andpull it out.

X Take the bulb out of bulb holder:.X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder:.X Insert bulb holder: and turn it clockwiseuntil it engages.

Cornering light function (Bi-Xenonheadlamps)

X Switch off the lights.X Open the hood.X Turn housing cover: counter-clockwiseand pull it out.

X Turn bulb holder; counter-clockwise andpull it out.

X Take the bulb out of bulb holder;.X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder;.X Insert bulb holder; into the lamp and turnit clockwise.

X Align housing cover: and turn itclockwise until it engages.

Changing the rear bulbs

Opening and closing the side trimpanelsYoumust open the side trim panel in the trunkbefore you can change the bulbs in the taillamps.

Replacing bulbs 117

Lightsandwindshieldwipers

Z

Example: right-hand side trim panelX To open: release right or left side trimpanel: at the top and fold it down in thedirection of the arrow.

X To close: insert side panel :.

Tail lampX Switch off the lights.X Open the trunk.X Open the side trim panel (Y page 117).

X Press retaining clips: at the same time inthe direction of the arrows.

X Carefully remove the bulb holder with thecontacted connectors and the bulbs.

Bulb holder: Brake lamp; Brake lamp= Rear fog lamp? Backup LightA Turn signalX Brake lamp/rear fog lamp/backuplamp: remove the corresponding bulb fromthe bulb holder.

X Insert the new bulb into the bulb holder.X Turn signal lamp: lightly press the bulbinto the bulb holder, turn it counter-clockwise and remove it from bulb holder.

X Insert the new bulb into the bulb holder andturn it clockwise.

X Reinsert the bulb holder and engage onretaining clips:.

X Close the side trim panel (Y page 117).

Windshield wipers

Switching the windshield wipers on/off! Do not operate the windshield wiperswhen the windshield is dry, as this coulddamage the wiper blades. Moreover, dustthat has collected on the windshield canscratch the glass if wiping takes placewhenthe windshield is dry.If it is necessary to switch on thewindshieldwipers in dry weather conditions, alwaysuse washer fluid when operating thewindshield wipers.

118 Windshield wipersLightsandwindshieldwipers

! If the windshield wipers leave smears onthe windshield after the vehicle has beenwashed in an automatic car wash, wax orother residues may be the reason for this.Clean the windshield using washer fluidafter washing the vehicle in an automaticcar wash.

Combination switch1 $ Windshield wiper off2 Ä Intermittent wipe, low (rain sensor

set to low sensitivity)3 Å Intermittent wipe, high (rain sensor

set to high sensitivity)4 ° Continuous wipe, slow5 ¯ Continuous wipe, fastB í Single wipe/î To wipe the

windshield using washer fluidX Switch on the ignition.X Turn the combination switch to thecorresponding position.

! Vehicles with a rain sensor: if thewindshield becomes dirty in dry weatherconditions, the windshield wipers may beactivated inadvertently. This could thendamage the windshield wiper blades orscratch the windshield.For this reason, you should always switchoff the windshield wipers in dry weather.

Vehicles with a rain sensor: in the Ä orÅ position, the appropriate wipingfrequency is automatically set according tothe intensity of the rain. In the Å position,the rain sensor is more sensitive than in

the Ä position, causing the windshieldwipers to wipe more frequently.If the wiper blades are worn, the windshieldwill no longer be wiped properly. This couldprevent you from observing the trafficconditions. Replace the wiper blades twice ayear, ideally in spring and fall.

Replacing the wiper blades

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf the windshield wipers begin to move whileyou are changing the wiper blades, you couldbe trapped by the wiper arm. There is a riskof injury.Always switch off the windshield wipers andignition before changing the wiper blades.

! To avoid damaging the wiper blades,make sure that you touch only the wiperarm of the wiper.

! Never open the hood if a windshield wiperarm has been folded away from thewindshield.Never fold a windshield wiper arm withouta wiper blade back onto the windshield.Hold the windshield wiper arm firmly whenyou change the wiper blade. If you releasethe windshield wiper arm without a wiperblade and it falls onto the windshield, thewindshield may be damaged by the force ofthe impact.Mercedes-Benz recommends that you havethe wiper blades changed at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

Changing the windshield wiper blades

Removing the wiper bladesX Remove the SmartKey from the ignitionlock.

X Fold the wiper arm away from thewindshield.

Windshield wipers 119

Lightsandwindshieldwipers

Z

X Press both release clips;.X Fold wiper blade: in the direction ofarrow= away from wiper arm?.

X Remove wiper blade: in the direction ofarrowA.

Installing the wiper blades

X Position new wiper blade: withrecessB on lugA.

X Fold wiper blade: in the direction ofarrow= onto the wiper arm, until retainingclips; engage in bracket?.

X Make sure that wiper blade: is seatedcorrectly.

X Fold the wiper arm back onto thewindshield.

120 Windshield wipersLightsandwindshieldwipers

Problems with the windshield wipers

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

The windshield wipersare jammed.

Leaves or snow, for example, may be obstructing the windshieldwiper movement. The wiper motor has been deactivated.X For safety reasons, you should remove the SmartKey from theignition lock.

X Remove the cause of the obstruction.X Switch the windshield wipers back on.

The windshield wipersfail completely.

The windshield wiper drive is malfunctioning.X Select another wiper speed on the combination switch.X Have the windshield wipers checked at a qualified specialistworkshop.

The windshield washerfluid from the spraynozzles no longer hitsthe center of thewindshield.

The spray nozzles are misaligned.X Have the spray nozzles adjusted at a qualified specialistworkshop.

Windshield wipers 121

Lightsandwindshieldwipers

Z

122

Useful information ............................ 124Overview of climate control sys-tems ................................................... 124Operating the climate control sys-tems ................................................... 129Setting the air vents ......................... 136

123

Climatecontrol

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optionalequipment of your vehicle available at thetime of publication of the Operator'sManual. Country-specific differences arepossible. Please note that your vehicle maynot be equipped with all featuresdescribed. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions.

i Read the information on qualifiedspecialist workshops: (Y page 25).

Overview of climate control systems

Important safety notesObserve the settings recommended on thefollowing pages. The windows couldotherwise fog up.To prevent the windows from fogging up:Rswitch off climate control only brieflyRswitch on air-recirculation mode onlybrieflyRswitch on the cooling with airdehumidification functionRswitch on the defrost windshield functionbriefly, if required

The automatic climate control regulates thetemperature and the humidity of the vehicleinterior and filters out undesirablesubstances from the air.Automatic climate control/dual-zoneautomatic climate control is only operationalwhen the engine is running. Optimumoperation is only achieved with the sidewindows and panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel closed.The residual heat function can only beactivated or deactivated with the ignitionswitched off (Y page 135).

i Ventilate the vehicle for a brief periodduring warm weather, e.g. using theconvenience opening feature (Y page 88).

This will speed up the cooling process andthe desired vehicle interior temperaturewill be reached more quickly.

i The integrated filter filters out mostparticles of dust and soot and completelyfilters out pollen. With dual-zone automaticclimate control, gaseous pollutants andodors will also be reduced. A clogged filterreduces the amount of air supplied to thevehicle interior. For this reason, you shouldalways observe the interval for replacingthe filter, which is specified in theMaintenance Booklet. As it depends onenvironmental conditions, e.g. heavy airpollution, the interval may be shorter thanstated in the Maintenance Booklet.

i It is possible that the dehumidificationfunction of the climate control system maybe activated automatically an hour after theSmartKey has been removed. The vehicleis then ventilated for 30 minutes.

124 Overview of climate control systemsClimatecontrol

Control panel for climate control

USA only: To set the temperature (Y page 131); To defrost the windshield (Y page 133)= To set the air distribution (Y page 132)? To activate/deactivate air-recirculation mode (Y page 135)A To set the airflow (Y page 132)B To switch cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 129)C To switch the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 134)

Canada only: To set the temperature (Y page 131); To defrost the windshield (Y page 133)= To set the air distribution (Y page 132)

Overview of climate control systems 125

Climatecontrol

? To activate/deactivate air-recirculation mode (Y page 135)A To set the airflow (Y page 132)B To switch cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 129)C To switch the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 134)

Notes on using climate control

Automatic climate controlThe following contains notes andrecommendations on optimum use of theautomatic climate control.RSwitch on the air-conditioning system byturning control knobA clockwise to thedesired position (except position 0).RSet the temperature to 72 ‡ (22 †).RRecommendation for preventingfogged up windows with low outsidetemperatures or rain: switch¯ on forthe air distribution and switchP andO off if possible (Y page 132).In air-recirculation mode, switche off(Y page 135).Set airflow controlA to a setting between3 and 6(Y page 132).RRecommendation for rapid cooling orheating of the vehicle interior: briefly setairflow controlA to a setting between 3and 6(Y page 132).RRecommendation for a constantvehicle interior temperature: set airflowcontrolA to a setting between 1 and3(Y page 132).RRecommendation for air distribution inthe winter: setO and¯(Y page 132).Recommendation for air distribution inthe summer: setP orP and¯(Y page 132).ROnly use the "Windshield defrosting"function briefly until the windshield is clearagain.ROnly use air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g.if there are unpleasant outside odors or

when in a tunnel. The windows couldotherwise fog up, since no fresh air is drawninto the vehicle in air-recirculation mode.RVehicleswithCOMAND: if you change thesettings of the climate control system, theclimate status display appears for threeseconds at the bottom of the screen in theCOMAND display. See also the separateCOMAND operating instructions. You willsee the current settings of the variousclimate control functions.

ECO start/stop functionDuring automatic engine switch-off, the ECOstart/stop function only operates at areduced capacity. If you require the fullclimate control output, you can switch off theECO start/stop function by pressing the ECObutton (Y page 144).

126 Overview of climate control systemsClimatecontrol

Control panel for dual-zone automatic climate control

USA only: To set the temperature, left (Y page 131); To set climate control to automatic (Y page 131)= To defrost the windshield (Y page 133)? To increase the airflow (Y page 132)A To set the air distribution (Y page 132)B DisplayC To activate/deactivate air-recirculation mode (Y page 135)D To switch climate control on/off (Y page 129)E To set the temperature, right (Y page 131)F To activate/deactivate maximum cooling (Y page 133)G To switch cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 129)H To reduce the airflow (Y page 132)I To switch the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 134)J To switch the ZONE function on/off (Y page 132)

Overview of climate control systems 127

Climatecontrol

Canada only: To set the temperature, left (Y page 131); To set climate control to automatic (Y page 131)= To defrost the windshield (Y page 133)? To increase the airflow (Y page 132)A To set the air distribution (Y page 132)B DisplayC To activate/deactivate air-recirculation mode (Y page 135)D To switch climate control on/off (Y page 129)E To set the temperature, right (Y page 131)F To switch the residual heat function on/off (Y page 135)G To switch cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 129)H To reduce the airflow (Y page 132)I To switch the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 134)J To switch the ZONE function on/off (Y page 132)

Notes on using dual-zone automaticclimate control

Automatic climate controlThe following contains instructions andrecommendations to enable you to get themost out of your automatic climate control.RActivate climate control using theà and¿ buttons. The indicator lamps in theà and¿ buttons light up.RSet the temperature to 72 ‡ (22 †).

ROnly use the "Windshield defrosting"function briefly until the windshield is clearagain.ROnly use air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g.if there are unpleasant outside odors orwhen in a tunnel. The windows couldotherwise fog up, since no fresh air is drawninto the vehicle in air-recirculation mode.RUse the ZONE function to adopt thetemperature settings on the driver's sidefor the front-passenger side as well. Theindicator lamp in theá button goes out.

128 Overview of climate control systemsClimatecontrol

ROnly available on vehicles for Canada:use the residual heat function if you wantto heat or ventilate the vehicle interiorwhen the ignition is switched off. Theresidual heat function can only be activatedor deactivated with the ignition switchedoff.RVehicleswithCOMAND: if you change thesettings of the climate control system, theclimate status display appears for threeseconds at the bottom of the screen in theCOMAND display. See also the separateCOMAND operating instructions. You willsee the current settings of the variousclimate control functions.

ECO start/stop functionDuring automatic engine switch-off, the ECOstart/stop function only operates at areduced capacity. If you require the fullclimate control output, you can switch off theECO start/stop function by pressing the ECObutton (Y page 144).

Operating the climate controlsystems

Switching climate control on/off

General notesWhen the climate control is switched off, theair supply and air circulation are alsoswitched off. The windows could fog up.Therefore, switch off climate control onlybriefly

Automatic climate controlX Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in theignition lock (Y page 141).

X To switch on: turn controlA clockwise tothe desired position (except position 0)(Y page 125).

X To switch off: turn controlA counter-clockwise to position 0(Y page 125).

Dual-zone automatic climate controlX Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in theignition lock (Y page 141).

X To switch on: press theà button.The indicator lamp in theà button lightsup. Airflow and air distribution are set toautomatic mode.

orX Press the^ button.The indicator lamp in the^ button goesout. The previously selected settings arerestored.

X To switch off: press the^ button.The indicator lamp in the^ button lightsup.

i Dual-zone automatic climate control:switch on climate control primarily usingtheà button.

Activating/deactivating cooling withair dehumidification

General notesIf you deactivate the "Cooling with air-dehumidification" function, the air inside thevehicle will not be cooled. The air inside thevehicle will also not be dehumidified. Thewindows can fog up more quickly. Therefore,only deactivate the "Cooling with air-dehumidification" function briefly.The "Cooling with air dehumidification"function is only available when the engine isrunning. The air inside the vehicle is cooledand dehumidified according to thetemperature selected.Condensation may drip from the underside ofthe vehicle when it is in cooling mode. This isnormal and not a sign that there is amalfunction.

Operating the climate control systems 129

Climatecontrol

Activating/deactivatingX To activate: press the¿ button.The indicator lamp in the¿ button lightsup.

X To deactivate: press the¿ button.The indicator lamp in the¿ button goesout. The "Cooling with air dehumidification"function has a delayed switch-off feature.

130 Operating the climate control systemsClimatecontrol

Problems with the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

The indicator lamp inthe¿ buttonflashes three times orremains off. The"Cooling with airdehumidification"function cannot beswitched on.

Cooling with air dehumidification has been deactivated due to amalfunction.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Setting climate control to automatic

General notesThe automatic function is only available inconjunctionwith dual-zone automatic climatecontrol.In automatic mode, the set temperature ismaintained automatically at a constant level.The system automatically regulates thetemperature of the dispensed air, the airflowand the air distribution.The automatic mode functions optimallywhen the "Cooling with air dehumidification"function is activated. If necessary, coolingwith air dehumidification can be deactivated.If you deactivate the "Cooling with air-dehumidification" function, the air inside thevehicle will not be cooled. The air inside thevehicle will also not be dehumidified. Thewindows can fog up more quickly. Therefore,only deactivate the "Cooling with air-dehumidification" function briefly.

Setting climate control to automaticX Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in theignition lock (Y page 141).

X Set the desired temperature.X To activate: press theà button.The indicator lamp in theà button lightsup. Automatic air distribution and airfloware activated.

X To switch to manual mode: press theÉ orË button.

orX Press theK orI button.The indicator lamp in theà button goesout. Automatic air distribution and airfloware deactivated.

Setting the temperature

Automatic climate controlYou can set the temperature for the entirevehicle.X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in theignition lock (Y page 141).

X To increase/reduce: turn control:clockwise or counter-clockwise(Y page 125). Only change the temperaturesetting in small increments. Start at 72 ‡(22 †).

Dual-zone automatic climate controlDifferent temperatures can be set for thedriver's and front-passenger sides.X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in theignition lock (Y page 141).

X To increase/reduce: turn control: orE clockwise or counter-clockwise(Y page 127). Only change the temperature

Operating the climate control systems 131

Climatecontrol

setting in small increments. Start at 72 ‡(22 †).

Setting the air distribution

Automatic climate control

Air distribution settings¯ Directs air through the defroster ventsP Directs air through the center and side

air ventsO Directs air through the footwell air

vents

i You can also activate several airdistribution settings simultaneously. To dothis, press multiple air distribution buttons.The air is then directed through variousvents.

Setting the air distributionX Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in theignition lock (Y page 141).

X Press one or more of theP,O,¯ buttons.The corresponding indicator lamp lights upbriefly.

Dual-zone automatic climate control

Air distribution settings¯ Directs air through the defroster ventsP Directs air through the center and side

air ventsO Directs air through the footwell air

ventsb Directs air through the defroster,

center and side air ventsa Directs air through the defroster and

footwell vents

i Regardless of the air distribution setting,airflow is always directed through the sideair vents. The side air vents can only beclosed if the adjusters are turned clockwiseuntil they engage.

Setting the air distributionX Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in theignition lock (Y page 141).

X Press theÉ orË button repeatedlyuntil the desired symbol appears in thedisplay.

Setting the airflow

Automatic climate controlX Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in theignition lock (Y page 141).

X To increase/reduce: turn controlAclockwise or counter-clockwise(Y page 125).

Dual-zone automatic climate controlX Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in theignition lock (Y page 141).

X To increase/reduce: press theK orI button.

Switching the ZONE function on/offThis function is only available with dual-zoneautomatic climate control.X To activate: press theá button.The indicator lamp in theá button lightsup.The temperature setting for the driver'sside is not adopted for the front-passengerside.

X To deactivate: press theá button.The indicator lamp in theá button goesout.The temperature setting for the driver'sside is adopted for the front-passengerside.

132 Operating the climate control systemsClimatecontrol

Defrosting the windshieldYou can use this function to defrost thewindshield or to defrost the inside of thewindshield and the side windows.

i You should only select the "Windshielddefrosting" function until the windshield isclear again.

X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in theignition lock (Y page 141).

X To activate: press the¬ button.The indicator lamp in the¬ button lightsup.The climate control system switches to thefollowing functions:Rhigh airflowRhigh temperatureRair distribution to the windshield andfront side windowsRair-recirculation mode offi The "Windshield defrosting" functionautomatically sets the blower output to theoptimum defrosting effect. As a result, theairflow may increase or decreaseautomatically after the button is pressed.

i You can adjust the blower outputmanually while the "Windshield defrosting"function is in operation:RAutomatic climate control: turn airflowcontrolA clockwise or counter-clockwise (Y page 125).RDual-zone automatic climate control:press theó orô button.

X To deactivate: press the¬ button.The indicator lamp in the¬ button goesout. The previously selected settings arerestored. Air-recirculation mode remainsdeactivated.

orX Dual-zone automatic climate control: presstheà button.The indicator lamp in the¬ button goesout. Airflow and air distribution are set toautomatic mode.

orX Automatic climate control: turntemperature control: clockwise orcounter-clockwise (Y page 125).Dual-zone automatic climate control: turntemperature control: orE clockwise orcounter-clockwise (Y page 127).

MAX COOL maximum coolingThe MAX COOL function is only available invehicles for the USA.MAX COOL is only operational when theengine is running.X To activate: press theÙ button.The indicator lamp in the button lights up.

X To deactivate: press theÙ buttonagain.The indicator lamp goes out. The previouslyselected settings are restored.

When you activate MAX COOL, climatecontrol switches to the following functions:Rmaximum coolingRmaximum airflowRair-recirculation mode on

Defrosting the windows

Windows fogged up on the inside

Automatic climate controlX Activate the¿ "Cooling with airdehumidification" function.

X If the windows continue to fog up, activatethe¬ "Windshield defrosting" function.i You should only select this setting untilthe windshield is clear again.

Operating the climate control systems 133

Climatecontrol

Dual-zone automatic climate controlX Activate the¿ "Cooling with airdehumidification" function.

X Activate automatic modeÃ.X If the windows continue to fog up, activatethe¬ "Windshield defrosting" function.i You should only select this setting untilthe windshield is clear again.

Windows fogged up on the outsideX Activate the windshield wipers.X Set the air distribution toP orO.i You should only select this setting untilthe windshield is clear again.

Rear window defroster

General notesThe rear window defroster has a high currentdraw. You should therefore switch it off assoon as the rear window is clear. Otherwise,the rear window defroster switches offautomatically after several minutes.If the battery voltage is too low, the rearwindow defroster may switch off.

Activating/deactivatingX Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in theignition lock (Y page 141).

X Press the¤ button.The indicator lamp in the¤ button lightsup or goes out.

134 Operating the climate control systemsClimatecontrol

Problems with the rear window defroster

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

The rear windowdefroster hasdeactivatedprematurely or cannotbe activated.

The battery has not been sufficiently charged.X Switch off any consumers that are not required, e.g. readinglamps, interior lighting or the seat heating.When the battery is sufficiently charged, the rear windowdefroster can be activated again.

Activating/deactivating air-recirculation mode

General notesYou can deactivate the flow of fresh air ifunpleasant odors are entering the vehiclefrom outside. The air already inside thevehicle will then be recirculated.If you switch on air-recirculation mode, thewindows can fog up more quickly, inparticular at low temperatures. Only use air-recirculation mode briefly to prevent thewindows from fogging up.The operation of air-recirculation mode is thesame for all control panels.

Activating/deactivatingX Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in theignition lock (Y page 141).

X To activate: press thee button.The indicator lamp in thee button lightsup.

i Air-recirculation mode is activatedautomatically at high outsidetemperatures.When air-recirculationmodeis activated automatically, the indicatorlamp in thee button is not lit.Outside air is added after about30 minutes.

X To deactivate: press thee button.The indicator lamp in thee button goesout.

i Air-recirculation mode deactivatesautomatically:Rafter approximately five minutes atoutside temperatures belowapproximately 41 ‡ (5 †)Rafter approximately five minutes if the"Cooling with air dehumidification"function is deactivatedRafter approximately 30 minutes atoutside temperatures aboveapproximately 41 ‡ (5†) if the "Coolingwith air dehumidification" function isactivated

Activating/deactivating the residualheat function

General notesThe residual heat function is only available invehicles for Canada with automatic climatecontrol.It is possible to make use of the residual heatof the engine to continue heating the vehiclefor approximately 30minutes after the enginehas been switched off. The heating timedepends on the temperature that has beenset.

i The blower will run at a low speedregardless of the airflow setting.

i If you activate the residual heat functionat high temperatures, only the ventilationwill be activated. The blower runs atmedium speed.

Operating the climate control systems 135

Climatecontrol

Activating/deactivatingX Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in theignition lock or remove it (Y page 141).

X To activate: press theÌ button.The indicator lamp in theÌ button lightsup.

X To deactivate: press theÌ button.The indicator lamp in theÌ button goesout.

i Residual heat is deactivatedautomatically:Rafter approximately 30 minutesRwhen the ignition is switched onRif the battery voltage drops

Setting the air vents

Important safety notes

G WARNINGVery hot or very cold air can flow from the airvents. This could result in burns or frostbite inthe immediate vicinity of the air vents. Thereis a risk of injury.Make sure that all vehicle occupants alwaysmaintain a sufficient distance to the airoutlets. If necessary, redirect the airflow toanother area of the vehicle interior.

In order to ensure the direct flow of fresh airthrough the air vents into the vehicle interior,please observe the following notes:Rkeep the air inlet between the windshieldand the hood free of blockages, such as ice,snow or leaves.Rnever cover the air vents or air intake grillesin the vehicle interior.

i You can move the adjusters for the airvents vertically or horizontally to set thedirection of the airflow.

i For optimal climate control in the vehicle,open the air vents completely and set theadjusters to the central position.

Setting the center air vents

X To open the center air vent: turn theadjuster in one of center air vents:counter-clockwise.

X To close the center air vent: turn theadjuster in one of center air vents:clockwise until it engages.

Setting the side air vents

: Side window defroster vent; Side air ventX To open a side air vent: turn the adjusterin side air vent; counter-clockwise.

X To close a side air vent: turn the adjusterin side air vent; clockwise until itengages.

136 Setting the air ventsClimatecontrol

Setting the rear-compartment airvents

: Rear-compartment air vent, left; Rear-compartment air vent, right= Rear-compartment air vent thumbwheelX To open/close: turn thumbwheel= up ordown.

Setting the air vents 137

Climatecontrol

Z

138

Useful information ............................ 140Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle 140Driving ............................................... 140Automatic transmission ................... 146Refueling ............................................ 155Parking ............................................... 157Driving tips ........................................ 160Driving systems ................................ 166

139

Drivingandparking

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optionalequipment of your vehicle available at thetime of publication of the Operator'sManual. Country-specific differences arepossible. Please note that your vehicle maynot be equipped with all featuresdescribed. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions.

i Read the information on qualifiedspecialist workshops: (Y page 25).

Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle

Important safety notesNew and replaced brake pads and discs onlyreach their optimum braking effect afterseveral hundred kilometers of driving.Compensate for this by applying greater forceto the brake pedal.

The first 1000 miles (1500 km)The more you look after the engine when it isnew, the more satisfied you will be with itsperformance in the future.RYou should therefore drive at varyingvehicle and engine speeds for the first1000 miles (1500 km).RAvoid heavy loads, e.g. driving at fullthrottle, during this period.RChange gear in good time, before thetachometer needle isÔ of the way to thered area of the tachometer.RDo not manually shift to a lower gear tobrake the vehicle.RIf possible, do not depress the acceleratorpedal past the point of resistance(kickdown).RIdeally, for the first 1000 miles (1500 km),drive in program E.

After 1,000 miles (1,500 km), you canincrease the engine speed gradually and bringthe vehicle to full speed.Additional breaking-in notes for AMGvehicles:RDo not drive faster than 85 mph(140 km/h) for the first 1,000 miles(1,500 km).ROnly allow the engine to reach a maximumengine speed of 4,500 rpm briefly.RChange gear in good time.

i You should also observe these notes onbreaking-in if the engine or parts of thedrive train on your vehicle have beenreplaced.

i Always observe the respective speedlimits.

Driving

Important safety notes

G WARNINGObjects in the driver's footwell can restrict thepedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal.The operating and road safety of the vehicleis jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident.Make sure that all objects in the vehicle arestowed correctly, and that they cannot enterthe driver's footwell. Install the floormatssecurely and as specified in order to ensuresufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not useloose floormats and do not place floormats ontop of one another.

G WARNINGUnsuitable footwear can hinder correct usageof the pedals, e.g.:Rshoes with thick solesRshoes with high heelsRslippersThere is a risk of an accident.Wear suitable footwear to ensure correctusage of the pedals.

140 DrivingDrivingandparking

G WARNINGIf you switch off the ignition while driving,safety-relevant functions are only availablewith limitations, or not at all. This could affect,for example, the power steering and the brakeboosting effect. You will require considerablymore effort to steer and brake. There is a riskof an accident.Do not switch off the ignition while driving.

G WARNINGIf the parking brake has not been fullyreleased when driving, the parking brake can:Roverheat and cause a fireRlose its hold function.There is a risk of fire and an accident. Releasethe parking brake fully before driving off.

! Warm up the engine quickly. Do not usethe engine's full performance until it hasreached operating temperature.Only shift the automatic transmission tothe desired drive position when the vehicleis stationary.Where possible, avoid spinning the drivewheels when pulling away on slipperyroads. You could otherwise damage thedrive train.

! AMG vehicles: avoid full-load operationand engine speeds greater than 5000 rpmwhen the engine is cold. This helps toprotect the engine and avoidsuncomfortable driving.

Key positions

g To remove the SmartKey(shift the transmission to position P)

1 Power supply for some consumers, suchas the windshield wipers

2 Ignition (power supply for all consumers)and drive position

3 To start the engine

i The SmartKey can be turned in theignition lock even if it is not the correctSmartKey for the vehicle. The ignition is notswitched on. The engine cannot be started.

Starting the engine

Important safety notes

G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbon monoxide. Inhalingthese exhaust gases leads to poisoning. Thereis a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leavethe engine running in enclosed spaceswithout sufficient ventilation.

G WARNINGFlammable materials introduced throughenvironmental influence or by animals canignite if in contact with the exhaust system orparts of the engine that heat up. There is a riskof fire.Carry out regular checks to make sure thatthere are no flammable foreign materials in

Driving 141

Drivingandparking

Z

the engine compartment or in the exhaustsystem.

! Do not depress the accelerator pedalwhen starting the engine.

i During a cold start, the engine runs athigher speeds to enable the catalyticconverter to reach its operatingtemperature. The sound of the engine maychange during this time.

Automatic transmissionX Shift the transmission to position P.Transmission position display P is shown inthe multifunction display.

i When the transmission is in position N,you can also start the engine with the brakepedal depressed.

Starting procedureX Turn the SmartKey to position 3 in theignition lock (Y page 141) and release it assoon as the engine is running.

Pulling away

Automatic transmissioni It is only possible to shift the transmissionfrom position P to the desired position ifyou depress the brake pedal. Only then canthe parking lock be deactivated. If you donot depress the brake pedal, the DIRECTSELECT lever can still be moved but theparking lock remains engaged.

i If the transmission oil temperature isbelow Ò4‡ (Ò20† ), you can only shift fromposition P when the engine is running.

X Depress the brake pedal and keep itdepressed.

X Shift the transmission to position D or R.

X Release the brake pedal.X Carefully depress the accelerator pedal.The electric parking brake (Y page 158) isautomatically released.The red! indicator lamp in theinstrument cluster goes out.

i The vehicle locks centrally once you havepulled away. The locking knobs in the doorsdrop down.You can open the doors from the inside atany time.You can also deactivate the automaticlocking feature (Y page 212).

i Upshifts take place at higher enginespeeds after a cold start. This helps thecatalytic converter to reach its operatingtemperature more quickly.

Hill start assistHill start assist helps you when pulling awayforwards or in reverse on an uphill gradient.It holds the vehicle for a short time after youhave removed your foot from the brake pedal.This gives you enough time to move your footfrom the brake pedal to the accelerator pedaland to depress it before the vehicle begins toroll.

G WARNINGAfter a short time, hill start assist will nolonger brake your vehicle and it could rollaway. There is a risk of an accident and injury.Therefore, quickly move your foot from thebrake pedal to the accelerator pedal. Neverleave the vehicle when it is held by hill startassist.

X Remove your foot from the brake pedal.The vehicle is then held for about a second.

X Pull away.Hill start assist is not active if:Ryou are pulling away on a level road or ona downhill gradient.Rthe transmission is in position N.

142 DrivingDrivingandparking

Rthe electric parking brake is applied.RESP® is malfunctioning.Further information on holding the vehiclestationary on uphill gradients (Y page 149).

ECO start/stop function

IntroductionThe ECO start/stop function switches theengine off automatically if the vehicle isstopped under certain conditions.The engine starts automatically when thedriver wants to pull away again. The ECOstart/stop function thereby helps you toreduce the fuel consumption and emissionsof your vehicle.

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf the engine is switched off automatically andyou exit the vehicle, the engine is restartedautomatically. The vehicle may begin moving.There is a risk of accident and injury.If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn offthe ignition and secure the vehicle againstrolling away.

General notes

: ECO start/stop display

If the¤ symbol is shown in green in themultifunction display, the ECO start/stopfunction switches the engine offautomatically if the vehicle stops moving.The stop/start function is automaticallyactivated each time you start the engine withthe SmartKey.

If the ECO start/stop function has beenmanually deactivated (Y page 144) or amalfunction has caused the system to bedeactivated, the¤ symbol is notdisplayed.AMG vehicles: the ECO start/stop functionis only available in drive program C.

Automatic engine switch-off

General notesThe ECO start/stop function is operationaland the¤ symbol is displayed in green inthe multifunction display, if:Rthe indicator lamp in the ECO button is litgreen.Rthe outside temperature is within the rangethat is suitable for the system.Rthe engine is at normal operatingtemperature.Rthe set temperature for the vehicle interiorhas been reached.Rthe battery is sufficiently charged.Rthe system detects that the windshield isnot fogged up when the air-conditioningsystem is switched on.Rthe hood is closed.Rthe driver's door is closed and the driver'sseat belt is fastened.

If not all conditions for automatic engineswitch-off are fulfilled, the¤ symbol isshown in yellow.

i All of the vehicle's systems remain activewhen the engine has been stoppedautomatically.

i The engine can be switched offautomatically a maximum of four times(first stop and three subsequent stops) insuccession. The¤ symbol is shown inyellow in the multifunction display after theengine has been started automatically forthe fourth time. When the¤ symbol isshown in green in themultifunction display,

Driving 143

Drivingandparking

Z

automatic engine switch-off is againpossible.

Vehicles with automatic transmissionIf the vehicle is braked to a standstill in D orN, the ECO start/stop function switches offthe engine automatically.

i The HOLD function can be activated if theengine has been switched offautomatically. It is then not necessary tocontinue applying the brakes during theautomatic stop phase. When you depressthe accelerator pedal, the engine startsautomatically and the braking effect of theHOLD function is deactivated.

Automatic engine start

General notesThe engine starts automatically if:Ryou switch off the ECO start/stop functionby pressing the ECO button.Ryou engage reverse gear R.Rthe vehicle starts to roll.Rthe brake system requires this.Rthe temperature in the vehicle interiordeviates from the set range.Rthe system detects moisture on thewindshield when the air-conditioningsystem is switched on.Rthe condition of charge of the battery is toolow.Rthe driver's seat belt is removed or thedriver's door is opened.

Vehicles with automatic transmissionThe engine is started automatically if you:Rrelease the brake pedal when HOLD is notactivated and the transmission is inposition D or N.Rdepress the accelerator pedal.Rmove the transmission out of position P.i Shifting the transmission to position Pdoes not start the engine.

i If you shift the transmission from R to D,the ECO start/stop function is availableagain once the¤ symbol reappears ingreen in the multifunction display.

Deactivating/activating the ECO start/stop function

ECO buttonX To switch off: press button:.Indicator lamp; and the¤ symbol inthe multifunction display go out.

X To switch on: press button:.Indicator lamp; lights up.If all conditions for automatic engineswitch-off (Y page 143) are fulfilled, the¤ symbol is shown in green in themultifunction display.If not all conditions for automatic engineswitch-off (Y page 143) are fulfilled, the¤ symbol is shown in yellow in themultifunction display. If this is the case, theECO start/stop function is not available.

i If indicator lamp; is off, the ECO start/stop function has been deactivatedmanually or as the result of a malfunction.The engine will then not be switched offautomatically when the vehicle stops.

144 DrivingDrivingandparking

Problems with the engine

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

The engine does notstart.

The HOLD function or DISTRONIC PLUS is activated.X Deactivate the HOLD function (Y page 176) or DISTRONICPLUS (Y page 168).

X Try to start the engine again.

The engine does notstart. The starter motorcan be heard.

RThere is a malfunction in the engine electronics.RThere is a malfunction in the fuel supply.X Turn the SmartKey back to position 0 in the ignition lock beforeattempting to start the engine again.

X Try to start the engine again (Y page 141). Avoid excessivelylong and frequent attempts to start the engine as thesewill drainthe battery.

If the engine does not start after several attempts:X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The engine does notstart. You cannot hearthe starter motor.

The on-board voltage is too low because the battery is too weakor discharged.X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 309).If the engine does not start despite attempts to jump-start it:X Consult a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.

The startermotor was exposed to a thermal load that was too high.X Allow the starter motor to cool down for approximately twominutes.

X Try to start the engine again.If the engine still does not start:X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Driving 145

Drivingandparking

Z

Problem Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions

The engine is notrunning smoothly andis misfiring.

There is a malfunction in the engine electronics or in a mechanicalcomponent of the engine management system.X Only depress the accelerator pedal slightly.X Have the cause rectified immediately at a qualified specialistworkshop.Otherwise, non-combusted fuel may get into the catalyticconverter and damage it.

The coolanttemperature display isshowing more than248 ‡ (120 †). Thecoolant warning lampmay also be lit and awarning tone maysound.

The coolant level is too low. The coolant is too hot and the engineis no longer being cooled sufficiently.X Stop as soon as possible and allow the engine and the coolantto cool down.

X Check the coolant level (Y page 289). Observe the warningnotes as you do so and add coolant if necessary.

Automatic transmission

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf the engine speed is above the idling speedand you engage transmission position D orR, the vehicle could pull away suddenly. Thereis a risk of an accident.When engaging transmission position D or R,always firmly depress the brake pedal and donot simultaneously accelerate.

G WARNINGThe automatic transmission switches toneutral position N when you switch off theengine. The vehicle may roll away. There is arisk of an accident.After switching off the engine, always switchto parking position P. Prevent the parkedvehicle from rolling away by applying theparking brake.

DIRECT SELECT lever

Overview of transmission positionsAll vehicles (except AMG vehicles): theDIRECT SELECT lever is on the right of thesteering column.For information on the selector lever in AMGvehicles (Y page 148).

j Park position with parking lockk Reverse geari Neutralh Drive

i The DIRECT SELECT lever always returnsto its original position. The currenttransmission position P, R, N or D appears

146 Automatic transmissionDrivingandparking

in the transmission position display(Y page 147) in the multifunction display.

Transmission position and driveprogram displayThe current transmission position and driveprogram appear in the multifunction display.

: Transmission position display; Drive program display

i The arrows in the transmission positiondisplay show how and into whichtransmission positions you can changeusing the DIRECT SELECT lever.

! If the transmission position display in themultifunction display is not working, youshould pull away carefully to checkwhetherthe desired transmission position isengaged. Ideally, you should selecttransmission position D and drive programE or S.

Engaging park position PX Push the DIRECT SELECT lever in thedirection of arrow P.Transmission position display P is shown inthe multifunction display.

i When you engage park position P, makesure that the transmission position displayshows P in the multifunction display.

i You can only engage park positionPwhenthe vehicle is stationary.

i The automatic transmission shifts intopark position P automatically:Rif you open the driver's door while thevehicle is stationary in transmissionposition D or RRif you open the door while traveling atvery low speeds in transmission positionD or R

In addition, a warning tone sounds and adisplay message is shown.

i Depressing the brake and pushing theDIRECT SELECT lever up or downdisengages the parking lock. Thetransmission is in N neutral.At transmission fluid temperatures belowÒ4 ‡ (Ò20†), you can only shift out of parkposition P into another transmissionposition when the engine is running.In order to shift from park position Pdirectly into R or D:Rdepress the brake pedal andRpush the DIRECT SELECT lever up ordown past the first point of resistance

! If the engine speed is too high or thevehicle is moving, do not shift theautomatic transmission directly from D toR, from R to D or directly to P. Theautomatic transmission could otherwise bedamaged.

Engaging reverse gear R! Only shift the automatic transmission toR when the vehicle is stationary.

i The ECO start/stop function is notavailable when reverse gear is engaged.Further information on the ECO start/stopfunction (Y page 143).

X When the vehicle is stationary, depress thebrake pedal.

X Push the DIRECT SELECT lever up past thefirst point of resistance.

Automatic transmission 147

Drivingandparking

Z

Shifting to neutral NX When the vehicle is stationary, depress thebrake pedal.

X Push the DIRECT SELECT lever up or downto the first point of resistance.

If the engine has been switched off, theautomatic transmission automatically shiftsto N.

Remaining in neutral NIf the automatic transmission is to remain inneutral N, e.g. for washing the vehicle in carwashes with a towing device, please observethe following instructions:

G WARNINGIf children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,they could:Ropen the doors, thus endangering otherpeople or road users.Rget out and disrupt traffic.Roperate the vehicle's equipment.Additionally, children could set the vehicle inmotion if, for example, they:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshifting the automatic transmission out ofpark position PRStart the engine.There is a risk of an accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children or animals unattended in thevehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out ofreach of children.

RMake sure that the ignition is switched on.RWhen the vehicle is stationary, depress thebrake pedal and keep it depressed.RShift to neutral N.RRelease the brake pedal.RIf the electric parking brake is engaged,release it.RSwitch off the ignition and leave theSmartKey in the ignition lock.

Engaging drive position DX When the vehicle is stationary, depress thebrake pedal.

X Push the DIRECT SELECT lever down pastthe first point of resistance.

Selector lever

Selector lever in AMG vehicles with P buttonj Park position with parking lockk Reverse geari Neutralh Drive

Transmission position and driveprogram display

Example: Transmission position display; Drive program display

The current transmission position and driveprogram appear in the multifunction display.

148 Automatic transmissionDrivingandparking

Engaging park position P

X When the vehicle is stationary, press Pbutton:.

Transmission positions

B Park positionDo not shift the transmission intoposition P unless the vehicle isstationary (Y page 157). Theparking lock should not be used asa brake when parking. Alwaysapply the electronic parking brakein addition to the parking lock inorder to secure the vehicle.If the vehicle electronics aremalfunctioning, the transmissionmay be locked in position P.Have the vehicle electronicschecked immediately at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

C Reverse gearOnly shift the transmission to Rwhen the vehicle is stationary.

A NeutralNo power is transmitted from theengine to the drive wheels.Releasing the brakes will allow youto move the vehicle freely, e.g. topush it or tow it.If ESP® is deactivated or faulty:only shift the transmission topositionN if the vehicle is in dangerof skidding, e.g. on icy roads.When you switch off the engine, theautomatic transmissionautomatically shifts into neutral N.

7 DriveThe automatic transmissionchanges gear automatically. Allforward gears are available.

Changing gearThe automatic transmission shifts to theindividual gears automatically when it is intransmission position D. This automaticgearshifting behavior is determined by:Rthe selected drive program (Y page 150)Rthe position of the accelerator pedalRthe road speed

Driving tips

Holding the vehicle stationary on uphillgradients

G WARNINGIf the clutch overheats, the electronicmanagement system is automaticallydeactivated. This interrupts the powertransmission. The vehicle may, for example,roll backwards on gradients. There is a risk ofan accident.Never hold the vehicle stationary on uphillgradients by depressing the accelerator.

Automatic transmission 149

Drivingandparking

Z

The clutch may overheat if you hold thevehicle stationary on uphill gradients bydepressing the accelerator pedal. If the clutchoverheats, a warning tone sounds.All vehicles (except AMG vehicles): theStopStop VehicleVehicle ShiftShift to Pto P LeaveLeave EngineEngineRunningRunning display message appears in themultifunction display. You will only be able tocontinue your journey once the clutch hascooled down and the display message in themultifunction display has disappeared.AMG vehicles: the Trans. OilTrans. OilOverheated Drive on with CareOverheated Drive on with Care displaymessage appears in the multifunctiondisplay.Never hold the vehicle stationary on uphillgradients by depressing the accelerator.Instead, only ever hold the vehicle stationaryon uphill gradients by:Rdepressing the brake pedalRactivating the HOLD functionRengaging the electric parking brake

KickdownAMG vehicles: kickdown is only possible intemporary manual drive program M. Forfurther information on manual drive programM(Y page 152).Use kickdown for maximum acceleration:X Depress the accelerator pedal beyond thepressure point.The automatic transmission shifts to alower gear depending on the engine speed.

X Ease off the accelerator pedal once thedesired speed is reached.The automatic transmission shifts back up.

Rocking the vehicle freeShifting the transmission repeatedly betweengears D and R may help to free the vehicle ifit has become stuck in slush or snow. Thevehicle's engine management system limitsthe speed to a maximum of 5 mph (9 km/h)when shifting back and forth. To shift back

and forth between transmission positions Dand R, move the selector lever up and downbeyond the pressure point.

Program selector button

General notesThe program selector button allows you tochoose between drive programs withdifferent driving characteristics.

Example: program selector button

E Economy Comfortable, economicaldriving

S Sport Sporty driving style

M Manual Manual gear shifting

Only change from automatic drive programE or S to manual drive program M when thevehicle is stationary.X Press program selector button:repeatedly until the letter for the desiredgearshift program appears in themultifunction display.

i The automatic transmission shifts toautomatic drive program E each time theengine is started.

i For further information on the automaticdrive program, see (Y page 151).

150 Automatic transmissionDrivingandparking

AMG vehicles

C ControlledEfficiency

Comfortable, economicaldriving

S Sport Sporty driving style

M Manual Manual gear shifting

Only change from automatic drive programC or S to manual drive program M when thevehicle is stationary.X Press program selector button:repeatedly until the letter for the desiredgearshift program appears in themultifunction display.

i The automatic transmission shifts toautomatic drive program C each time theengine is started.

i For further information on the automaticdrive program, see (Y page 151).

Steering wheel paddle shifters

: Left steering wheel paddle shifter (shiftsdown)

; Right steering wheel paddle shifter (shiftsup)

In drive program M, you can change gearyourself using the steering wheel paddleshifters.If you pull the left or right steering wheelpaddle shifter when in automatic driveprogram E (drive programC on AMG vehicles)or S, the automatic transmission shifts intodrive program M for a limited time.Depending on which paddle shifter is pulled,the automatic transmission immediatelyshifts into the next gear down or up.AMG vehicles: you can activate driveprogram M RACE START (Y page 177) usingthe steering wheel paddle shifters.

i You can only change gear with thesteering wheel paddle shifters when thetransmission is in position D.i For further information on the manualdrive program, see (Y page 152).

Automatic drive programDrive program E (drive program C on MAGvehicles) is characterized by the following:Rcomfort-oriented engine settingsRoptimal fuel consumption resulting fromthe automatic transmission shifting upsooner

Automatic transmission 151

Drivingandparking

Z

Rthe vehicle pulling away more gently inforward and reverse gears, unless theaccelerator pedal is depressed fullyRincreased sensitivity. This improves drivingstability on slippery road surfaces, forexampleRthe automatic transmission shifting upsooner. This results in the vehicle beingdriven at lower engine speeds and thewheels being less likely to spin

Drive program S is characterized by thefollowing:Rsporty engine settingsRthe automatic transmission shifting uplaterRthe fuel consumption possibly being higheras a result of the later automatictransmission shift points

Manual drive program

IntroductionIn manual drive program M, you can changegear yourself by using the steering wheelpaddle shifters. For this, the transmissionmust be in position D. The gear currentlyselected and engaged is shown in themultifunction display.Manual drive program M differs from driveprograms E (drive program C on AMGvehicles) and S with regard to spontaneity,responsiveness and smoothness of gearchanges.

Gear Driving situations

= You can use the engine's brakingeffect

5 You can use the braking effect ofthe engine on downhill gradientsand for driving:Ron steep mountain roadsRin mountainous terrainRin arduous conditions

4 To use the braking effect of theengine on extremely steep downhillgradients and on long downhillstretches

Switching on the manual drive programActivating permanentlyX Press the program selector button(Y page 150) repeatedly untilM appears inthe multifunction display.Manual drive program M remains activeuntil drive program E (drive program C onAMG vehicles) or S is selected.

Activating temporarilyX Pull the right or left steering wheel paddleshifter (Y page 151).M is shown in the multifunction display.Manual drive program M is temporarilyactive. Depending on which paddle shifteris pulled, the automatic transmissionimmediately shifts into the next gear downor up.

i When manual drive program M isactivated via the steering wheel paddleshifters, the temporarily active manualdrive program M will be deactivatedautomatically after a limited time, if thedriving situation permits. The automatictransmission switches to the previouslyactivated drive program E (drive programC on AMG vehicles) or S. When driving ondownhill gradients, the temporarily activemanual drive program M will only bedeactivated if the accelerator pedal isdepressed while the vehicle is rollingdownhill.

152 Automatic transmissionDrivingandparking

UpshiftingX Pull the right-hand steering wheel paddleshifter (Y page 151).The automatic transmission shifts up to thenext gear.

i All vehicles (except AMG vehicles): inorder to prevent engine damage theautomatic transmission automaticallyshifts up:Rif the maximum engine speed on thecurrently engaged gear is reached andRyou continue to accelerate.

AMG vehicles:! Inmanual drive programM, the automatictransmission does not shift upautomatically even when the enginelimiting speed for the current gear isreached. When the engine limiting speed isreached, the fuel supply is cut to preventthe engine from overrevving. Always makesure that the engine speed does not reachthe red area of the tachometer. There isotherwise a risk of engine damage.

Shift recommendationThe gearshift recommendations assist you inadopting an economical driving style. Therecommended gear is shown in themultifunction display.

X Shift to recommended gear; accordingto gearshift recommendation: whenshown in the multifunction display of theinstrument cluster.

AMG vehicles! Inmanual drive programM, the automatictransmission does not shift upautomatically even when the enginelimiting speed for the current gear isreached. When the engine limiting speed isreached, the fuel supply is cut to preventthe engine from overrevving. Always makesure that the engine speed does not reachthe red area of the tachometer. There isotherwise a risk of engine damage.

: Gear indicator; Upshift indicator

Before the engine speed reaches the red area,an upshift indicator will be shown in themultifunction display.X If the color in the speedometermultifunction display changes to red andthe UPUP display message is shown, shift upa gear.

DownshiftingX Pull the left-hand steering wheel paddleshifter (Y page 151).The automatic transmission shifts down tothe next gear.

i If you slow down or stop without shiftingdown, the automatic transmissionautomatically shifts down.

i For maximum acceleration, pull the left-hand steering wheel paddle shifter until thetransmission selects the optimum gear forthe current speed.

i If the engine exceeds the maximumengine speed when shifting down, the

Automatic transmission 153

Drivingandparking

Z

automatic transmission protects againstengine damage by not shifting down.

KickdownAMG vehicles: kickdown is only possible intemporary manual drive program M.You can also use kickdown for maximumacceleration in manual drive program M.X Depress the accelerator pedal beyond thepressure point.The automatic transmission shifts to alower gear depending on the engine speed.

X Shift back up once the desired speed isreached.

i During kickdown, you cannot change gearusing the steering wheel paddle shifters.

i If you apply full throttle, the automatictransmission shifts up to the next gearwhen the maximum engine speed isreached. This prevents the engine fromoverrevving.

Switching off themanual drive programX Press the program selector button(Y page 150) repeatedly until E or Sappears in the multifunction display.

Deactivating the temporary manual driveprogramX Pull and hold the right steering wheelpaddle shifter until the automatictransmission shifts into the last activeautomatic drive program E (drive programC on AMG vehicles) or S.

i When manual drive program M isdeactivated, the automatic transmission inautomatic drive program E (drive programC on AMG vehicles) or Smay shift from thecurrent gear into a higher or lower gear.This is dependent on the position of theaccelerator pedal, speed and load.

154 Automatic transmissionDrivingandparking

Problems with the transmission

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

The transmission hasproblems shifting gear.

The transmission is losing oil.X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialistworkshop immediately.

The acceleration abilityis deteriorating.The transmission nolonger shifts into all ofthe gears.Reverse gear can nolonger be engaged.

The transmission is in emergency mode.X Stop the vehicle.X Shift the transmission to position P.X Switch off the engine.X Wait at least 10 seconds before restarting the engine.X Shift the transmission to position D.X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialistworkshop immediately.

Refueling

Important safety notes

G WARNINGFuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuelincorrectly, there is a risk of fire andexplosion.You must avoid fire, open flames, creatingsparks and smoking. Switch off the engineand, if applicable, the auxiliary heating beforerefueling.

G WARNINGFuel is poisonous and hazardous to health.There is a risk of injury.You must make sure that fuel does not comeinto contact with your skin, eyes or clothingand that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuelvapors. Keep fuel away from children.If you or others come into contact with fuel,observe the following:RWash away fuel from skin immediatelyusing soap and water.RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes,immediately rinse them thoroughly with

clean water. Seek medical assistancewithout delay.RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medicalassistance without delay. Do not inducevomiting.RImmediately change out of clothing whichhas come into contact with fuel.

G WARNINGElectrostatic buildup can create sparks andignite fuel vapors. There is a risk of fire andexplosion.Always touch the vehicle body before openingthe fuel filler flap or touching the fuel pumpnozzle. Any existing electrostatic buildup isthereby discharged.

! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with agasoline engine. Do not switch on theignition if you accidentally refuel with thewrong fuel. Otherwise, the fuel will enterthe fuel system. Even small amounts of thewrong fuel could result in damage to thefuel system and the engine. Notify aqualified specialist workshop and have thefuel tank and fuel lines drained completely.

Refueling 155

Drivingandparking

Z

! Overfilling the fuel tank could damage thefuel system.

! Take care not to spill any fuel on paintedsurfaces. You could otherwise damage thepaintwork.

! Use a filter when refueling from a fuel can.Otherwise, the fuel lines and/or injectionsystem could be blocked by particles fromthe fuel can.

Do not get into the vehicle again during therefueling process. Otherwise, electrostaticcharge could build up again.If you overfill the fuel tank, fuel could sprayout when the fuel pump nozzle is removed.For further information on fuel and fuel quality(Y page 352).

Refueling

Opening/closing the fuel filler flap

: To open the fuel filler flap; Tire pressure table= To insert the fuel filler cap? Fuel type to be used

The fuel filler flap is unlocked or lockedautomatically when you open or close thevehicle with the SmartKey.The position of the fuel filler cap is displayedæ in the instrument cluster. The arrow onthe filling pump indicates the side of thevehicle.

OpeningX Switch the engine off.X Remove the SmartKey from the ignitionlock.

X Press the fuel filler flap in the direction ofarrow:.The fuel filler flap swings up.

X Turn the fuel filler flap counter-clockwiseand remove it.

X Insert the fuel filler cap into holder on theinside of fuel filler flap=.

X Completely insert the filler neck of the fuelpump nozzle into the tank, hook in placeand refuel.

X Only fill the tank until the pump nozzleswitches off.i Do not add any more fuel after the pumpstops filling for the first time. Otherwise,fuel may leak out.

ClosingX Replace the cap on the filler neck and turnclockwise until it engages audibly.

X Close the fuel filler flap.

i Close the fuel filler flap before locking thevehicle.

i If you are driving with the fuel filler capopen, the8 reserve fuel warning lampflashes. A message appears in themultifunction display (Y page 235).In addition, the;Check Enginewarninglamp may light up (Y page 255).For further information on warning andindicator lamps in the instrument cluster,see (Y page 255).

156 RefuelingDrivingandparking

Problems with fuel and the fuel tank

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

Fuel is leaking from thevehicle.

The fuel line or the fuel tank is faulty.

G WARNINGRisk of explosion or fire.X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock immediatelyand remove it (Y page 141).

X Do not restart the engine under any circumstances.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The fuel filler flapcannot be opened.

The fuel filler flap is not unlocked.orThe SmartKey battery is discharged.X Unlock the vehicle (Y page 76).orX Unlock the vehicle using the mechanical key (Y page 77).

The fuel filler flap is unlocked, but the opening mechanism isjammed.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Parking

Important safety notes

G WARNINGFlammable material such as leaves, grass ortwigsmay ignite if they come into contactwithhot parts of the exhaust system or exhaustgas flow. There is a risk of fire.Park the vehicle so that no flammablematerials come into contact with parts of thevehicle which are hot. Take particular care notto park on dry grassland or harvested grainfields.

G WARNINGIf you leave children unsupervised in thevehicle, they could set it in motion by, forexample:Rreleasing the parking brakeRshifting the automatic transmission out ofthe parking position PRstarting the engine.They could also operate the vehicle'sequipment. There is a risk of an accident andinjury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

! Always secure the vehicle correctlyagainst rolling away. Otherwise, the vehicleor its drivetrain could be damaged.

Parking 157

Drivingandparking

Z

To ensure that the vehicle is secured againstrolling away unintentionally:Rthe electric parking brake must be applied.Rthe transmission must be in position P andthe transmission position display mustshow P.Rthe SmartKey must be removed from theignition lock.Ron uphill or downhill gradients, the frontwheels must be turned towards the curb.

Switching off the engine

Important safety notes

G WARNINGThe automatic transmission switches toneutral position N when you switch off theengine. The vehicle may roll away. There is arisk of an accident.After switching off the engine, always switchto parking position P. Prevent the parkedvehicle from rolling away by applying theparking brake.

Vehicles with automatic transmissionAll vehicles (except AMG vehicles)X Apply the electric parking brake.X Shift the transmission to position P.

Selector lever in AMG vehicles

AMG vehicles:X Apply the electric parking brake.X Press P button:.

X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in theignition lock and remove it.The immobilizer is activated.

i If you switch the engine off with thetransmission in position R or D, theautomatic transmission shifts to Nautomatically.If you then open one of the front doors orremove the SmartKey from the ignition, theautomatic transmission shifts to P.If you shift the automatic transmission toN before switching off the engine, theautomatic transmission remains in N evenif a door is opened.

i The automatic transmission shifts to Pautomatically if you:Rswitch off the engine using the SmartKeyand remove the SmartKey from theignition lock orRswitch off the engine using the SmartKeyand open a front door.

If you attempt to turn off the engine when theselector lever is not in position P:Ra message appears in the multifunctiondisplayRa warning signal sounds

Electric parking brake

General notes

G WARNINGIf you leave children unsupervised in thevehicle, they could set it in motion by, forexample:Rreleasing the parking brakeRshifting the automatic transmission out ofthe parking position PRstarting the engine.

158 ParkingDrivingandparking

They could also operate the vehicle'sequipment. There is a risk of an accident andinjury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

i The electric parking brake performs afunction test at regular intervals while theengine is switched off. The sounds that canbe heard while this is occurring are normal.

Applying/releasing manually

ApplyingX Push handle:.When the electric parking brake is applied,theF (USA only) or! (Canada only)red indicator lamp lights up in theinstrument cluster.

i The electric parking brake can also beapplied when the SmartKey is removed.

ReleasingX Pull handle:.The redF (USA only) or! (Canadaonly) indicator lamp in the instrumentcluster goes out.

i You can only release the electric parkingbrake when the SmartKey is in position 1or 2 in the ignition lock.

Applying automaticallyThe electric parking brake is appliedautomatically:Rif DISTRONIC PLUS brings the vehicle to astandstill orRif the HOLD function is keeping the vehiclestationary orRif Active Parking Assist is holding thevehicle at a standstill

In addition, at least one of the followingconditions must be fulfilled:Rthe engine is switched off.Rthe driver's door is open and the seat beltis not fastened.Rthere is a system malfunction.Rthe power supply is insufficient.Rthe vehicle is stationary for a lengthyperiod.

The redF (USA only) or! (Canadaonly) indicator lamp in the instrument clusterlights up.

i The electric parking brake is notautomatically engaged if the engine isswitched off by the ECO start/stopfunction.

Releasing automaticallyYour vehicle's electric parking brake isautomatically released if all of the followingconditions are met:Rthe engine is running.Rthe transmission is in position D or R.Rthe seat belt has been fastened.Ryou depress the accelerator pedal.If the transmission is in positionR, the tailgatemust be closed.

Parking 159

Drivingandparking

Z

If your seat belt is not fastened, the followingconditions must be fulfilled to automaticallyrelease the electric parking brake:Rthe driver's door is closed.Ryou have shifted out of transmissionposition P or you have previously drivenfaster than 2 mph (3 km/h).

Emergency brakingThe vehicle can also be braked during anemergency by using the electric parkingbrake.X While driving, push handle:of the electricparking brake (Y page 158).

i The vehicle is braked for as long ashandle: of the electric parking brake ispressed. The longer electric parking brakehandle: is depressed, the greater thebraking force.

During braking:Ra warning tone soundsRthe Release Park. BrakeRelease Park. Brake messageappearsRthe redF (USA only) or! (Canadaonly) indicator lamp in the instrumentcluster flashes

When the vehicle has been braked to astandstill, the electric parking brake isengaged.

Parking the vehicle for a long periodIf you leave the vehicle parked for longer thanfour weeks, the battery may be damaged byexhaustive discharging.If you leave the vehicle parked for longer thansix weeks, the vehicle may suffer damage asa result of lack of use.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop andseek advice.

i You can obtain information about tricklechargers from a qualified specialistworkshop.

Driving tips

General notes

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you switch off the ignition while driving,safety-relevant functions are only availablewith limitations, or not at all. This could affect,for example, the power steering and the brakeboosting effect. You will require considerablymore effort to steer and brake. There is a riskof an accident.Do not switch off the ignition while driving.

G WARNINGIf you operate mobile communicationequipment while driving, you will bedistracted from traffic conditions. You couldalso lose control of the vehicle. There is a riskof an accident.Only operate this equipment when the vehicleis stationary.

Observe the legal requirements for thecountry in which you are driving. Somejurisdictions prohibit the driver from using amobile phone while driving a vehicle.If you make a call while driving, always usehands-freemode. Only operate the telephonewhen the traffic situation permits. If you areunsure, pull over to a safe location and stopbefore operating the telephone.Bear in mind that at a speed of only 30 mph(approximately 50 km/h), the vehicle coversa distance of 44 ft (approximately 14 m) persecond.

160 Driving tipsDrivingandparking

Drive sensibly – save fuelObserve the following tips to save fuel:RThe tires should always be inflated to therecommended tire pressure.RRemove unnecessary loads.RRemove roof racks when they are notneeded.RWarm up the engine at low engine speeds.RAvoid frequent acceleration or braking.RHave all maintenance work carried out asindicated by the service intervals in theMaintenance Booklet or by the serviceinterval display.

Fuel consumption also increases whendriving in cold weather, in stop-start trafficand in hilly terrain.

Drinking and driving

G WARNINGDrinking and driving and/or taking drugs anddriving are very dangerous combinations.Even a small amount of alcohol or drugs canaffect your reflexes, perceptions andjudgment.The possibility of a serious or even fatalaccident is greatly increased when you drinkor take drugs and drive.Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allowanyone to drive who has been drinking ortaking drugs.

Emission control

G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbon monoxide. Inhalingthese exhaust gases leads to poisoning. Thereis a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leavethe engine running in enclosed spaceswithout sufficient ventilation.

Certain engine systems are designed to keepthe level of poisonous components in exhaustfumes within legal limits.

These systems only work at peak efficiency ifthey are serviced exactly in accordance withthe manufacturer's specifications. For thisreason, only have work on the engine carriedout by qualified and authorized Mercedes-Benz technicians.The engine settings must not be changedunder any circumstances. Furthermore, allspecific service work must be carried out atregular intervals and in accordance with theMercedes-Benz service requirements. Detailscan be found in the Maintenance Booklet.

ECO displayThe ECOdisplay gives you information on howeconomical your driving style is. The ECOdisplay assists you in achieving the optimumdriving style in terms of consumption, takingthe actual and selected conditions intoconsideration. Your driving style cansignificantly influence the vehicle'sconsumption.

Example: ECO display

The ECO display consists of three bars:RAccelerationAccelerationRConstantConstantRCoastingCoastingThe percent value is the average value of thethree bars. The three bars and themean valuebegin at the value of 50%. A higherpercentage indicates a more economicaldriving style.The ECO display does not indicate the actualfuel consumption and a fixed percentagecount in the ECO display does not indicate afixed consumption figure.

Driving tips 161

Drivingandparking

Z

Apart from driving style, consumption isdependent on many factors such as, e.g.:RloadRtire pressureRcold startRchoice of routeRelectrical consumers switched onThese factors are not taken intoconsideration by the ECO display.The evaluation of your driving style is carriedout using the following three categories:RAccelerationAcceleration (evaluation of allacceleration processes):- The bar fills up: moderate acceleration,especially at higher speeds

- The bar empties: sporty accelerationRConstantConstant (assessment of driving behaviorat all times):- The bar fills up: constant speed andavoidance of unnecessary accelerationand deceleration

- The bar empties: fluctuations in speedRCoastingCoasting (assessment of all decelerationprocesses):- The bar fills up: anticipatory driving,keeping your distance and early releaseof the accelerator. The vehicle can coastwithout use of the brakes.

- The bar empties: frequent braking

i An economical driving style speciallyrequires driving at moderate enginespeeds.To achieve a higher value in the categoriesAccelerationAcceleration and ConstantConstant:Robserve the gearshift recommendations.Rdrive in drive program E.i On long journeys at a constant speed, e.g.on the highway, only the bar for ConstantConstantwill change.

i The ECO display summaries the drivingcharacteristics from the start of the journeyto its completion. For this reason, the bars

change dynamically at the beginning of thejourney. On longer journeys, there arefewer changes. Formore dynamic changes,carry out a manual reset.

Further information on the ECO display(Y page 202).

Braking

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you shift down on a slippery road surface inan attempt to increase the engine's brakingeffect, the drive wheels could lose their grip.There is an increased danger of skidding andaccidents.Do not shift down for additional enginebraking on a slippery road surface.

Downhill gradients! On long and steep gradients, you mustreduce the load on the brakes by shifting toa lower gear in good time. This allows youto take advantage of the engine's brakingeffect. For this, you need to have selectedmanual drive programM. This helps you toavoid overheating the brakes and wearingthem out excessively.When you take advantage of the engine'sbraking effect, a drive wheel may not turnfor some time, e.g. on a slippery roadsurface. This could cause damage to thedrive train. This type of damage is notcovered by the Mercedes-Benz warranty.

i Briefly depressing the accelerator pedalon downhill gradients while the manualdrive program M is temporarily activated:the automatic transmission may switch tothe last active automatic drive program Eor S. The automatic transmission may shiftto a higher gear. This can reduce theengine's braking effect.

162 Driving tipsDrivingandparking

Heavy and light loads

G WARNINGIf you rest your foot on the brake pedal whiledriving, the braking system can overheat. Thisincreases the stopping distance and can evencause the braking system to fail. There is arisk of an accident.Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. Neverdepress the brake pedal and the acceleratorpedal at the same time.

! Depressing the brake pedal constantlyresults in excessive and premature wear tothe brake pads.

If the brakes have been subjected to a heavyload, do not stop the vehicle immediately.Drive on for a short while. This allows theairflow to cool the brakes more quickly.

Wet roadsIf you have driven for a long time in heavy rainwithout braking, there may be a delayedreaction from the brakeswhen braking for thefirst time. This may also occur after thevehicle has been washed or driven throughdeep water.You have to depress the brake pedal morefirmly. Maintain a greater distance from thevehicle in front.After driving on a wet road or having thevehicle washed, brake firmly while payingattention to the traffic conditions. This willwarm up the brake discs, thereby drying themmore quickly and protecting them againstcorrosion.

Limited braking performance on salt-treated roadsIf you drive on salted roads, a layer of saltresidue may form on the brake discs andbrake pads. This can result in a significantlylonger braking distance.

RBrake occasionally to remove any possiblesalt residue. Make sure that you do notendanger other road users when doing so.RCarefully depress the brake pedal and thebeginning and end of a journey.RMaintain a greater distance to the vehicleahead.

Servicing the brakes! If the red brake warning lamp lights up inthe instrument cluster and you hear awarning tone while the engine is running,the brake fluid level may be too low.Observe additional warning messages inthe multifunction display.The brake fluid level may be too low due tobrake pad wear or leaking brake lines.Have the brake system checkedimmediately. This work should be carriedout at a qualified specialist workshop.

! A function or performance test shouldonly be carried out on a 2-axledynamometer. If you are planning to havethe vehicle tested on such a dynamometer,contact an authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter to obtain further information first.Otherwise, you could damage the drivetrain or the brake system.

! As the ESP® system operatesautomatically, the engine and the ignitionmust be switched off (the SmartKey mustbe in position 0 or 1 in the ignition lock) if:Rthe electric parking brake is tested on abrake dynamometer (for a maximum often seconds)Rthe vehicle is towed with the front axleraised.

Braking triggered automatically by ESP®may seriously damage the brake system.

All checks and maintenance work on thebrake system must be carried out at aqualified specialist workshop. Consult aqualified specialist workshop to arrange this.

Driving tips 163

Drivingandparking

Z

Have brake pads installed and brake fluidreplaced at a qualified specialist workshop.If the brake system has only been subject tomoderate loads, you should test thefunctionality of your brakes at regularintervals.You can find a description of Brake Assist(BAS) on (Y page 64).Mercedes-Benz recommends that you onlyhave brake pads/linings installed on yourvehicle which have been approved forMercedes-Benz vehicles or which correspondto an equivalent quality standard. Brakepads/linings which have not been approvedfor Mercedes-Benz vehicles or which are notof an equivalent quality could affect yourvehicle's operating safety.Mercedes-Benz recommends that you onlyuse brake fluid that has been speciallyapproved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz,or which corresponds to an equivalent qualitystandard. Brake fluid which has not beenapproved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles orwhich is not of an equivalent quality couldaffect your vehicle's operating safety.

Checking brake lining thicknessYou can measure the break pad/liningthickness using a test gauge. Color-coding(green or red) on the test gauge allows you todetermine whether the brake pad/liningthickness is still sufficient. The test gauge isin the vehicle document wallet in the glovebox.

Front wheel

Rear wheelX Bring the vehicle and wheels into a suitableposition so that you can attach test gaugeA.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away(Y page 157).

X Move the selector lever to position P.X Switch off the engine.X Place test gaugeA between the wheel'sspokes on brake pad/lining=.

164 Driving tipsDrivingandparking

X Hold test gaugeA vertically on brakedisc: and slide measuring pin; ontobrake disc:.

X Check which color field? the arrow onmeasuring pin; is pointing to.Green: the brake pad/lining thickness issufficient.Red: the brake pad/lining thickness is notsufficient. Have the brake pads/liningchecked at a qualified specialist workshop.

i To avoid an inaccurate measurement:Rmake sure you position the wheelssuitablyRdo not put the measuring pin on a recessin the brake disc

Driving on wet roads

HydroplaningIf water has accumulated to a certain depthon the road surface, there is a danger ofhydroplaning occurring, even if:Ryou drive at low speeds.Rthe tires have adequate tread depth.For this reason, in the event of heavy rain orin conditions in which hydroplaning mayoccur, you must drive in the followingmanner:Rlower your speed.Ravoid ruts.Rbrake carefully.

Driving on flooded roads! Do not drive through flooded areas.Check the depth of anywater before drivingthrough it. Drive slowly through standingwater. Otherwise, water may enter thevehicle interior or the engine compartment.This can damage the electroniccomponents in the engine or the automatictransmission. Water can also be drawn inby the engine's air suction nozzles and thiscan cause engine damage.

Winter driving

General notes

G WARNINGIf you shift down on a slippery road surface inan attempt to increase the engine's brakingeffect, the drive wheels could lose their grip.There is an increased danger of skidding andaccidents.Do not shift down for additional enginebraking on a slippery road surface.

G DANGERIf the exhaust pipe is blocked or adequateventilation is not possible, poisonous gasessuch as carbon monoxide (CO) may enter thevehicle. This is the case, e.g. if the vehiclebecomes trapped in snow. There is a risk offatal injury.If you leave the engine or the auxiliary heatingrunning, make sure the exhaust pipe and areaaround the vehicle are clear of snow. Toensure an adequate supply of fresh air, opena window on the side of the vehicle that is notfacing into the wind.

Have your vehicle winterproofed at a qualifiedspecialist workshop at the onset of winter.Observe the notes in the "Winter operation"section (Y page 320).

Driving with summer tiresObserve the notes in the "Winter operation"section (Y page 320).

Slippery road surfaces

G WARNINGIf you shift down on a slippery road surface inan attempt to increase the engine's brakingeffect, the drive wheels could lose their grip.There is an increased danger of skidding andaccidents.Do not shift down for additional enginebraking on a slippery road surface.

Driving tips 165

Drivingandparking

Z

If the vehicle threatens to skid or cannot bestopped when moving at low speed:X Shift the transmission to position N.Drive particularly carefully on slippery roadsurfaces. Avoid sudden acceleration, steeringand brakingmaneuvers. Do not use the cruisecontrol or DISTRONIC PLUS.The outside temperature indicator is notdesigned to serve as an ice-warning deviceand is therefore unsuitable for that purpose.Changes in the outside temperature aredisplayed after a short delay.Indicated temperatures just above thefreezing point do not guarantee that the roadsurface is free of ice. The roadmay still be icy,especially in wooded areas or on bridges. Youshould pay special attention to roadconditions when temperatures are aroundfreezing point.

i For more information on driving withsnow chains, see (Y page 321).

Driving systems

Cruise control

General notesCruise control maintains a constant roadspeed for you. It brakes automatically in orderto avoid exceeding the set speed. On long andsteep downhill gradients, especially if thevehicle is laden, you must select a low gear ingood time. For this, you will need to haveselected manual drive programM(Y page 152). By doing so, you will makeuse of the braking effect of the engine. Thisrelieves the load on the brake system andprevents the brakes from overheating andwearing too quickly.Use cruise control only if road and trafficconditions make it appropriate to maintain asteady speed for a prolonged period. You canstore any road speed above 20 mph(30 km/h).

Important safety notesIf you fail to adapt your driving style, cruisecontrol can neither reduce the risk of anaccident nor override the laws of physics.Cruise control cannot take into account theroad, traffic and weather conditions. Cruisecontrol is only an aid. You are responsible forthe distance to the vehicle in front, for vehiclespeed, for braking in good time and forstaying in your lane.Do not use cruise control:Rin road and traffic conditions which do notallow you to maintain a constant speed e.g.in heavy traffic or on winding roadsRon slippery road surfaces. Braking oraccelerating could cause the drive wheelsto lose traction and the vehicle could thenskidRwhen there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog,heavy rain or snow

If there is a change of drivers, advise the newdriver of the speed stored.

Cruise control lever

: To activate or increase speed; To activate or reduce speed= To deactivate cruise control? To activate at the current speed/last

stored speedWhen you activate cruise control, the storedspeed is shown in the multifunction displayfor five seconds.

166 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

Activation conditionsTo activate cruise control, all of the followingactivation conditions must be fulfilled:Rthe electric parking brake must bereleased.Ryou are driving faster than20 mph(30 km/h).RESP® must be active, but not intervening.Ron vehicles with automatic transmission,the selector lever must be in position D.

Storing, maintaining and calling up aspeed

Storing and maintaining the currentspeedYou can store the current speed if you aredriving faster than 20 mph (30km/h).X Accelerate the vehicle to the desiredspeed.

X Briefly press the cruise control leverup: or down;.

X Remove your foot from the acceleratorpedal.Cruise control is activated. The vehicleautomatically maintains the stored speed.

i Cruise control may be unable to maintainthe stored speed on uphill gradients. Thestored speed is resumedwhen the gradientevens out. Cruise control maintains thestored speed on downhill gradients byautomatically applying the brakes.

Storing the current speed or calling up thelast stored speedG WARNINGIf you call up the stored speed and it differsfrom the current speed, the vehicleaccelerates or decelerates. If you do not knowthe stored speed, the vehicle could accelerateor brake unexpectedly. There is a risk of anaccident.Pay attention to the road and trafficconditions before calling up the stored speed.

If you do not know the stored speed, store thedesired speed again.

X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towardsyou?.

X Remove your foot from the acceleratorpedal.The first time cruise control is activated, itstores the current speed or regulates thespeed of the vehicle to the previouslystored speed.

Setting a speedKeep in mind that it may take a brief momentuntil the vehicle has accelerated or braked tothe speed set.X Press the cruise control lever up: for ahigher speed or down; for a lower speed.

X To adjust the set speed in 1 mphincrements (1 km/h increments): brieflypress the cruise control lever up: ordown; to the pressure point.Every time the cruise control lever ispressed up: or down; the last speedstored is increased or reduced.

X To adjust the set speed in 5 mphincrements (10 km/h increments):briefly press the cruise control leverup: or down; to the pressure point.Every time the cruise control lever ispressed up: or down; the last speedstored is increased or reduced.

i Cruise control is not deactivated if youdepress the accelerator pedal. Forexample, if you accelerate briefly toovertake, cruise control adjusts thevehicle's speed to the last speed storedafter you have finished overtaking.

Driving systems 167

Drivingandparking

Z

Deactivating cruise controlThere are several ways to deactivate cruisecontrol:X Briefly press the cruise control leverforwards=.

orX Brake.Cruise control is automatically deactivated if:Rthe vehicle is secured with the electricparking brakeRyou are driving at less than 20 mph(30 km/h)RESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP®Ryou shift the transmission to position Nwhile driving

If cruise control is deactivated, you will heara warning tone. You will see the CruiseCruiseControl OffControl Off message in the multifunctiondisplay for approximately five seconds.

i When you switch off the engine, the lastspeed stored is cleared.

DISTRONIC PLUS

General notesDISTRONIC PLUS regulates the speed andautomatically helps you maintain thedistance to the vehicle detected in front.Vehicles are detectedwith the aid of the radarsensor system. DISTRONIC PLUS brakesautomatically so that the set speed is notexceeded.Change into a lower gear in good time on longand steep downhill gradients. This isespecially important if the vehicle is laden. Bydoing so, you will make use of the brakingeffect of the engine. This relieves the load onthe brake system and prevents the brakesfrom overheating and wearing too quickly.If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that there is a riskof a collision, you will be warned visually andacoustically. DISTRONIC PLUS cannotprevent a collision without your intervention.

An intermittent warning tone will then soundand the distance warning lamp will light up inthe instrument cluster. Brake immediately inorder to increase the distance to the vehiclein front or take evasive action provided it issafe to do so.For DISTRONIC PLUS to assist you, the radarsensor system must be operational.DISTRONIC PLUS operates in range between0 mph (0 km/h) and 120 mph (200 km/h).Do not use DISTRONIC PLUS while driving onroads with steep gradients.As DISTRONIC PLUS transmits radar waves,it can resemble the radar detectors of theresponsible authorities. You can refer to therelevant chapter in the Operator's Manual ifquestions are asked about this.

i This device complies with RSS-210 ofIndustry Canada. Operation is subject tothe following two conditions:1. This device may not cause harmfulinterference, and2. this device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation of the device.Removal, tampering, or altering of thedevice will void any warranties, and is notpermitted. Do not tamper with, alter, or usein any non-approved way.Any unauthorized modification to thisdevice could void the user's authority tooperate the equipment.

Important safety notes

G WARNINGDISTRONIC PLUS does not react to:Rpeople or animalsRstationary obstacles on the road, e.g.stopped or parked vehiclesRoncoming and crossing trafficAs a result, DISTRONIC PLUSmay neither givewarnings nor intervene in such situations.There is a risk of an accident.

168 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

Always pay careful attention to the trafficsituation and be ready to brake.

G WARNINGDISTRONIC PLUS cannot always clearlyidentify other road users and complex trafficsituations.In such cases, DISTRONIC PLUS may:Rgive an unnecessary warning and thenbrake the vehicleRneither give a warning nor interveneRaccelerate unexpectedlyThere is a risk of an accident.Continue to drive carefully and be ready tobrake, in particular when warned to do so byDISTRONIC PLUS.

G WARNINGDISTRONIC PLUS brakes your vehicle with upto 50% of themaximumpossible deceleration.If this braking force is insufficient, DISTRONICPLUS warns you visually and audibly. There isa risk of an accident.In such cases, apply the brakes yourself andtry to take evasive action.

! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD functionis activated, the vehicle brakesautomatically in certain situations. Toprevent damage to the vehicle, deactivateDISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function inthe following or other similar situations:Rwhen towing the vehicleRin the car wash

If you fail to adapt your driving style,DISTRONIC PLUS can neither reduce the riskof accident nor override the laws of physics.DISTRONIC PLUS cannot take into accountthe road, traffic and weather conditions.DISTRONIC PLUS is only an aid. You areresponsible for the distance to the vehicle infront, for vehicle speed, for braking in goodtime and for staying in your lane.

Do not use DISTRONIC PLUS:Rin road and traffic conditions which do notallow you to maintain a constant speed e.g.in heavy traffic or on winding roadsRon slippery road surfaces. Braking oraccelerating could cause the drive wheelsto lose traction and the vehicle could thenskidRwhen there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog,heavy rain or snow

DISTRONIC PLUS may not detect narrowvehicles driving in front, e.g. motorcycles, orvehicles driving on a different line.In particular, the detection of obstacles canbe impaired if:Rdirt on the sensors or anything elsecovering the sensorsRsnow or heavy rainRinterference by other radar sourcesRstrong radar reflections, for example, inparking garages

If DISTRONIC PLUS no longer detects avehicle in front, DISTRONIC PLUS mayunexpectedly accelerate the vehicle to thestored speed.This speed may:Rbe too high if you are driving in a filter laneor an exit laneRbe so high when driving in the right-handlane that you overtake vehicles in the left-hand laneRbe so highwhen driving in the left-hand lanethat you overtake vehicles in the right-handlane

If there is a change of drivers, advise the newdriver of the speed stored.

Driving systems 169

Drivingandparking

Z

Cruise control lever

: To store the current speed or a higherspeed

; To store the current speed or a lowerspeed

= To deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS? To store the current speed or calling up

the last stored speedA To set the specified minimum distance

Activating DISTRONIC PLUS

Activation conditionsTo activate DISTRONIC PLUS, all of thefollowing activation conditions must befulfilled:Rthe engine must be started. It may take upto two minutes after pulling away beforeDISTRONIC PLUS is operational.Rthe electric parking brake must bereleased.RESP® must be active, but not intervening.RActive Parking Assist must not beactivated.Rthe transmission must be in position D.Rthe driver's door must be closed when youshift from P to D or your seat belt must befastened.Rthe front-passenger door and rear doorsmust be closed.

ActivatingX Briefly pull the cruise control lever towardsyou? or press it up: or down;.DISTRONIC PLUS is selected.

X Press the cruise control lever repeatedlyup: or down; until the desired speedis set.

X Remove your foot from the acceleratorpedal.Your vehicle adapts its speed to that of thevehicle in front, but only up to the desiredstored speed.i If you do not fully release the acceleratorpedal, the DISTRONIC PLUS PassiveDISTRONIC PLUS Passivemessage appears in the multifunctiondisplay. The set distance to a slower-moving vehicle in front will then not bemaintained. You will be driving at the speedyou determine by the position of theaccelerator pedal.

You can also activate DISTRONIC PLUS whenstationary. The lowest speed that can be setis 18 mph (30 km/h).X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towardsyou? or press it up: or down;.DISTRONIC PLUS is selected.

Activating at the current speed/laststored speedG WARNINGIf you call up the stored speed and it differsfrom the current speed, the vehicleaccelerates or decelerates. If you do not knowthe stored speed, the vehicle could accelerateor brake unexpectedly. There is a risk of anaccident.Pay attention to the road and trafficconditions before calling up the stored speed.If you do not know the stored speed, store thedesired speed again.

170 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

X Briefly pull the cruise control lever(Y page 170) towards you?.

X Remove your foot from the acceleratorpedal.DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. The firsttime it is activated, the current speed isstored. Otherwise, it sets the vehicle cruisespeed to the previously stored value.

Driving with DISTRONIC PLUS

Pulling away and drivingi The vehicle can also pull away when it isfacing an unidentified obstacle or is drivingon a different line from another vehicle. Thevehicle then brakes automatically. There isa risk of an accident. Be ready to brake atall times.

If you depress the brake, DISTRONIC PLUS isdeactivated unless your vehicle is stationary.X If you want to pull away withDISTRONIC PLUS: remove your foot fromthe brake pedal.

X Briefly pull the cruise control lever(Y page 170) towards you?.

orX Accelerate briefly.Your vehicle pulls away and adapts itsspeed to that of the vehicle in front.If no vehicle is detected in front, yourvehicle accelerates to the set speed.

If there is no vehicle in front, DISTRONICPLUS operates in the same way as cruisecontrol.If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehiclein front has slowed down, it brakes yourvehicle. In this way, the distance you haveselected is maintained.If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a faster-movingvehicle in front, it increases the driving speed.The vehicle is only accelerated up to thespeed you have stored.

Selecting the drive programDISTRONIC Plus supports a sporty drivingstyle when you have selected the S or Mdriving program (Y page 150). Accelerationbehind the vehicle in front or to the set speedis then noticeably more dynamic. If you haveselected the E driving program, the vehicleaccelerates more gently. This setting isrecommended in stop-and-start traffic.

Changing lanesIf you change to the passing lane, DISTRONICPLUS supports you when:Ryou are driving faster than 43.5 mph(70 km/h)RDISTRONIC PLUS is maintaining thedistance to a vehicle in frontRyou switch on the appropriate turn signalRDISTRONIC PLUS does not detect a dangerof collision

If these conditions are fulfilled, your vehicleis accelerated. Acceleration will beinterrupted if changing lanes takes too longor if the distance between your vehicle andthe vehicle in front becomes too small.

i When changing lanes, DISTRONIC PLUSmonitors the left lane on left-hand drivevehicles and the right lane on right-handdrive vehicles.

StoppingG WARNINGWhen leaving the vehicle, even if it is brakedonly by DISTRONIC PLUS, it could roll away if:Rthere is a malfunction in the system or inthe voltage supply.RDISTRONIC PLUS has been deactivatedwith the cruise control lever, e.g. by avehicle occupant or from outside thevehicle.Rthe electrical system in the enginecompartment, the battery or the fuses havebeen tampered with.

Driving systems 171

Drivingandparking

Z

Rthe battery is disconnected.Rthe accelerator pedal has been depressed,e.g. by a vehicle occupant.

There is a risk of an accident.If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn offDISTRONIC PLUS and secure the vehicleagainst rolling away.

For further information on deactivatingDISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 173).If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehiclein front is stopping, it brakes your vehicle untilit is stationary.Once your vehicle is stationary, it remainsstationary and you do not need to depress thebrake.

i After a time, the electric parking brakesecures the vehicle and relieves the servicebrake.

i Depending on the specified minimumdistance, your vehicle will come to astandstill at a sufficient distance behind thevehicle in front. The specified minimumdistance is set using the control on thecruise control lever.

The electric parking brake automaticallysecures the vehicle if DISTRONIC PLUS isactivated and:Rthe seat belt is unfastened and the driver'sdoor is open.Rthe engine is switched off, unless it isautomatically switched off by the ECOstart/stop function.Ra system malfunction occurs.Rthe power supply is not sufficient.If amalfunction occurs, then the transmissionmay be shifted into position P automatically.

Setting a speedKeep in mind that it may take a brief momentuntil the vehicle has accelerated or braked tothe speed set.

: To store the current speed or a higherspeed

; To store the current speed or a lowerspeed

X Press the cruise control lever up: for ahigher speed or down; for a lower speed.

X To adjust the set speed in 1 mphincrements (1 km/h increments): brieflypress the cruise control lever up: ordown; to the pressure point.Every time the cruise control lever ispressed up: or down; the last speedstored is increased or reduced.

X To adjust the set speed in 5 mphincrements (10 km/h increments):briefly press the cruise control leverup: or down; to the pressure point.Every time the cruise control lever ispressed up: or down;, the last speedstored is increased or reduced.

i DISTRONIC PLUS is not deactivated if youdepress the accelerator pedal. If youaccelerate to overtake, DISTRONIC PLUSadjusts the vehicle's speed to the lastspeed stored after you have finishedovertaking.

Setting the specifiedminimumdistanceYou can set the specified minimum distancefor DISTRONIC PLUS by varying the time spanbetween one and two seconds. With thisfunction, you can set the minimum distancethat DISTRONIC PLUS keeps to the vehicle infront, dependent on vehicle speed. You can

172 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

see this distance in the multifunction display(Y page 174).

i Make sure that you maintain theminimum distance to the vehicle in front asrequired by law. Adjust the distance to thevehicle in front if necessary.

X To increase: turn control= indirection;.DISTRONIC PLUS then maintains a greaterdistance between your vehicle and thevehicle in front.

X To decrease: turn control= indirection:.DISTRONIC PLUS then maintains a shorterdistance between your vehicle and thevehicle in front.

Deactivating DISTRONIC PLUS

There are several ways to deactivateDISTRONIC PLUS:X Briefly press the cruise control leverforwards:.

orX Brake, unless the vehicle is stationary.When you deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS, youwill see the DISTRONIC PLUS OffDISTRONIC PLUS Off messagein the multifunction display for approximatelyfive seconds.

i The last speed stored remains stored untilyou switch off the engine. DISTRONICPLUSis not deactivated if you depress theaccelerator pedal.

DISTRONIC PLUS is automaticallydeactivated if:Ryou engage the electric parking brake or ifthe vehicle is automatically secured withthe electric parking brakeRESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP®Rthe transmission is in the P, R orN positionRyou pull the cruise control lever towardsyou in order to pull away and the front-passenger door or one of the rear doors isopenRthe vehicle is skiddingRyou activate Active Parking AssistIf DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated, you willhear a warning tone. You will see theDISTRONIC PLUS OffDISTRONIC PLUS Off message in themultifunction display for approximately fiveseconds.

Driving systems 173

Drivingandparking

Z

DISTRONIC PLUS displays in theinstrument cluster

Displays in the speedometer

Example: DISTRONIC PLUS displays in thespeedometer

When DISTRONIC PLUS is activated, one ortwo segments; in the set speed range lightup.If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a vehicle in front,segments; between speed of the vehicle infront= and stored speed: light up.

i For design reasons, the speed displayedin the speedometer may differ slightly fromthe speed set for DISTRONIC PLUS.

Display when DISTRONIC PLUS isdeactivated

: Vehicle in front, if detected; Distance indicator, current distance to

the vehicle in front= Specified minimum distance to the

vehicle in front; adjustable? Own vehicle

In the Assistance menu (Y page 207) of theon-board computer, you can select theassistance display.X Select the Assistance GraphicAssistance Graphic functionusing the on-board computer(Y page 207).

Display when DISTRONIC PLUS isactivated

: Vehicle in front, if detected; Specified minimum distance to the

vehicle in front; adjustable= Own vehicle? DISTRONIC PLUS active (text only

appears when the cruise control lever isactuated)

X Select the Assistance GraphicAssistance Graphic functionusing the on-board computer(Y page 207).

You will initially see the stored speed forabout five seconds when you activateDISTRONIC PLUS.

Tips for driving with DISTRONIC PLUS

General notesThe following contains descriptions of certainroad and traffic conditions in which you mustbe particularly attentive. In such situations,brake if necessary. DISTRONIC PLUS is thendeactivated.

174 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

Cornering, going into and coming out of abend

The ability of DISTRONIC PLUS to detectvehicles when cornering is limited. Yourvehicle may brake unexpectedly or late.

Vehicles traveling on a different line

DISTRONIC PLUS may not detect vehiclestraveling on a different line. The distance tothe vehicle in front will be too short.

Other vehicles changing lanes

DISTRONIC PLUS has not detected thevehicle cutting in yet. The distance to thisvehicle will be too short.

Narrow vehicles

DISTRONIC PLUS has not yet detected thevehicle in front on the edge of the road,because of its narrow width. The distance tothe vehicle in front will be too short.

Obstructions and stationary vehicles

DISTRONIC PLUS does not brake forobstacles or stationary vehicles. If, forexample, the detected vehicle turns a cornerand reveals an obstacle or stationary vehicle,DISTRONIC PLUS will not brake for these.

Driving systems 175

Drivingandparking

Z

Crossing vehicles

DISTRONIC PLUS may detect vehicles thatare crossing your lane by mistake. ActivatingDISTRONIC PLUS at traffic lights withcrossing traffic, for example, could causeyour vehicle to pull away unintentionally.

HOLD function

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWhen leaving the vehicle, it can still roll awaydespite being braked by the HOLD function if:Rthere is a malfunction in the system or inthe voltage supply.Rthe HOLD function has been deactivated bypressing the accelerator pedal or the brakepedal, e.g. by a vehicle occupant.Rthe electrical system in the enginecompartment, the battery or the fuses havebeen tampered with.Rthe battery is disconnectedThere is a risk of an accident.If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn offthe HOLD function and secure the vehicleagainst rolling away.

! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD functionis activated, the vehicle brakesautomatically in certain situations. Toprevent damage to the vehicle, deactivateDISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function inthe following or other similar situations:Rwhen towing the vehicleRin the car wash

Deactivating the HOLD function(Y page 177).

General notesThe HOLD function can assist the driver in thefollowing situations:Rwhen pulling away, especially on steepslopesRwhen maneuvering on steep slopesRwhen waiting in trafficThe vehicle is kept stationary without thedriver having to depress the brake pedal.The braking effect is canceled and the HOLDfunction deactivated when you depress theaccelerator pedal to pull away.

Activation conditionsYou can activate the HOLD function if:Rthe vehicle is stationaryRthe engine is running or if it has beenautomatically switched off by the ECOstart/stop functionRthe driver's door is closed or your seat beltis fastenedRthe electric parking brake is releasedRthe transmission position D, R or N isengaged while driving a vehicle with anautomatic transmissionRDISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated

176 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

Activating the HOLD function

Example: vehicles with a color multifunctiondisplayX Make sure that the activation conditionsare met.

X Depress the brake pedal.X Quickly depress the brake pedal furtheruntil: appears in the multifunctiondisplay.The HOLD function is activated. You canrelease the brake pedal.

i If depressing the brake pedal the firsttime does not activate the HOLD function,wait briefly and then try again.

Deactivating the HOLD functionThe HOLD function is deactivatedautomatically if:Ryou accelerate. On vehicles with automatictransmission: only when the transmissionis in position D or R.Rthe transmission is in positionP on vehicleswith automatic transmission.Ryou depress the brake pedal again with acertain amount of pressure until:disappears from the multifunction display.Ryou secure the vehicle using the electricparking brake.Ryou activate DISTRONIC PLUS.

i After a time, the electric parking brakesecures the vehicle and relieves the servicebrake.

The electric parking brake automaticallysecures the vehicle if the HOLD function isactivated and:Rthe driver's door is open and the driver'sseat belt is unfastened.Rthe engine is switched off, unless it isautomatically switched off by the ECOstart/stop function.Ra system malfunction occurs.Rthe power supply is not sufficient.If amalfunction occurs, then the transmissionmay be shifted into position P automatically.

RACE START

Important safety notesRACE START enables optimal accelerationfrom a standing start. The precondition forthis is a suitable high-grip road surface.RACE START is intended solely for activationon dedicated race circuits.

i RACE START is only available in AMGvehicles.

Conditions for activationYou can activate RACE START if:Rthe doors, hood and the trunk lid areclosed.Rthe engine is running and the transmission,all-wheel drive clutch and the engine are atoperating temperature.RSPORT handling mode is activated.(Y page 69)Rthe steering wheel is in the straight-aheadposition.Rthe vehicle is stationary and the brakepedal is depressed (left foot).Rthe transmission is in position D.Rdrive program M is selected (Y page 150).

Driving systems 177

Drivingandparking

Z

Activating RACE STARTX Depress the brake pedal with your left footand keep it depressed.

X Pull and hold both steering wheel shiftpaddles.

X The RACE START Confirm: Paddle UPRACE START Confirm: Paddle UPCancel: Paddle DOWNCancel: Paddle DOWN message appearsin the multifunction display.

X Release both steering wheel shift paddles.i If the activation conditions are no longerfulfilled, RACE START is canceled. TheRACE START Not Possible SeeRACE START Not Possible SeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manual message appears inthe multifunction display.

X To cancel: pull the left steering wheelpaddle shifter (Y page 151).

orX To confirm: pull the right steering wheelpaddle shifter (Y page 151).The RACE START Available DepressRACE START Available Depressgas pedalgas pedal message appears in themultifunction display.i If you do not depress the acceleratorpedal within a few seconds, RACE START iscanceled. The multifunction display showsthe RACE START CanceledRACE START Canceled message.

X Fully depress the accelerator pedal.The engine speed is increased.The RACE START Release brake toRACE START Release brake tostartstart message appears in themultifunction display.i If you do not release the brake pedalwithin a short time, RACE START will becanceled. The multifunction display showsthe RACE START CanceledRACE START Canceled message.

X Take your foot off the brake, but keep theaccelerator pedal depressed.The vehicle pulls away at maximumacceleration.The RACERACE STARTSTART ActiveActivemessage appearsin the multifunction display.

RACE START is deactivated when the vehiclereaches a speed of approximately 30 mph(Canada: 50 km/h). Drive program S is

activated. SPORT handling mode remainsactivated.RACE START is deactivated immediately ifyou release the accelerator pedal duringRACE START or if any of the activationconditions are no longer fulfilled. The RACERACESTART Not PossibleSTART Not Possible or RACE STARTRACE STARTCanceledCanceled message appears in themultifunction display.

i If RACE START is used repeatedly withina short period of time, it is only availableagain after the vehicle has been driven acertain distance.

4MATIC4MATIC ensures that all four wheels arepermanently driven. Together with ESP®, itimproves the traction of your vehiclewhenever a drive wheel spins due toinsufficient grip.If you fail to adapt your driving style, 4MATICcan neither reduce the risk of accident noroverride the laws of physics. 4MATIC cannottake account of road, weather and trafficconditions. 4MATIC is only an aid. You areresponsible for the distance to the vehicle infront, for vehicle speed, for braking in goodtime and for staying in your lane.If a drive wheel spins due to insufficient grip:ROnly depress the accelerator pedal as faras necessary when pulling away.RAccelerate less when driving.

! Never tow the vehicle with one axleraised. This may damage the transfer case.Damage of this sort is not covered by theMercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. Allwheels must remain either on the groundor be fully raised. Observe the instructionsfor towing the vehicle with all wheels in fullcontact with the ground.

i In wintry driving conditions, themaximumeffect of 4MATIC can only be achieved ifyou use winter tires (M+S tires), with snowchains if necessary.

178 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

PARKTRONIC

Important safety notesPARKTRONIC is an electronic parking aid withultrasonic sensors. It monitors the areaaround your vehicle using six sensors in thefront bumper and six sensors in the rearbumper. PARKTRONIC indicates visually andaudibly the distance between your vehicleand an object.PARKTRONIC is only an aid. It is not areplacement for your attention to yourimmediate surroundings. You are alwaysresponsible for safe maneuvering, parkingand exiting a parking space. Whenmaneuvering, parking or pulling out of aparking space, make sure that there are nopersons, animals or objects in the area inwhich you are maneuvering.

! When parking, pay particular attention toobjects above or below the sensors, suchas flower pots or trailer drawbars.PARKTRONIC does not detect such objectswhen they are in the immediate vicinity ofthe vehicle. You could damage the vehicleor the objects.The sensorsmay not detect snow and otherobjects that absorb ultrasonic waves.Ultrasonic sources such as an automaticcar wash, the compressed-air brakes on atruck or a pneumatic drill could causePARKTRONIC to malfunction.PARKTRONICmay not function correctly onuneven terrain.

PARKTRONIC is activated automatically whenyou:Rswitch on the ignitionRshift the transmission to position D, R or NRrelease the electric parking brakePARKTRONIC is deactivated at speeds above11 mph (18 km/h). It is reactivated at lowerspeeds.

Range of the sensors

General notesPARKTRONIC does not take objects intoconsideration that are:Rbelow the detection range, e.g. people,animals or objectsRabove the detection range, e.g.overhanging loads, truck overhangs orloading ramps.

: Sensors in the front bumper, left-handside (example)

Side view

Top view

The sensors must be free from dirt, ice orslush. They can otherwise not functioncorrectly. Clean the sensors regularly, taking

Driving systems 179

Drivingandparking

Z

care not to scratch or damage them(Y page 295).

Front sensors

Center Approx. 40in (approx.100cm)

Corners Approx. 24in (approx.60cm)

Rear sensors

Center Approx. 48 in (approx.120 cm)

Corners Approx. 32in (approx.80cm)

Minimum distance

Center Approx. 8in (approx. 20cm)

Corners Approx. 8in (approx. 20cm)

If there is an obstacle within this range, therelevant warning displays light up and awarning tone sounds. If the distance fallsbelow the minimum, the distance may nolonger be shown.

Warning displaysThe warning displays show the distancebetween the sensors and the obstacle. Thewarning display for the front area is locatedon the dashboard above the center air vents.The warning display for the rear area islocated on the headliner in the rearcompartment.

Warning display for the front area: Segments on the left-hand side of the

vehicle; Segments on the right-hand side of the

vehicle= Segments showing operational readiness

The warning display for each side of thevehicle is divided into five yellow and two redsegments. PARKTRONIC is operational ifyellow segments showing operationalreadiness= light up.The selected transmission position and thedirection in which the vehicle is rollingdetermine which warning display is activewhen the engine is running.

Transmissionposition

Warning display

D Front area activated

R, N or the vehicleis rollingbackwards

Rear and front areasactivated

P No areas activated

One or more segments light up as the vehicleapproaches an obstacle, depending on thevehicle's distance from the obstacle.From the:Rsixth segment onwards, you will hear anintermittent warning tone forapproximately two seconds.Rseventh segment onwards, you will hear awarning tone for approximately two

180 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

seconds. This indicates that you have nowreached the minimum distance.

Deactivating/activating PARKTRONIC

: Indicator lamp; To deactivate/activate PARKTRONIC

If indicator lamp: lights up, PARKTRONIC isdeactivated.

i PARKTRONIC is automatically activatedwhen you turn the SmartKey to position 2in the ignition lock.

Driving systems 181

Drivingandparking

Z

Problems with PARKTRONIC

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

Only the red segmentsin the PARKTRONICwarning displays are lit.You also hear a warningtone for approximatelytwo seconds.PARKTRONIC is thendeactivated and theindicator lamp on thePARKTRONIC buttonlights up.

PARKTRONIC has malfunctioned and has switched off.X If problems persist, have PARKTRONIC checked at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

Only the red segmentsin the PARKTRONICwarning displays are lit.PARKTRONIC is thendeactivated.

The PARKTRONIC sensors are dirty or there is interference.X Clean the PARKTRONIC sensors (Y page 295).X Switch the ignition back on.

The problem may be caused by an external source of radio orultrasound waves.X See if PARKTRONIC functions in a different location.

Active Parking Assist

General notesActive Parking Assist is an electronic parkingaid with ultrasound. It measures the road onboth sides of the vehicle. A parking symbolindicates a suitable parking space. Activesteering intervention can assist you duringmaneuvering and parking. You may also usePARKTRONIC (Y page 179).

Important safety notesActive Parking Assist is merely an aid. It is nota replacement for your attention to yourimmediate surroundings. You are alwaysresponsible for safe maneuvering, parkingand exiting a parking space. Make sure thatno persons, animals or objects are in themaneuvering range.When PARKTRONIC is switched off, ActiveParking Assist is also unavailable.

G WARNINGWhile parking or pulling out of a parkingspace, the vehicle swings out and can driveonto areas of the oncoming lane. This couldresult in a collision with another road user.There is a risk of an accident.Pay attention to other road users. Stop thevehicle if necessary or cancel the ActiveParking Assist parking procedure.

! If unavoidable, you should drive overobstacles such as curbs slowly and not ata sharp angle. Otherwise, you may damagethe wheels or tires.

Active Parking Assist may possibly indicateparking spaces which are not suitable forparking, for example:Rwhere parking or stopping is prohibitedRin front of driveways or entrances and exitsRon unsuitable surfaces

182 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

Parking tips:ROn narrow roads, drive as close to theparking space as possible.RParking spaces that are littered orovergrownmight be identified or measuredincorrectly.RParking spaces that are partially occupiedby trailer drawbars might not be identifiedas such or be measured incorrectly.RSnowfall or heavy rainmay lead to a parkingspace being measured inaccurately.RPay attention to the PARKTRONIC(Y page 180) warning messages during theparking procedure.RYou can intervene in the steering procedureto correct it at any time. Active ParkingAssist will then be canceled.RWhen transporting a load which protrudesfrom your vehicle, you should not useActive Parking Assist.RNever use Active Parking Assist when snowchains are installed.RMake sure that the tire pressures arealways correct. This has a direct influenceon the parking characteristics of thevehicle.

Use Active Parking Assist for parking spaces:Rthat are parallel or at right-angles to thedirection of travelRthat are on straight roads, not bendsRthat are on the same level as the road, e.g.not on the pavement

Detecting parking spacesObjects located above the height range ofActive Parking Assist will not be detectedwhen the parking space is measured. Theseare not taken into account when the parkingprocedure is calculated, e.g. overhangingloads, tail sections or loading ramps of goodsvehicles.

G WARNINGIf there are objects above the detection range,Active Parking Assist may turn prematurely.You may cause a collision as a result. There isa risk of an accident.If there are objects above the detection range,stop and deactivate Active Parking Assist.

For further information on the detectionrange (Y page 179).Active Parking Assist does not support youwith parking spaces at right-angles to thedirection of travel if:Rtwo parking spaces are located directlynext to one anotherRthe parking space is directly next to a lowobstacle such as a low curbRyou park forwardsActive Parking Assist does not support youwith parking spaces that are parallel or atright-angles to the direction of travel if:Rthe parking space is on a curbRthe parking space is apparently blocked,for example by foliage or grass pavingblocksRthe range of movement is too smallRthe parking space is bordered by anobstacle which is not clearly defined suchas a tree or a trailer

: Detected parking space on the left; Parking symbol= Detected parking space on the right

Active Parking Assist is automaticallyactivated when driving forwards. The systemis operational at speeds of up toapproximately 22 mph (35 km/h). While inoperation, the system independently locates

Driving systems 183

Drivingandparking

Z

and measures parking spaces on both sidesof the vehicle.Active Parking Assist will only detect parkingspaces:Rthat are parallel or at right-angles to thedirection of travelRthat are parallel to the direction of traveland at least 59 in (1.5 m) wideRthat are parallel to the direction of traveland at least 39.5 in (1.0m) longer than yourvehicleRthat are at right angles to the direction oftravel and at least 39.5 in (1.0 m) widerthan your vehicle

i In the case of parking spaces that are atright angles to the direction of travel,please ensure that the parking space islong enough to accommodate your vehicle.

When driving at speeds below 19 mph(30 km/h), you will see parking symbol as astatus indicator in the instrument cluster.When a parking space has been detected, anarrow towards the right or the left alsoappears. By default, Active Parking Assistonly displays parking spaces on the front-passenger side. Parking spaces on thedriver's side are displayed as soon as the turnsignal on the driver's side is activated. Whenparking on the driver's side, this must remainswitched on until you acknowledge the use ofActive Parking Assist by pressing theabutton on the multifunction steering wheel.The system automatically determineswhether the parking space is parallel or atright-angles to the direction of travel.A parking space is displayed while you aredriving past it, and until you areapproximately 50 ft (15 m) away from it.

Parking

G WARNINGActive Parking Assist merely aids you byintervening actively in the steering. If you donot brake there is a risk of an accident.

Always apply the brakes yourself whenmaneuvering and parking.

X Stop the vehicle when the parking spacesymbol shows the desired parking space inthe instrument cluster.

X Shift the transmission to position R.The Start Park Assist? Yes: OK No:Start Park Assist? Yes: OK No:%message appears in themultifunctiondisplay.

X To cancel the procedure: press the% button on the multifunction steeringwheel or pull away.

orX To park using Active Parking Assist:press thea button on the multifunctionsteering wheel.The Park Assist Active AcceleratePark Assist Active Accelerateand Brake Observe Surroundingsand Brake Observe Surroundingsmessage appears in the multifunctiondisplay.

X Let go of the multifunction steering wheel.X Back up the vehicle, being ready to brakeat all times. Do not exceed a maximumspeed of approximately 5 mph (10 km/h)when backing up. Otherwise Active ParkingAssist will be canceled.i In tight parking spaces, you will achievethe best parking results by backing up asfar as possible. When doing so, alsoobserve the PARKTRONIC messages.

X Stop as soon as PARKTRONIC sounds thecontinuous warning tone, if not before.Maneuvering may be required in tightparking spaces.

The Park Assist Active Select DPark Assist Active Select DObserveObserve SurroundingsSurroundingsmessage appears inthe multifunction display.X Shift the transmission to position D whilethe vehicle is stationary.Active Parking Assist immediately steers inthe other direction.The Park Assist Active AcceleratePark Assist Active Accelerateand Brake Observe Surroundingsand Brake Observe Surroundings

184 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

message appears in the multifunctiondisplay.i You will achieve the best results bywaiting for the steering procedure tocomplete before pulling away.

X Drive forwards and be ready to brake at alltimes.

X Stop as soon as PARKTRONIC sounds thecontinuous warning tone, if not before.

The Park Assist Active Select RPark Assist Active Select RObserveObserve SurroundingsSurroundingsmessage appears inthe multifunction display.Further transmission shifts may benecessary.As soon as the parking procedure iscomplete, the Park Assist FinishedPark Assist Finishedmessage appears and a warning tone sounds.Active Parking Assist no longer supports youwith steering interventions. When ActiveParking Assist is finished, you must steeragain yourself. PARKTRONIC is still available.X Maneuver if necessary.X Always observe the warning messagesdisplayed by PARKTRONIC (Y page 180).

Parking tips:RThe way your vehicle is positioned in theparking space after parking is dependenton various factors. These include theposition and shape of the vehicles parkedin front and behind it and the conditions ofthe location. It may be the case that ActiveParking Assist guides you too far into aparking space, or not far enough into it. Insome cases, it may also lead you across oronto the curb. If necessary, you shouldcancel the parking procedure with ActiveParking Assist.RYou can also engage forward gearprematurely. The vehicle redirects anddoes not drive as far into the parking space.Should a gear be changed too early, theparking procedure will be canceled. Asensible parking position can no longer beachieved from this position.

Exiting a parking spaceIn order that Active Parking Assist cansupport you when you exit the parking space:Rthe border of the parking space must behigh enough. A curb is too small, forexample.Rthe border of the parking space must notbe too wide, as the position of the vehiclemust not exceed an angle of 45° to thestarting position as it is maneuvering intothe parking space.Ra maneuvering distance of at least 3.3 ft(1.0 m) must be available.

Active Parking Assist can only assist you withexiting a parking space if you have parked thevehicle parallel to the direction of travel usingActive Parking Assist.X Start the engine.X Switch on the turn signal in the directionyou are pulling away.

X Shift the transmission to position D or R.The Start Park Assist? Yes: OK No:Start Park Assist? Yes: OK No:%message appears in the multifunctiondisplay.

X To cancel the procedure: press the% button on the multifunction steeringwheel or pull away.

orX To exit a parking space using ActiveParking Assist: press thea button onthe multifunction steering wheel.The Park Assist Active AcceleratePark Assist Active Accelerateand Brake Observe Surroundingsand Brake Observe Surroundingsmessage appears in the multifunctiondisplay.

X Let go of the multifunction steering wheel.X Reverse the vehicle or drive forwards, beingready to brake at all times. Do not exceeda maximum speed of approximately6 mph (10 km/h) when exiting a parkingspace. Otherwise Active Parking Assist willbe canceled.

X Stop when PARKTRONIC sounds thecontinuous warning tone, if not before.

Driving systems 185

Drivingandparking

Z

X Shift the transmission to position D or R asrequired while the vehicle is stationary.Active Parking Assist immediately steers inthe other direction. The Park AssistPark AssistActive Accelerate and BrakeActive Accelerate and BrakeObserveObserve SurroundingsSurroundingsmessage appearsin the multifunction display.i You will achieve the best results bywaiting for the steering procedure tocomplete before pulling away.If you back up after activation, the steeringwheel is moved to the straight-aheadposition.

X Drive forwards and back up as prompted bythe PARKTRONIC warning displays, severaltimes if necessary.

X Stop as soon as PARKTRONIC sounds thecontinuous warning tone, if not before.

Once you have exited the parking spacecompletely, the steering wheel is moved tothe straight-ahead position. You hear a toneand the message Park Assist FinishedPark Assist Finishedappears in the multifunction display. You willthen have to steer and merge into traffic onyour own. PARKTRONIC is still available. Youcan take over the steering, before the vehiclehas exited the parking space completely. Thisis useful, for example when you recognizethat it is already possible to pull out of theparking space.

Canceling Active Parking AssistYou can cancel Active Parking Assist at anytime.X Stop the movement of the multifunctionsteering wheel or steer yourself.Active Parking Assist will be canceled atonce. The Park Assist CanceledPark Assist Canceledmessage appears in the multifunctiondisplay.

orX Press the PARKTRONIC button on thecenter console (Y page 181).PARKTRONIC is switched off and ActiveParking Assist is immediately canceled.

The Park Assist CanceledPark Assist Canceled messageappears in the multifunction display.

Active Parking Assist is canceledautomatically if:Rthe electric parking brake is engagedRtransmission position P is selectedRparking using Active Parking Assist is nolonger possibleRyou are driving faster than 6 mph(10 km/h)Ra wheel spins, ESP® intervenes or fails. The

÷ warning lamp lights up in theinstrument cluster.

A warning tone sounds. The parking symboldisappears and the multifunction displayshows the Park Assist CanceledPark Assist Canceledmessage.If Active Parking Assist is canceled, you muststeer again yourself.

Rear view camera

General notes

Rear view camera: is in the trunk lid handle.The rear view camera is an optical parking andmaneuvering aid. It uses guide lines to showthe area behind your vehicle in the Audio/COMAND display.The area behind the vehicle is displayed as amirror image, as in the rear view mirror.The rear view camera is protected fromraindrops and dust by means of a flap. Whenthe rear view camera is activated, this flap

186 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

opens. Only once the maneuvering processhas been completed and the rear view camerahas switched off does the flap close again. Fortechnical reasons, the flap may remain openbriefly after the rear view camera has beendeactivated. If you switch off the engine, theflap will also close.

i The text of messages shown in theCOMAND display depends on the languagesetting. The following are examples of rearview camera messages in the COMANDdisplay.

Observe the notes on cleaning(Y page 295).

Important safety notesThe rear view camera is only an aid. It is nota replacement for your attention to yourimmediate surroundings. You are alwaysresponsible for safe maneuvering andparking. Whenmaneuvering or parking, makesure that there are no persons, animals orobjects in the area in which you aremaneuvering.Under the following circumstances, the rearview camera will not function, or will functionin a limited manner:Rthe tailgate is openRin heavy rain, snow or fogRat night or in very dark placesRif the camera is exposed to very bright lightRif the area is lit by fluorescent light or LEDlighting (the display may flicker)Rif there is a sudden change in temperature,e.g. when driving into a heated garage inwinterRif the camera lens is dirty or obstructedRif the rear of your vehicle is damaged. Inthis event, have the camera position andsetting checked at a qualified specialistworkshop

The field of vision and other functions of therear view camera may be restricted due toadditional accessories on the rear of the

vehicle (e.g. license plate holder, bicyclerack).

Activating/deactivating the rear viewcameraX To activate:make sure that the SmartKeyis in position 2 in the ignition lock.

X Make sure that in the audio system/COMAND, the "Activation by R gear"function is selected; see the separateoperating instructions for the audiosystem/COMAND.

X Engage reverse gear.Guide lines are used to show the areabehind the vehicle in the Audio/COMANDdisplay.

To deactivate: the rear view cameradeactivates if you shift the transmission to Pon vehicles with automatic transmission orafter driving forwards a short distance.

Displays in the Audio/COMAND displayThe rear view camera may show a distortedview of obstacles, show them incorrectly ornot at all. The rear view camera does not showobjects in the following positions:Rvery close to the rear bumperRunder the rear bumperRin the area immediately above the tailgatehandle

! Objects not at ground level may appear tobe further away than they actually are, e.g.:Rthe bumper of a parked vehicleRthe drawbar of a trailerRthe ball coupling of a trailer tow hitchRthe rear section of an HGVRa slanted postUse the guidelines only for orientation.Approach objects no further than thebottom-most guideline.

Driving systems 187

Drivingandparking

Z

Lanes: White guide line without turning the

steering wheel, vehicle width includingthe exterior mirrors (static)

; Yellow lane marking tires at currentsteering wheel angle, vehicle width to theouter side of the wheels (dynamic)

= Red guide line for the vehicle widthincluding the exterior mirrors, for currentsteering wheel angle (dynamic)

? Bumper

Guide lines? BumperA Red guide line at a distance of

approximately 10 in (0.25 m) from therear of the vehicle

B Yellow guide line at a distance ofapproximately 13 ft (4.0 m) from the rearof the vehicle

C Vehicle center axle (marker assistance)D Yellow guide line at a distance of

approximately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rearof the vehicle

The lanes and guide lines are only displayedif you have engaged reverse gear.The distance specifications only apply toobjects that are at ground level.

Additional displays on vehicles with PARKTRONICand COMAND: Front warning display; Additional PARKTRONIC measurement

operational readiness indicator= Rear warning display

Vehicles with PARKTRONIC andCOMAND: if PARKTRONIC is operational(Y page 179), an additional operationalreadiness indicator will appear in COMANDdisplay;.If the PARKTRONIC warningdisplays are active or light up, warningdisplays: and= are also active or light upcorrespondingly in the COMAND display.

"Reverse parking" functionX Make sure that the rear view camera isactivated and the "Reverse parking"function is selected; see the separateoperating instructions for the audiosystem/COMAND.The lane and the guide lines are shown.

188 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

Backing up straight into a parking spacewithout turning the steering wheel

: White lane with steering wheel straight; Yellow guide line at a distance of

approximately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rearof the vehicle

= Red guide line at a distance ofapproximately 10 in (0.25 m) from therear of the vehicle

X With the help of white lane:, checkwhether the vehicle will fit into the parkingspace.

X Using the white lane as a guide, carefullyback up until you reach the end position.Red guide line= is then at the end of theparking space. The vehicle is almostparallel in the parking space.

Reverse perpendicular parking with thesteering wheel at an angleX Drive past the parking space and bring thevehicle to a standstill.

Turning the steering wheel: Red lane indicating the route the vehicle

will take with the steering wheel in itscurrent position

; Parking space markingX While the vehicle is at a standstill, turn thesteering wheel in the direction of theparking space until the red lane reachesparking space marking;.

X Keep the steering wheel in that positionand back up carefully.

Backing up with the steering wheel turned: Red lane indicating the route the vehicle

will take with the steering wheel in itscurrent position

X Stop the vehicle when it is almost exactlyin front of the parking space.Thewhite lane should be as close to parallelwith the parking space marking aspossible.

Driving systems 189

Drivingandparking

Z

Driving to the final position: White lane at current steering wheel angle; Parking space markingX Turn the steering wheel to the centerposition while the vehicle is stationary.

: Red guide line at a distance ofapproximately 10 in (0.25 m) from therear of the vehicle

; White lane with steering wheel straight= End of parking spaceX Back up carefully until you have reachedthe final position.Red guide line: is then at end of parkingspace=. The vehicle is almost parallel inthe parking space.

ATTENTION ASSIST

General notesATTENTION ASSIST helps you during long,monotonous journeys, such as on highways.It is active in the range between 50 mph(80 km/h) and 112 mph (180 km/h).

If ATTENTION ASSIST detects typicalindicators of fatigue or increasing lapses inconcentration on the part of the driver, itsuggests you take a break.

Important safety notesATTENTION ASSIST is only an aid to thedriver. It might not always recognize fatigueor increasing inattentiveness in time or fail torecognize them at all. The system is not asubstitute for a well-rested and attentivedriver.ATTENTION ASSIST assesses your level offatigue or lapses in concentration by takingthe following criteria into account:Ryour personal driving style, e.g. steeringcharacteristicsRjourney details, e.g. time of day and lengthof journey

The functionality of ATTENTION ASSIST isrestricted and warnings may be delayed ornot occur at all:Rif the road condition is poor, e.g. if thesurface is uneven or if there are potholesRif there is a strong side windRif you have adopted a sporty driving stylewith high cornering speeds or high rates ofaccelerationRif you are predominantly driving slowerthan 50 mph (80 km/h) or faster than112 mph (180 km/h)Rif you are currently using COMAND ormaking a telephone call with itRif the time has been set incorrectlyRin active driving situations, such as whenyou change lanes or change your speed

Warning and display messages in themultifunction displayX Activate ATTENTION ASSIST using the on-board computer (Y page 209).TheÀ symbol appears in the assistancedisplay (Y page 207).

190 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

If ATTENTION ASSIST is active, it will notwarn you until at least 20 minutes afteryour journey has begun. You then hear anintermittent warning tone twice and theAttention Assist: DrowsinessAttention Assist: DrowsinessDetectedDetected message appears in themultifunction display.

X If necessary, take a break.X Press thea button to confirm themessage.

On long journeys, take regular breaks in goodtime to allow yourself to rest properly. If youdo not take a break, you will be warned againafter 15 minutes at the earliest. Theprecondition for this is thatATTENTION ASSIST still detects typicalindicators of fatigue or increasing lapses inconcentration.ATTENTION ASSIST is reset when youcontinue your journey and starts assessingyour tiredness again if:Ryou switch off the engine.Ryou take off your seat belt and open thedriver's door, e.g. for a change of drivers orto take a break.

Speed Limit Assist

General notesSpeed Limit Assist shows you detected speedlimits in the multifunction display. Data fromthe navigation system is also used for thispurpose. If a traffic sign indicating a speedlimit or the end of a speed limit is detected,it is shown in the multifunction display. IfSpeed Limit Assist does not detect any trafficsigns, the speed limit from the digital roadmap is used and shown in the display.Speed Limit Assist detects the traffic signswith a camera attached behind the top of thewindshield.

: Speed Limit Assist camera

Important safety notesSpeed Limit Assist is only an aid and does notalways detect traffic signs with informationabout the maximum permissible speed.Traffic signs always have priority over theSpeed Limit Assist display.The system may be impaired or may notfunction if:Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to snow,rain, fog or sprayRthere is glare, e.g. from the sun or fromoncoming trafficRthe windshield is dirty, fogged up orcovered, for instance by a sticker, in thevicinity of the cameraRthe traffic signs are covered, for instanceby dirt, snow or treesRthe traffic signs are poorly illuminatedRthere are ambiguous traffic signs, forinstance near roadworks or on multi-laneroads

Information in themultifunction displayBriefly showing detected traffic signs inthe multifunction displayX Activate the Speed Limit Assist warningfunction using the on-board computer(Y page 207).A traffic sign indicating a speed limit or theend of a speed limit appears in themultifunction display for around fiveseconds as soon as it is detected. Any other

Driving systems 191

Drivingandparking

Z

information in the multifunction display ishidden for this period.

: Maximum permissible speed (example); Maximum permissible speed for vehicles

subject to the restriction in the additionalsign (example)

= Additional character in fog? Speed Limit Assist is available and

switched onPermanently showing detected trafficsigns in the multifunction displayX Display the assistance graphic using theon-board computer (Y page 207).A traffic sign indicating a speed limit or theend of a speed limit appears in themultifunction display as soon as it isdetected.

Traffic sign: indicating a speed limit isgenerally displayed until:Ra traffic sign indicating the end of the speedlimit is detected.Ryou make a turn.Ryou leave or enter a city.Rthe road type changes (e.g. highway,country road).Ryou have traveled a certain minimumdistance without the traffic sign beingrepeated or detected again.

Lane Tracking package

General notesThe Lane Tracking package consists of BlindSpot Assist (Y page 192) and Lane KeepingAssist (Y page 194).

Blind Spot Assist

General notesBlind Spot Assist uses a radar sensor systemto monitor the areas on both sides of yourvehicle. It supports you from a speed ofapproximately 20 mph (30 km/h). A warningdisplay in the exterior mirrors draws yourattention to vehicles detected in themonitored area. If you then switch on thecorresponding turn signal to change lanes,you will also receive a visual and audiblecollision warning. For this purpose, Blind SpotAssist uses sensors in the rear bumper.

Important safety notesG WARNINGBlind Spot Assist does not react to:Rvehicles overtaken too closely on the side,placing them in the blind spot areaRvehicles which approach with a large speeddifferential and overtake your vehicle

As a result, Blind Spot Assist may not givewarnings in such situations. There is a risk ofan accident.Always observe the traffic conditionscarefully, andmaintain a safe lateral distance.

Blind Spot Assist is only an aid. It may fail todetect some vehicles and is no substitute forattentive driving.

i USA only:This device has been approved by the FCCas a "Vehicular Radar System". The radarsensor is intended for use in an automotiveradar system only. Removing, tamperingwith, or altering the device will void anywarranties, and is not permitted by the

192 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

FCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use inany non-approved way.Any unauthorized modification to thisdevice could void the user’s authority tooperate the equipment.

Monitoring range of the sensorsIn particular, the detection of obstacles canbe impaired if:Rdirt on the sensors or anything elsecovering the sensorsRthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavyrain or snowRa narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. amotorbike or bicycleRthe road has very wide lanesRthe road has narrow lanesRyou are not driving in the middle of the laneRthere are barriers or similar lane bordersVehicles in the monitoring range are then notindicated.

Blind Spot Assist monitors the area up to10 ft (3.0 m) behind your vehicle and directlynext to your vehicle, as shown in the diagram.For this purpose, Blind Spot Assist uses radarsensors in the rear bumper.If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in thelane beyond the lane next to your vehicle maybe indicated, especially if the vehicles are not

driving in the middle of their lane. This maybe the case if the vehicles are driving on theinner side of their lane.Due to the nature of the system:Rwarnings may be issued in error whendriving close to crash barriers or similarsolid lane borders.Rwarnings may be interrupted when drivingalongside particularly long vehicles, e.g.trucks, for a prolonged time.

The two sensors for Blind Spot Assist areintegrated into the sides of the rear bumper.Make sure that the bumper is free of dirt, iceor slush in the vicinity of the sensors. Forexample, the radar sensors must not becovered by bicycle racks or overhangingloads. Following a severe impact or in theevent of damage to the bumpers, have thefunction of the radar sensors checked at aqualified specialist workshop. Blind SpotAssist may otherwise not work properly.

Indicator and warning displayBlind Spot Assist is not active at speeds belowapproximately 20mph (30 km/h). Vehicles inthe monitoring range are then not indicated.

: Yellow indicator lamp/red warning lamp

When Blind Spot Assist is activated, indicatorlamp: in the exterior mirrors lights upyellow at speeds of up to 20 mph (30 km/h).At speeds above 20 mph (30 km/h), theindicator lamp goes out and Blind Spot Assistis operational.If a vehicle is detected within the monitoringrange of Blind Spot Assist at speeds above

Driving systems 193

Drivingandparking

Z

20 mph (30 km/h), then warning lamp: onthe corresponding side lights up red. Thiswarning is always emitted when a vehicleenters the blind spot monitoring range frombehind or from the side. When you overtakea vehicle, the warning only occurs if thedifference in speed is less than 7 mph(12 km/h).The yellow indicator lamp goes out if reversegear is engaged. In this event, Blind SpotAssist is no longer active.The brightness of the indicator/warninglamps is adjusted automatically according tothe ambient light.

Collision warningIf a vehicle is detected in themonitoring rangeof Blind Spot Assist and you switch on thecorresponding turn signal, a double warningtone sounds. Red warning lamp: flashes. Ifthe turn signal remains on, vehicles detectedare indicated by the flashing of red warninglamp:. There are no further warning tones.

Switching on Blind Spot AssistX Make sure that Blind Spot Assist isactivated in the on-board computer(Y page 209).

X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in theignition lock.Warning lamps: in the exterior mirrorslight up red for approximately1.5 seconds and then turn yellow.

Lane Keeping Assist

General notesLane Keeping Assist monitors the area infront of your vehicle by means of a camera atthe top of thewindshield. LaneKeeping Assistdetects lane markings on the road and warnsyou before you leave your laneunintentionally.

: Lane Keeping Assist camera

If you select kmkm on the on-board computer inthe Display Unit Speed-/OdometerDisplay Unit Speed-/Odometerfunction (Y page 210), Lane Keeping Assistis active starting at a speed of 60 km/h. If themilesmiles display unit is selected, the assistancerange begins at 40 mph.

Important safety notesG WARNINGLane Keeping Assist may not always clearlyrecognize lane markings.In this case, Lane Keeping Assist may:Rgive an unnecessary warningRnot give a warningThere is a risk of an accident.Always pay particular attention to the trafficsituation and stay in lane, in particular ifwarned by Lane Keeping Assist.

G WARNINGThe Lane Keeping Assist warning does notreturn the vehicle to the original lane. Thereis a risk of an accident.You should always steer, brake or accelerateyourself, in particular if warned by LaneKeeping Assist.

If you fail to adapt your driving style, LaneKeeping Assist can neither reduce the risk ofan accident nor override the laws of physics.Lane Keeping Assist cannot take into accountthe road, traffic and weather conditions. LaneKeeping Assist is merely an aid. You areresponsible for the distance to the vehicle in

194 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

front, for vehicle speed, for braking in goodtime and for staying in your lane.The Lane Keeping Assist does not keep thevehicle in the lane.The system may be impaired or may notfunction if:Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due toinsufficient illumination of the road, or dueto snow, rain, fog or sprayRthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic,the sun or reflections (e.g. when the roadsurface is wet)Rthe windshield is dirty, fogged up, damagedor covered, for instance by a sticker, in thevicinity of the cameraRthere are no, several or unclear lanemarkings for a lane, e.g. in areas with roadconstruction workRthe lane markings are worn away, dark orcovered up, e.g. by dirt or snowRthe distance to the vehicle in front is toosmall and the lanemarkings thus cannot bedetectedRthe lane markings change quickly, e.g.lanes branch off, cross one another ormergeRthe road is narrow and windingRthere are strong shadows cast on the laneA warning may be given if a front wheelpasses over a lane marking. It will warn youby means of intermittent vibration in thesteering wheel for up to 1.5 seconds.

Switching on Lane Keeping AssistX Switch on Active Lane Keeping Assist usingthe on-board computer; to do so, selectStandardStandard or AdaptiveAdaptive(Y page 209).If you drive at speeds above 40 mph(60 km/h) and lanemarkings are detected,the lane markings in the assistancegraphics display (Y page 207) are shownin green.

When Standard is selected, no warningvibration occurs if:Ryou switch on the turn signals. In this event,the warnings are suppressed for a certainperiod of time.Ra driving safety system intervenes, such asABS, BAS or ESP®.

When Adaptive is selected, no warningvibration occurs if:Ryou switch on the turn signals. In this event,the warnings are suppressed for a certainperiod of time.Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g.ABS, BAS or ESP®.Ryou accelerate hard, e.g. kickdown.Ryou brake hard.Ryou steer actively, e.g. swerve to avoid anobstacle or change lanes quickly.Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend.In order that you are warned only whennecessary and in good time if you cross thelane marking, the system recognizes certainconditions and warns you accordingly.The warning vibration occurs earlier if:Ryou approach the outer lane marking on abend.Rthe road has very wide lanes, e.g. afreeway.Rthe system recognizes solid lane markings.The warning vibration occurs later if:Rthe road has narrow lanes.Ryou cut the corner on a bend.

Driving systems 195

Drivingandparking

Z

196

Useful information ............................ 198Important safety notes .................... 198Displays and operation .................... 198Menus and submenus ...................... 201Display messages ............................. 217Warning and indicator lamps in theinstrument cluster ............................ 247

197

On-board

computerand

displays

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optionalequipment of your vehicle available at thetime of publication of the Operator'sManual. Country-specific differences arepossible. Please note that your vehicle maynot be equipped with all featuresdescribed. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions.

i Read the information on qualifiedspecialist workshops: (Y page 25).

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you operate information systems andcommunication equipment integrated in thevehicle while driving, you will be distractedfrom traffic conditions. You could also losecontrol of the vehicle. There is a risk of anaccident.Only operate the equipment when the trafficsituation permits. If you are not sure that thisis possible, park the vehicle paying attentionto traffic conditions and operate theequipment when the vehicle is stationary.

G WARNINGIf the instrument cluster has failed ormalfunctioned, you may not recognizefunction restrictions in systems relevant tosafety. The operating safety of your vehiclemay be impaired. There is a risk of anaccident.Drive on carefully. Have the vehicle checkedat a qualified specialist workshopimmediately.

You must observe the legal requirements forthe country in which you are currently drivingwhen operating the on-board computer.The on-board computer only showsmessagesor warnings from certain systems in the

multifunction display. You should thereforemake sure your vehicle is operating safely atall times. Otherwise, a vehicle that is notoperating safely may cause an accident.For an overview, see the instrument panelillustration (Y page 31).

Displays and operation

Instrument cluster lightingThe lighting in the instrument cluster, in thedisplays and the controls in the vehicleinterior can be adjusted using the brightnesscontrol knob.The brightness control knob is located on thebottom left of the instrument cluster(Y page 31).X Turn the brightness control knob clockwiseor counter-clockwise.If the light switch is set toÃ, T orL, the brightness is dependent uponthe brightness of the ambient light.

i The light sensor in the instrument clusterautomatically controls the brightness ofthe multifunction display.In daylight, the displays in the instrumentcluster are not illuminated.

Coolant temperature display

G WARNINGOpening the hood when the engine isoverheated or when there is a fire in theengine compartment could expose you to hotgases or other service products. There is arisk of injury.Let an overheated engine cool down beforeopening the hood. If there is a fire in theengine compartment, keep the hood closedand contact the fire department.

! A display message is shown if the coolanttemperature is too high.

198 Displays and operationOn

-board

computerand

displays

If the coolant temperature is over248‡(120†), do not continue driving. Theengine will otherwise be damaged.

The coolant temperature gauge is in theinstrument cluster on the right-hand side.Under normal operating conditions and withthe specified coolant level, the coolanttemperature may rise to 248 ‡(120 †).

Tachometer! Do not drive in the overrevving range, asthis could damage the engine.

The red band in the tachometer indicates theengine's overrevving range.The fuel supply is interrupted to protect theengine when the red band is reached.

Outside temperature displayYou should pay special attention to roadconditions when temperatures are aroundfreezing point.The outside temperature display is in themultifunction display.Changes in the outside temperature aredisplayed after a short delay.

Speedometer with segmentsThe speedometer is divided into segments onvehicles with DISTRONIC PLUS.The segments in the speedometer indicatewhich speed range is available.RCruise control activated (Y page 166):The segments light up from the storedspeed to the maximum speed.RDISTRONIC PLUS activated (Y page 168):One or two segments in the set speedrange light up.RDISTRONIC PLUS detects a vehicle in front:

The segments between the speed of thevehicle in front and the stored speed lightup.

Operating the on-board computer

Overview

: Multifunction display; Switches on the Voice Control System;

see the separate operating instructions= Right control panel? Left control panelA Back buttonX To activate the on-board computer: turnthe SmartKey to position 1 in the ignitionlock.

You can control the multifunction display andthe settings in the on-board computer usingthe buttons on the multifunction steeringwheel.

Displays and operation 199

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Left control panel

=

;

RCalls up the menu and menu bar

9

:

Press briefly:RScrolls in listsRSelects a submenu or functionRIn the AudioAudio menu: selects astored station, an audio track ora video sceneRIn the TelTel(telephone) menu:switches to the phone book andselects a name or telephonenumber

9

:

Press and hold:RIn the AudioAudio menu: selects theprevious/next station or selectsan audio track or a video sceneusing rapid scrollingRIn the TelTel (Telephone) menu,starts rapid scrolling through thephone book

a RConfirms a selection/displaymessageRIn the TelTel (telephone) menu:switches to the telephone bookand starts dialing the selectednumberRIn the AudioAudio menu: stops thestation search function at thedesired station

Right control panel

~ RRejects or ends a callRExits phone book/redialmemory

6 RMakes or accepts a callRSwitches to the redial memory

WX

RAdjusts the volume

8 RMute

Back button

% Press briefly:RBackRSwitches off the Voice ControlSystem; see the separateoperating instructionsRHides display messages/callsup the last TripTrip menu functionusedRExits the telephone book/redialmemory

% Press and hold:RCalls up the standard display inthe TripTrip menu

Multifunction display

: Permanent display: outside temperatureor speed (Y page 210)

; Time= Text field? Menu bar

200 Displays and operationOn

-board

computerand

displays

A Drive program (Y page 147)B Transmission position (Y page 147)X To show menu bar?: press the=or; button on the steering wheel.

Menu bar? disappears after a few seconds.Text field= shows the selected menu orsubmenu as well as display messages.

i You can set the time using the audiosystem or COMAND, see the separateoperating instructions.

The following messages may appear in themultifunction display:Z Shift recommendation

(Y page 152)XjY Active Parking Assist (Y page 182)CRUISECRUISE Cruise control (Y page 166)_ Adaptive Highbeam Assist

(Y page 112)¤ ECO start/stop function

(Y page 143)ë HOLD function (Y page 176)

Menus and submenus

Menu overviewOperating the on-board computer(Y page 199).Depending on the equipment installed in thevehicle, you can call up the following menus:RTripTrip menu (Y page 201)RNaviNavi menu (navigation instructions)(Y page 203)RAudioAudio menu (Y page 204)RTelTel (telephone) menu (Y page 205)RDriveAssistDriveAssist (Assistance) menu(Y page 207)RServ.Serv. menu (Y page 209)RSett.Sett. menu (Y page 209)RAMGAMG menu in AMG vehicles (Y page 213)

The AudioAudio, NaviNavi and TelTelmenus differ slightlyin vehicles with Audio 20 and in vehicles withCOMAND. The examples given in thisOperator's Manual apply to vehiclesequipped with COMAND.

Trip menu

Standard display

X Press and hold the% button on thesteering wheel until the TripTrip menu withtrip odometer: and odometer; isshown.

Trip computer "From Start" or "FromReset"

Example: trip computer "From Start": Distance; Time= Average speed? Average fuel consumptionX Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the TripTrip menu.

X Press the9 or: button to selectAfter StartAfter Start or After ResetAfter Reset.

The values in the From StartFrom Start submenu arecalculated from the start of a journey, whilethe values in the From ResetFrom Reset submenu arecalculated from the last time the submenuwas reset (Y page 202).

Menus and submenus 201

On-board

computera

nddisplays

Z

The From StartFrom Start trip computer isautomatically reset when:Rthe ignition has been switched off for morethan four hours.R999 hours have been exceeded.R9,999 miles have been exceeded.The From ResetFrom Reset trip computer isautomatically reset if the value exceeds9,999 hours or 99,999 miles.

ECO display

Example: ECO displayX Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the TripTrip menu.

X Press9 or: to select ECOECODISPLAYDISPLAY.

If the ignition remains switched off for longerthan four hours, the ECO display will beautomatically reset.For further information on the ECO display,see (Y page 161).

Displaying the range and current fuelconsumption

X Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the TripTrip menu.

X Press the9 or: button to selectcurrent fuel consumption; (not for AMGvehicles) and approximate range:.

Approximate range: is calculatedaccording to the current driving style and theamount of fuel in the tank. If there is only asmall amount of fuel left in the fuel tank, thedisplay shows a vehicle being refueledCinstead of range:.

Digital speedometer

: Shift recommendation (Y page 152); Digital speedometer

Gearshift recommendation: is not given onAMG vehicles.X Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the TripTrip menu.

X Press the9 or: button to select thedigital speedometer.

Resetting values

Example: resetting the trip computer "From Start"

You can reset the values of the followingfunctions:RTrip odometerR"From Start" trip computerR"From Reset" trip computerRECO displayX Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the TripTrip menu.

X Press the9 or: button to select thefunction that you wish to reset.

202 Menus and submenusOn

-board

computerand

displays

X Press thea button.X Press the: button to select YesYes andpressa to confirm.

i When you reset the values in the "ECOdisplay", the values in the trip computer"From Start" are likewise reset. When youreset the values in the trip computer "FromStart", the values in the "ECO display"arelikewise reset.

Navigation system menu

Displaying navigation instructionsX Switch on the audio system or COMAND;see the separate operating instructions.

X Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the NaviNavi menu.

In the NaviNavi menu, the multifunction displayshows navigation instructions. For moreinformation, see the separate operatinginstructions.

Route guidance not active

: Direction of travel; Current road

Route guidance active

No change of direction announced

: Distance to the destination; Distance to the next change of direction= Current road? "Follow the road's course" symbol

Change of direction announced without alane recommendation

: Road into which the change of directionleads

; Distance to change of direction and visualdistance display

= Symbol for change of direction

When a change of direction is announced, youwill see symbol= for the change of directionand distance graphic;. The distanceindicator shortens towards the top of thedisplay as you approach the point of theannounced change of direction.

Menus and submenus 203

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Change of direction announced with alane recommendation

: Road into which the change of directionleads

; Distance to change of direction and visualdistance display

= Lane recommendation? New lane during a change of directionA Uninterrupted laneB Symbol for change of direction

On multilane roads, the system can displaylane recommendation= for the next changeof direction. During the change of direction,additional lanes may be displayed.Lane recommendations are only displayed ifthe relevant data is available on the digitalmap.

Other status indicators of thenavigation systemRO: you have reached the destination or anintermediate destination.RNew Route...New Route... or Calculating RouteCalculating Route:calculating a new routeROff MapOff Map or OffOff MappedMapped RoadRoad: the vehicleposition is outside the area of the digitalmap (off-map position).RNo RouteNo Route: no route could be calculated tothe selected destination.

Audio menu

Selecting a radio station

: Waveband; Station frequency with memory position

i The memory position is only displayedalong with station; if this has beenstored.

X Switch on the audio system or COMANDand select Radio; see the separateoperating instructions.

X Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the AudioAudio menu.

X To select a stored station: briefly pressthe9 or: button.

X To select a station from the stationlist: press and briefly hold the9or: button.

If no station list is received:X To select a station using the stationsearch: press and briefly hold the9or: button.

i For information on changing wavebandand storing stations, see the separateoperating instructions.

i SIRIUS XM satellite radio functions like anormal radio.For more information on satellite radiooperation, see the separate operatinginstructions.

204 Menus and submenusOn

-board

computerand

displays

Operating an audio player or audiomedia

CD changer display (example): Current CD in the CD changer; Current title

Audio data from various audio devices ormedia can be played, depending on theequipment installed in the vehicle.X Switch on the audio system or COMANDand activate audio CD/DVD mode or MP3mode; see the separate operatinginstructions.

X Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the AudioAudio menu.

X To select the next/previous track:briefly press the9 or: button.

X To select a track from the track list(rapid scrolling): press and hold the9 or: button until desiredtrack; has been reached.If you press and hold9 or:, therapid scrolling speed is increased. Not allaudio drives or data carriers support thisfunction.

If track information is stored on the audiodevice or medium, the multifunction displaywill show the number and title of the track.The current track does not appear in audioAUX mode (Auxiliary audio mode: externalaudio source connected).

Video DVD operation

DVD changer display (example): Current DVD; Current sceneX Switch on COMAND and select video DVD;see the separate operating instructions.

X Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the AudioAudio menu.

X To select the next/previous scene:briefly press the9 or: button.

X To select a scene from the scene list(rapid scrolling): press and hold the9 or: button until desired scenehas been reached.

Telephone menu

Introduction

G WARNINGIf you operate information systems andcommunication equipment integrated in thevehicle while driving, you will be distractedfrom traffic conditions. You could also losecontrol of the vehicle. There is a risk of anaccident.Only operate the equipment when the trafficsituation permits. If you are not sure that thisis possible, park the vehicle paying attentionto traffic conditions and operate theequipment when the vehicle is stationary.

When telephoning, you must observe thelegal requirements for the country in whichyou are currently driving.

Menus and submenus 205

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

X Switch on your mobile phone and audiosystem or COMAND, see the separateoperating instructions.

X Establish a Bluetooth® connection to theaudio system or COMAND; see theseparate operating instructions.

X Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the TelTel menu.

You will see one of the following displaymessages in the multifunction display:RPhone READYPhone READY or the name of the networkprovider: the mobile phone has found anetwork and is ready to receive.RTelephone No ServiceTelephone No Service: there is nonetwork available or the mobile phone issearching for a network.

Accepting a call

Example: incoming callX Press the6 button on the steeringwheel to accept an incoming call.

If someone calls you when you are in theTelTel menu, a display message appears in themultifunction display.If you are not in the TelTel menu, you can stillaccept a call.

Rejecting or ending a callX Press the~ button on the steeringwheel.

If you are not in the TelTel menu, you can stillreject or end a call.

Dialing an entry from the phone bookX Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the TelTel menu.

X Press the9,: ora button toswitch to the phone book.

X Press the9 or: button to select thedesired name.To start scrolling rapidly, press and hold the9 or: button for longer than onesecond.Rapid scrolling stops when you release thebutton or reach the end of the list.

X If only one telephone number is storedfor a name: press the6 ora buttonto start dialing.

orX If there is more than one number for aparticular name: press the6 orabutton to display the numbers.

X Press the9 or: button to select thenumber you want to dial.

X Press the6 ora button to startdialing.

orX If you do not want to make a call: pressthe~ or% button.

RedialingThe on-board computer saves the last namesor numbers dialed in the redial memory.X Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the TelTel menu.

X Press the6 button to switch to theredial memory.

X Press the9 or: button to select thedesired name or number.

X Press the6 ora button to startdialing.

orX If you do not want to make a call: pressthe~ or% button.

206 Menus and submenusOn

-board

computera

nddisplays

Assistance menu

Introduction

In the DriveAssistDriveAssist menu, you have thefollowing options:RDisplaying the assistance graphicRShowing Speed Limit Assist andactivating/deactivating its messagefunctionRActivating/deactivating ESP®RActivating/deactivating the distancewarning functionRActivating/deactivating COLLISIONPREVENTION ASSIST PLUSRActivating/deactivating ATTENTIONASSISTRActivating/deactivating Blind Spot AssistRActivating/deactivating Lane KeepingAssist

Assistance graphicX Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the DriveAssistDriveAssistmenu.

X Press9 or: to select AssistanceAssistanceGraphicGraphic.

X Press thea button.The multifunction display shows theDISTRONIC PLUS distance display in theassistance graphic (Y page 174).

The assistance graphic can display the statusof and information fromother driving systemsor driving safety systems.

The assistance graphic shows:RtheÀ symbol, when ATTENTIONASSIST(Y page 190) is activated.Rthe lanemarkings as bright lineswhen LaneKeeping Assist (Y page 194) is activated.RtheÄ symbol, when Speed Limit Assist(Y page 191) is activated.The assistance graphic can also displaytraffic signs that are detected and indicatespeed limits.RtheÄ symbol when the distancewarning function (Y page 65) is activated.RtheÄ symbol when COLLISIONPREVENTION ASSIST PLUS (Y page 67) isactivated.

Speed Limit Assist

Displaying Speed Limit AssistX Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the DriveAssistDriveAssistmenu.

X Press the9 or: button to selectSpeed Lim. AssistSpeed Lim. Assist.

X Press thea button.Under certain conditions (Y page 191),detected speed limits are shown in themultifunction display.

Activating/deactivating the Speed LimitAssist message functionX Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the DriveAssistDriveAssistmenu.

X Press the9 or: button to selectSpeed Lim. AssistSpeed Lim. Assist.

X Press thea button.The multifunction display shows SpeedLimit Assist.

X Press the: button.The current selection is displayed.

X To activate or deactivate: pressa.If the Speed Limit Assist message functionis activated, a detected speed limit is

Menus and submenus 207

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

automatically displayed for five seconds.Other items in themultifunction display aresuppressed during this time.When Speed Limit Assist is operational andthe message function is activated, theassistance graphic shows theÄsymbol.

Deactivating/activating ESP®

i Observe the "Important safety notes"section in the description of ESP(Y page 68).

G WARNINGIf you deactivate ESP®, ESP® no longerstabilizes the vehicle. There is an increasedrisk of skidding and an accident.Only deactivate ESP® in the situationsdescribed in the following.

It may be best to deactivate ESP® in thefollowing situations:Rwhen using snow chainsRin deep snowRon sand or gravelActivating/deactivating ESP® on AMGvehicles (Y page 69).For further information about ESP®, see(Y page 68).X Start the engine.X Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the DriveAssistDriveAssistmenu.

X Press the9 or: button to selectESPESP.

X Press thea button.The current selection is displayed.

X To activate/deactivate: press theabutton again.ESP® is deactivated if the å warninglamp in the instrument cluster lights upcontinuously when the engine is running.

If the ÷ warning lamp and the åwarning lamp are lit continuously, ESP® is notavailable due to a malfunction.Observe the information on warning lamps(Y page 251).Observe the information on displaymessages(Y page 218).

Switching the distance warningfunction on and offX Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the DriveAssistDriveAssistmenu.

X Press9 or: to select DistanceDistanceWarningWarning.

X Press thea button.The current selection is displayed.

X To activate/deactivate: press theabutton again.

When the distance warning function isactivated, the assistance graphic shows theÄ symbol in the multifunction display.Further information on the distance warningfunction (Y page 65).

Activating/deactivating COLLISIONPREVENTION ASSIST PLUSX Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the DriveAssistDriveAssistmenu.

X Press the9 or: button to selectCollision Prevent. AssistCollision Prevent. Assist.

X Press thea button.The current selection is displayed.

X To activate/deactivate: press theabutton again.

If COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS isdeactivated, the assistance graphic showstheÄ symbol in the multifunction display.For further information about COLLISIONPREVENTION ASSIST PLUS, see (Y page 67).

208 Menus and submenusOn

-board

computerand

displays

Activating/deactivating ATTENTIONASSISTX Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the DriveAssistDriveAssistmenu.

X Press9 or: to select AttentionAttentionAssistAssist.

X Press thea button.The current selection is displayed.

X To activate/deactivate: press theabutton again.

When ATTENTION ASSIST (Y page 190) isactivated, the assistance graphic shows theÀ symbol in the multifunction display.

Activating/deactivating Blind SpotAssistX Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the DriveAssistDriveAssistmenu.

X Press the9 or: button to selectBlind Spot AssistBlind Spot Assist.

X Press thea button.The current selection is displayed.

X To activate/deactivate: press theabutton again.

For further information about Blind SpotAssist, see (Y page 192).When the Blind Spot Assist: SensorsBlind Spot Assist: SensorsDeactivatedDeactivated message is shown, the radarsensors are deactivated.X Switch on the radar sensor system(Y page 213).

Activating/deactivating Lane KeepingAssistX Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the DriveAssistDriveAssistmenu.

X Press9 or: to select LaneLaneKeeping AssistKeeping Assist.

X Press thea button.The current selection is displayed.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to set OffOff,StandardStandard or AdaptiveAdaptive.

X Press thea button to save the setting.When Lane Keeping Assist is activated, themultifunction display shows the lanemarkings as bright lines in the assistancegraphic.

For further information about Lane KeepingAssist, see (Y page 194).

Maintenance menu

In the ServServ menu, you have the followingoptions:RCalling up display messages in messagememory (Y page 217)RChecking the tire pressure electronically(Y page 326)Restarting the tire pressure loss warningsystem (Canada only) (Y page 325)RCalling up the service due date(Y page 290)

Settings menu

Introduction

Menus and submenus 209

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

In the Sett.Sett. menu, you have the followingoptions:RChanging the instrument cluster settingsRChanging the light settingsRChanging the vehicle settingsRChanging the convenience settingsRRestoring the factory settings

Instrument cluster

Selecting the unit of measurement fordistanceYou can determine whether the multifunctiondisplay shows some messages in miles orkilometers.X Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the Sett.Sett. menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theInstrument ClusterInstrument Cluster submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select theDisplay Unit Speed-/Odometer:Display Unit Speed-/Odometer:function.You will see the selected setting kmkm ormilesmiles.

X Press thea button to save the setting.

The selected unit of measurement fordistance applies to:Rthe digital speedometer in the TripTrip menuRthe odometer and the trip odometerRthe trip computerRthe current consumption and the rangeRthe navigation instructions in the NaviNavimenuRcruise controlRDISTRONIC PLUSRASSYST PLUS service interval display

Switching the additional speedometeron/offThe Additional Speedometer [km/h]:Additional Speedometer [km/h]: orAdditionalAdditional SpeedometerSpeedometer [mph]:[mph]: functionallows you to choose whether the status area

in the multifunction display always shows thespeed in km/hkm/h or in mphmph instead of the outsidetemperature.X Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the Sett.Sett. menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theInstrument ClusterInstrument Cluster submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press: or9 to select theAdditional Speedometer [km/h]:Additional Speedometer [km/h]: orAdditional Speedometer [mph]Additional Speedometer [mph]function.You will see the selected setting: OnOn orOffOff.

X Press thea button to save the setting.

Selecting the permanent display functionYou can determine whether the multifunctiondisplay permanently shows your speed or theoutside temperature.X Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the Sett.Sett. menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theInstrument ClusterInstrument Cluster submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select thePermanent Display:Permanent Display: function.You will see the selected setting OutsideOutsideTemperatureTemperature or AdditionalAdditionalSpeedometer [km/h]Speedometer [km/h]/AdditionalAdditionalSpeedometer [mph]Speedometer [mph].

X Press thea button to save the setting.

i The speed is displayed in km/h/mph.

Lights

Switching the daytime running lamps on/offCanada only: daytime running lamps arerequired by law. You cannot set the DaytimeDaytimeDriving LightsDriving Lights function via the on-boardcomputer.

210 Menus and submenusOn

-board

computerand

displays

X Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the Sett.Sett. menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theLightsLights submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select theDaytime Running LightsDaytime Running Lights function.If the Daytime Running LightsDaytime Running Lights functionhas been switched on, the cone of light andtheW symbol in the multifunctiondisplay are shown in orange.

X Press thea button to save the setting.

Further information on daytime runninglamps (Y page 109).

Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist on/offThis function is only available on vehicles withthe Intelligent Light System.X Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the Sett.Sett. menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theLightsLights submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select theAdaptive HighbeamAdaptive Highbeam function.If the Adaptive HighbeamAdaptive Highbeam function hasbeen switched on, the cone of light and the_ symbol in the multifunction displayare shown in orange.

X Press thea button to save the setting.

For further information about AdaptiveHighbeam Assist, see (Y page 112).

Setting the brightness of the ambientlightingX Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the Sett.Sett. menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theLightsLights submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select theAmb. Light +/-Amb. Light +/- function.You will see the selected setting.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to adjust thebrightness to any level from OffOff toLevelLevel55 (bright).

X Press thea or% button to save thesetting.

Activating/deactivating surroundlighting and exterior lighting delayedswitch-offIf you have activated the SurroundSurroundLightingLighting function and the light switch is settoÃ, the following functions are activatedwhen it is dark:Rsurround lighting: the exterior lightingremains lit for 40 seconds after unlockingwith the key. If you start the engine, thesurround lighting is switched off andautomatic headlamp mode is activated(Y page 109).Rexterior lighting delayed switch-off: theexterior lighting remains lit for60 seconds after the engine is switched off.If you close all the doors and the trunk lid,the exterior lighting goes off after15 seconds.

X Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the Sett.Sett. menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theLightsLights submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select theSurround LightingSurround Lighting function.When the Surround LightingSurround Lighting function isactivated, the light cone and the areaaround the vehicle are displayed in orangein the multifunction display.

X Press thea button to save the setting.

Menus and submenus 211

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Deactivating delayed switch-off of theexterior lighting temporarily:X Before leaving the vehicle, turn theSmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock.

X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in theignition lock.The exterior lighting delayed switch-off isdeactivated.

Delayed switch-off of the exterior lighting isreactivated the next time you start theengine.

i Depending on your vehicle's equipment,when the surround lighting and delayedswitch-off exterior lighting are on, thefollowing light up:RParking lampsRFront fog lampsRLow-beam headlampsRDaytime running lampsRSide marker lampsRSurround lighting in the exterior mirrors

Activating/deactivating the interiorlighting delayed switch-offIf you activate the Interior LightingInterior LightingDelayDelay function, the interior lighting remainson for 20 seconds after you remove the keyfrom the ignition lock.X Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the Sett.Sett. menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theLightsLights submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select theInterior Lighting DelayInterior Lighting Delay function.If the InteriorInterior LightingLighting DelayDelay functionhas been switched on, the vehicle interioris displayed in orange in the multifunctiondisplay.

X Press thea button to save the setting.

Vehicle

Activating/deactivating the automaticdoor locking mechanismX Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the Sett.Sett. menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theVehicleVehicle submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select theAutomatic Door LockAutomatic Door Lock function.When the AutomaticAutomatic DoorDoor LockLock functionis activated, the vehicle doors are displayedin orange in the multifunction display.

X Press thea button to save the setting.

If you activate the Automatic Door LockAutomatic Door Lockfunction, the vehicle is centrally locked abovea speed of around 9 mph (15 km/h).For further information on the automaticlocking feature, see (Y page 83).

Activating/deactivating the acousticlocking verification signalIf you switch on the AcousticAcoustic LockLock function,an acoustic signal sounds when you lock thevehicle.X Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the Sett.Sett. menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theVehicleVehicle submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select theAcoustic LockAcoustic Lock function.If the AcousticAcoustic LockLock function is activated,the& symbol in the multifunctiondisplay lights up orange.

X Press thea button to save the setting.

212 Menus and submenusOn

-board

computera

nddisplays

Activating/deactivating the radar sensorsystemX Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the SettingsSettingsmenu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theVehicleVehicle submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the9 or: button to selectRadar Sensors (See Oper. Manual)Radar Sensors (See Oper. Manual).You will see the selected setting OnOn orOffOff.

X Press thea button to save the setting.

If the radar sensor system is switched off,Blind Spot Assist is deactivated(Y page 192).

Convenience

Switching the fold-in mirrors with thelocking feature on/offThis function is only available on vehicles withthe memory function (Y page 104).When you activate the Auto. MirrorAuto. MirrorFoldingFolding function, the exterior mirrors arefolded in when the vehicle is locked.If you unlock the vehicle and then open adoor, the exterior mirrors fold out again.If you have switched on the Auto. MirrorAuto. MirrorFoldingFolding function and you fold in the exteriormirrors using the button on the door(Y page 102), they will not fold outautomatically. The exterior mirrors can thenonly be folded out using the button on thedoor.X Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the Sett.Sett. menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theConvenienceConvenience submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press: or9 to select the Auto.Auto.Mirror FoldingMirror Folding function.If the Auto. Mirror FoldingAuto. Mirror Folding function isactivated, the vehicle's exterior mirror is

displayed in orange in the multifunctiondisplay.

X Press thea button to save the setting.

Restoring the factory settingsX Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the Sett.Sett. menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theFactory SettingFactory Setting submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.The Reset All Settings?Reset All Settings? messageappears.

X Press the: or9 button to selectNoNo or YesYes.

X Pressa to confirm the selection.If you have selected YesYes , the multifunctiondisplay shows a confirmation message.

For safety reasons, the Daytime RunningDaytime RunningLights:Lights: function in the LightsLights submenu isonly reset if the vehicle is stationary.

AMG menu in AMG vehicles

AMG displays

: Digital speedometer; Gear indicator= Upshift indicator? Engine oil temperatureA Coolant temperatureB Transmission fluid temperatureX Press= or; on the steering wheelto select the AMGAMG menu.

Upshift indicator UPUP= indicates that theengine has reached the overrevving rangewhen in the manual gearshift program.

Menus and submenus 213

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Upshift indicator UPUP= fades out othermessages until you have shifted up.If the engine oil temperature is below 176 ‡(80 †), oil temperature? is shown in blue.Avoid driving at full engine output during thistime.If the transmission fluid temperature is below122 ‡ (50 †), oil temperatureB is shownin blue. Avoid driving at full engine outputduring this time.

SETUP

: Drive program (CC/SS/MM); ESP® mode (ONON/OFFOFF) or SPORT handling

mode (SPORTSPORT)SETUP shows the drive program, the ESP®(Electronic Stability Program) mode and theSPORT handling mode.X Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the AMGAMG menu.

X Press the9 button repeatedly untilSETUP is displayed.

RACETIMER

Displaying and starting RACETIMERThe RACETIMER is only intended for use on aclosed race circuit. Do not use the functionon public roads.

: Lap; RACETIMER

You can start the RACETIMER when theengine is running or if the SmartKey is inposition 2 in the ignition lock.X Press= or; on the steering wheelto select the AMGAMG menu.

X Press the9 button repeatedly until theRACETIMER is shown.

X To start: press thea button to start theRACETIMER.

Displaying the intermediate time

X Press the= or; button to selectInterm. TimeInterm. Time.

X Pressa to confirm.The intermediate time is displayed for fiveseconds.

Starting a new lap

: RACETIMER; Fastest lap time (best lap)= Lap

214 Menus and submenusOn

-board

computerand

displays

X Pressa to confirm New LapNew Lap.i It is possible to store a maximum ofsixteen laps. The 16th lap can only becompleted with Finish LapFinish Lap.

Stopping the RACETIMER

X Press the% button on the steeringwheel.

X Pressa to confirm YesYes.The RACETIMER interrupts timing when youstop the vehicle and turn the SmartKey toposition 1 in the ignition lock. If you turn theSmartKey to position 2 or 3 and then pressa to confirm StartStart, timing is continued.Resetting the current lapX Stop the RACETIMER.X Press the= or; button to selectReset LapReset Lap.

X Pressa to reset the lap time to "0".

Deleting all laps

If you switch off the engine, the RACETIMERis reset to "0" after 30 seconds. All laps aredeleted.You cannot delete individual stored laps. Ifyou have stopped 16 laps, the current lapdoes not have to be reset.

X Reset the current lap.X Pressa to confirm ResetReset.Reset Race Timer?Reset Race Timer? appears in themultifunction display.

X Press the: button to select YesYes andpress thea button to confirm.All laps are deleted.

Overall statistics

: RACETIMER overall evaluation; Total time driven= Average speed? Distance coveredA Maximum speed

This function is shown if you have stored atleast one lap and stopped the RACETIMER.X Press= or; on the steering wheelto select the AMGAMG menu.

X Press the9 button repeatedly until theoverall evaluation is shown.

Lap statistics

: Lap; Lap time= Average lap speed? Lap lengthA Top speed during lap

Menus and submenus 215

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

This function is only available if you havestored at least two laps and have stopped theRACETIMER.X Press= or; on the steering wheelto select the AMGAMG menu.

X Press the9 button repeatedly until thelap evaluation is shown.Each lap is shown in a separate submenu.The fastest lap is indicated by flashingsymbol:.

X Press the9 or: button to select adifferent lap evaluation.

216 Menus and submenusOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages

General notesDisplay messages appear in the multifunction display.Display messages with graphic displays may be shown in simplified form in the Operator'sManual and may differ from the messages shown in the multifunction display.Please respond in accordance with the display messages and follow the additional notes inthis Operator's Manual.Certain display messages are accompanied by an audible warning tone or a continuous tone.When the ignition is switched off, all display messages are deleted, apart from some high-priority display messages. Once the causes of the high-priority display messages have beenrectified, the corresponding display messages are also deleted.When you stop and park the vehicle, please observe the notes on the HOLD function(Y page 176) and parking (Y page 157).

Hiding display messagesX Press thea or% button on the steering wheel to hide the display message.The display message is cleared.

The multifunction display shows high-priority display messages in red. Some high-prioritydisplay messages cannot be hidden.The multifunction display shows these messages continuously until the causes for themessages have been remedied.

Message memoryThe on-board computer saves certain display messages in themessage memory. You cancall up the display messages:X Press= or; on the steering wheel to select the ServServ menu.If there are display messages, the multifunction display shows, for example, 2 Messages2 Messages.

X Press the9 or: button to select the entry, e.g. 2 Messages2 Messages.X Pressa to confirm.X Press the9 or: button to scroll through the display messages.

Display messages 217

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Safety systems

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

!÷CurrentlyCurrentlyUnavailable SeeUnavailable SeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manual

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System), ESP® (Electronic StabilityProgram), BAS (Brake Assist), the HOLD function and hill startassist are temporarily unavailable.COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST/COLLISION PREVENTIONASSIST PLUS may also have failed.In addition, the ÷, å and ! warning lamps light up inthe instrument cluster.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.Possible causes are:Rself-diagnosis is not yet complete.Rthe on-board voltage may be insufficient.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if youbrake hard, for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severelyaffected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situationcan increase.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Carefully drive a short distance on a suitable stretch of road,making slight steering movements at a speed above 12 mph(20 km/h).If the display message disappears, the functions mentionedabove are available again.

If the display message continues to be displayed:X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

!÷Inoperative SeeInoperative SeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manual

ABS, ESP®, BAS, the HOLD function and hill start assist areunavailable due to a malfunction.COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST/COLLISION PREVENTIONASSIST PLUS may also have failed.In addition, theJ, ÷, å and ! warning lamps lightup in the instrument cluster.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.

G WARNING

218 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM SolutionsThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if youbrake hard, for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severelyaffected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situationcan increase.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

÷CurrentlyCurrentlyUnavailable SeeUnavailable SeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manual

ESP®, BAS, the HOLD function and hill start assist are temporarilyunavailable.COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST/COLLISION PREVENTIONASSIST PLUS may also have failed.In addition, the ÷ and å warning lamps light up in theinstrument cluster.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.The self-diagnosis function might not be complete, for example.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above.The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thusincrease.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Carefully drive a short distance on a suitable stretch of road,making slight steering movements at a speed above 12 mph(20 km/h).If the display message disappears, the functions mentionedabove are available again.

If the display message continues to be displayed:X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages 219

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

÷Inoperative SeeInoperative SeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manual

ESP®, BAS, the HOLD function and hill start assist are unavailabledue to a malfunction.COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST/COLLISION PREVENTIONASSIST PLUS may also have failed.In addition, the ÷ and å warning lamps light up in theinstrument cluster.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above.The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thusincrease.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

T!÷Inoperative SeeInoperative SeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manual

EBD (electronic brake force distribution), ABS, ESP®, BAS, theHOLD function and hill start assist are not available due to amalfunction.COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST/COLLISION PREVENTIONASSIST PLUS may also have failed.In addition, the ÷, å and ! warning lamps light up inthe instrument cluster and a warning tone sounds.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The front and rear wheels could thereforelock if you brake hard, for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severelyaffected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situationcan increase.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

220 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

F(USA

only)!(Canadaonly)Please ReleasePlease ReleaseParking BrakeParking Brake

The redF (USA only)/! (Canada only) indicator lampflashes and a warning tone sounds. A condition for automaticrelease of the electric parking brake is not fulfilled (Y page 158).You are driving with the electric parking brake applied.X Release the electric parking brake manually.

The redF (USA only)/! (Canada only) indicator lampflashes and a warning tone sounds.You are making an emergency stop using the electric parkingbrake (Y page 158).

F(USA

only)!(Canadaonly)Parking Brake SeeParking Brake SeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manual

The yellow! warning lamp lights up.The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.To apply:X Switch the ignition off.X Press the electric parking brake handle for at least ten seconds.X Shift the transmission to P.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The yellow! warning lamp and the redF (USAonly)/! (Canada only) indicator lamp light up.The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.To release:X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.X Release the electric parking brake manually.orX Release the electric parking brake automatically (Y page 158).

If the electric parking brake still cannot be released:X Do not drive on.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages 221

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

The redF (USA only)/! (Canada only) indicator lampflashes and the yellow! warning lamp lights up.The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.To release:X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.X Release the electric parking brake manually.

To apply:X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.X Apply the electric parking brake manually.

If the redF (USA only)/! (Canada only) indicator lampcontinues to flash:X Do not drive on.X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 343).X Shift the transmission to P.X Turn the front wheels towards the curb.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The yellow! warning lamp lights up. The redF (USAonly)/! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes for about tenseconds after the electric parking brake has been applied orreleased. It then goes out or remains lit.The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.X Apply the electric parking brake.

If it is not possible to engage the electric parking brake:X Shift the transmission to P.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

If it is not possible to release the electric parking brake:X Release the electric parking brake automatically (Y page 158).

If the electric parking brake still cannot be released:X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

222 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

The yellow! warning lamp lights up. If you manually apply orrelease the electric parking brake, the redF (USAonly)/! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes.The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. It is not possible toapply the electric parking brake manually.X Shift the transmission to P.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

F(USA

only)!(Canadaonly)Parking BrakeParking BrakeInoperativeInoperative

The yellow! warning lamp lights up. The redF (USAonly)/! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes for about tenseconds after the electric parking brake has been applied orreleased. It then goes out or remains lit.The electric parking brake is malfunctioning, e.g. because ofovervoltage or undervoltage.X Remove the cause for the overvoltage or undervoltage, e.g. bycharging the battery or restarting the engine.

X Engage or release the electric parking brake.

If it remains impossible to apply or release the electric parkingbrake:X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.X Engage or release the electric parking brake.

If the electric parking brake still cannot be released:X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The display message is only shown while the vehicle is in motion.The yellow! warning lamp lights up and the redF (USAonly)/! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes.It is not possible to apply the electric parking brake manually.X Shift the transmission to P.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

F(USA

only)!(Canadaonly)Turn On theTurn On theIgnition toIgnition toRelease theRelease theParking BrakeParking Brake

The redF (USA only)/! (Canada only) indicator lamp lightsup.You attempted to release the electric parking brake while theignition was switched off.X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignition lock.

Display messages 223

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

$(USA

only)J(Canadaonly)Check Brake FluidCheck Brake FluidLevelLevel

There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.In addition, the$ (USA only)/J (Canada only) warninglamp lights up in the instrument cluster and a warning tonesounds.

G WARNINGThe braking effect may be impaired.There is a risk of an accident.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue drivingunder any circumstances.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 157).X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.X Do not add brake fluid. This does not correct the malfunction.

#Check Brake PadCheck Brake PadWearWear

The brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Gmbrace Inoperativembrace Inoperative

One or more main features of the mbrace system aremalfunctioning.X Have the mbrace system checked immediately at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

224 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

CollisionCollisionPrevention AssistPrevention AssistPlusPlusCurrentlyCurrentlyUnavailable SeeUnavailable SeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manual

COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS is temporarily notoperational. Possible causes are:Rthe front bumper is dirty.Rfunction is impaired due to heavy rain or snow.Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due toelectromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radiostations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation.RAMG vehicles: ESP® is deactivated.Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range.Rthe on-board voltage is too low.When the causes stated above no longer apply, the displaymessage disappears.COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS is operational again.If the display message does not disappear:X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 157).X Clean the front bumper (Y page 295).X Restart the engine.X AMG vehicles: reactivate ESP®(Y page 69).

CollisionCollisionPrevention AssistPrevention AssistPlusPlusInoperativeInoperative

COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS is malfunctioning. Thedistance warning signal may also have failed.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages 225

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

PRE-SAFEPRE-SAFEFunctionsFunctionsCurrently LimitedCurrently LimitedSee Operator'sSee Operator'sManualManual

Adaptive Brake Assist is temporarily inoperative. Possible causesare:Rthe front bumper is dirty.Rfunction is impaired due to heavy rain or snow.Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due toelectromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radiostations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation.RAMG vehicles: ESP® is deactivated.Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range.Rthe on-board voltage is too low.When the causes stated above no longer apply, the displaymessage disappears.Adaptive Brake Assist is operational again.If the display message does not disappear:X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 157).X Clean the front bumper (Y page 295).X Restart the engine.X AMG vehicles: reactivate ESP®(Y page 69).

PRE-SAFEPRE-SAFEFunction LimitedFunction LimitedSee Operator'sSee Operator'sManualManual

Adaptive Brake Assist is faulty. The distance warning signal mayalso have failed.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

6SRS MalfunctionSRS MalfunctionService RequiredService Required

There is a malfunction in the SRS (Supplemental RestraintSystem). The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrumentcluster.

G WARNINGThe air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either betriggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may notbe triggered.There is an increased risk of injury.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.Further information on occupant safety (Y page 40).

226 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

6Front LeftFront LeftMalfunctionMalfunctionService RequiredService Requiredor Front RightFront RightMalfunctionMalfunctionService RequiredService Required

SRS has malfunctioned at the front on the left or right. The 6warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.

G WARNINGThe air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either betriggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may notbe triggered.There is an increased risk of injury.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

6Rear LeftRear LeftMalfunctionMalfunctionService RequiredService Requiredor Rear RightRear RightMalfunctionMalfunctionService RequiredService Required

SRS has malfunctioned at the rear on the left or right. The 6warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.

G WARNINGThe air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either betriggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may notbe triggered.There is an increased risk of injury.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

6Left Side CurtainLeft Side CurtainAirbagAirbag MalfunctionMalfunctionService RequiredService Requiredor Right SideRight SideCurtain AirbagCurtain AirbagMalfunctionMalfunctionService RequiredService Required

There is a malfunction in the left-hand or right-hand windowcurtain air bag. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in theinstrument cluster.

G WARNINGThe left or right window curtain air bag may either be triggeredunintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not betriggered.There is an increased risk of injury.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages 227

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

Front PassengerFront PassengerAirbag DisabledAirbag DisabledSee Operator'sSee Operator'sManualManual

The front-passenger air bag is disabled during the journey, eventhough:Ran adultorRa person larger than a certain size is occupying the front-passenger seat

If additional forces are applied to the seat, the system mayinterpret the occupant's weight as lower than it actually is.

G WARNINGThe front-passenger air bag does not deploy during an accident.There is an increased risk of injury.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 157).X Switch the ignition off.X Have the occupant get out of the vehicle.X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front-passenger door andswitch on the ignition.

X Observe the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp in thecenter console and the multifunction display and check thefollowing:

Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on:Rthe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must light up andremain lit. If the indicator lamp is on, OCS has disabled the front-passenger air bag (Y page 47).Rthe Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator'sFront Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator'sManualManual or Front Passenger Airbag Disabled SeeFront Passenger Airbag Disabled SeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manual display messages must not be shown inthe multifunction display.

X Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessarysystem checks have been completed.

X Make sure that the display messages do not appear in themultifunction display.

If these conditions are fulfilled, the front-passenger seat can beoccupied again. Whether the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicatorlamp remains lit or goes out depends on how OCS classifies theoccupant.If the conditions are not fulfilled, the system is not operatingcorrectly.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

228 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM SolutionsFor further information about the Occupant Classification System,see (Y page 47).

Front PassengerFront PassengerAirbagAirbag EnabledEnabled SeeSeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manual

The front-passenger air bag is enabled during the journey, eventhough:Ra child, a small adult or an object weighing less than thesystem's weight threshold is located on the front-passengerseatorRthe front-passenger seat is unoccupiedThe system may detect objects or forces applying additionalweight on the seat.

G WARNINGThe air bag may deploy unintentionally.There is an increased risk of injury.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 157).X Switch the ignition off.X Open the front-passenger door.X Remove the child and the child restraint system from the front-passenger seat.

X Make sure that there are no objects on the seat adding to theweight.The system may otherwise detect the additional weight andinterpret the seat occupant's weight as greater than it actuallyis.

X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front-passenger door andswitch on the ignition.

X Observe the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp in thecenter console and the multifunction display and check thefollowing:

Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on:Rthe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must light up andremain lit. If the indicator lamp is on, OCS (OccupantClassification System) has disabled the front-passenger air bag(Y page 47).Rthe Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator'sFront Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator'sManualManual or Front Passenger Airbag Disabled SeeFront Passenger Airbag Disabled SeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manual display messages must not be shown inthe multifunction display.

Display messages 229

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM SolutionsX Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessarysystem checks have been completed.

X Make sure that the display messages do not appear in themultifunction display.

If these conditions are fulfilled, the front-passenger seat can beoccupied again. Whether the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicatorlamp remains lit or goes out depends on how OCS classifies theoccupant.If the conditions are not fulfilled, the system is not operatingcorrectly.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.For further information about the Occupant Classification System,see (Y page 47).

Lightsi Display messages about LEDs:This display message will only appear if all LEDs have failed.

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

bCheck LeftCheck LeftCornering LightCornering Light orCheck RightCheck RightCornering LightCornering Light

The left or right-hand cornering light is defective.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself(Y page 114).

orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheck Left LowCheck Left LowBeamBeam or CheckCheckRight Low BeamRight Low Beam

The left or right-hand low-beam headlamp is defective.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself(Y page 114).

orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheck Rear LeftCheck Rear LeftTurn SignalTurn Signal orCheck Rear RightCheck Rear RightTurn SignalTurn Signal

The rear left-hand or rear right-hand turn signal is defective.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself(Y page 114).

orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

230 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

bCheck Front LeftCheck Front LeftTurn SignalTurn SignalorCheckCheckFront Right TurnFront Right TurnSignalSignal

The front left-hand or front right-hand turn signal is defective.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself(Y page 114).

orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheck Left MirrorCheck Left MirrorTurn SignalTurn Signal orCheckCheck RightRight MirrorMirrorTurn SignalTurn Signal

The turn signal in the left-hand or right-hand exterior mirror isdefective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheckCheck CenterCenter BrakeBrakeLampLamp

The high-mounted brake lamp is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheck Left BrakeCheck Left BrakeLampLamp or CheckCheckRight Brake LampRight Brake Lamp

The left or right-hand brake lamp is defective.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself(Y page 114).

orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheck Left TailCheck Left Tailand Brake Lampsand Brake Lamps orCheck Right TailCheck Right Tailand Brake Lampsand Brake Lamps

The left or right-hand tail lamp/brake lamp is defective.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself(Y page 114).

orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheck Left HighCheck Left HighBeamBeam or CheckCheckRight High BeamRight High Beam

The left or right-hand high beam is defective.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself(Y page 114).

orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bLicense Plate LampLicense Plate Lamp

The left or right-hand license plate lamp is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheck Left FogCheck Left FogLampLamp or CheckCheckRight Fog LampRight Fog Lamp

The left-hand or right-hand front fog lamp is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages 231

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

bRear Fog LampRear Fog Lamp

The rear fog lamp is defective.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself(Y page 114).

orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheck Front LeftCheck Front LeftParking LampParking Lamp orCheck Front RightCheck Front RightParking LampParking Lamp

The front left or front right parking or standing lamp is defective.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself(Y page 114).

orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bBackup LightBackup Light

The backup lamp is defective.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself(Y page 114).

orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheck Left TailCheck Left TailLampLamp or CheckCheckRight Tail LampRight Tail Lamp

The left or right-hand tail lamp is defective.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself(Y page 114).

orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheck Front LeftCheck Front LeftSidemarker LampSidemarker Lamp orCheck Front RightCheck Front RightSidemarker LampSidemarker Lamp

The left or right front side marker lamp is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheck Rear LeftCheck Rear LeftSidemarker LampSidemarker Lamp orCheck Rear RightCheck Rear RightSidemarker LampSidemarker Lamp

The rear left or right side marker lamp is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheckCheck LeftLeft DaytimeDaytimeRunningRunningLightLightorCheck RightCheck RightDaytime RunningDaytime RunningLightLight

The left-hand or right-hand daytime running lamp is faulty.

232 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

bActive HeadlampsActive HeadlampsInoperativeInoperative

The active light function is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bMalfunction SeeMalfunction SeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manual

The exterior lighting is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bAutoAuto LampLamp FunctionFunctionInoperativeInoperative

The light sensor is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bSwitch Off LightsSwitch Off Lights

The lights are still switched on when you leave the vehicle. Awarning tone also sounds.X Turn the light switch toÃ.

Adaptive HighbeamAdaptive HighbeamAssist InoperativeAssist Inoperative

Adaptive Highbeam Assist is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Adaptive HighbeamAdaptive HighbeamAssist CurrentlyAssist CurrentlyUnavailable SeeUnavailable SeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manual

Adaptive Highbeam Assist is deactivated and temporarilyinoperative. Possible causes are:Rthe windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty.Rvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog.X Clean the windshield.If the system detects that the camera is fully operational again,the Adaptive Highbeam Assist Now AvailableAdaptive Highbeam Assist Now Available message isdisplayed.Adaptive Highbeam Assist is operational again.

Display messages 233

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Engine

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

+Check CoolantCheck CoolantLevel SeeLevel SeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manual

The coolant level is too low.

! Avoidmaking long journeys with too little coolant in the enginecooling system. The engine will otherwise be damaged.

X Add coolant, observing the warning notes before doing so(Y page 289).

X If coolant needs to be added more often than usual, have theengine coolant system checked at a qualified specialistworkshop.

? The fan motor is faulty.X At coolant temperatures below 248 ‡ (120 †), drive to thenearest qualified specialist workshop.

X Avoid subjecting the engine to heavy loads, e.g. driving inmountainous terrain, and stop-and-go traffic.

?Coolant Too HotCoolant Too HotStop Vehicle TurnStop Vehicle TurnEngine OffEngine Off

The coolant is too hot.A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNINGDo not drive when your engine is overheated. This can cause somefluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment tocatch fire.Steam from the overheated engine can also cause serious burnswhich can occur just by opening the hood.There is a risk of injury.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 157).X Wait until the engine has cooled down.X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is notblocked, e.g. by snow, slush or ice.

X Do not start the engine again until the display message goes outand the coolant temperature is below 248 ‡ (120 †).Otherwise, the engine could be damaged.

X Pay attention to the coolant temperature display.X If the temperature increases again, visit a qualified specialistworkshop immediately.

Under normal operating conditions and with the specified coolantlevel, the coolant temperature may rise to 248 ‡ (120 †).

234 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

# The battery is not being charged.A warning tone also sounds.Possible causes are:Ra defective alternatorRa torn poly-V-beltRa malfunction in the electronicsX Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Open the hood.X Check whether the poly-V-belt is torn.If the poly-V-belt is torn:! Do not continue driving. The engine could otherwise overheat.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.If the poly-V-belt is not damaged:X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

4Check Engine OilCheck Engine OilAt Next RefuelingAt Next Refueling

The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level.A warning tone also sounds.X Check the oil level when next refueling, at the latest(Y page 287).

X If necessary, add engine oil (Y page 288).X Have the engine checked at a qualified specialist workshop ifengine oil needs to be added more often than usual.

! Avoid long journeys with too little engine oil. The engine willotherwise be damaged.

Information on approved engine oils can be obtained from anyqualified specialist workshop or on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.

æFuel Level LowFuel Level Low

The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range.X Refuel at the nearest gas station.

Display messages 235

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

ç There is only a very small amount of fuel in the fuel tank.X Refuel at the nearest gas station without fail.

æGas Cap LooseGas Cap Loose

The fuel system pressure is too low. The fuel filler cap is not closedcorrectly or the fuel system is leaking.X Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed.

If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed:X Close the fuel filler cap.

If the fuel filler cap is correctly closed:X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Driving systems

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

ÀAttention Assist:Attention Assist:Take a Break!Take a Break!

Based on certain criteria, ATTENTION ASSIST has detected fatigueor a lack of concentration on the part of the driver. A warning tonealso sounds.X If necessary, take a break.During long journeys, take regular breaks in good time so you getenough rest.

ÀAttention AssistAttention AssistInoperativeInoperative

ATTENTION ASSIST is inoperative.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Speed Limit AssistSpeed Limit AssistCurrentlyCurrentlyUnavailable SeeUnavailable SeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manual

Speed Limit Assist is deactivated and temporarily inoperative.Possible causes are:Rthe windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty.Rvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog.X Clean the windshield.If the system detects that the camera is fully operational, thedisplay message disappears.Speed Limit Assist is operational again.

SpeedSpeed LimitLimit Assist:Assist:Unavailable InUnavailable InThis CountryThis Country

Speed Limit Assist is only available in certain countries.X Drive on.Speed Limit Assist is available again as soon as you drive into acountry in which its use is approved.

236 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

SpeedSpeed LimitLimit AssistAssistInoperativeInoperative

Speed Limit Assist is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

ëOffOff

The HOLD function is deactivated. the vehicle is skidding.A warning tone also sounds.X Reactivate the HOLD function later (Y page 176).

The HOLD function is deactivated. When the brake pedal is firmlydepressed, an activation condition is not fulfilled.A warning tone also sounds.X Check the activation conditions for the HOLD function(Y page 176).

Radar SensorsRadar SensorsDeactivated SeeDeactivated SeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manual

The radar sensor system is deactivated.X Switch on the radar sensor system (Y page 213).

Lane KeepingLane KeepingAssist CurrentlyAssist CurrentlyUnavailable SeeUnavailable SeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manual

Lane Keeping Assist is deactivated and temporarily inoperative.Possible causes are:Rthe windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty.Rvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog.Rthere are no lane markings for a longer period.Rthe lanemarkings areworn, dark or covered, e.g. by dirt or snow.When the causes stated above no longer apply, the displaymessage disappears.Lane Keeping Assist is operational again.If the display message does not disappear:X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 157).X Clean the windshield.

Lane KeepingLane KeepingAssist InoperativeAssist Inoperative

Lane Keeping Assist is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages 237

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

Blind Spot AssistBlind Spot AssistCurrentlyCurrentlyUnavailable SeeUnavailable SeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manual

Blind Spot Assist is temporarily inoperative. Possible causes are:Rthe sensors are dirty.Rfunction is impaired due to heavy rain or snow.Rthe radar sensor system is outside the operating temperaturerange.Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due toelectromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radiostations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation.

The yellow9 indicator lamps also light up in the exteriormirrors.When the causes stated above no longer apply, the displaymessage disappears.Blind Spot Assist is operational again.If the display message does not disappear:X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 157).X Clean the sensors (Y page 295).X Restart the engine.

Blind Spot AssistBlind Spot AssistInoperativeInoperative

Blind Spot Assist is defective.The yellow9 indicator lamps also light up in the exteriormirrors.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Park AssistPark AssistCanceledCanceled

The driver's door is open and the driver's seat belt has not beenfastened.X Repeat the parking process with the seat belt fastened and thedriver's door closed.

You have inadvertently touched the multifunction steering wheelwhile steering intervention was active.X While steering intervention is active, make sure that themultifunction steering wheel is not touched unintentionally.

The vehicle has started to skid and ESP® has intervened.X Use Active Parking Assist again later (Y page 182).

238 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

Park AssistPark AssistInoperativeInoperative

You have just carried out a large number of turning or parkingmaneuvers.Active Parking Assist will become available again afterapproximately ten minutes (Y page 182).X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Switch off and restart the engine.

If the display message continues to be displayed:X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

PARKTRONIC is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

DISTRONIC PLUS OffDISTRONIC PLUS Off DISTRONIC PLUS has been deactivated (Y page 168). If it wasdeactivated automatically, a warning tone also sounds.

DISTRONICDISTRONIC PLUSPLUS NowNowAvailableAvailable

DISTRONIC PLUS is operational again after having beentemporarily unavailable. You can now reactivate DISTRONIC PLUS(Y page 168).

DISTRONIC PLUSDISTRONIC PLUSCurrentlyCurrentlyUnavailable SeeUnavailable SeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manual

DISTRONIC PLUS is temporarily inoperative. Possible causes are:Rfunction is impaired due to heavy rain or snow.Rthe sensors in the radiator trim are dirtyRthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due toelectromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radiostations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation.Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range.Rthe on-board voltage is too low.A warning tone also sounds.When the causes stated above no longer apply, the displaymessage disappears.DISTRONIC is operational again.If the display message does not disappear:X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 157).X Clean the sensors in the radiator trim (Y page 295).X Restart the engine.

Display messages 239

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

DISTRONIC PLUSDISTRONIC PLUSInoperativeInoperative

DISTRONIC PLUS is defective. Adaptive Brake Assist may alsohave failed.A warning tone also sounds.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

DISTRONIC PLUSDISTRONIC PLUSPassivePassive

You have depressed the accelerator pedal. DISTRONIC PLUS is nolonger controlling the speed of the vehicle.X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.

DISTRONIC PLUSDISTRONIC PLUS- - - mph- - - mph

An activation condition for DISTRONIC PLUS is not fulfilled.X Check the activation conditions for DISTRONIC PLUS(Y page 170).

Cruise ControlCruise ControlInoperativeInoperative

Cruise control is defective.A warning tone also sounds.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Cruise ControlCruise Control- - - mph- - - mph

A condition for activating cruise control has not been fulfilled.You have tried to store a speed below 20 mph (30 km/h), forexample.X If conditions permit, drive faster than 20 mph (30 km/h) andstore the speed.

X Check the activation conditions for cruise control(Y page 167).

240 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Tires

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

Tire PressureTire PressureCheck TiresCheck Tires

Canada only:The tire pressure loss warning system has detected a significantloss in pressure.A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNINGWith tire pressures which are too low, there is a risk of thefollowing hazards:Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speedincrease.Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatlyimpair tire traction.Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, maybe greatly impaired.

There is a risk of an accident.X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or brakingmaneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 157).X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for aflat tire (Y page 301).

X Check the tire pressures and, if necessary, correct the tirepressure.

X Restart the tire pressure loss warning system when the tirepressure is correct (Y page 325).

CheckCheck TireTire PressurePressureThen Restart RunThen Restart RunFlat IndicatorFlat Indicator

Canada only:The tire pressure loss warning system generated a displaymessage and has not been restarted since.X Set the correct tire pressure in all four tires.X Restart the tire pressure loss warning system (Y page 325).

Run Flat IndicatorRun Flat IndicatorInoperativeInoperative

Canada only:The tire pressure loss warning system is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Correct TireCorrect TirePressurePressure

The tire pressure is too low in at least one of the tires, or the tirepressure difference between the wheels is too great.X Check the tire pressures at the next opportunity (Y page 326).X If necessary, correct the tire pressure.X Restart the tire pressure monitor (Y page 328).

Display messages 241

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

Check TiresCheck Tires The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped significantly.The wheel position is displayed in the multifunction display.A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNINGWith tire pressures which are too low, there is a risk of thefollowing hazards:Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speedincrease.Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatlyimpair tire traction.Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, maybe greatly impaired.

There is a risk of an accident.X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or brakingmaneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 157).X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for aflat tire (Y page 301).

X Check the tire pressure (Y page 326).X If necessary, correct the tire pressure.

Warning TireWarning TireMalfunctionMalfunction

The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped suddenly. Thewheel position is shown in the multifunction display.

G WARNINGIf you drive with a flat tire, there is a risk of the following hazards:Ra flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle.RYou could lose control of the vehicle.Rcontinued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire.

There is a risk of an accident.X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or brakingmaneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 157).X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for aflat tire (Y page 301).

242 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

Tire Press.Tire Press.Monitor CurrentlyMonitor CurrentlyUnavailableUnavailable

Due to a source of radio interference, no signals can be receivedfrom the wheel sensors. The tire pressure monitor is temporarilymalfunctioning.X Drive on.The tire pressure monitor restarts automatically as soon as theproblem has been solved.

TirePress.TirePress.Sensor(s) MissingSensor(s) Missing

There is no signal from the tire pressure sensor of one or severalwheels. The pressure of the affected tire is not displayed in themultifunction display.X Have the faulty tire pressure sensor replaced at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

Tire PressureTire PressureMonitorMonitorInoperative NoInoperative NoWheel SensorsWheel Sensors

The wheels mounted do not have a suitable tire pressure sensor.The tire pressure monitor is deactivated.X Mount wheels with suitable tire pressure sensors.The tire pressuremonitor is activated automatically after drivingfor a few minutes.

Tire Press.Tire Press.MonitorMonitorInoperativeInoperative

The tire pressure monitor is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Vehicle

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

ShiftShift toto 'P''P' oror 'N''N'to Start Engineto Start Engine

You have attempted to start the engine with the transmission inposition R or D.X Shift the transmission to position P or N.

Auxiliary BatteryAuxiliary BatteryMalfunctionMalfunction

The auxiliary battery for the automatic transmission is no longerbeing charged.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop at the next opportunity.X Until then, set the automatic transmission to position P beforeyou switch off the engine.

X Before leaving the vehicle, apply the electric parking brake.

Depress Brake toDepress Brake toStart EngineStart Engine

You have attempted to start the engine with the transmission inposition N without depressing the brake pedal.X Depress the brake pedal.

Display messages 243

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

To Deselect P or NTo Deselect P or NDepress Brake andDepress Brake andStart EngineStart Engine

You have attempted to shift the transmission to position R or Dwithout starting the engine.X Start the engine.X Depress the brake pedal.

i It is only possible to shift the transmission from position P tothe desired position if you depress the brake pedal. Only thencan the parking lock be deactivated. If you do not depress thebrake pedal, you can move the DIRECT SELECT lever but theparking lock remains engaged.

i At transmission fluid temperatures below Ò4 ‡ (Ò20 †) youcan only shift out of position P into another transmissionposition when the engine is running.

Apply Brake toApply Brake toShift from 'P'Shift from 'P'

You have attempted to move the transmission selector lever toposition R, N or D without depressing the brake pedal.X Depress the brake pedal.

Transmission NotTransmission Notin Pin PRisk of VehicleRisk of VehicleRolling AwayRolling Away

The driver's door is open and the transmission is in position R, Nor D.A warning tone also sounds.X Shift the transmission to position P.X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 157).

Service RequiredService RequiredDoDo NotNot ShiftShift GearsGearsVisit DealerVisit Dealer

You cannot change the transmission position due to amalfunction.A warning tone also sounds.If transmission position D is selected:X Drive to a qualified specialist workshop without shifting thetransmission from position D.

If transmission position R, N or P is selected:X Notify a qualified specialist workshop or breakdown service.

Only Shift to 'P'Only Shift to 'P'when Vehiclewhen Vehicleis Stationaryis Stationary

The vehicle is moving.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Shift the transmission to position P.

Reversing NotReversing NotPossible ServicePossible ServiceRequiredRequired

The automatic transmission is malfunctioning. You cannot backup.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

244 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

TransmissionTransmissionMalfunctionMalfunction

The automatic transmission is malfunctioning.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

TransmissionTransmissionMalfunction StopMalfunction Stop

The automatic transmission is malfunctioning.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 157).X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

StopStop VehicleVehicle ShiftShiftto P Leave Engineto P Leave EngineRunningRunning

The automatic transmission has overheated.X Drive on carefully.The automatic transmission is available again when the displaymessage goes out.

If the display message continues to be displayed:X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 157).X Wait until the automatic transmission has cooled down and thedisplay message has disappeared.

Trans. OilTrans. OilOverheated DriveOverheated Driveon with Careon with Care

AMG vehicles: the transmission oil has overheated.Manual drive programM and the temporarily active manual driveprogram are no longer available. The engine power output isreduced.X Allow the vehicle to cool down.

4matic Currently4matic CurrentlyUnavailableUnavailable

4MATIC (permanent all-wheel drive) has overheated. The vehicleis only driven by the front wheels.X Drive on.The airflow cools 4MATIC more quickly.When the display message goes out, 4MATIC is available againand the vehicle is driven by all four wheels.

4matic Inoperative4matic Inoperative 4MATIC is malfunctioning. The vehicle is only driven by the frontwheels.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

N The trunk lid is open.X Close the trunk lid.

Display messages 245

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

M The hood is open.

G WARNINGThe open hood may block your view when the vehicle is in motion.There is a risk of an accident.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Apply the electric parking brake.X Close the hood.

C At least one door is open. A warning tone also sounds.X Close all the doors.

ÐPower SteeringPower SteeringMalfunction SeeMalfunction SeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manual

The power steering is malfunctioning.A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNINGYou will need to use more force to steer.There is a risk of an accident.X Check whether you are able to apply the extra force required.X If you are able to steer safely: carefully drive on to a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

X If you are unable to steer safely: do not drive on. Contact thenearest qualified specialist workshop.

Phone No ServicePhone No Service Your vehicle is outside the network provider's transmitter/receiver range.X Wait until the mobile phone operational readiness symbolappears in the multifunction display.

¥Check Washer FluidCheck Washer Fluid

The washer fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir has droppedbelow the minimum.

i If you do not mix antifreeze with the washer fluid in the wintermonths, then the washer fluid could freeze in the washer fluidreservoir. In this case, the Check Washer FluidCheck Washer Fluid displaymessage may appear in the multifunction display.

X Add washer fluid (Y page 290).

246 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

WiperWiperMalfunctioningMalfunctioning

The windshield wipers are malfunctioning.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Hazard WarningHazard WarningFlashersFlashersMalfunctioningMalfunctioning

The hazard warning lamps are faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

SmartKey

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

+Key Does NotKey Does NotBelong to VehicleBelong to Vehicle

You have put the wrong SmartKey in the ignition lock.X Use the correct SmartKey.

+TakeTake YourYour KeyKey fromfromIgnitionIgnition

The SmartKey is in the ignition lock.X Remove the SmartKey.

+Obtain a New KeyObtain a New Key

The SmartKey needs to be replaced.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster

Seat belts

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

ü

After starting theengine, the red seatbelt warning lamp lightsup for six seconds.

The seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front passengerto fasten their seat belts.X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 52).

ü

After starting theengine, the red seatbelt warning lamp lightsup. In addition, awarning tone soundsfor up to six seconds.

The driver's seat belt is not fastened.X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 52).The warning tone ceases.

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 247

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Problem Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions

ü

The red seat beltwarning lamp lights upafter the engine starts,as soon as the driver'sor the front-passengerdoor is closed.

The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt.X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 52).The warning lamp goes out.

There are objects on the front-passenger seat.X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stowthem in a secure place.The warning lamp goes out.

ü

The red seat beltwarning lamp flashesand an intermittentaudible warningsounds.

The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt. Inaddition, you are driving faster than 15mph (25 km/h) or you havebriefly driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h).X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 52).The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning toneceases.

There are objects on the front-passenger seat. In addition, you aredriving faster than 15 mph (25 km/h) or you have briefly drivenfaster than 15 mph (25 km/h).X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stowthem in a secure place.The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning toneceases.

248 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument clusterOn

-board

computerand

displays

Safety systems

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

$ (USA only)J (Canada only)The red brake systemwarning lamp comes onwhile the engine isrunning. Awarning tonealso sounds.

There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.

G WARNINGThe braking effect may be impaired.There is a risk of an accident.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue drivingunder any circumstances.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 157).X Do not add brake fluid. Adding more will not remedy themalfunction.

X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay.

!

The yellowABSwarninglamp is lit while theengine is running.

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) is deactivated due to amalfunction. Therefore, BAS (Brake Assist), COLLISIONPREVENTION ASSIST, COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS,ESP® (Electronic Stability Program), the HOLD function and hillstart assist, for example, are also deactivated.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if youbrake hard, for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severelyaffected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situationcan increase.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay.

X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.If the ABS control unit is faulty, there is also a possibility that othersystems, such as the navigation system or the automatictransmission, will not be available.

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 249

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Problem Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions

!

The yellowABSwarninglamp is lit while theengine is running.

ABS is temporarily unavailable. BAS, COLLISION PREVENTIONASSIST, COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS, ESP®, EBD(electronic brake force distribution), the HOLD function and hillstart assist, for example, are therefore also deactivated.Possible causes are:Rself-diagnosis is not yet complete.Rthe on-board voltage may be insufficient.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The front and rear wheels could thereforelock if you brake hard, for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severelyaffected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situationcan increase.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is a risk of an accident.X Carefully drive a suitable distance, making slight steeringmovements at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h).The functions mentioned above are available again when thewarning lamp goes out.

If the warning lamp is still on:X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay.

X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

250 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument clusterOn

-board

computerand

displays

Problem Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions

!

The yellowABSwarninglamp is lit while theengine is running. Awarning tone alsosounds.

EBD is malfunctioning. Therefore, ABS, BAS, COLLISIONPREVENTION ASSIST, COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS,ESP®, the HOLD function and hill start assist, for example, are notavailable either.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The front and rear wheels could thereforelock if you brake hard, for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severelyaffected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situationcan increase.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay.

X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

$ (USA only)J (Canada only)֌!

The red brake warninglamp, the yellow ESP®and ESP® OFF warninglamps and the yellowABS warning lamp arelit while the engine isrunning.

ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning. Therefore, BAS, COLLISIONPREVENTION ASSIST, COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS,EBD, the HOLD function and hill start assist, for example, are notavailable either.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The front and rear wheels could thereforelock if you brake hard, for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severelyaffected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situationcan increase.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay.

X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 251

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Problem Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions

÷

The yellow ESP®warning lamp flasheswhile the vehicle is inmotion.

ESP® or traction control has intervened because there is a risk ofskidding or at least one wheel has started to spin.Cruise control or DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated.X When pulling away, only depress the accelerator pedal as far asnecessary.

X Ease off the accelerator pedal while the vehicle is in motion.X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.X Do not deactivate ESP®.For exceptions, see: (Y page 68).

å

The yellow ESP® OFFwarning lamp is lit whilethe engine is running.

ESP® and ESP® trailer stabilization are deactivated. ESP® will notstabilize the vehicle if it starts to skid or if a wheel starts to spin.

G WARNING

If ESP® is switched off, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Reactivate ESP®.For exceptions, see: (Y page 68).

X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.

If ESP® cannot be activated:X Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

M

AMG vehicles only:The yellow SPORThandling mode warninglamp is lit while theengine is running.

SPORT handling mode is activated.

G WARNING

When SPORT handling mode is switched on, ESP® is unable tostabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Only switch on SPORT handling mode in certain situations(Y page 69).

252 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument clusterOn

-board

computerand

displays

Problem Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions

֌

The yellow ESP® andESP® OFF warninglamps are lit while theengine is running.

ESP®, BAS, COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST, COLLISIONPREVENTION ASSIST PLUS, the HOLD function and hill start assistare not available due to a malfunction.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above.The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thusincrease.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay.

X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

֌

The yellow ESP® andESP® OFF warninglamps are lit while theengine is running.

ESP®, BAS, the HOLD function and hill start assist are temporarilyunavailable.COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST/COLLISION PREVENTIONASSIST PLUS may also have failed.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.self-diagnosis is not yet complete.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above.The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thusincrease.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Carefully drive a suitable distance, making slight steeringmovements at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h).The functions mentioned above are available again when thewarning lamp goes out.

If the warning lamp is still on:X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay.

X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 253

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Problem Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions

F (USA only)! (Canada only)The red indicator lampfor the electric parkingbrake flashes or lightsup and/or the yellowwarning lamp for theelectric parking brakelights up.

X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay.

6

The red SRS warninglamp is lit while theengine is running.

There is a malfunction in the SRS (Supplemental RestraintSystem).

G WARNINGThe air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either betriggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may notbe triggered.There is an increased risk of injury.X Drive on carefully.X Have SRS checked at a qualified specialist workshopimmediately.

For further information about SRS, see (Y page 40).

254 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument clusterOn

-board

computerand

displays

Engine

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

;

The yellow CheckEngine warning lamplights up while theengine is running.

There may be a malfunction, for example:Rin the engine managementRin the fuel injection systemRin the exhaust systemRin the ignition systemRin the fuel systemThe emission limit values may be exceeded and the engine maybe running in emergency mode.X Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

i In some states, you must immediately visit a qualifiedspecialist workshop as soon as the yellowCheck Enginewarninglamp lights up. This depends on the locally applicable legalrequirements. If in doubt, check whether such legal regulationsapply in the state in which you are currently driving.

æ

The yellow reserve fuelwarning lamp lights upwhile the engine isrunning.

The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range.X Refuel at the nearest gas station.

æ

The yellow reserve fuelwarning lamp flasheswhile the engine isrunning.

The fuel system pressure is too low. The fuel filler cap is not closedcorrectly or the fuel system is leaking.X Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed.X If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed: close the fuel fillercap.

X If the fuel filler cap is closed: visit a qualified specialistworkshop.

?

The red coolantwarning lamp lights upwhile the engine isrunning and the coolanttemperature gage is atthe start of the scale.

The temperature sensor for the coolant temperature gage isdefective.The coolant temperature is no longer being monitored. There is arisk of engine damage if the coolant temperature is too high.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continuedriving under any circumstances.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 157).X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 255

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Problem Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions

?

The red coolantwarning lamp comes onwhile the engine isrunning.

The coolant level is too low.If the coolant level is correct, the airflow to the engine radiatormay be blocked or the electric engine radiator fan may bemalfunctioning.The coolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooledsufficiently.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay.

X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 157).X Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle untilthe engine has cooled down.

X Check the coolant level and add coolant (Y page 289). Observethe warning notes.

X If you need to add coolant more often than usual, have theengine coolant system checked.

X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is notblocked, e.g. by snow, slush or ice.

X Do not start the engine again until the coolant temperature isunder 248‡ (120†). Otherwise, the engine could be damaged.

X Drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop.X Avoid subjecting the engine to heavy loads, e.g. driving inmountainous terrain, and stop-and-go traffic.

?

The red coolantwarning lamp comes onwhile the engine isrunning. Awarning tonealso sounds.

The coolant temperature has exceeded 248 ‡ (120 †). Theairflow to the engine radiator may be blocked or the coolant levelmay be too low.

G WARNINGThe engine is not being cooled sufficiently and may be damaged.Do not drive when your engine is overheated. This can cause somefluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment tocatch fire.Vapor from the overheated engine can also cause serious burnswhich can occur just by opening the hood.There is a risk of injury.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay.

X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 157).

256 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument clusterOn

-board

computerand

displays

Problem Possible causes/consequences and MM SolutionsX Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle untilthe engine has cooled down.

X Check the coolant level and add coolant (Y page 289). Observethe warning notes.

X If you need to add coolant more often than usual, have theengine coolant system checked.

X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is notblocked, e.g. by snow, slush or ice.

X At coolant temperatures under 248‡ (120†), drive to the nextqualified specialist workshop.

X Avoid subjecting the engine to heavy loads, e.g. driving inmountainous terrain, and stop-and-go traffic.

Driving systems

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

·

The red distancewarning lamp lights upwhile the vehicle is inmotion.

The distance to the vehicle in front is too small for the speedselected.X Increase the distance.

·

The red distancewarning lamp lights upwhile the vehicle is inmotion. A warning tonealso sounds.

You are approaching a vehicle or a stationary obstacle in your lineof travel at too high a speed.X Be prepared to brake immediately.X Pay careful attention to the traffic situation. You may have tobrake or take evasive action.

For further information about the distance warning function ofCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST (Y page 65).For further information about COLLISION PREVENTION ASSISTPLUS (Y page 67).

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 257

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Tires

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

h

The yellow tire pressuremonitor warning lamp(pressure loss/malfunction) is lit.

The tire pressure monitor has detected a loss of pressure in atleast one of the tires.

G WARNINGWith tire pressures which are too low, there is a risk of thefollowing hazards:Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speedincrease.Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatlyimpair tire traction.Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, maybe greatly impaired.There is a risk of an accident.

X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or brakingmaneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 157).X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay.

X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for aflat tire (Y page 301).

X Check the tire pressure (Y page 326).X If necessary, correct the tire pressure.

h

The yellow tire pressuremonitor warning lamp(pressure loss/malfunction) flashes forapproximately oneminute and thenremains lit.

The tire pressure monitor is faulty.

G WARNINGThe system is possibly unable to recognize or register low tirepressure.There is a risk of an accident.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay.

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

258 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument clusterOn

-board

computera

nddisplays

Useful information ............................ 260Loading guidelines ............................ 260Stowage areas .................................. 260Features ............................................. 266

259

Stow

ageandfeatures

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optionalequipment of your vehicle available at thetime of publication of the Operator'sManual. Country-specific differences arepossible. Please note that your vehicle maynot be equipped with all featuresdescribed. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions.

i Read the information on qualifiedspecialist workshops: (Y page 25).

Loading guidelines

G WARNINGIf objects, luggage or loads are not secured ornot secured sufficiently, they could slip, tipover or be flung around and thereby hit vehicleoccupants. There is a risk of injury,particularly in the event of sudden braking ora sudden change in direction.Always store objects so that they cannot beflung around. Secure objects, luggage orloads against slipping or tipping before thejourney.

G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaustgases can enter the vehicle interior if thetrunk lid is open when the engine is running,especially if the vehicle is in motion. There isa risk of poisoning.Always switch off the engine before openingthe trunk lid. Never drive with the trunk lidopen.

The handling characteristics of a ladenvehicle are dependent on the distribution ofthe load within the vehicle. For this reason,you should observe the following notes whentransporting a load:RNever exceed the maximum permissiblegross vehicle weight or the gross axleweight rating of the vehicle (includingoccupants). The values are specified on thevehicle identification plate on the B-pillar ofthe driver's door.RThe trunk is the preferred place to carryobjects.RPosition heavy loads as far forwards aspossible and as low down in the trunk aspossible.RThe load must not protrude above theupper edge of the seat backrests.RAlways place the load against the rear orfront seat backrests. Make sure that theseat backrests are securely locked intoplace.RAlways place the load behind unoccupiedseats if possible.RUse the cargo tie down rings and the parcelnets to transport loads and luggage.RUse cargo tie-down rings and fasteningmaterials appropriate for the weight andsize of the load.RSecure the load with sufficiently strong andwear-resistant tie-downs. pad sharp edgesfor protection.

Stowage areas

Stowage space

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you do not correctly store objects in thevehicle interior, they can slip or be flungaround, thus striking vehicle occupants.There is a risk of injury, especially whenbraking or abruptly changing directions.

260 Stowage areasStow

ageandfeatures

RAlways store objects so that they cannot beflung around in these or in similarsituations.RAlways make sure that objects do notprotrude from stowage compartments,parcel nets or stowage nets.RClose lockable stowage compartmentswhile driving.RStow and secure objects that are heavy,hard, pointy, sharp-edged, fragile or toolarge in the trunk.

Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 260).

Stowage compartments in the front

Glove box

X To open: pull handle: and open glove boxflap;.

X To close: fold glove box flap; upwardsuntil it engages.

i There is a pen holder at the top of theglove box flap.

Eyeglasses compartment

X To open: press marking:.

Make sure that the eyeglasses compartmentis always closedwhile the vehicle is inmotion.

Stowage compartment in the centerconsole

Illustration: vehicles with DIRECT SELECT leverX To open: press the marking on cover:.i Depending on the vehicle equipment,there may be an ashtray in the centerconsole instead of a storage compartment.

Stowage areas 261

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

Stowage compartment in front of thearmrest (vehicles with automatictransmission)

Vehicles with DIRECT SELECT leverX To open: press the marking on cover:.

i You can remove the non-slip mat and theinsert for cleaning. When removing theinsert you will have to overcome someslight resistance.

Stowage compartment under the armrest

X To open: on vehicles with moveablearmrests, make sure that the armrest is inthe rearmost position.

X Press button: and fold the armrest up.

i Depending on the vehicle's equipment, aUSB connection and an AUX IN connectionor a Media Interface are installed in thestowage compartment. A Media Interfaceis a universal interface for portable audioequipment, e.g. for an iPod® or MP3 player(see the separate Audio or COMANDOperating Instructions).

Stowage compartment under the driver'sseat and front-passenger seatG WARNINGIf you exceed the maximum load for thestowage compartment, the cover may not beable to restrain the items. Items may bethrown out of the stowage compartment andhit vehicle occupants. There is a risk of injury,particularly in the event of sudden braking ora sudden change in direction.Never exceed the maximum permissible loadfor the stowage compartment. Stow andsecure heavy objects in the trunk.

The maximum permissible load of thestowage compartment is 2.6 lbs (1.5 kg).

X To open: pull handle: up and foldcover; forwards.

Stowage space in the rear

Stowage compartment in the rear centerconsole

262 Stowage areasStow

ageandfeatures

X To open: pull down the top of stowagecompartment: by the edge of the handle.

i Depending on the vehicle's equipment,theremay be an open stowage space abovethe stowage compartment.

Parcel netsParcel nets are located:Rin the front-passenger footwellRon the back of the driver's and the front-passenger seatRon the left and right-hand side in the trunkObserve the loading guidelines (Y page 260)and the safety notes regarding stowagespaces (Y page 260).

Through-loading facility in the rearObserve the loading guidelines (Y page 260).

X To open: fold down seat armrest:.X Pull the center head restraint on the rearbench seat into the uppermost position(Y page 97).

X Slide locking mechanism= in thedirection of the arrow.

X Swing flap; fully to the side.Flap; is held open by a magnet.

X To close: swing flap; in the trunk backuntil it engages.

X Fold armrest: up fully if necessary.

Rear bench seat through-loadingfeature

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf the rear bench seat/rear seat and seatbackrest are not engaged they could foldforwards, e.g. when braking suddenly or in theevent of an accident.RThe vehicle occupant would thereby bepushed into the seat belt by the rear benchseat/rear seat or by the seat backrest. Theseat belt can no longer offer the intendedlevel of protection and could even causeinjuries.RObjects or loads in the trunk cannot berestrained by the seat backrest.

There is an increased risk of injury.Before every trip, make sure that the seatbackrests and the rear bench seat/rear seatare engaged.

! Before folding the backrest in the rearcompartment forwards, make sure that therear compartment armrest and the

Stowage areas 263

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

cupholder are folded in. They mayotherwise be damaged.

Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 260).

Folding the rear seat backrest forwardsand back

Folding the rear seat backrest forwardThe left-hand and right-hand rear seatbackrests can be folded forwards separatelyto increase the trunk capacity.

X Fully insert the backrest head restraints(Y page 98).

X Move the driver's or front-passenger seatforward if necessary.

X Pull left-hand or right-hand releasehandle; of the seat backrest forwards.Corresponding seat backrest: isreleased.

X Fold backrest: forwards.X Move the driver's or front-passenger seatback if necessary.

X Insert the seat belt into seat-beltextender:.

Folding the rear seat backrest back

X Move the driver's or front-passenger seatforward if necessary.

! Make sure that the seat belt does notbecome trapped when folding the rear seatbackrest back. Otherwise, it could bedamaged.

X Fold seat backrest: back until it engages.Red lock status indicator; is no longervisible.

X Adjust the head restraints if necessary(Y page 98).

X Move the driver's or front-passenger seatback if necessary.

Securing cargo

Cargo tie-down ringsObserve the following notes on securingloads:RObserve the loading guidelines(Y page 260).RSecure the load using the cargo tie-downrings.RDistribute the load on the cargo tie-downrings evenly.RDo not use elastic straps or nets to securea load, as these are only intended as ananti-slip protection for light loads.

264 Stowage areasStow

ageandfeatures

RDo not route tie-downs across sharp edgesor corners.RPad sharp edges for protection.

: Cargo tie-down rings

Stowage well under the trunk floorUnder the trunk floor you can find a bracketfor TIREFIT and the vehicle tool kit, etc.

X To open: pull handle: up.

X Hook handle: into rain trough;.

To enlarge the trunk you can remove the trunkfloor.X To remove: lift the trunk floor almost torain trough; and pull it out.

X To insert: place the trunk floor at thebottom in the center.

X Hold sides of trunk floor= and press in thedirection of the arrow until it engages inhooks?.

Roof carrier

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWhen you load the roof, the center of gravityof the vehicle rises and the drivingcharacteristics change. If you exceed themaximum roof load, the drivingcharacteristics, as well as steering andbraking, will be greatly impaired. There is arisk of an accident.Never exceed the maximum roof load andadjust your driving style.

! Mercedes-Benz recommends that youonly use roof carriers that have been testedand approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles.This helps to prevent damage to thevehicle.Position the load on the roof rack in such away that the vehicle will not sustaindamage even when it is in motion.

Stowage areas 265

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

Depending on the vehicle equipment,ensure that when the roof carrier isinstalled you can:Ropen the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel fullyRopen the trunk lid fully

The maximum roof load is 165 lbs((75 kg).An incorrectly secured roof carrier or roofload may become detached from the vehicle.You must therefore ensure that you observethe roof carrier manufacturer's installationinstructions.

Attaching the roof carrier

X Open covers: carefully in the direction ofthe arrow.

X Fold covers: upwards.X Only secure the roof carrier to theanchorage points under covers:.

X Observe the manufacturer's installationinstructions.

Features

Cup holder

Important safety notes

G WARNINGThe cup holder cannot hold a container securewhilst traveling. If you use a cup holder whilsttraveling, the container may be flung aroundand liquid may be spilled. The vehicleoccupants may come into contact with the

liquid and if it is hot, they may be scalded. Youmay be distracted from the traffic conditionsand you could lose control of the vehicle.There is a risk of an accident and injury.Only use the cup holder when the vehicle isstationary. Only use the cup holder forcontainers of the right size. Always close thecontainer, particularly if the liquid is hot.

G WARNINGIf you do not correctly store objects in thevehicle interior, they can slip or be flungaround, thus striking vehicle occupants.There is a risk of injury, especially whenbraking or abruptly changing directions.RAlways store objects so that they cannot beflung around in these or in similarsituations.RAlways make sure that objects do notprotrude from stowage compartments,parcel nets or stowage nets.RClose lockable stowage compartmentswhile driving.RStow and secure objects that are heavy,hard, pointy, sharp-edged, fragile or toolarge in the trunk.

! Only use the cup holders for containers ofthe right size and which have lids. Thedrinks could otherwise spill.

The stowage compartments in the doorsprovide space for bottles:Rfront: capacity up to 34 fl. oz. (1.0 l)Rrear: capacity up to 17 fl. oz. (0.5 l)

Cup holder in the front-compartmentcenter consoleThe cup holder and the rubber matunderneath can be removed for cleaning.Clean them with clean, lukewarm water only.

266 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

X To remove: carefully pull in upper sectionsof cup holder: on the driver's and front-passenger sides until they release.

X Lift the cup holder upwards; until it canbe removed.

X To install: insert cup holder into lateralcurved sections; in the stowagecompartment. Insert the cup holder so thatthe wedge of the upper section of cupholder: faces forwards.

X Press the cup holder downwards until itengages on the right and left-hand sides.

Cup holder in the rear seat armrest! Do not sit on or support your body weighton the rear seat armrest when it is foldeddown, as you could otherwise damage it.

! Close the cup holder before folding therear seat armrest up. Otherwise, the cupholder could be damaged.

X Fold down the rear seat armrest.X To open: press the front of cup holder:or;.Cup holder: or; extends automatically.

X To close: slide cup holder: or; backuntil it engages.

Sun visors

Overview

G WARNINGIf themirror cover of the vanitymirror is foldedup when the vehicle is in motion, you could beblinded by incident light. There is a risk of anaccident.Always keep the mirror cover folded downwhile driving.

: Mirror light; Bracket= Retaining clip, e.g. for a car park ticket? Vanity mirrorA Mirror cover

Features 267

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

Vanity mirror in the sun visorMirror light: only functions if the sun visoris clipped into bracket; and mirror coverA has been folded up.

Glare from the side

X Fold down sun visor:.X Pull sun visor: out of retainer;.X Swing sun visor: to the side.X Vehicles with mirror lights: slide sunvisor: horizontally as desired.

Ashtray

Front ashtray! The stowage space under the ashtray isnot heat resistant. Before placing litcigarettes in the ashtray, make sure thatthe ashtray is properly engaged.Otherwise,the stowage space could be damaged.

Example: vehicles with a cover over the stowagecompartment

X To open: push the lower section ofcover:.The stowage compartment opens.

X To remove the insert: lift insert=up; and out.

X To re-install the insert: press insert=into the holder until it engages.

i If you remove the ashtray insert, you canuse the resulting compartment forstowage.

Rear-compartment ashtray

X To open: pull cover= out by its top edge.X To remove: pull insert; by recess: inthe direction of arrow? until it audiblyreleases.

X Lift insert; up and out.X To install the insert: place insert; fromabove into the holder and press down untilit engages.

Cigarette lighter

G WARNINGYou can burn yourself if you touch the hotheating element or the socket of the cigarettelighter.In addition, flammable materials can ignite if:Rthe hot cigarette lighter fallsRa child holds the hot cigarette lighter toobjects, for example

268 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

There is a risk of fire and injury.Always hold the cigarette lighter by the knob.Always make sure that the cigarette lighter isout of reach of children. Never leave childrenunsupervised in the vehicle.

Your attentionmust always be focused on thetraffic conditions. Only use the cigarettelighter when road and traffic conditionspermit.

Example: vehicles with a cover over the stowagecompartmentX Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in theignition lock (Y page 141).

X To open: push the lower section ofcover:.The stowage compartment opens.

X Press in cigarette lighter;.Cigarette lighter; will pop outautomatically when the heating element isred-hot.

12 V sockets

Points to observe before useX Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in theignition lock (Y page 141).

The sockets can be used for accessories witha maximum draw of 180 W (15 A).Accessories include such items as lamps orchargers for mobile phones.If you use the sockets for long periods whenthe engine is switched off, the battery maydischarge.

i An emergency cut-out ensures that theon-board voltage does not drop too low. Ifthe on-board voltage is too low, the powerto the sockets is automatically cut. Thisensures that there is sufficient power tostart the engine.

Socket in the front-compartment centerconsole

Vehicles with a cover over the stowagecompartmentX To open: push the lower section ofcover:.The stowage compartment opens.

X Lift up the cover of socket;.

Vehicles without a cover over the stowagecompartmentX Lift up the cover of socket:.

Features 269

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

Socket in the rear-compartment centerconsole

X Pull cover: out by its top edge.X Lift up the cover of socket;.

Socket in the trunk

X Lift up the cover of socket:.

mbrace

General notesYou must have a license agreement toactivate the mbrace service. Make sure thatyour system is activated and operational. Tolog in, press the ï MB Info call button. Ifany of the steps mentioned are not carriedout, the system may not be activated.If you have questions about the activation,contact one of the following telephonehotlines:RUSA:Mercedes-BenzCustomer AssistanceCenter at

1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372)or 1-866-990-9007RCanada: Customer Service at1-888-923-8367

Shortly after successfully registering with theservice, a user ID and password will be sentto you by post.USA only: you can use this password to logonto the mbrace area under "Owners Online"at http://www.mbusa.com.The system is available if:Rit has been activated and is operationalRthe corresponding mobile phone networkis available for transmitting data to theCustomer CenterRa service subscription is availableRthe starter battery is sufficiently charged

i Determining the location of the vehicle ona map is only possible if:RGPS reception is available.Rthe vehicle position can be forwarded tothe Customer Assistance Center.

The mbrace systemTo adjust the volume during a call, proceedas follows:X Press theW orX button on themultifunction steering wheel.

orX Use the volume controller of the audiosystem/COMAND.

The system offers various services, e.g:RAutomatic and manual emergency callRRoadside Assistance callRMB Info callUSA only: you can find information and adescription of all available features under"Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.

270 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

System self-testAfter you have switched on the ignition, thesystem carries out a self-diagnosis.A malfunction in the system has beendetected if one of the following occurs:RThe indicator lamp in the SOS button doesnot come on during the system self-test.RThe indicator lamp in the F RoadsideAssistance button does not light up duringself-diagnosis of the system.RThe indicator lamp in the ï MB Info callbutton does not light up during self-diagnosis of the system.RThe indicator lamp in one or more of thefollowing buttons continues to light up redafter the system self-diagnosis:- SOS button- F Roadside Assistance call button- ï MB Info call buttonRAfter the system self-diagnosis, theInoperativeInoperative or Service NotService NotActivatedActivated message appears in themultifunction display.

If a malfunction is indicated as outlinedabove, the system may not operate asexpected. In the event of an emergency, helpwill have to be summoned by other means.Have the system checked at the nearestauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center or contactthe following service hotlines:RUSA:Mercedes-BenzCustomer AssistanceCenter at1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372)or 1-866-990-9007RCanada: Customer Service at1-888-923-8367

Emergency call

Important safety notesG WARNINGIt can be dangerous to remain in the vehicle,even if you have pressed the SOS button in anemergency if:Ryou see smoke inside or outside of thevehicle, e.g. if there is a fire after anaccidentRthe vehicle is on a dangerous section ofroadRthe vehicle is not visible or cannot easily beseen by other road users, particularly whendark or in poor visibility conditions

There is a risk of an accident and injury.Leave the vehicle immediately in this orsimilar situations as soon as it is safe to doso. Move to a safe location along with othervehicle occupants. In such situations, securethe vehicle in accordance with nationalregulations, e. g. with a warning triangle.

You must have a license agreement toactivate the mbrace service. Make sure thatyour system is activated and operational. Toregister, press the ï MB Info call button.If any of the steps mentioned are not carriedout, the system may not be activated.If you have questions about the activation,contact one of the following telephonehotlines:RUSA:Mercedes-BenzCustomer AssistanceCenter at1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372)or 1-866-990-9007RCanada: Customer Service at1-888-923-8367

General notesAn emergency call is dialed automatically ifan air bag or Emergency Tensioning Device istriggered.

i You cannot end an automaticallytriggered emergency call yourself.

Features 271

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

An emergency call can also be initiatedmanually.As soon as the emergency call has beeninitiated, the indicator lamp in the SOS buttonflashes. The multifunction display shows theConnecting CallConnecting Call message.The audio output is muted.Once the connection has been made, theCall ConnectedCall Connected message appears in themultifunction display.All important information on the emergencyis transmitted, for example:RCurrent location of the vehicle (asdetermined by the GPS system)RVehicle identification numberRInformation on the severity of the accidentShortly after the emergency call has beeninitiated, a voice connection is automaticallyestablished between the CustomerAssistance Center and the vehicle occupants.RIf the vehicle occupants respond, theMercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter attempts to get more informationon the emergency.RIf there is no response from the vehicleoccupants, an ambulance is immediatelysent to the vehicle.

If no voice connection can be established tothe Mercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter, the systemhas been unable to initiatean emergency call.This can occur, for example, if the relevantmobile phone network is not available. Theindicator lamp in the SOS button flashescontinuously.The Call FailedCall Failed message appears in themultifunction display and must be confirmed.In this case, summon assistance by othermeans.

Making an emergency call

X To initiate an emergency callmanually: press cover: briefly to open.

X Press SOS button; briefly.The indicator lamp in SOS button;flashes until the emergency call isconcluded.

X Wait for a voice connection to theMercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter.

X After the emergency call, close cover:.

i If the mobile phone network isunavailable, mbrace will not be able tomake the emergency call. If you leave thevehicle immediately after pressing the SOSbutton, you will not know whether mbraceplaced the emergency call. In this case,always summon assistance by othermeans.

Roadside Assistance button

272 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

X Press Roadside Assistance button:.This initiates a call to the Mercedes-BenzCustomer Assistance Center.The indicator lamp in Roadside Assistancebutton: flashes while the call is active.The multifunction display shows theConnecting CallConnecting Call message. The audiooutput is muted.

If a connection can be made, the CallCallConnectedConnected message appears in themultifunction display.If a mobile phone network and GPS receptionare available, the system transfers data to theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center,for example:RCurrent location of the vehicleRVehicle identification number

i The audio system or COMAND displayindicates that a call is active. During thecall, you can change to the navigationmenuby pressing the NAVI button on COMAND,for example.Voice output is not available.

A voice connection is established betweenthe Mercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter and the vehicle occupants.From the vehicle remote malfunctiondiagnosis, the Mercedes-Benz CustomerAssistance Center can ascertain the nature ofthe problem (Y page 277).The Mercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter either sends a qualified Mercedes-Benz technician or makes arrangements foryour vehicle to be transported to the nearestauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.You may be charged for services such asrepair work and/or towing.Further details are available in your mbracemanual.

i The system has not been able to initiatea roadside assistance call, if:Rthe indicator lamp for RoadsideAssistance call button: is flashingcontinuously.Rno voice connection to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center wasestablished.

This can occur if the relevant mobile phonenetwork is not available, for example.The Call FailedCall Failed message appears in themultifunction display.

X To end a call: press the~ button on themultifunction steering wheel.

orX Press the corresponding button for endinga phone call on the audio system or onCOMAND.

MB Info call button

X Press MB Info call button:.This initiates a call to the Mercedes-BenzCustomer Assistance Center.The indicator lamp in MB Info callbutton: flashes while the connection isbeing made. The multifunction displayshows the Connecting CallConnecting Call message.The audio system is muted.

If a connection can be made, the CallCallConnectedConnected message appears in themultifunction display.

Features 273

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

If a mobile phone network and GPS receptionare available, the system transfers data to theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center,for example:RCurrent location of the vehicleRVehicle identification number

i The audio system or COMAND displayindicates that a call is active. During thecall, you can change to the navigationmenuby pressing the NAVI button on COMAND,for example.Voice output is not available.

A voice connection is established betweenthe Mercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter and the vehicle occupants.You receive information about operating yourvehicle, about the nearest authorizedMercedes-Benz Center and about otherproducts and services from Mercedes-Benz.USA only: you can find further information onthe mbrace system under "Owners Online" athttp://www.mbusa.com.

i The system has not been able to initiatean MB Info call, if:Rthe indicator lamp in MB Info callbutton: is flashing continuously.Rno voice connection to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center wasestablished.

This can occur if the relevant mobile phonenetwork is not available, for example.The Call FailedCall Failed message appears in themultifunction display.

X To end a call: press the~ button on themultifunction steering wheel.

orX Press the corresponding button for endinga phone call on the audio system or onCOMAND.

Call priorityWhen service calls are active, e.g. RoadsideAssistance or MB Info calls, an emergencycall can still be initiated. In this case, anemergency call will take priority and overrideall other active calls.The indicator lamp of the respective buttonflashes until the call is ended.An emergency call can only be terminated bythe Mercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter.All other calls can be ended by pressing:Rthe~ button on the multifunctionsteering wheelRthe corresponding button on the audiosystem or on COMAND for ending atelephone call

i When a call is initiated, the audio systemis muted. The mobile phone is no longerconnected to COMAND. However, if youwant to use your mobile phone, do so onlywhen the vehicle is stationary and in a safelocation.

Downloading destinations in COMAND

Downloading destinationsDestination Download gives you access to adata bank with over 15 million Points ofInterest (POIs). These can be downloaded onthe navigation system in your vehicle. If youknow the destination, the address can bedownloaded. Alternatively, you can obtain thelocation of Points of Interest (POIs)/important destinations in the vicinity.Furthermore, you can download routes withup to 20 way points.You are prompted to confirm route guidanceto the address entered.The system calculates the route andsubsequently starts the route guidance withthe address entered.

i If you select NoNo, the address can be savedin the address book.

274 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

i The destination download function isavailable if the relevant mobile phonenetwork is available and data transfer ispossible.

i The destination download function canonly be used if the vehicle is equipped witha navigation system.

Route AssistanceThis service is part of the mbrace PLUSPackage and cannot be purchasedseparately.

i You can also use the Route Assistancefunction if your vehicle is not equipped witha navigation system.

Within the framework of this service, youreceive a professional and reliable form ofnavigation support without having to leaveyour vehicle.The customer service representative finds asuitable route depending on your vehicle'scurrent position and the desired destination.You will then be guided live through thecurrent route section.

Search & Send

General notesi To use "Search & Send", your vehiclemust be equipped with mbrace and anavigation system. Additionally, an mbraceservice subscription must be completed.

"Search & Send" is a destination entryservice. A destination address which is foundon Google Maps® can be transferred viambrace directly to your vehicle's navigationsystem.

Specifying and sending the destinationaddressX Go to the website http://www.maps.google.com and enter adestination address into the entry field.

X To send the destination address to thee-mail address of your mbrace

account: click on the correspondingbutton on the website.i Example:If you select 'Send to vehicle' and then'Mercedes-Benz', the destination addresswill be sent to your vehicle.

X When the "Send" dialog window appears:Enter the e-mail address you specifiedwhen setting up your mbrace account intothe corresponding field.

X Click "Send".

i Information on specific commands suchas "Address entry" or "Send" can be foundon the website.

Calling up destination addressesX Switch on the ignition.The destination address is loaded into thevehicle's navigation system.A display message appears, askingwhether navigation should be started.

X Select YesYes by turning cVd or slidingXVY the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.The system calculates the route andsubsequently starts the route guidancewith the address entered.

i If you select NoNo, the address can be savedin the address book.

i If you have sent more than onedestination address, each individualdestination must be confirmed separately.

i Destination addresses are loaded in thesame order as the order in which they weresent.If you own multiple Mercedes-Benzvehicles withmbrace and activatedmbraceaccounts:If multiple vehicles are registered under thesame e-mail address, the destination willbe sent to all the vehicles.

Features 275

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

Vehicle remote openingYou can use the vehicle remote opening if youhave unintentionally locked your vehicle anda replacement SmartKey is not available.The vehicle can be opened by the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center.The vehicle can be immediately openedremotely within four days of the ignition beingturned off. After this time, the remoteunlocking may be delayed by 15 to60 minutes. After 30 days, the vehicle can nolonger be opened remotely.X Contact the following service hotlines:RUSA: Mercedes-Benz CustomerAssistance Center at1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007RCanada: Customer Service at1-888-923-8367

You will be asked for your password.X Return to your vehicle at the time agreedupon with the Mercedes-Benz CustomerAssistance Center.

USA only: alternatively, the vehicle can beopened via:Rthe Internet, under the "Owners Online"sectionRthe telephone application (e.g. iPhone®,Blackberry)

To do this, you will need your identificationnumber and password.

i Vehicle remote opening is only possible ifthe corresponding mobile phone networkis accessible.

Vehicle remote closingThe remote closing feature can be used whenyou have forgotten to lock the vehicle and youare no longer nearby.The vehicle can then be locked by theMercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter.The vehicle can be immediately remotelylocked within four days of the ignition being

turned off. After this time, the remote closingmay be delayed by 15 to 60 minutes. After30 days the vehicle can no longer be closedremotely.X Contact the following service hotlines:RUSA: Mercedes-Benz CustomerAssistance Center at1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007RCanada: Customer Service at1-888-923-8367

You will be asked for your password.The next time you are inside the vehicle andyou switch on the ignition, the DoorsDoorsLocked RemotelyLocked Remotely message appears in themultifunction display.USA only: alternatively, the vehicle can belocked via:Rthe Internet, under the "Owners Online"sectionRthe telephone application (e.g. iPhone®,Blackberry)

To do this, you will need your identificationnumber and password.

i The vehicle remote closing feature isavailable when the relevant mobile phonenetwork is available and data connection ispossible.

Stolen vehicle recovery serviceIf your vehicle has been stolen:X Notify the police.The police will issue a numbered incidentreport.

X This number will be forwarded to theMercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter together with your PIN.The Mercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter then tries to locate the system. TheMercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter contacts you and the local lawenforcement agency if the vehicle islocated.

276 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

However, only the law enforcement agencyis informed of the location of the vehicle.

i If the anti-theft alarm system is activatedfor longer than 30 seconds, the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center isautomatically informed.

Vehicle remote malfunction diagnosisWith the vehicle remote malfunctiondiagnosis (Vehicle Health Check), theCustomer Assistance center can provideimproved support for problems with yourvehicle. During an existing call, vehicle datais transferred to the Customer Assistancecenter. The customer service representativecan use the received data to decide what kindof assistance is required. You are then, forexample, guided to the nearest authorizedMercedes-Benz Center or a recovery vehicleis called.If vehicle data needs to be transferred duringan MB Info call or a Roadside Assistance call,this is initiated by the Customer Assistancecenter. You will see the RoadsideRoadsideAssistance ConnectedAssistance Connected message in theCOMAND display. If the vehicle remotemalfunction diagnosis can be started, theRequest for vehicle diagnosisRequest for vehicle diagnosisreceived. Start vehicle diagnosis?received. Start vehicle diagnosis?message appears in the display.X Confirm the message with YesYes.X When the Vehicle Diagnosis PleaseVehicle Diagnosis Pleasestart ignitionstart ignition message appears, turnthe SmartKey to position 2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 141).

X When the Please follow thePlease follow theinstructionsinstructions receivedreceived byby phonephone andandmove your vehicle to a safemove your vehicle to a safeposition.position. message appears, follow thecustomer service representative'sinstructions.The message in the display disappears.If you select CancelCancel, the vehicle remotemalfunction diagnosis is canceledcompletely.

The vehicle operating state check begins.You will see the Vehicle diagnosisVehicle diagnosisactivated.activated. message.

When the diagnosis is completed, the SendSendvehicle diagnostics data//(Voicevehicle diagnostics data//(Voiceconnection may be//interruptedconnection may be//interruptedduringduring datadata transfer)transfer)message appears.The vehicle data can now be sent to theCustomer Assistance center.X Press OKOK to confirm the message.The voice connection with the CustomerAssistance center is terminated.You will see the Vehicle Diagnosis:Vehicle Diagnosis:Transferring data...Transferring data... message.The vehicle data is sent to the CustomerAssistance center.

Depending on what the customer servicerepresentative agreed with you, the voiceconnection is re-established after the transferis complete. If necessary, you will becontacted at a later time by another means,e.g. by e-mail or phone.Further functions of the vehicle remotemalfunction diagnosis include, for example:Rtransfer of service data to the CustomerAssistance center. If a service is overdue,the COMAND display shows a messageabout various special offers at yourworkshop.Rmonthly status information e-mail on oillevel, air pressure, maintenance, brakes,etc. If applicable, you will receiveinformation on special offers in the e-mail.USA only: this information can also becalled up under "Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.

Information on the data stored in the vehicle(Y page 26).Information on Roadside Assistance(Y page 23).

Features 277

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

Downloading routesDownloading routes allows you to transferand save predefined routes in the navigationsystem. To do this, an SD memory card mustbe inserted into the COMAND system. If noSD memory card is inserted, you must insertthe card into the card slot on the COMANDsystem before saving.A route can be prepared and sent either by acustomer service representative or via thembrace portal on the Internet.Each route can include up to 20 way points.Once a route has been received by thenavigation system, you will see the <route<routename>name> hashas beenbeen savedsaved toto memorymemory card.card.Do you want to start routeDo you want to start routeguidance?guidance?message in the COMAND display.The route is saved to the SD memory card.X To start route guidance: select YesYes.An overview of the route is shown in thedisplay.i If you select NoNo, the saved route can becalled up later via the navigation menu.

X Select StartStart.Route guidance is started.

i Downloaded and saved data can be calledup again in COMAND.You can find further information in theseparate COMAND Operating Instructions.

Speed alertYou can define the upper speed limit, whichmust not be exceeded by the vehicle.If this selected speed is exceeded by thevehicle, a message will be sent to theCustomer Assistance center. The CustomerAssistance center then forwards thisinformation to you.You can select the way in which you receivethis information beforehand. Possible optionsinclude text message, e-mail or an automatedcall.

The data you receive contains the followinginformation:Rthe location where the speed limit wasexceededRthe time at which the speed limit wasexceededRthe selected speed limit which wasexceeded

Geo fencingGeo fencing allows you to select areas whichthe vehicle should not enter or leave. You willbe informed if the vehicle crosses theboundaries of the selected areas. You canselect the way in which you receive thisinformation beforehand. Possible optionsinclude text message, e-mail or an automatedcall.The area can be determined as either a circleor a polygon with a maximum of ten corners.You can specify up to ten areassimultaneously. Different settings arepossible for each area.USA only: these settings can be called upunder "Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.Alternatively, you can trigger an MB Info calland inform the customer servicerepresentative that you wish to activate geofencing.Currently inactive areas can be activated bytext message.

Triggering the vehicle alarmWith this function, you can trigger thevehicle's panic alarm via text message. Analarm sounds and the exterior lightingflashes. Depending on the setting, the panicalarm lasts five or ten seconds. Afterwards,the alarm switches off.

278 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

Garage door opener

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWhen you operate or program the garage doorwith the integrated garage door opener,persons in the range of movement of thegarage door can become trapped or struck bythe garage door. There is a risk of injury.When using the integrated garage dooropener, always make sure that nobody iswithin the range of movement of the garagedoor.

G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbon monoxide. Inhalingthese exhaust gases leads to poisoning. Thereis a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leavethe engine running in enclosed spaceswithout sufficient ventilation.

The HomeLink® garage door openerintegrated in the rear-view mirror allows youto operate up to three different door and gatesystems.Use the integrated garage door opener onlyon garage doors that:Rhave safety stop and reverse features andRmeet current U.S. federal safety standardsWhen programming a garage door opener,park the vehicle outside the garage.

i Certain garage door drives areincompatible with the integrated garagedoor opener. If you have difficultyprogramming the integrated garage dooropener, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Alternatively, you can call the followingtelephone assistance services:RUSA: Mercedes-Benz CustomerAssistance Center at1-800-FOR-MERCedesRCanada: Customer Service at1-800-387-0100RHomeLink® hotline 1-800-355-3515(free of charge)

More information on HomeLink® and/orcompatible products is also availableonline at http://www.homelink.com.

i Notes on the declaration of conformity(Y page 24).USA: FCC ID: CB2HMIHL4Canada: IC: 279B-HMIHL4

Programming

Programming buttonsObserve the "Important safety notes"(Y page 279).

Integrated garage door opener in the rear-viewmirror

Garage door remote controlA is not part ofthe integrated garage door opener.X The first time before programming, clearthe integrated garage door opener memory(Y page 281).

X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in theignition lock.

Features 279

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

X Press and hold one of buttons; to? onthe integrated garage door opener.After a short time, indicator lamp: lightsup yellow.i Indicator lamp: lights up yellow as soonas button;,= or? is programmed forthe first time. If the selected button hasalready been programmed, indicatorlamp: will only light up yellow after tenseconds have elapsed.

X Release button;,= or?. Indicatorlamp: flashes yellow.

X Point garage door remote controlAtowards buttons; to? on the rear-viewmirror at a distance of 2 to 8 inches (5 to20 cm).i The required distance between remotecontrolA and the integrated garage dooropener depends on the garage door drivesystem. Several attempts might benecessary. You should test every positionfor at least 25 seconds before tryinganother position.

X Press and hold buttonB on remote controlA until indicator lamp: lights up green.If indicator lamp: lights up green orflashes, then programming has beensuccessful.

X Release buttonB on remote controlA forthe garage door drive system.

X If indicator lamp: lights up red: repeatthe programming procedure for thecorresponding button on the rear-viewmirror. When doing so, vary the distancebetween remote controlA and the rear-view mirror.

i If the indicator lamp flashes green aftersuccessful programming, the garage doorsystem is using a rolling code. Afterprogramming, you must synchronize thegarage door opener integrated in the rear-view mirror with the receiver of the garagedoor system.

Synchronizing the rolling codeObserve the "Important safety notes"(Y page 279).Your vehicle must be within reach of thegarage door or exterior gate drive. Make surethat neither your vehicle nor any persons/objects are present within the sweep of thedoor or gate.X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in theignition lock.

X Press the program button of the door orgate drive (see the door or gate driveoperating instructions, e.g. under"programming of additional remotecontrols").i Usually, you now have 30seconds toinitiate the next step.

X Press previously programmed button;,= or? of the integrated garage dooropener until the door closes.The rolling code synchronization is thencomplete.

Notes on programming the remotecontrolCanadian radio frequency laws require a"break" (or interruption) of the transmissionsignals after broadcasting for a few seconds.Therefore, these signals may not last longenough for the integrated garage dooropener. The signal is not recognized duringprogramming. Comparable with Canadianlaw, some U.S. garage door openers alsofeature a "break".Proceed as follows:Rif you live in CanadaRif you have difficulties programming thegarage door opener (regardless of whereyou live) when using the programmingsteps

280 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

X Press and hold one of buttons; to? onthe integrated garage door opener.After a short time, indicator lamp: lightsup yellow.

X Release the button.Indicator lamp: flashes yellow.

X Press buttonB of garage door remotecontrolA for two seconds, then release itfor two seconds.

X Press buttonB again for two seconds.X Repeat this sequence on buttonB ofremote controlA until indicator lamp:lights up green.If indicator lamp: turns red, repeat theprocess.

X Continue with the other programmingsteps (see above).

Problems when programmingIf you are experiencing problemsprogramming the integrated garage dooropener on the rear-view mirror, take note ofthe following instructions:RCheck the transmitter frequency of garagedoor drive remote controlA. This canusually be found on the back of the remotecontrol.The integrated garage door opener iscompatible with devices that have unitswhich operate in the frequency range of280to 433MHz.RReplace the batteries in garage doorremote controlA. This increases thelikelihood that garage door remote controlA will transmit a strong and precise signalto the integrated garage door opener in therear-view mirror.RWhen programming, hold remote controlA at varying distances and angles from thebutton that you are programming. Tryvarious angles at a distance between 2and12 inches (5to 30 cm) or at the same anglebut at varying distances.RIf another remote control for the samegarage door drive is available, repeat the

same programming steps with this remotecontrol. Before performing these steps,make sure that new batteries have beeninstalled in garage door drive remotecontrolA.RNote that some remote controls onlytransmit for a limited amount of time (theindicator lamp on the remote control goesout). Press buttonB on remote controlA again before transmission ends.RAlign the antenna cable of the garage dooropener unit. This can improve signalreception/transmission.

Opening/closing the garage doorAfter it has been programmed, the integratedgarage door opener performs the function ofthe garage door system remote control.Please also read the operating instructionsfor the garage door system.X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in theignition lock.

X Press button;,= or? which you haveprogrammed to operate the garage door.Garage door system with a fixed code:indicator lamp: lights up green.Garage door system with a rolling code:indicator lamp: flashes green.i The transmitter will transmit a signal aslong as the button is pressed. Thetransmission is halted after a maximum often seconds and indicator lamp: lightsup yellow. Press button;,= or? againif necessary.

Clearing the memoryX Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in theignition lock.

X Press buttons; and?.The indicator lamp lights up yellow.

X Press and hold buttons; and? until theindicator lamp turns green.

Features 281

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

i Make sure that you clear the memory ofthe integrated garage door opener beforeselling the vehicle.

Compass

Calling up the compassThe compass displays in which compassdirection the vehicle is currently traveling: NN,NENE, EE, SESE, SS, SWSW, WW or NWNW.

To receive a correct display in rear-viewmirror:, the compass must be calibratedand the magnetic field zone set.

Setting the compassX Determine your position using the followingzone maps.

North America zone map

South America zone mapX Push a round pen into opening=(Y page 282) for approximately threeseconds.The zone currently selected appears incompass display;(Y page 282).

X To select the zone: push a round pen intoopening=(Y page 282) until the desiredzone is selected.If, after a few seconds, the display incompass display;(Y page 282) changesdirection, the zone has been selected.

Calibrating the compassX Make sure that there is sufficient space foryou to drive in a circle without impedingtraffic.

In order to calibrate the compass correctly,do the following:Rcalibrate the compass in the open and notin the vicinity of steel structures or high-voltage transmission lines.Rswitch off electrical consumers such as theclimate control, windshield wipers or rearwindow defroster.Rclose all doors and the trunk lid.X Switch on the ignition.X Push a round pen into opening=(Y page 282) for approximately six

282 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

seconds, until symbol CC is shown incompass display;(Y page 282).

X Drive your vehicle in a full circle atapproximately 3 mph (5 km/h) to 6 mph(10 km/h).When the calibration has successfully beencompleted, the current direction is shownin compass display;(Y page 282).

Floormat on the driver's side

G WARNINGObjects in the driver's footwell can restrict thepedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal.The operating and road safety of the vehicleis jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident.Make sure that all objects in the vehicle arestowed correctly, and that they cannot enterthe driver's footwell. Install the floormatssecurely and as specified in order to ensuresufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not useloose floormats and do not place floormats ontop of one another.

X Slide the seat backwards.X To install: place the floormat in thefootwell.

X Press safety catch knobs: ontoretainers;.

X To remove: pull the floormat offretainers;.

X Remove the floormat.

Features 283

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

284

Useful information ............................ 286Engine compartment ........................ 286Maintenance ...................................... 290Care .................................................... 291

285

Maintenance

andcare

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optionalequipment of your vehicle available at thetime of publication of the Operator'sManual. Country-specific differences arepossible. Please note that your vehicle maynot be equipped with all featuresdescribed. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions.

i Read the information on qualifiedspecialist workshops: (Y page 25).

Engine compartment

Hood

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf the hood is unlatched, it may open up whenthe vehicle is in motion and block your view.There is a risk of an accident.Never unlatch the hood while driving.

G WARNINGWhen opening and closing the hood, it maysuddenly fall into the closed position. There isa risk of injury to persons within range ofmovement of the hood.Open and close the hood only when no one iswithin its range of movement.

G WARNINGOpening the hood when the engine isoverheated or when there is a fire in theengine compartment could expose you to hotgases or other service products. There is arisk of injury.Let an overheated engine cool down beforeopening the hood. If there is a fire in theengine compartment, keep the hood closedand contact the fire department.

G WARNINGThe engine compartment contains movingcomponents. Certain components, such asthe radiator fan, may continue to run or startagain suddenly when the ignition is off. Thereis a risk of injury.If you need to do any work inside the enginecompartment,Rswitch off the ignitionRnever reach into the area where there is arisk of danger from moving components,such as the fan rotation areaRkeep clothing away from moving parts

G WARNINGThe ignition system and the fuel injectionsystem work under high voltage. If you touchcomponents which are under voltage, youcould get an electric shock. There is a risk ofinjury.Never touch components of the ignitionsystem or fuel injection system when theignition is switched on.

Opening the hood

G WARNINGCertain components in the enginecompartment, such as the engine, radiatorand parts of the exhaust system, can becomevery hot. Working in the engine compartmentposes a risk of injury.Where possible, let the engine cool down andtouch only the components described in thefollowing.

G WARNINGWhen the hood is open and the windshieldwipers are set in motion, you can be injuredby the wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury.Always switch off the windshield wipers andthe ignition before opening the hood.

! Make sure that the windshield wipers arenot folded away from the windshield. You

286 Engine compartmentMaintenance

andcare

could otherwise damage the windshieldwipers or the hood.

X Make sure that the windshield wipers areswitched off.

X Pull release lever: on the hood.The hood is released.

X Reach into the gap between the hood andthe radiator trim and press hood catchlever; to the left.

X Raise the hood.

X Pull support strut? out of bracketA.X Lift up support strut? and insert it intoyellow retaining clip=.

Closing the hoodX Raise the hood slightly and, at the sametime, remove support strut? from yellowretaining clip=.

X Swing support strut? down and press itinto bracketA until it engages.

X Lower the hood and let it fall from a heightof approximately 8 in (20 cm).

X Check that the hood has engaged properly.If the hood can be raised slightly, it is notproperly engaged. Do not press the hoodclosed. Open the hood again and close itwith a little more force.

Engine oil

General notesDepending on your driving style, the vehicleconsumes up to 0.9 US qt (0.8 liters) of oil per600 miles (1,000 km). The oil consumptionmay be higher than this when the vehicle isnew or if you frequently drive at high enginespeeds.Depending on the engine, the oil dipstick maybe in a different location.When checking the oil level:Rpark the vehicle on a level surface.Rthe engine should be switched off forapproximately five minutes if the engine isat normal operating temperature.Rif the engine is not at normal operatingtemperature, e.g. if the engine was onlystarted briefly, wait about 30 minutesbefore carrying out the measurement.

Engine compartment 287

Maintenance

andcare

Z

Checking the oil level using the oildipstick

G WARNINGCertain components in the enginecompartment, such as the engine, radiatorand parts of the exhaust system, can becomevery hot. Working in the engine compartmentposes a risk of injury.Where possible, let the engine cool down andtouch only the components described in thefollowing.

ExampleX Pull oil dipstick: out of the dipstick guidetube.

X Wipe off oil dipstick:.X Slowly slide oil dipstick: into the guidetube to the stop, and take it out again.If the level is between MIN mark= andMAX mark;, the oil level is correct.

X If the oil level has dropped to MIN mark= or below, add 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter) ofengine oil.

Adding engine oil

G WARNINGCertain components in the enginecompartment, such as the engine, radiatorand parts of the exhaust system, can becomevery hot. Working in the engine compartmentposes a risk of injury.Where possible, let the engine cool down andtouch only the components described in thefollowing.

G WARNINGIf engine oil comes into contact with hotcomponents in the engine compartment, itmay ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.Make sure that engine oil is not spilled nextto the filler neck. Let the engine cool downand thoroughly clean the engine oil off thecomponents before starting the engine.

H Environmental noteWhen adding oil, take care not to spill any. Ifoil enters the soil or waterways, it is harmfulto the environment.

! Only use engine oils and oil filters thathave been approved for vehicles with aservice system. You can obtain a list of theengine oils and oil filters tested andapproved in accordance with theMercedes-Benz Specifications for ServiceProducts at any Mercedes-Benz Servicecenter.Damage to the engine or exhaust system iscaused by the following:Rusing engine oils and oil filters that havenot been specifically approved for theservice systemRreplacing engine oil and oil filters afterthe interval for replacement specified bythe service system has been exceededRusing engine oil additives.

! Do not add toomuch oil. adding toomuchengine oil can result in damage to theengine or to the catalytic converter. Haveexcess engine oil siphoned off.

288 Engine compartmentMaintenance

andcare

Example: engine oil capX Turn cap: counter-clockwise and removeit.

X Add engine oil.If the oil level is at or below the MIN markon the oil dipstick, add 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter)of engine oil.

X Replace cap: on the filler neck and turnclockwise.Ensure that the cap locks into placesecurely.

X Check the oil level again with the oildipstick (Y page 288).

Further information on engine oil(Y page 354).

Checking and adding other serviceproducts

Checking coolant level

G WARNINGThe engine cooling system is pressurized,particularly when the engine is warm. Whenopening the cap, you could be scalded by hotcoolant spraying out. There is a risk of injury.Let the engine cool down before opening thecap. Wear eye and hand protection whenopening the cap. Open the cap slowly half aturn to allow pressure to escape.

! The coolant may only be checked andcorrected when the engine is cool (coolanttemperature below 104 ‡ (40 †).Checking the coolant when the coolant

temperature is above 104 ‡ (40 †) mayresult in damage to the engine or to theengine cooling system.

ExampleX Park the vehicle on a level surface.Only check the coolant level when thevehicle is on a level surface and the enginehas cooled down.

X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in theignition lock (Y page 141).

X Check the coolant temperature display inthe instrument cluster.The coolant temperature must be below104 ‡ (40 †).

X Turn the SmartKey to position0 (Y page 141) in the ignition lock.

X Slowly turn cap: half a turn counter-clockwise to allow excess pressure toescape.

X Turn cap: further counter-clockwise andremove it.If the coolant is at the level of marker bar= in the filler neck when cold, there isenough coolant in coolant expansiontank;.

X If necessary, add coolant that has beentested and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

X Replace cap: and turn it clockwise as faras it will go.

For further information on coolant, see(Y page 355).

Engine compartment 289

Maintenance

andcare

Z

Windshield washer system

G WARNINGCertain components in the enginecompartment, such as the engine, radiatorand parts of the exhaust system, can becomevery hot. Working in the engine compartmentposes a risk of injury.Where possible, let the engine cool down andtouch only the components described in thefollowing.

G WARNINGWindshield washer concentrate is highlyflammable. If it comes into contact with hotengine components or the exhaust system itcould ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.Make sure that no windshield washerconcentrate is spilled next to the filler neck.

ExampleX To open: pull cap: upwards by the tab.X Add the premixed washer fluid.X To close: press cap: onto the filler neckuntil it engages.

If the washer fluid level drops below therecommended minimum of 1 liter, a messageappears in the multifunction displayprompting you to refill the washer fluid(Y page 246).Further information on windshield washerfluid/antifreeze (Y page 356).

Maintenance

ASSYST PLUS

Service messagesThe ASSYST PLUS service interval displayinforms you of the next service due date.Information on the type of service and serviceintervals (see the separate MaintenanceBooklet).You can obtain further information from anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center or athttp://www.mbusa.com (USA only).

i The ASSYST PLUS service interval displaydoes not show any information on theengine oil level. Observe the notes on theengine oil level (Y page 287).

The multifunction display shows a servicemessage for several seconds, e.g.:RService A in .. DaysService A in .. DaysRService A DueService A DueRService A Exceeded by .. DaysService A Exceeded by .. DaysDepending on the operating conditions of thevehicle, the remaining time or distance untilthe next service due date is displayed.The letter AA or BB, possibly in connection witha number or another letter, shows the type ofservice. AA stands for a minor service and BB fora major service.You can obtain further information from anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.The ASSYST PLUS service interval displaydoes not take into account any periods oftime during which the battery isdisconnected.Maintaining the time-dependent serviceschedule:X Note down the service due date displayedin the multifunction display beforedisconnecting the battery.

orX After reconnecting the battery, subtractthe battery disconnection periods from theservice date shown on the display.

290 MaintenanceMaintenance

andcare

Hiding a service messageX Press thea or% button on thesteering wheel.

Displaying service messagesX Switch on the ignition.X Press the= or; button to select theServ.Serv. menu.

X Press the9 or: button to select theASSYST PLUSASSYST PLUS submenu and confirm bypressing thea button.The service due date appears in themultifunction display.

Information about Service

Resetting the ASSYST PLUS serviceinterval display! If the ASSYST PLUS service intervaldisplay has been inadvertently reset, thissetting can be corrected at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.Have service work carried out as describedin the Maintenance Booklet. This mayotherwise lead to increased wear anddamage to the major assemblies or thevehicle.

A qualified specialist workshop, e.g. anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center, will resetthe ASSYST PLUS service interval displayafter the service work has been carried out.You can also obtain further information onmaintenance work, for example.

Special service requirementsThe specifiedmaintenance interval takes onlythe normal operation of the vehicle intoaccount. Under arduous operating conditionsor increased load on the vehicle,maintenance work must be carried out morefrequently, for example:Rregular city driving with frequentintermediate stopsRif the vehicle is primarily used to travelshort distances

Ruse in mountainous terrain or on poor roadsurfacesRif the engine is often left idling for longperiods

Under these or similar conditions, have, forexample, the air filter, engine oil and oil filterreplaced or changed more frequently. Underarduous operating conditions, the tires mustbe checked more often. Further informationcan be obtained at a qualified specialistworkshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter.

Driving abroadAnextensiveMercedes-Benz Service networkis also available in other countries. You canobtain further information from anyauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Care

General notes

H Environmental noteDispose of empty packaging and cleaningcloths in an environmentally responsiblemanner.

! For cleaning your vehicle, do not use anyof the following:Rdry, rough or hard clothsRabrasive cleaning agentsRsolventsRcleaning agents containing solventsDo not scrub.Do not touch the surfaces or protectivefilms with hard objects, e.g. a ring or icescraper. You could otherwise scratch ordamage the surfaces and protective film.

! Do not park the vehicle for an extendedperiod straight after cleaning it, particularlyafter having cleaned the wheels with wheelcleaner. Wheel cleaners could causeincreased corrosion of the brake discs andbrake pads/linings. For this reason, you

Care 291

Maintenance

andcare

Z

should drive for a few minutes aftercleaning. Braking heats the brake discs andthe brake pads/linings, thus drying them.The vehicle can then be parked.

Regular care of your vehicle is a condition forretaining the quality in the long term.Use care products and cleaning agentsrecommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Exterior care

Automatic car wash

G WARNINGBraking efficiency is reduced after washingthe vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.After the vehicle has been washed, brakecarefully while paying attention to the trafficconditions until full braking power is restored.

! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD functionis activated, the vehicle brakesautomatically in certain situations. Toprevent damage to the vehicle, deactivateDISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function inthe following or other similar situations:Rwhen towing the vehicleRin the car wash

! Never clean your vehicle in a TouchlessAutomatic Car Wash as these use specialcleaning agents. These cleaning agents candamage the paintwork or plastic parts.

! Make sure that the automatictransmission is in positionNwhen washingyour vehicle in a tow-through car wash. Thevehicle could be damaged if thetransmission is in another position.

! Make sure that:

Rthe side windows and the sliding sunroofare fully closed.Rthe ventilation/heating is switched off(the OFF button has been pressed/theairflow control is set to position 0).Rthe windshield wiper switch is in position0.

Otherwise, the vehicle might be damaged.You can wash the vehicle in an automatic carwash from the very start.If the vehicle is very dirty, pre-wash it beforecleaning it in an automatic car wash.After using an automatic car wash, wipe offwax from the windshield and the wiperblades. This will prevent smears and reducewiping noises caused by residue on thewindshield.

Washing by handIn some countries, washing by hand is onlyallowed at wash bays that are speciallydesigned for this purpose. Observe the legalrequirements in all countries concerned.X Do not use hot water and do not wash thevehicle in direct sunlight.

X Use a soft sponge to clean.X Use a mild cleaning agent, such as a carshampoo approved by Mercedes-Benz.

X Thoroughly hose down the vehicle with agentle jet of water.

X Do not point the water jet directly towardsthe air inlet.

X Use plenty of water and rinse out thesponge frequently.

X Rinse the vehicle with clean water and drythoroughly with a chamois.

X Do not let the cleaning agent dry on thepaintwork.

When using the vehicle in winter, remove alltraces of road salt deposits carefully and assoon as possible.

292 CareMaintenance

andcare

Power washers

G WARNINGThe water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirtblasters) can cause invisible exterior damageto the tires or chassis components.Components damaged in this way may failunexpectedly. There is a risk of an accident.Do not use power washers with circular jetnozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damagedtires or chassis components replacedimmediately.

! Always maintain a distance of at least11.8 in (30 cm) between the vehicle and thepower washer nozzle. Information aboutthe correct distance is available from theequipment manufacturer.Move the power washer nozzle aroundwhen cleaning your vehicle.Do not aim directly at any of the following:RtiresRdoor gaps, roof gaps, joints, etc.Relectrical componentsRbatteryRconnectorsRlightsRsealsRtrimRventilation slotsDamaged seals or electrical componentscan lead to leaks or failures.

Cleaning the wheels! Donot use acidicwheel cleaning productsto remove brake dust. This could damagewheel bolts and brake components.

! Do not park the vehicle for an extendedperiod straight after cleaning it, particularlyafter having cleaned the wheels with wheelcleaner. Wheel cleaners could causeincreased corrosion of the brake discs andbrake pads/linings. For this reason, youshould drive for a few minutes after

cleaning. Braking heats the brake discs andthe brake pads/linings, thus drying them.The vehicle can then be parked.

Cleaning the paintwork! Do not affix:RstickersRfilmsRmagnetic plates or similar itemsto painted surfaces. You could otherwisedamage the paintwork.

X Remove dirt immediately, where possible,while avoiding rubbing too hard.

X Soak insect remains with insect removerand rinse off the treated areas afterwards.

X Soak bird droppings with water and rinseoff the treated areas afterwards.

X Remove coolant, brake fluid, tree resin,oils, fuels and greases by rubbing gentlywith a cloth soaked in petroleum ether orlighter fluid.

X Use tar remover to remove tar stains.X Use silicone remover to remove wax.X Use a suitable touch-up stick, e.g. MBTouch-Up Stick, to repair slight damage tothe paintwork quickly and provisionally.

The following cannot always be completelyrepaired:RscratchesRcorrosive depositsRareas affected by corrosionRdamage caused by inadequate careIn such cases, visit a qualified specialistworkshop.If water no longer forms "beads" on the paintsurface, use the paint care productsrecommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. This is the case approximately everythree to five months, depending on theclimate conditions and the care product used.If the dirt has penetrated the paint surface orif the paintwork has become dull, then thepaintwork should be cleaned. For cleaning,

Care 293

Maintenance

andcare

Z

please use the paint cleaner recommend andapproved by Mercedes Benz.Do not use these care products in the sun oron the hood while the hood is hot.

Matte finish care! Never polish the vehicle or the light alloywheels. Polishing causes the finish toshine.

! The following may cause the paint tobecome shiny and thus reduce the matteeffect:RVigorous rubbing with unsuitablematerials.RFrequent use of car washes.RWashing the vehicle in direct sunlight.

! Never use paint cleaner, buffing orpolishing products, or gloss preserver, e.g.wax. These products are only suitable forhigh-gloss surfaces. Their use on vehicleswith matte finish leads to considerablesurface damage (shiny, spotted areas).Always have paintwork repairs carried outat a qualified specialist workshop.

! Do not use wash programs with a hot waxtreatment under any circumstances.

Observe these notes if your vehicle has aclear matte finish. This will help you to avoiddamage to the paintwork due to incorrecttreatment.These notes also apply to light alloy wheelswith a clear matte finish.

i The vehicle should preferably be washedby hand using a soft sponge, car shampooand plenty of water.

i Use only insect remover and car shampoofrom the range of recommended andapproved Mercedes-Benz care products.

Cleaning the windows

G WARNINGYou could become trapped by the windshieldwipers if they start moving while cleaning thewindshield or wiper blades. There is a risk ofinjury.Always switch off the windshield wipers andthe ignition before cleaning the windshield orwiper blades.

! Only fold thewindshieldwipers away fromthe windshield when vertical. Otherwise,you will damage the hood.

! Do not use dry cloths, abrasive products,solvents or cleaning agents containingsolvents to clean the inside of the windows.Do not touch the insides of the windowswith hard objects, e.g. an ice scraper orring. There is otherwise a risk of damagingthe windows.

! Clean the water drainage channels of thewindshield and the rear window at regularintervals. Deposits such as leaves, petalsand pollen may under certaincircumstances prevent water from drainingaway. This can lead to corrosion damageand damage to electronic components.

X Clean the inside and outside of thewindows with a damp cloth and a cleaningproduct that is recommended andapproved by Mercedes-Benz.

Cleaning wiper blades

G WARNINGYou could become trapped by the windshieldwipers if they start moving while cleaning thewindshield or wiper blades. There is a risk ofinjury.Always switch off the windshield wipers andthe ignition before cleaning the windshield orwiper blades.

294 CareMaintenance

andcare

! Only fold thewindshieldwipers away fromthe windshield when vertical. Otherwise,you will damage the hood.

! Do not pull the wiper blade. Otherwise,the wiper blade could be damaged.

! Do not clean wiper blades too often anddo not rub them too hard. Otherwise, thegraphite coating could be damaged. Thiscould cause wiper noise.

X Fold the windshield wiper arms away fromthe windshield.

X Carefully clean the wiper blades with adamp cloth.

X Fold the windshield wiper arms back againbefore switching on the ignition.

! Hold the wiper arm securely when foldingback. The windshield could be damaged ifthe wiper arm smacks against it suddenly.

Cleaning the exterior lighting! Only use cleaning agents or cleaningcloths which are suitable for plastic lightlenses. Unsuitable cleaning agents orcleaning cloths could scratch or damagethe plastic light lenses.

X Clean the plastic lenses of the exteriorlighting using a wet sponge and a mildcleaning agent, e.g. Mercedes-Benz carshampoo or cleaning cloths.

Cleaning the mirror turn signals! Only use cleaning agents or cleaningcloths that are suitable for plastic lenses.Unsuitable cleaning agents or cleaningcloths could scratch or damage the plasticlenses of the mirror turn signals.

X Clean the plastic lenses of the mirror turnsignals in the exterior mirror housing usinga wet sponge and a mild cleaning agent,e.g. Mercedes-Benz car shampoo orcleaning cloths.

Cleaning the sensors! If you clean the sensors with a powerwasher, make sure that you keep adistance of at least 11.8 in (30 cm) betweenthe vehicle and the power washer nozzle.Information about the correct distance isavailable from the equipmentmanufacturer.

X Clean sensors: of the driving systemswith water, car shampoo and a soft cloth.

Cleaning the rear view camera! Do not clean the camera lens and the areaaround the rear view camera with a powerwasher.

Care 295

Maintenance

andcare

Z

X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary andthat the SmartKey is in position 2 in theignition lock.

X To open the cover of the rear viewcamera: with the audio system/COMANDactivated, press the W button.

X Select SystemSystem by turning cVd the audiosystem/COMAND controller and pressWto confirm.

X Select RearRear viewview cameracamera and pressW toconfirm.

X Select Open camera coverOpen camera cover and confirmwithW.The cover of the 360° camera opens.

X To clean the rear view camera: use clearwater and a soft cloth to clean cameralens:.

Cleaning the exhaust pipeImpurities combined with the effects of roadgrit and corrosive environmental factors maycause flash rust to form on the surface. Youcan restore the original shine of the exhaustpipe by cleaning it regularly, especially inwinter and after washing.

! Do not clean the exhaust pipe with acid-based cleaning agents such as sanitarycleansers or wheel cleaners.

X Clean the exhaust pipe with a care producttested and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

! AMG vehicles with black exhaust pipes:do not use chrome polish to polish blackchromed screens. They will otherwise losetheir silky black shine. Rub the screen usinga lightly oiled cloth after every car wash.Commercially available engine oils, WD 40or Ballistol are suitable oils.

Interior care

Cleaning the display! For cleaning, do not use any of thefollowing:Ralcohol-based thinner or gasolineRabrasive cleaning agentsRcommercially-available householdcleaning agents

These may damage the display surface. Donot put pressure on the display surfacewhen cleaning. This could lead toirreparable damage to the display.

X Before cleaning the display, make sure thatit is switched off and has cooled down.

X Clean the display surface using acommercially available microfiber clothand TFT/LCD display cleaner.

X Dry the display surface using a drymicrofiber cloth.

Cleaning the plastic trim

G WARNINGCare products and cleaning agents containingsolvents cause surfaces in the cockpit tobecome porous. As a result, plastic parts maycome loose in the event of air bagdeployment. There is a risk of injury.Do not use any care products and cleaningagents to clean the cockpit.

! Do not affix the following to plasticsurfaces:RstickersRfilmsRscented oil bottles or similar itemsYou can otherwise damage the plastic.

! Do not allow cosmetics, insect repellentor sunscreen to come into contact with theplastic trim. This maintains the high-qualitylook of the surfaces.

296 CareMaintenance

andcare

X Wipe the plastic trim with a damp, lint-freecloth, e.g. a microfiber cloth.

X Heavy soiling: use care and cleaningproducts recommended and approved byMercedes-Benz.The surface may change color temporarily.Wait until the surface is dry again.

Cleaning the steering wheel and gear orselector leverX Thoroughly wipe with a damp cloth or useleather care agents that have beenrecommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Cleaning genuine wood and trimelements! Do not use solvent-based cleaning agentssuch as tar remover, wheel cleaners,polishes or waxes. There is otherwise a riskof damaging the surface.

! Do not use chrome polish on trim pieces.The trim pieces have a chrome look but aremostly made of anodized aluminum andcan lose their shine if chrome polish isused. Use a damp, lint-free cloth insteadwhen cleaning the trim pieces.If the chrome-plated trim pieces are verydirty, you can use a chrome polish. If youare unsure as to whether the trim piecesare chrome-plated or not, consult anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

X Wipe the wooden trim and trim pieces witha damp, lint-free cloth, e.g. a microfibercloth.

X Heavy soiling: use car care and cleaningproducts recommended and approved byMercedes-Benz.

Cleaning the seat covers

General notes! Do not use microfiber cloths to cleangenuine leather, artificial leather orDINAMICA covers. If used often, these candamage the cover.

i Note that regular care is essential toensure that the appearance and comfort ofthe covers is retained over time.

Genuine leather seat coversLeather is a natural product.It exhibits natural surface characteristics, forexample:Rdifferences in the textureRsigns of stretching and markingRslight nuances of colorThese are characteristics of leather and notmaterial defects.

! To retain the natural appearance of theleather, observe the following cleaninginstructions:RClean genuine leather covers carefullywith a damp cloth and then wipe thecovers down with a dry cloth.RMake sure that the leather does notbecome soaked. It may otherwisebecome rough and cracked.ROnly use leather care agents that havebeen tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. You can obtain these from aqualified specialist workshop.

Seat covers of other materials! Observe the following when cleaning:RClean artificial leather coverswith a clothmoistened with a solution containing1% detergent (e.g. dish washing liquid).RClean cloth covers with a microfibercloth moistened with a solutioncontaining 1% detergent (e.g. dishwashing liquid). Rub carefully and alwayswipe entire seat sections to avoid leavingvisible lines. Leave the seat to dry

Care 297

Maintenance

andcare

Z

afterwards. Cleaning results depend onthe type of dirt and how long it has beenthere.RClean Alcantara® covers with a dampcloth. Make sure that you wipe entireseat sections to avoid leaving visiblelines.

Cleaning the seat belts

G WARNINGSeat belts can become severely weakened ifbleached or dyed. This could cause the seatbelts to tear or fail, for instance, in the eventof an accident. This poses an increased riskof injury or fatal injury.Never bleach or dye the seat belts.

! Donot clean the seat belts using chemicalcleaning agents. Do not dry the seat beltsby heating at temperatures above 176 ‡(80 †) or in direct sunlight.

X Use clean, lukewarm water and soapsolution.

Cleaning the headliner and carpetsX Headliner: if it is very dirty, use a soft brushor a cleaning agent recommended andapproved by Mercedes-Benz.

X Carpets: use the carpet and textilecleaning agents recommended andapproved by Mercedes-Benz.

298 CareMaintenance

andcare

Useful information ............................ 300Where will I find...? ........................... 300Flat tire .............................................. 301Battery (vehicle) ................................ 305Jump-starting .................................... 309Towing and tow-starting .................. 311Fuses .................................................. 314

299

Breakdow

nassistance

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optionalequipment of your vehicle available at thetime of publication of the Operator'sManual. Country-specific differences arepossible. Please note that your vehicle maynot be equipped with all featuresdescribed. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions.

i Read the information on qualifiedspecialist workshops: (Y page 25).

Where will I find...?

First-aid kit

X Open the trunk lid.X Remove first-aid kit:.

i Check the expiration date on first-aidkit: at least once a year. Replace thecontents if necessary, and replace missingitems.

Vehicle tool kit

General notesVehicles with a TIREFIT kit: the TIREFIT kit islocated in the stowage well under the trunkfloor.

Vehicles with a tire-change tool kit: the tire-change tool kit is in the stowage well underthe trunk floor.

i Apart from certain country-specificvariations, the vehicles are not equippedwith a tire-change tool kit. Some tools forchanging a wheel are specific to thevehicle. For more information on whichtools are required and approved to performa wheel change on your vehicle, consult aqualified specialist workshop.Tools required for changing a wheel mayinclude, for example:RJackRWheel chockRLug wrench

Vehicles with a TIREFIT kit

: Tire inflation compressor; Towing eye= Tire sealant filler bottleX Open the trunk lid.X Lift the trunk floor upwards (Y page 265).

i Towing eye; is located under tireinflation compressor:.

Vehicles with a tire-change tool kitX Open the trunk lid.X Lift the trunk floor upwards (Y page 265).X Remove the tire-change tool kit.

300 Where will I find...?Breakdow

nassistance

The tire-change tool kit contains:RJackRLug wrenchROne pair of glovesRFolding wheel chock

Flat tire

Preparing the vehicleYour vehicle may be equipped with:RMOExtended tires (tires with run-flatproperties) (Y page 301)Vehicle preparation is not necessary onvehicles with MOExtended tires.Ra TIREFIT kit (Y page 300)Information on changing/mounting a wheel(Y page 342).X Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery andlevel ground, as far away as possible fromtraffic.

X Switch on the hazard warning lamps.X Secure the vehicle against rolling away(Y page 157).

X If possible, bring the front wheels into thestraight-ahead position.

X Switch off the engine.X Remove the SmartKey from the ignitionlock.

X All occupants must get out of the vehicle.Make sure that they are not endangered asthey do so.

X Make sure that no one is near the dangerarea while a wheel is being changed.Anyone who is not directly assisting in thewheel change should, for example, standbehind the barrier.

X Get out of the vehicle. Pay attention totraffic conditions when doing so.

X Close the driver's door.

i Vehicles equippedwithMOExtended tiresare not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at thefactory. It is therefore recommended that

you additionally equip your vehicle with aTIREFIT kit if you mount tires that do notfeature run-flat properties, e.g. winter tires.A TIREFIT kit can be obtained from aqualified specialist workshop.

MOExtended tires (tires with run-flatproperties)

General notesWith MOExtended tires (tires with run flatcharacteristics), you can continue to driveyour vehicle even if there is a total loss ofpressure in one or more tires. The affectedtiremust not show any clearly visible damage.You can recognize MOExtended tires by theMOExtended marking which appears on thesidewall of the tire. You will find this markingnext to the tire size designation, the load-bearing capacity and the speed index(Y page 336).MOExtended tires may only be used inconjunction with an active tire pressure losswarning systemorwith an active tire pressuremonitor.If the pressure loss warning messageappears in the multifunction display:RObserve the instructions in the displaymessages (Y page 241).RCheck the tire for damage.RIf driving on, observe the following notes.The maximum driving distance isapproximately 50 miles (80 km) when thevehicle is partially laden and approximately18 miles (30 km) when the vehicle is fullyladen.In addition to the vehicle load, the drivingdistance possible depends upon:RSpeedRRoad conditionROutside temperatureThe driving distance possible in run-flat modemay be reduced by extreme driving

Flat tire 301

Breakdow

nassistance

conditions/maneuvers, or it can be increasedthrough a moderate style of driving.The maximum permissible distance whichcan be driven in run-flatmode is counted fromthe moment the tire pressure loss warningappears in the multifunction display.You must not exceed a maximum speed of50 mph (80 km/h).

i When replacing one or all tires, make surethat you use only tires:Rof the size specified for the vehicle andRmarked "MOExtended"If a tire has gone flat and cannot bereplaced with a MOExtended tire, astandard tire may be used as a temporarymeasure. Make sure that you use theproper size and type (summer or wintertire).

i Vehicles equippedwithMOExtended tiresare not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at thefactory. It is therefore recommended thatyou additionally equip your vehicle with aTIREFIT kit if you mount tires that do notfeature run-flat properties, e.g. winter tires.A TIREFIT kit can be obtained from aqualified specialist workshop.

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWhen driving in emergency mode, the drivingcharacteristics deteriorate, e.g. whencornering, accelerating quickly and whenbraking. There is a risk of an accident.Do not exceed the stated maximum speed.Avoid abrupt steering and driving maneuvers,and driving over obstacles (curbs, potholes,off-road). This applies in particular to a ladenvehicle.Stop driving in emergency mode if:Ryou hear banging noises.Rthe vehicle starts to shake.Ryou see smoke and smell rubber.

RESP® is intervening constantly.Rthere are tears in the sidewalls of the tire.After driving in emergency mode, have thewheel rims checked at a qualified specialistworkshop with regard to their further use. Thedefective tire must be replaced in every case.

TIREFIT kit

Important safety notesTIREFIT is a tire sealant.You can use TIREFIT to seal punctures of upto 0.16 in (4mm), particularly those in the tiretread. You can use TIREFIT at outsidetemperatures down to Ò4 ‡ (Ò20 †).

G WARNINGIn the following situations, the tire sealant isunable to provide sufficient breakdownassistance, as it is unable to seal the tireproperly:Rthere are cuts or punctures in the tire largerthan those mentioned above.Rthe wheel rim is damaged.Ryou have driven at very low tire pressuresor on a flat tire.

There is a risk of an accident.Do not drive the vehicle. Contact a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

G WARNINGThe tire sealant is harmful and causesirritation. It must not come into contact withyour skin, eyes or clothing or be swallowed.Do not inhale TIREFIT fumes. Keep tire sealantaway from children. There is a risk of injury.If you come into contact with the tire sealant,observe the following:RRinse off the tire sealant from your skinimmediately with water.RIf the tire sealant comes into contact withyour eyes, immediately rinse themthoroughly with clean water.

302 Flat tireBreakdow

nassistance

RIf tire sealant is swallowed, immediatelyrinse your mouth out thoroughly and drinkplenty of water. Do not induce vomiting,and seek medical attention immediately.RImmediately change out of clothing whichhas come into contact with tire sealant.RIf an allergic reaction occurs, seek medicalattention immediately.

Using the TIREFIT kit

TIREFIT sticker, 2-partX Do not remove any foreign objects whichhave penetrated the tire, e.g. screws ornails.

X Remove the tire sealant bottle, theaccompanying TIREFIT sticker and the tireinflation compressor from the stowage wellunderneath the cargo compartment floor(Y page 300).

X Affix part: of the TIREFIT sticker withinthe driver's field of vision.

X Affix part; of the TIREFIT sticker near thevalve on the wheel with the defective tire.

X Remove filler hoseB and plug= from thebottom section of the tire inflationcompressor housing.

X Slide the yellow filler hose connector intothe mounting on yellow capA of tiresealant bottle: until the plug engages.

X With the sealing rings in front, slide yellowcapA of tire sealant bottle: into themounting of tire inflation compressor;until the cap and both hooks engage.

X Remove the cap from valveC on the faultytire.

X Screw filler hoseD onto valve.X Insert plug= into the socket of thecigarette lighter (Y page 268) or into a 12 Vpower socket in your vehicle (Y page 269).

X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in theignition lock (Y page 141).

X Press on/off switch? on the tire inflationcompressor to ON.The tire inflation compressor is switchedon. The tire is inflated.i First, tire sealant is pumped into the tire.The pressure can briefly rise toapproximately 500 kPa (5 bar/73 psi).Do not switch off the tire inflationcompressor during this phase.

X Let the tire inflation compressor run for amaximum of ten minutes. The tire shouldthen have attained a pressure of at least200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi).

! Do not operate the tire inflationcompressor for longer than ten minutes at

Flat tire 303

Breakdow

nassistance

Z

a time without a break. It may otherwiseoverheat.The tire inflation compressor can beoperated again once it has cooled down.

If a tire pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi)is achieved after a maximum of ten minutes,see (Y page 304).If a tire pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi)is not achieved after a maximum of tenminutes, see (Y page 304).

i If tire sealant leaks out, allow it to dry. Itcan then be removed like a layer of film.If your clothes are soiled with tire sealant,have them cleaned with perchloroethyleneat a dry cleaner as soon as possible.

Tire pressure not reachedIf a pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) hasnot been achieved after ten minutes:X Switch off the tire inflation compressor.X Unscrew the filler hose from the valve ofthe faulty tire.

X Very slowly drive forwards or reverseapproximately 30 ft (10 m).

X Pump up the tire again.After a maximum of ten minutes, the tirepressuremust be at least 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi).

G WARNINGIf the required tire pressure is not reachedafter the specified time, the tire is too badlydamaged. The tire sealant cannot repair thetire in this instance. Damaged tires and a tirepressure that is too low can significantlyimpair the vehicle's braking and drivingcharacteristics. There is a risk of accident.Do not continue driving. Contact a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

Tire pressure reached

G WARNINGA tire temporarily sealed with tire sealantimpairs the driving characteristics and is notsuitable for higher speeds. There is a risk ofaccident.You should therefore adapt your driving styleaccordingly and drive carefully. Do not exceedthe specified maximum speed with a tire thathas been repaired using tire sealant.

! After use, excess tire sealant may run outof the filler hose. This could cause stains.Therefore, place the filler hose in the plasticbag that contained the TIREFIT kit.

H Environmental noteHave the used tire sealant bottle disposed ofprofessionally, e.g. at a qualified specialistworkshop.

If a tire pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi)has been achieved after ten minutes:X Switch off the tire inflation compressor.X Unscrew the filler hose from the valve ofthe faulty tire.

X Stow the tire sealant bottle and the tireinflation compressor.

X Pull away immediately.The maximum speed for a tire sealed with tiresealant is 50 mph (80 km/h). The upper partof the TIREFIT sticker must be affixed to theinstrument cluster in the driver's field ofvision.X Stop after driving for approximately tenminutes and check the tire pressure withthe tire inflation compressor.The tire pressure must now be at least130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi).

G WARNINGIf the required tire pressure is not reachedafter driving for a short period, the tire is toobadly damaged. The tire sealant cannot repairthe tire in this instance. Damaged tires and a

304 Flat tireBreakdow

nassistance

tire pressure that is too low can significantlyimpair the vehicle's braking and drivingcharacteristics. There is a risk of accident.Do not continue driving. Contact a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

X Correct the tire pressure if it is still at least130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi) (for the values,see the Tire and Loading Informationplacard on the driver's side B-pillar or tirepressure table on the fuel filler flap).

X To increase the tire pressure: switch onthe tire inflation compressor.

X To reduce the tire pressure: depresspressure release button: next topressure gauge;.

X To remove the tire sealant bottle from thetire inflation compressor, press togetherthe locking tabs on the yellow cap.

X Pull the tire sealant bottle out of the tireinflation compressor.The filler hose remains attached to the tiresealant bottle.

X Stow the tire sealant bottle and the tireinflation compressor.

X Drive to the nearest qualified specialistworkshop and have the tire changed there.

X Have the tire sealant bottle and the fillerhose replaced as soon as possible at aqualified specialist workshop.

X Have the tire sealant bottle replaced everyfour years at a qualified specialistworkshop.

Battery (vehicle)

Important safety notesSpecial tools and expert knowledge arerequired when working on the battery, e.g.removal and installing. You should thereforehave all work involving the battery carried outat a qualified specialist workshop.

G WARNINGWork carried out incorrectly on the batterycan lead, for example, to a short circuit andthus damage the vehicle electronics. This canlead to function restrictions applying tosafety-relevant systems, e.g. the lightingsystem, ABS (anti-lock braking system) orESP® (Electronic Stability Program). Theoperating safety of your vehicle may berestricted. You could lose control of thevehicle, for example:RbrakingRin the event of abrupt steering maneuverand/or when the vehicle's speed is notadapted to the road conditions

There is a risk of an accident.In the event of a short circuit or a similarincident, contact a qualified specialistworkshop immediately. Do not drive anyfurther. You should have all work involving thebattery carried out at a qualified specialistworkshop.

For further information about ABS and ESP®,see (Y page 64) and (Y page 68).

Battery (vehicle) 305

Breakdow

nassistance

Z

G WARNINGElectrostatic build-up can lead to the creationof sparks, which could ignite the highlyexplosive gases of a battery. There is a risk ofan explosion.Before handling the battery, touch the vehiclebody to remove any existing electrostaticbuild-up.

The highly flammable gasmixture formswhencharging the battery as well as when jump-starting.Always make sure that neither you nor thebattery is electrostatically charged. A build-up of electrostatic charge can be caused, forexample:Rby wearing clothing made from syntheticfibersRdue to friction between clothing and seatsRif you push or pull the battery across thecarpet or other synthetic materialsRif you wipe the battery with a cloth

G WARNINGDuring the charging process, a batteryproduces hydrogen gas. If a short circuitoccurs or sparks are created, the hydrogengas can ignite. There is a risk of an explosion.RMake sure that the positive terminal of aconnected battery does not come intocontact with vehicle parts.RNever place metal objects or tools on abattery.RIt is important that you observe thedescribed order of the battery terminalswhen connecting and disconnecting abattery.RWhen jump-starting, make sure that thebattery poles with identical polarity areconnected.RIt is particularly important to observe thedescribed order when connecting anddisconnecting the jumper cables.RNever connect or disconnect the batteryterminals while the engine is running.

G WARNINGBattery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing.Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not leanover the battery. Keep children away frombatteries. Wash battery acid immediately withwater and seek medical attention.

H Environmental noteBatteries contain dangeroussubstances. It is against thelaw to dispose of them withthe household rubbish. Theymust be collected separatelyand recycled to protect theenvironment.Dispose of batteries in anenvironmentally friendlymanner. Take dischargedbatteries to a qualifiedspecialist workshop or aspecial collection point forused batteries.

! Have the battery checked regularly at aqualified specialist workshop.Observe the service intervals in theMaintenance Booklet or contact a qualifiedspecialist workshop for more information.

! You should have all work involving thebattery carried out at a qualified specialistworkshop. In the exceptional case that it isnecessary for you to disconnect the batteryyourself, make sure that:Ryou switch off the engine and remove theSmartKey. Check that all the indicatorlamps in the instrument cluster are off.Otherwise, electronic components, suchas the alternator, may be damaged.Ryou first remove the negative terminalclamp and then the positive terminalclamp. Never swap the terminal clamps.

306 Battery (vehicle)Breakdow

nassistance

Otherwise, the vehicle's electronicsystem may be damaged.Ron vehicles with automatic transmission,the transmission is locked in position Pafter disconnecting the battery. Thevehicle is secured against rolling away.You can then no longer move the vehicle.

The battery and the cover of the positiveterminal clamp must be installed securelyduring operation.

Comply with safety precautions and takeprotective measures when handlingbatteries.

Risk of explosion.

Fire, open flames and smoking areprohibited when handling thebattery. Avoid creating sparks.

Battery acid is caustic. Avoidcontact with skin, eyes or clothing.Wear suitable protective clothing,especially gloves, apron andfaceguard.Rinse any acid spills immediatelywith clear water. Contact aphysician if necessary.Wear eye protection.

Keep children away.

Observe this Operator's Manual.

For safety reasons, Mercedes–Benzrecommends that you only use batteries thathave been tested and approved for yourvehicle by Mercedes-Benz. These batterieshave greater impact resistance and as a resultthere is no risk of acid burns to occupantswhen a battery is damaged in an accident.

In order for the battery to achieve themaximum possible service life, it must alwaysbe sufficiently charged.Like other batteries, the vehicle battery maydischarge over time if you do not use thevehicle. In this case, have the batterydisconnected at a qualified specialistworkshop. You can also charge the batterywith a charger recommended by Mercedes-Benz. Contact a qualified specialist workshopfor further information.Have the battery condition of charge checkedmore frequently if you use the vehicle mainlyfor short trips or if you leave it standing idlefor a lengthy period. Consult a qualifiedspecialist workshop if you wish to leave yourvehicle parked for a long period of time.Only replace a battery with a battery that hasbeen recommended by Mercedes-Benz.

i Remove the SmartKey if you park thevehicle and do not require any electricalconsumers. The vehicle will then use verylittle energy, thus conserving batterypower.

i If the power supply has been interrupted,e.g. if you reconnect the battery, you willhave to:Rset the clock (audio system/COMAND,see the separate operating instructions).Rreset the function for folding the exteriormirrors in/out automatically, by foldingthe mirrors out once (Y page 103).

Charging the battery

G WARNINGDuring charging and jump-starting, explosivegases can escape from the battery. There is arisk of an explosion.Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creatingsparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficientventilation while charging and jump-starting.Do not lean over a battery.

Battery (vehicle) 307

Breakdow

nassistance

Z

G WARNINGBattery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing.Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not leanover the battery. Keep children away frombatteries. Wash battery acid immediately withwater and seek medical attention.

G WARNINGA discharged battery can freeze attemperatures below freezing point. Whenjump-starting the vehicle or charging thebattery, gases can escape from the battery.There is a risk of an explosion.Allow the frozen battery to thaw out beforecharging it or jump-starting.

! Only use battery chargers with amaximum charging voltage of 14.8 V.

! Only charge the battery using the jump-starting connection point.

The jump-starting connection point is in theengine compartment (Y page 309).X Open the hood.X Connect the battery charger to the positiveterminal and ground point in the sameorder as when connecting the donorbattery in the jump-starting procedure(Y page 309).

If, at low temperatures, the indicator lamps/warning lamps in the instrument cluster donot light up, it is highly likely that thedischarged battery has frozen. In this caseyou may neither jump-start the vehicle norcharge the battery. The service life of athawed-out battery may be shorter. Thestarting characteristics can be impaired,particularly at low temperatures. Have thethawed-out battery checked at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.Only charge the installed battery with abattery charger which has been tested andapproved by Mercedes-Benz. An accessorybattery charge unit specially adapted forMercedes-Benz vehicles and tested and

approved by Mercedes-Benz is available. Itpermits the charging of the battery in itsinstalled position. Contact an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center for furtherinformation and availability. Read the batterycharger's operating instructions beforecharging the battery.

308 Battery (vehicle)Breakdow

nassistance

Jump-starting

For the jump-starting procedure, use only the jump-starting connection point, consisting of apositive terminal and an earth point, in the engine compartment.

G WARNINGBattery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean overthe battery. Keep children away from batteries. Wash battery acid immediately with water andseek medical attention.

G WARNINGDuring charging and jump-starting, explosive gases can escape from the battery. There is a riskof an explosion.Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creating sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficientventilation while charging and jump-starting. Do not lean over a battery.

G WARNINGDuring the charging process, a battery produces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs or sparksare created, the hydrogen gas can ignite. There is a risk of an explosion.RMake sure that the positive terminal of a connected battery does not come into contact withvehicle parts.RNever place metal objects or tools on a battery.RIt is important that you observe the described order of the battery terminals when connectingand disconnecting a battery.RWhen jump-starting, make sure that the battery poles with identical polarity are connected.RIt is particularly important to observe the described order when connecting and disconnectingthe jumper cables.RNever connect or disconnect the battery terminals while the engine is running.

G WARNINGA discharged battery can freeze at temperatures below freezing point. When jump-starting thevehicle or charging the battery, gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion.Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before charging it or jump-starting.

! Avoid repeated and lengthy starting attempts. Otherwise, the catalytic converter could bedamaged by the non-combusted fuel.

If, at low temperatures, the indicator lamps/warning lamps in the instrument cluster do notlight up, it is highly likely that the discharged battery has frozen. In this case you may neitherjump-start the vehicle nor charge the battery. The service life of a thawed-out battery may beshorter. The starting characteristics can be impaired, particularly at low temperatures. Havethe thawed-out battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

Jump-starting 309

Breakdow

nassistance

Z

Do not start the vehicle using a rapid charging device. If your vehicle's battery is discharged,the engine can be jump-started from another vehicle or from a second battery using jumpercables. Observe the following points:RThe battery is not accessible in all vehicles. If the other vehicle's battery is not accessible,jump-start the vehicle using a second battery or a jump-starting device.RYou may only jump-start the vehicle when the engine and exhaust system are cold.RDo not start the engine if the battery is frozen. Let the battery thaw first.ROnly jump-start from batteries with a 12 V voltage rating.ROnly use jumper cables which have a sufficient cross-section and insulated terminal clamps.RIf the battery is fully discharged, leave the battery that is being used to jump-start connectedfor a few minutes before attempting to start. This charges the battery slightly.RMake sure that the two vehicles do not touch.Make sure that:Rthe jumper cables are not damaged.Rbare parts of the terminal clamp do not come into contact with other metal parts while thejumper cables are connected to the battery.Rthe jumper cables cannot come into contact with parts which can move when the engineis running, such as the V-belt pulley or the fan.

X Secure the vehicle by applying the electric parking brake.X Shift the transmission to position P.X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock and remove it.X Switch off all electrical consumers, e.g. rear window defroster, lighting, etc.X Open the hood.

310 Jump-startingBreakdow

nassistance

Position numberB identifies the charged battery of the other vehicle or an equivalent jump-starting device.X Press together cover: of positive clamp; and slide it back.X Connect positive terminal; on your vehicle to positive terminal= of donor batteryBusing the jumper cable, beginning with your own battery.

X Start the engine of the donor vehicle and run it at idling speed.X Connect negative terminal? of donor batteryB to ground pointA of your vehicle usingthe jumper cable, connecting the jumper cable to battery of other vehicleB first.

X Start the engine.X Before disconnecting the jumper cables, let the engine run for several minutes.X First, remove the jumper cables from earth pointA and negative terminal?, then frompositive clamp; and positive terminal=. Begin each time at the contacts on your ownvehicle first.

X Close cover: of positive terminal; after removing the jumper cables.X Have the battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

i Jump-starting is not considered to be a normal operating condition.

i Jumper cables and further information regarding jump-starting can be obtained at anyqualified specialist workshop.

Towing and tow-starting

Important safety notes

G WARNINGFunctions relevant to safety are restricted orno longer available if:Rthe engine is not running.Rthe brake system or the power steering ismalfunctioning.Rthere is a malfunction in the voltage supplyor the vehicle's electrical system.

If your vehicle is being towed, much moreforce may be necessary to steer or brake.There is a risk of an accident.In such cases, use a tow bar. Before towing,make sure that the steering moves freely.

G WARNINGIf the weight of the vehicle to be towed or tow-started is greater than the permissible grossweight of your vehicle:Rthe towing eye could detach itselfRthe vehicle/trailer combination couldrollover.

There is a risk of an accident.When towing or tow-starting another vehicle,its weight should not be greater than thepermissible gross weight of your vehicle.

Information on your vehicle's gross vehicleweight rating can be found on the vehicleidentification plate (Y page 350).

Towing and tow-starting 311

Breakdow

nassistance

Z

! When COLLISION PREVENTION ASSISTPLUS, DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLDfunction is activated, the vehicle brakesautomatically in certain situations. To avoiddamage to the vehicle, deactivate thesesystems in the following or similarsituations:Rwhen towing the vehicleRin the car wash

! Only secure the tow rope or tow bar at thetowing eyes. Otherwise, the vehicle couldbe damaged.

! Do not use the towing eyes for recoverypurposes as this could damage the vehicle.If in doubt, recover the vehicle with a crane.

! When towing, pull away slowly andsmoothly. If the tractive power is too high,the vehicles could be damaged.

! The vehicle can be towed a maximum of30 miles (50km). The towing speed of30 mph (50km/h) must not be exceeded.If the vehicle has to be towed more than30 miles (50km), the front axle must beraised or the entire vehicle raised andtransported.

! Do not tow with sling-type equipment.This could damage the vehicle.

! Vehicles with automatic transmissionmust not be started by tow-starting. Thiscould otherwise damage the transmission.

It is better to have the vehicle transportedthan to have it towed.When towing a vehicle, the transmissionmustbe in position N.The battery must be connected and charged.Otherwise, you:Rcannot turn the SmartKey to position 2 inthe ignition lockRcannot shift the transmission to positionN.i Disarm the automatic locking featurebefore the vehicle is towed (Y page 212).

You could otherwise be locked out whenpushing or towing the vehicle.

Installing/removing the towing eye

Installing the towing eye

Example: towing eye mounting coversX Remove the towing eye from the stowagespace.The towing eye is located with the vehicletool kit under the trunk floor (Y page 265).Vehicles with the TIREFIT kit: the towingeye is beneath the tire inflationcompressor.

X Press the mark on cover: inwards in thedirection of the arrow.

X Take cover: off the opening.X Screw in and tighten the towing eyeclockwise to the stop.

Removing the towing eyeX Unscrew and remove the towing eye.X Position the top of cover: in the bumperand press it in at the bottom until itengages.

312 Towing and tow-startingBreakdow

nassistance

X Place the towing eye in the stowage wellunder the trunk floor (Y page 265).

X Vehicles with the TIREFIT kit: put back thetire inflation compressor.

Towing the vehicle with the front axleraisedOnly vehicles without 4MATIC can betowed with the front axle raised.! Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towedwith either the front or the rear axle raised,as doing so will damage the transmission.

Vehicles with 4MATIC may either be towedaway with both axles on the ground or beloaded up and transported.

! The ignition must be switched off if thevehicle is being towed with the front axleraised. Otherwise, ESP®may intervene anddamage the brake system.

X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in theignition lock.

X When the vehicle is stationary, depress thebrake pedal and keep it depressed.

X Shift the automatic transmission toposition P.

X Release the brake pedal.X Release the electric parking brake.X Switch off the automatic locking(Y page 212).

X Switch on the hazard warning lamps(Y page 111).

X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in theignition lock and leave the SmartKey in theignition lock.

Observe the important safety notes whentowing your vehicle with the front axle raised(Y page 311).

Towing a vehicle with both axles onthe groundi In order to signal a change of directionwhen towingwith the hazardwarning lampsswitched on, use the combination switch asusual. In this case, only the indicator lampsfor the direction of travel flash. Afterresetting the combination switch, thehazard warning lamp starts flashing again.

The automatic transmission automaticallyshifts to positionPwhen you open the driver'sor front-passenger door or when you removethe SmartKey from the ignition lock. In orderto ensure that the automatic transmissionstays in position N when towing the vehicle,you must observe the following points:X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary.X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in theignition lock.

X Depress and hold the brake pedal.X Shift the automatic transmission toposition N.

X Leave the SmartKey in position 2 in theignition lock.

X Release the brake pedal.X Release the electric parking brake.X Switch on the hazard warning lamps(Y page 111).

It is important that you observe the safetyinstructions when towing away your vehicle(Y page 311).

Transporting the vehicle! You may only secure the vehicle by thewheels, not by parts of the vehicle such asaxle or steering components. Otherwise,the vehicle could be damaged.

X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in theignition lock.

X Shift the transmission to position N.

Towing and tow-starting 313

Breakdow

nassistance

Z

As soon as the vehicle has been loaded:X Prevent the vehicle from rolling away byapplying the electric parking brake.

X Shift the transmission to position P.X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in theignition lock and remove it.

X Secure the vehicle.The towing eye can be used to pull the vehicleonto a trailer or transporter for transportingpurposes.

Tow-starting (emergency enginestarting)! Vehicles with automatic transmissionmust not be tow-started. You couldotherwise damage the automatictransmission.

Fuses

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you manipulate or bridge a faulty fuse or ifyou replace it with a fuse with a higheramperage, the electric cables could beoverloaded. This could result in a fire. Thereis a risk of an accident and injury.Always replace faulty fuses with the specifiednew fuses having the correct amperage.

! Only use fuses that have been approvedfor Mercedes-Benz vehicles and whichhave the correct fuse rating for the systemconcerned. Only use fuses marked with an"S". Otherwise, components or systemscould be damaged.

The fuses in your vehicle serve to close downfaulty circuits. If a fuse blows, all thecomponents on the circuit and their functionsstop operating.Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses ofthe same rating, which you can recognize by

the color and value. The fuse ratings are listedin the fuse allocation chart.If a newly inserted fuse also blows, have thecause traced and rectified at a qualifiedspecialist workshop, e.g. an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.

Before changing a fuseX Secure the vehicle against rolling away(Y page 157).

X Switch off all electrical consumers.X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in theignition lock and remove it (Y page 141).All indicator lamps in the instrument clustermust be off.

The fuses are located in various fuse boxes:RFuse box in the engine compartment on theleft-hand side of the vehicle, when viewedin the direction of travelRFuse box in the front-passenger footwellThe fuse allocation chart is on the fuse box inthe front-passenger footwell (Y page 315).

Fuse box in the engine compartment

G WARNINGWhen the hood is open and the windshieldwipers are set in motion, you can be injuredby the wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury.Always switch off the windshield wipers andthe ignition before opening the hood.

! Make sure that no moisture can enter thefuse box when the cover is open.

! When closing the cover, make sure that itis lying correctly on the fuse box. Moistureseeping in or dirt could otherwise impairthe operation of the fuses.

314 FusesBreakdow

nassistance

X Open the hood.X Use a dry cloth to remove any moisturefrom the fuse box.

X To open: open clamps;.X Fold up cover: in the direction of thearrow and remove it.

X To close: check whether the seal is seatedcorrectly in cover:.

X Insert cover: at the back into openings= on the fuse box.

X Fold down cover:.X Hook clamps; into the fuse box andclose.

X Close the hood.

Fuse box in the front-passengerfootwell

X To open: remove the floormat from thefront-passenger side.

X Fold out perforated floor covering: in thedirection of the arrow.

X To release cover=, press retainingclamp;.

X Fold out cover= in the direction of thearrow to the catch.

X Remove cover= forwards.

i Fuse allocation chart? is located on thelower right-hand side of cover=.

X To close: insert cover= on the left-handside of the fuse box into the retainer.Cover= engages in the retainers.

X Fold down cover= until clamps; lockaudibly.

X Fold back perforated floor covering:.

Fuses 315

Breakdow

nassistance

Z

316

Useful information ............................ 318Important safety notes .................... 318Operation ........................................... 318Winter operation ............................... 320Tire pressure ..................................... 322Loading the vehicle .......................... 329Maximum load rating ....................... 333Uniform Tire Quality GradingStandards .......................................... 334Tire labeling ....................................... 335Definition of terms for tires andloading ............................................... 339Changing a wheel ............................. 342Wheel and tire combinations ........... 346

317

Wheelsandtires

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optionalequipment of your vehicle available at thetime of publication of the Operator'sManual. Country-specific differences arepossible. Please note that your vehicle maynot be equipped with all featuresdescribed. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions.

i Read the information on qualifiedspecialist workshops: (Y page 25).

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf wheels and tires of the wrong size are used,the wheel brakes or suspension componentsmay be damaged. There is a risk of anaccident.Always replace wheels and tires with thosethat fulfill the specifications of the originalpart.When replacing wheels, make sure to use thecorrect:RdesignationRmodelWhen replacing tires, make sure to use thecorrect:RdesignationRmanufacturerRmodel

G WARNINGA flat tire severely impairs the driving,steering and braking characteristics of thevehicle. There is a risk of accident.Tires without run-flat characteristics:Rdo not drive with a flat tire.Rimmediately replace the flat tire with youremergency spare wheel or spare wheel, orconsult a qualified specialist workshop.

Tires with run-flat characteristics:Rpay attention to the information andwarning notices onMOExtended tires (tireswith run-flat characteristics).

Accessories that are not approved for yourvehicle by Mercedes-Benz or that are notbeing used correctly can impair operatingsafety.Before purchasing and using non-approvedaccessories, visit a qualified specialistworkshop and inquire about:RsuitabilityRlegal stipulationsRfactory recommendationsInformation on dimensions and types ofwheels and tires for your vehicle can be found(Y page 346).Information on air pressure for the tires onyour vehicle can be found:Ron the vehicle's Tire and LoadingInformation placard on the B-pillarRon the tire pressure label on the fuel fillerflapRunder "Tire pressure"

i Further information on wheels and tirescan be obtained at any qualified specialistworkshop.

Operation

Information on drivingRIf the vehicle is heavily loaded, check thetire pressures and correct them ifnecessary.RWhile driving, pay attention to vibrations,noises and unusual handlingcharacteristics, e.g. pulling to one side.This may indicate that the wheels or tiresare damaged. If you suspect that a tire isdefective, reduce your speed immediately.Stop the vehicle as soon as possible tocheck the wheels and tires for damage.Hidden tire damage could also be causing

318 OperationWheelsandtires

the unusual handling characteristics. If youfind no signs of damage, have the wheelsand tires checked at a qualified specialistworkshop.RWhen parking your vehicle, make sure thatthe tires do not get deformed by the curbor other obstacles. If it is necessary to driveover curbs, speed humps or similarelevations, try to do so slowly and at anobtuse angle. Otherwise, the tires,particularly the sidewalls, may bedamaged.

Regular checking of wheels and tires

G WARNINGDamaged tires can cause tire inflationpressure loss. As a result, you could losecontrol of your vehicle. There is a risk ofaccident.Check the tires regularly for signs of damageand replace any damaged tires immediately.

Regularly check the wheels and tires of yourvehicle for damage at least once a month, aswell as after driving off-road or on roughroads. Damaged wheels can cause a loss oftire pressure. Pay particular attention todamage such as:Rcuts in the tiresRpuncturesRtears in the tiresRbulges on tiresRdeformation or severe corrosion on wheelsRegularly check the tire tread depth and thecondition of the tread across the whole widthof the tire (Y page 319). If necessary, turnthe front wheels to full lock in order to inspectthe inner side of the tire surface.All wheels must have a valve cap to protectthe valve against dirt and moisture. Do notmount anything onto the valve other than thestandard valve cap or other valve capsapproved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle.

Do not use any other valve caps or systems,e.g. tire pressure monitoring systems.Regularly check the pressure of all the tiresparticularly prior to long trips. Adjust the tirepressure as necessary (Y page 322).The service life of tires depends, among otherthings, on the following factors:RDriving styleRTire pressureRDistance covered

Important safety notes on the tiretread

G WARNINGInsufficient tire tread will reduce tire traction.The tire is no longer able to dissipate water.This means that on wet road surfaces, the riskof hydroplaning increases, in particular wherespeed is not adapted to suit the drivingconditions. There is a risk of accident.If the tire pressure is too high or too low, tiresmay exhibit different levels of wear atdifferent locations on the tire tread. Thus, youshould regularly check the tread depth andthe condition of the tread across the entirewidth of all tires.Minimum tire tread depth for:RSummer tires:â in (3 mm)RM+S tires:ã in (4 mm)For safety reasons, replace the tires beforethe legally prescribed limit for the minimumtire tread depth is reached.

Operation 319

Wheelsandtires

Z

Bar indicator: for tread wear is integratedinto the tire tread.Treadwear indicators (TWI) are required bylaw. Six indicators are positioned on the tiretread. They are visible once the tread depthis approximatelyá in (1.6 mm). If this is thecase, the tire is so worn that it must bereplaced.

Selecting, mounting and replacingtiresROnly mount tires and wheels of the sametype and make.Exception: it is permissible to install adifferent type or make in the event of a flattire. Observe the "MOExtended tires (tireswith run-flat characteristics" section(Y page 301).ROnly mount tires of the correct size ontothe wheels.RAfter mounting new tires, break them in atmoderate speeds for the first 60 miles(100 km), as they only reach their fullperformance after this distance.RDo not drive with tires which have too littletread depth, as this significantly reducesthe traction on wet roads (hydroplaning).RReplace the tires after six years at thelatest, regardless of wear.

MOExtended tires (tires with run-flatproperties)With MOExtended tires (tires with run flatcharacteristics), you can continue to driveyour vehicle even if there is a total loss ofpressure in one or more tires.MOExtended tires may only be used inconjunction with an active tire pressure losswarning system and only on wheelsspecifically tested by Mercedes-Benz.Notes on driving with MOExtended tires witha flat tire (Y page 301).

i Vehicles equippedwithMOExtended tiresare not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at thefactory. It is therefore recommended thatyou additionally equip your vehicle with aTIREFIT kit if you mount tires that do notfeature run-flat properties, e.g. winter tires.A TIREFIT kit can be obtained from aqualified specialist workshop.

Winter operation

General notesHave your vehicle winterproofed at a qualifiedspecialist workshop at the onset of winter.Observe the notes in the "Changing a wheel"section (Y page 342).

Driving with summer tiresAt temperatures below 45‡ (+7†), summertires lose elasticity and therefore traction andbraking power. Change the tires on yourvehicle to M+S tires. Using summer tires atvery cold temperatures could cause cracks toform, thereby damaging the tirespermanently. Mercedes-Benz cannot acceptresponsibility for this type of damage.

M+S tires

G WARNINGM+S tires with a tire tread depth of less thanã in (4 mm) are not suitable for use in winterand do not provide sufficient traction. Thereis a risk of an accident.M+S tires with a tread depth of less thanãin (4 mm) must be replaced immediately.

At temperatures below 45 ‡ (+7 †), usewinter tires or all-season tires. Both types oftire are identified by the M+S marking.Only winter tires bearing thei snowflakesymbol in addition to the M+S markingprovide the best possible grip in wintry roadconditions. Only these tires will allow driving

320 Winter operationWheelsandtires

safety systems such as ABS and ESP® tofunction optimally in winter. These tires havebeen developed specifically for driving insnow.UseM+S tires of the samemake and tread onall wheels to maintain safe handlingcharacteristics.Always observe the maximum permissiblespeed specified for the M+S tires you havemounted.Once the winter tires are mounted:X Check the tire pressures (Y page 325).X Restart the tire pressure loss warningsystem3(Y page 325) or restart the tirepressure monitor4(Y page 328).

Snow chains

G WARNINGIf snow chains are mounted on the rearwheels, the snow chains could cause abrasionto the vehicle body or to chassis components.This could cause damage to the vehicle or thetires. There is a risk of an accident.To avoid hazardous situations:Rnever mount snow chains on the rearwheelsRonly mount snow chains in pairs on thefront wheels.

! On some tire sizes there is not enoughspace for snow chains. To avoid damage tothe vehicle or tires, observe the "Wheel andtire combinations" section under "Tires andwheels".

! Vehicles with steel wheels: if youmount snow chains on steel wheels, youmay damage the hub caps. Remove the hubcaps from the relevant wheels beforemounting the snow chains.

For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benzrecommends that you only use snow chainsthat have been specially approved for yourvehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or are of acorresponding standard of quality.If you intend to mount snow chains, pleasebear the following points in mind:RSnow chains may not be mounted on allwheel/tire combinations. Permissiblewheel-tire combinations (Y page 346).ROnly use snow chains when driving onroads completely covered by snow.Remove the snow chains as soon aspossible when you come to a road that isnot snow-covered.RLocal regulations may restrict the use ofsnow chains. Observe the appropriateregulations if you wish to mount snowchains.RDo not exceed the maximum permissiblespeed of 30 mph (50 km/h).RWhen snow chains are installed, never useActive Parking Assist (Y page 182).

i You can deactivate ESP®(Y page 68)when pulling away with snow chainsinstalled. You can thereby allow the wheelsto spin in a controlledmanner, achieving anincreased driving force (cutting action).

3 Canada4 USA, Canada

Winter operation 321

Wheelsandtires

Z

Tire pressure

Tire pressure specifications

G WARNINGUnderinflated or overinflated tires pose thefollowing risks:Rthe tires may burst, especially as the loadand vehicle speed increase.Rthe tires may wear excessively and/orunevenly, which may greatly impair tiretraction.Rthe driving characteristics, as well assteering and braking, may be greatlyimpaired.

There is a risk of an accident.Follow recommended tire inflation pressuresand check the pressure of all the tiresincluding the spare wheel:Rmonthly, at leastRif the load changesRbefore beginning a long journeyRunder different operating conditions, e.g.off-road driving

If necessary, correct the tire pressure.

Use a suitable pressure gauge to check thetire pressure. The outer appearance of a tiredoes not permit any reliable conclusion aboutthe tire pressure. On vehicles equipped withthe electronic tire pressure monitor, the tirepressure can be checked in the on-boardcomputer.The recommended tire pressures for the tiresmounted at the factory can be found on thelabels described here.1.) Tire and Loading Information placardon the B-pillar on the driver's side of thevehicle (Y page 329).The Tire and Loading Information placardcontains the recommended tire pressures forcold tires. The recommended tire pressuresare valid for the maximum permissible loadand up to the maximum permissible vehiclespeed.

: Recommended tire pressures

Option 2) Tire pressure table on the insideof the fuel filler flap.The tire pressure table contains therecommended pressures for cold tires forvarious operating conditions, i.e. differingload and speed conditions.

i Specifications shown in the examples oftire pressure tables are for illustrationpurposes only. Tire pressure specificationsare vehicle-specific and may deviate fromthe data shown here. Tire pressurespecifications applicable to your vehicleare located in your vehicle's tire pressuretable.

Example: tire pressure table for all tires permittedfor this vehicle by the factory

If a tire size precedes a tire pressure, the tirepressure information following is only validfor that tire size. The load conditions "partiallyladen" and "fully laden" are defined in thetable for different numbers of occupants andamounts of luggage. The actual number ofseats may differ.

322 Tire pressureWheelsandtires

Example: tire pressure table with tire dimensions

Some tire pressure tables show only the rimdiameters instead of the full tire size, e.g.R18. Rim diameter is part of the tire size andcan be found on the tire sidewall(Y page 336).

If the tire pressures have been set to thelower values for lighter loads and/or lowerroad speeds, the pressures should be resetto the higher values:Rif you want to drive with an increased loadand/orRif you want to drive at higher road speeds.

i The tire pressures for increased loadsand/or higher road speeds, shown in thetire pressure table, may have a negativeeffect on driving comfort.

If the tire pressure is not set correctly, thiscan lead to an excessive build up of heat anda sudden loss of pressure.For more information, contact a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

Important notes on tire pressure

G WARNINGIf the tire pressure drops repeatedly, thewheel, valve or tire may be damaged. Tirepressure that is too low may result in a tireblow-out. There is a risk of an accident.RCheck the tire for foreign objects.RCheck whether the wheel is losing air or thevalve is leaking.

If you are unable to rectify the damage,contact a qualified specialist workshop.

G WARNINGIf you fit unsuitable accessories onto tirevalves, the tire valves may be overloaded andmalfunction, which can cause tire pressureloss. Due to their design, retrofitted tirepressure monitors keep the tire valve open.This can also result in tire pressure loss. Thereis a risk of an accident.Only screw the standard valve cap or othervalve caps approved by Mercedes-Benz foryour vehicle onto the tire valve.

Use a suitable pressure gauge to check thetire pressure. The outer appearance of a tiredoes not permit any reliable conclusion aboutthe tire pressure.The tire temperature and pressure increasewhen the vehicle is in motion. This isdependent on the driving speed and the load.Therefore, you should only correct tirepressures when the tires are cold.The tires are cold:Rif the vehicle has been parked withoutdirect sunlight on the tires for at least threehours andRif the vehicle has not been driven furtherthan 1 mile (1.6 km)

The tire temperature changes depending onthe outside temperature, the vehicle speedand the tire load. If the tire temperaturechanges by 18 ‡ (10 †), the tire pressurechanges by approximately 10 kPa (0.1 bar/1.5 psi). Take this into account when

Tire pressure 323

Wheelsandtires

Z

checking the pressure of warm tires. Onlycorrect the tire pressure if it is too low for thecurrent operating conditions. If you check thetire pressure when the tires are warm, theresulting value will be higher than if the tireswere cold. This is normal. Do not reduce thetire pressure to the value specified for coldtires. The tire pressure would otherwise betoo low.Observe the recommended tire pressures forcold tires:Ron the Tire and Loading Information placardon the B-pillar on the driver's sideRin the tire pressure table on the inside ofthe fuel filler flap

Underinflated or overinflated tires

Underinflation

G WARNINGTires with pressure that is too low canoverheat and burst as a consequence. Inaddition, they also suffer from excessive and/or irregular wear, which can severely impairthe braking properties and the drivingcharacteristics. There is a risk of an accident.Avoid tire pressures that are too low in all thetires, including the spare wheel.

Underinflated tires may:Rwear quickly and unevenlyRhave an adverse effect on fuel consumptionRoverheat, leading to tire defectsRhave an adverse effect on handlingcharacteristics

Overinflation

G WARNINGTires with excessively high pressure can burstbecause they are damaged more easily byroad debris, potholes etc. In addition, theyalso suffer from irregular wear, which canseverely impair the braking properties and the

driving characteristics. There is a risk of anaccident.Avoid tire pressures that are too high in all thetires, including the spare wheel.

Overinflated tires may:Rhave an adverse effect on handlingcharacteristicsRwear quickly and unevenlyRbe more susceptible to damageRhave an adverse effect on ride comfortRincrease the braking distance

Maximum tire pressuresNever exceed the maximum permissible tireinflation pressure. Always observe therecommended tire pressure for your vehiclewhen adjusting the tire pressure(Y page 322).

: Example: maximum permissible tirepressure

i The actual values for tires are vehicle-specific and may deviate from the values inthe illustration.

Checking the tire pressures

Important safety notesObserve the "Tire pressure information"section (Y page 322).

324 Tire pressureWheelsandtires

Information on air pressure for the tires onyour vehicle can be found:Ron the vehicle's Tire and LoadingInformation placard on the B-pillarRon the tire pressure label on the fuel fillerflapRin the "Tire pressure information" section

Checking tire pressures manuallyTo determine and set the correct tirepressure, proceed as follows:X Remove the valve cap of the tire that is tobe checked.

X Press the tire pressure gauge securely ontothe valve.

X Read the tire pressure and compare it withthe recommended value on the Tire andLoading Information placard on theB-pillar on the driver's side of your vehicle.

X If necessary, increase the tire pressure tothe recommended value (Y page 322).

X If the tire pressure is too high, release airby pressing down the metal pin in the valveusing the tip of a pen, for example. Then,check the tire pressure again using the tirepressure gauge.

X Screw the valve cap onto the valve.X Repeat these steps for the other tires.

Tire pressure loss warning system(Canada only)

General notesWhile the vehicle is in motion, the tirepressure loss warning system monitors theset tire pressure using the rotational speed ofthe wheels. This enables the system to detectsignificant pressure loss in a tire. If the speedof rotation of a wheel changes as a result ofa loss of pressure, a corresponding warningmessage will appear in the multifunctiondisplay.

You can recognize the tire pressure losswarning by the Run Flat IndicatorRun Flat IndicatorActive Press 'OK' to RestartActive Press 'OK' to Restart messagewhich appears in the ServiceService menu of themultifunction display. Further information onthe message display can be found under"Restarting the tire pressure loss warningsystem" (Y page 325).

Important safety notesThe tire pressure warning system does notwarn you of an incorrectly set tire pressure.Observe the notes on the recommended tirepressure (Y page 322).The tire pressure loss warning does notreplace the need to regularly check the tirepressure. An even loss of pressure on severaltires at the same time cannot be detected bythe tire pressure loss warning system.The tire pressure monitor is not able to warnyou of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if thetire is penetrated by a foreign object. In theevent of a sudden loss of pressure, bring thevehicle to a halt by braking carefully. Avoidabrupt steering maneuvers.The function of the tire pressure loss warningsystem is limited or delayed if:Rsnow chains are mounted on your vehicle'stires.Rroad conditions are wintry.Ryou are driving on sand or gravel.Ryou adopt a very sporty driving style(cornering at high speeds or driving withhigh rates of acceleration).Ryou are driving with a heavy load (in thevehicle or on the roof).

Restarting the tire pressure losswarning systemRestart the tire pressure loss warning systemif you have:Rchanged the tire pressureRchanged the wheels or tiresRmounted new wheels or tires

Tire pressure 325

Wheelsandtires

Z

X Before restarting, make sure that the tirepressures are set properly on all four tiresfor the respective operating conditions.The recommended tire pressure can befound on the Tire and Loading Informationplacard on the B-pillar on the driver's side.Additionally, a tire pressure table isattached to the fuel filler flap. The tirepressure loss warning system can only givereliable warnings if you have set the correcttire pressure. If an incorrect tire pressureis set, these incorrect values will bemonitored.

X Also observe the notes in the section on tirepressures (Y page 322).

X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position2 in the ignition lock (Y page 141).

X Press= or; on the steering wheelto select the ServiceService menu.

X Press the9 or: button to selectTire PressureTire Pressure.

X Press thea button.The Run Flat Indicator ActiveRun Flat Indicator ActivePress 'OK' to RestartPress 'OK' to Restart messageappears in the multifunction display.

If you wish to confirm the restart:X Press thea button.The Tire Pressure Now OK?Tire Pressure Now OK? messageappears in the multifunction display.

X Press the9 or: button to selectYesYes.

X Press thea button.The Run Flat Indicator RestartedRun Flat Indicator Restartedmessage appears in the multifunctiondisplay.After a teach-in period, the tire pressureloss warning system will monitor the settire pressures of all four tires.

If you wish to cancel the restart:X Press the% button.or

X When the Tire Pressure Now OK?Tire Pressure Now OK?message appears, press the9or: button to select CancelCancel.

X Press thea button.The tire pressure values stored at the lastrestart will continue to be monitored.

Tire pressure monitor

General notesIf a tire pressure monitor is installed, thevehicle's wheels have sensors that monitorthe tire pressures in all four tires. The tirepressure monitor warns you if the pressuredrops in one or more of the tires. The tirepressure monitor only functions if the correctsensors are installed on all wheels.Information on tire pressures is displayed inthe multifunction display. After a fewminutesof driving, the current tire pressure of eachtire is shown in the ServiceService menu of themultifunction display.

Example: current tire pressure display

For information on the message display, referto the "Checking the tire pressureelectronically" section (Y page 328).

Important safety notes

G WARNINGEach tire, including the spare (if provided),should be checked at least once every twoweeks when cold and inflated to the pressurerecommended by the vehicle manufactureron the Tire and Loading Information placardon the driver's door B-pillar or the tirepressure label on the inside of the fuel fillerflap. If your vehicle has tires of a different size

326 Tire pressureWheelsandtires

than the size indicated on the Tire and LoadingInformation placard or, if available, the tirepressure label, you should determine theproper tire pressure for those tires.As an added safety feature, your vehicle hasbeen equippedwith a tire pressuremonitoringsystem (TPMS) that illuminates a low tirepressure telltale when one or more of yourtires are significantly underinflated.Accordingly, when the low tire pressuretelltale lights up, you should stop and checkyour tires as soon as possible, and inflatethem to the proper pressure. Driving on asignificantly underinflated tire causes the tireto overheat and can lead to tire failure.Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiencyand tire tread life, andmay affect the vehicle'shandling and stopping ability. Please note thatthe TPMS is not a substitute for proper tiremaintenance, and it is the driver'sresponsibility to maintain correct tirepressure, even if underinflation has notreached the level to trigger illumination of theTPMS low tire pressure telltale.Your vehicle has also been equipped with aTPMS malfunction indicator to indicate whenthe system is not operating properly. TheTPMS malfunction indicator is combined withthe low tire pressure telltale. When thesystem detects a malfunction, the warninglampwill flash for approximately aminute andthen remain continuously illuminated. Thissequence will be repeated every time thevehicle is started as long as the malfunctionexists. When the malfunction indicator isilluminated, the system may not be able todetect or signal low tire pressure as intended.TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety ofreasons, including the installation ofincompatible replacement or alternate tiresor wheels on the vehicle that prevent theTPMS from functioning properly. Alwayscheck the TPMS malfunction telltale afterreplacing one or more tires or wheels on yourvehicle to ensure that the replacement oralternate Tires and wheels allow the TPMS tocontinue to function properly.

It is the driver's responsibility to set the tirepressure to that recommended for cold tireswhich is suitable for the operating situation(Y page 322). Note that the correct tirepressure for the current operating situationmust first be taught-in to the tire pressuremonitor. If there is a substantial loss ofpressure, the warning threshold for thewarning message is aligned to the referencevalues taught-in. Restart the tire pressuremonitor after adjusting the pressure of thecold tires (Y page 328). The currentpressures are saved as new reference values.As a result, a warning message will appear ifthe tire pressure drops significantly.The tire pressure monitor does not warn youof an incorrectly set tire pressure. Observethe notes on the recommended tire pressure(Y page 322).The tire pressure monitor is not able to warnyou of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if thetire is penetrated by a foreign object. In theevent of a sudden loss of pressure, bring thevehicle to a halt by braking carefully. Avoidabrupt steering maneuvers.The tire pressure monitor has a yellowwarning lamp in the instrument cluster forindicating a pressure loss or malfunction.Whether the warning lamp flashes or lights upindicates whether a tire pressure is too low orthe tire pressure monitor is malfunctioning:Rif the warning lamp is lit continuously, thetire pressure on one or more tires issignificantly too low. The tire pressuremonitor is not malfunctioning.Rif the warning lamp flashes for around aminute and then remains lit constantly, thetire pressure monitor is malfunctioning.

i In addition to the warning lamp, amessage appears in the multifunctiondisplay.Further information can be found on(Y page 241).

If the tire pressure monitor is malfunctioning,it may take more than ten minutes for the tirepressure warning lamp to inform you of the

Tire pressure 327

Wheelsandtires

Z

malfunction by flashing for approximately oneminute and then remaining lit. When themalfunction has been rectified, the tirepressure warning lamp goes out after a fewminutes of driving.The tire pressure values indicated by the on-board computer may differ from thosemeasured at a gas station with a pressuregauge. The tire pressures shown by the on-board computer refer to those measured atsea level. At high altitudes, the tire pressurevalues indicated by a pressure gauge arehigher than those shown by the on-boardcomputer. In this case, do not reduce the tirepressures.The operation of the tire pressuremonitor canbe affected by interference from radiotransmitting equipment (e.g. radioheadphones, two-way radios) that may bebeing operated in or near the vehicle.

Checking the tire pressureelectronicallyX Make sure that the SmartKey is in position2 in the ignition lock (Y page 141).

X Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the ServiceServicemenu.

X Press the9 or: button to selectTire PressureTire Pressure.

X Press thea button.The current tire pressure of each tire isshown in the multifunction display.

If the vehicle has been parked for longer than20 minutes, the Tire pressure will beTire pressure will bedisplayed after driving a fewdisplayed after driving a fewminutesminutes message appears.After a teach-in process, the tire pressuremonitor automatically detects new wheels ornew sensors. As long as a clear allocation ofthe tire pressure value to the individualwheels is not possible, the Tire PressureTire PressureMonitor ActiveMonitor Active message is shown insteadof the tire pressure display. The tire pressuresare already being monitored.

Tire pressure monitor warningmessagesIf the tire pressuremonitor detects a pressureloss in one or more tires, a warning messageis shown in the multifunction display and theyellow tire pressure monitor warning lightcomes on.RIf the Correct Tire PressureCorrect Tire Pressure messageappears in the multifunction display, thetire pressure in at least one tire is too lowand must be corrected at the nextopportunity.RIf the Check Tire Pressure SoonCheck Tire Pressure Soonmessage appears in the multifunctiondisplay, the tire pressure in one or moretires has dropped significantly and the tiresmust be checked.RIf the Tire Pressure Warning TireTire Pressure Warning TireFailureFailure message appears in themultifunction display, the tire pressure inone or more tires has dropped suddenlyand the tires must be checked.

Observe the instructions and safety notes inthe display messages in the "Tires" section(Y page 241).

i If the wheel positions on the vehicle arerotated, the tire pressures may bedisplayed for the wrong positions for ashort time. This is rectified after a fewminutes of driving, and the tire pressuresare displayed for the correct positions.

Restarting the tire pressure monitorWhen you restart the tire pressure monitor,all existingwarningmessages are deleted andthe warning lamps go out. The monitor usesthe currently set tire pressures as thereference values for monitoring. In mostcases, the tire pressure monitor willautomatically detect the new referencevalues after you have changed the tirepressure. However, you can also definereference values manually as described here.The tire pressure monitor then monitors thenew tire pressure values.

328 Tire pressureWheelsandtires

X Set the tire pressure to the valuerecommended for the correspondingdriving situation on the Tire and LoadingInformation placard on the driver's sideB-pillar (Y page 322).Additional tire pressure values for differentloads can also be found on the tire pressuretable on the inside of the fuel filler flap(Y page 322).

X Make sure that the tire pressure is correcton all four wheels.

X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position2 in the ignition lock.

X Press= or; on the steering wheelto select the ServiceService menu.

X Press the9 or: button to selectTire PressureTire Pressure.

X Press thea button.The multifunction display shows thecurrent tire pressure for the individual tiresor the Tire pressure will beTire pressure will bedisplayed after driving a fewdisplayed after driving a fewminutesminutes message.

X Press the: button.The Use Current Pressures as NewUse Current Pressures as NewReference ValuesReference Values message appears inthe multifunction display.

If you wish to confirm the restart:X Press thea button.The Tire Pressure MonitorTire Pressure MonitorRestartedRestarted message appears in themultifunction display.After driving for a few minutes, the systemchecks whether the current tire pressuresare within the specified range. The new tirepressures are then accepted as referencevalues and monitored.

If you wish to cancel the restart:X Press the% button.The tire pressure values stored at the lastrestart will continue to be monitored.

Loading the vehicle

Instruction labels for tires and loads

G WARNINGOverloaded tires can overheat, causing ablowout. Overloaded tires can also impair thesteering and driving characteristics and leadto brake failure. There is a risk of accident.Observe the load rating of the tires. The loadrating must be at least half of the GAWR ofyour vehicle. Never overload the tires byexceeding the maximum load.

: B-pillar, driver's side

Two instruction labels on your vehicle showthe maximum possible load.(1) The Tire and Loading Information placard

is on the B-pillar on the driver's side. TheTire and Loading Information placardshows themaximum permissible numberof occupants and the maximumpermissible vehicle load. It also containsdetails of the tire sizes andcorresponding pressures for tiresmounted at the factory.

(2) The vehicle identification plate is on theB-pillar on the driver's side. The vehicleidentification plate informs you of thegross vehicle weight rating. It is made upof the vehicle weight, all vehicleoccupants, the fuel and the cargo. Youcan also find information about themaximum gross axle weight rating on thefront and rear axle.

Loading the vehicle 329

Wheelsandtires

Z

The maximum gross axle weight rating isthe maximum weight that can be carriedby one axle (front or rear axle). Neverexceed the maximum load or themaximum gross axle weight rating for thefront or rear axle.

Maximum permissible gross vehicleweight rating

X Specification for maximum gross vehicleweight: is listed in the Tire and LoadingInformation placard: "The combined weightof occupants and cargo should neverexceed XXX kilograms or XXX lbs."

The gross weight of all vehicle occupants,load, luggage and trailer load/noseweight (ifapplicable) must not exceed the specifiedvalue.

i The specifications shown on the Tire andLoading Information placard in theillustration are examples. The maximumpermissible load is vehicle-specific andmay deviate from the data shown here. Themaximum permissible load that applies foryour vehicle can be found on your vehicle'sTire and Loading Information placard.

Number of seats

Maximum number of seats: indicates themaximum number of occupants allowed totravel in the vehicle. This information can befound on the Tire and Loading Informationplacard.

i The specifications shown on the Tire andLoading Information placard in theillustration are examples. The number ofseats is vehicle-specific and can differ fromthe details shown. The number of seats inyour vehicle can be found on the Tire andLoading Information placard.

Determining the correct load limit

Step-by-step instructionsThe following steps have been developed asrequired of all manufacturers under Title 49,Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575pursuant to the "National Traffic and MotorVehicle Safety Act of 1966".X Step 1: Locate the statement "Thecombined weight of occupants and cargoshould never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." onyour vehicle’s Tire and Loading Informationplacard.

X Step 2: Determine the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers that will be ridingin your vehicle.

X Step 3: Subtract the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers from XXXkilograms or XXX lbs.

330 Loading the vehicleWheelsandtires

X Step 4: The resulting figure equals theavailable amount of cargo and luggage loadcapacity. For example, if the "XXX" amountequals 1400 lbs and there are fiveoccupants in the vehicle each with a weightof 150 lbs, the amount of available cargoand luggage load capacity is 650 lbs (1400Ò 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).

X Step 5:Determine the combined weight ofluggage and cargo being loaded on thevehicle. That weight may not safely exceedthe available cargo and luggage loadcapacity calculated in step 4.

X Step 6 (if applicable): If your vehicle willbe towing a trailer, load from your trailerwill be transferred to your vehicle. Refer tothis Operator's Manual to determine howthis reduces the available cargo andluggage load capacity of your vehicle(Y page 333).

Loading the vehicle 331

Wheelsandtires

Z

Example: steps 1 to 3The following table shows examples on how to calculate total and cargo load capacities withvarying seating configurations and number and size of occupants. The following examples usea maximum load of 1500 lbs (680 kg). This is for illustration purposes only.Make sure youare using the actual load limit for your vehicle stated on your vehicle's Tire and LoadingInformation placard (Y page 330).The greater the combined weight of the occupants, the lower the maximum luggage load.

Example 1 Example 2 Example 3

Step 1 Combined maximumweight of occupantsand cargo (data fromthe Tire and LoadingInformation placard)

1500 lbs(680 kg)

1500 lbs(680 kg)

1500 lbs(680 kg)

Example 1 Example 2 Example 3

Step 2 Number of people inthe vehicle (driverand occupants)

5 3 1

Distribution of theoccupants

Front: 2Rear: 3

Front: 1Rear: 2

Front: 1

Weight of theoccupants

Occupant 1:150 lbs (68 kg)Occupant 2:180 lbs (82 kg)Occupant 3:160 lbs (73 kg)Occupant 4:140 lbs (63 kg)Occupant 5:120 lbs (54 kg)

Occupant 1:200 lbs (91 kg)Occupant 2:190 lbs (86 kg)Occupant 3:150 lbs (68 kg)

Occupant 1:150 lbs (68 kg)

Gross weight of alloccupants

750 lbs (340 kg) 540 lbs (245 kg) 150 lbs (68 kg)

332 Loading the vehicleWheelsandtires

Example 1 Example 2 Example 3

Step 3 Permissible load andtrailer load/noseweight(maximumpermissible loadrating from the Tireand LoadingInformation placardminus the grossweight of alloccupants)

1500 lbs(680 kg)Ò750 lbs(340 kg) =750 lbs (340 kg)

1500 lbs(680 kg)Ò540 lbs(245 kg) =960 lbs (435 kg)

1500 lbs(680 kg)Ò150 lbs (68 kg)= 1350 lbs(612 kg)

Vehicle identification plateEven if you have calculated the total cargocarefully, you should still make sure that thegross vehicle weight rating and the gross axleweight rating are not exceeded. Details canbe found on the vehicle identification plate onthe B-pillar on the driver's side of the vehicle(Y page 329).Permissible gross vehicle weight: thegross weight of the vehicle, all passengers,load and trailer load/noseweight (ifapplicable) must not exceed the permissiblegross vehicle weight.Gross axle weight rating: the maximumpermissible weight that can be carried by oneaxle (front or rear axle).To ensure that your vehicle does not exceedthe maximum permissible values (grossvehicle weight and maximum gross axleweight rating), have your loaded vehicle(including driver, occupants, cargo, and fulltrailer load if applicable) weighed on asuitable vehicle weighbridge.

Trailer load/noseweightThe trailer load/noseweight affects the grossweight of the vehicle. If a trailer is attached,the trailer load/noseweight is included in theload along with occupants and luggage. Thetrailer load/noseweight is usually between

10% and 15% of the gross weight of the trailerand its load.

Maximum load rating

Do not overload the tires by exceeding thespecified load limit. The maximumpermissible load can be found on thevehicle's Tire and Loading Informationplacard on the B-pillar on the driver's side(Y page 329).

Maximum tire load: is the maximumpermissible weight for which the tire isapproved.

i The actual values for tires are vehicle-specific and may deviate from the values inthe illustration.

Maximum load rating 333

Wheelsandtires

Z

Uniform Tire Quality GradingStandards

Overview of Tire Quality GradingStandards

Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards areU.S. government specifications. Theirpurpose is to provide drivers with uniformreliable information on tire performance data.Tire manufacturers have to grade tires usingthree performance factors: tread wear:,tire traction;, and heat resistance=.These regulations do not apply to Canada.Nevertheless, all tires sold in North Americaare provided with the corresponding qualitygrading markings on the sidewall of the tire.All passenger car tires must conform to thestatutory safety requirements in addition tothese grades.Where applicable, the tire gradinginformation can be found on the tire sidewallbetween the tread shoulder and maximumtire width.

i The actual values for tires are vehicle-specific and may deviate from the values inthe illustration.

For example:

Treadwear Traction Temperature

200 AA A

TreadwearThe treadwear grade is a comparative ratingbased on thewear rate of the tire when testedunder controlled conditions on a specifiedU.S. government course. For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear one and one-halftimes as well on the government course as atire graded 100.The relative performance of tires dependsupon the actual conditions of their use,however, and may depart significantly fromthe norm, due to variations in driving habits,service practices and differences in roadcharacteristics and climate conditions.

Traction

G WARNINGThe traction grade assigned to this tire isbased on straight-ahead braking tractiontests, and does not include acceleration,cornering, hydroplaning, or peak tractioncharacteristics.

The traction grades, from highest to lowest,are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades representthe tire's ability to stop on a wet surface asmeasured under controlled conditions onspecified government test surfaces of asphaltand concrete. A tire marked C may have poortraction performance.The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or icyroad is always lower than on dry roadsurfaces.You should pay special attention to roadconditions when temperatures are aroundthe freezing point.Mercedes-Benz recommends a minimumtread depth ofã in (4 mm) for all four wintertires (Y page 320) to maintain normal drivingcharacteristics in winter. Winter tires canreduce the braking distance on snow-coveredsurfaces in comparison with summer tires.Stopping distance, however, is stillconsiderably greater than when the road is

334 Uniform Tire Quality Grading StandardsWheelsandtires

not covered with ice or snow. Takeappropriate care when driving.

! Avoid wheelspin. This can lead to damageto the drive train.

Temperature

G WARNINGThe temperature grade for this tire isestablished for a tire that is properly inflatedand not overloaded. Excessive speed,underinflation, or excessive loading, eitherseparately or in combination, can causeexcessive heat build-up and possible tirefailure.

The temperature grades are A (the highest),B, and C. These represent the tire'sresistance to the generation of heat and itsability to dissipate heat when tested undercontrolled conditions on a specified indoorlaboratory test wheel. Sustained hightemperature can cause thematerial of the tireto degenerate and reduce tire life, andexcessive temperature can lead to suddentire failure. The grade C corresponds to a levelof performance which all passenger car tiresmust meet under the Federal Motor VehicleSafety Standard No. 109. Grades B and Arepresent higher levels of performance on thelaboratory test wheel than the minimumrequired by law.

Tire labeling

Overview of tire labeling

The following markings are on the tire in additionto the tire name (sales designation) and themanufacturer's name:: Uniform tire Quality Grading Standard

(Y page 339); DOT, Tire Identification Number

(Y page 338)= Maximum tire load (Y page 333)? Maximum tire pressure (Y page 324)A ManufacturerB Tire material (Y page 339)C Tire size designation, load-bearing

capacity and speed index (Y page 336)D Load index (Y page 338)E Tire name

i Tire data is vehicle-specific and maydeviate from the data in the example.

Tire labeling 335

Wheelsandtires

Z

Tire size designation, load-bearingcapacity and speed rating

: Tire width; Nominal aspect ratio in %= Tire code? Rim diameterA Load bearing indexB Speed rating

i Tire data is vehicle-specific and maydeviate from the data in the example.

General: depending on the manufacturer'sstandards, the size imprinted in the tire wallmay not contain any letters or may containone letter that precedes the size description.If there is no letter preceding the sizedescription (as shown above): these arepassenger vehicle tires according toEuropean manufacturing standards.If "P" precedes the size description: these arepassenger vehicle tires according to U.S.manufacturing standards.If "LT" precedes the size description: theseare light truck tires according to U.S.manufacturing standards.If "T" precedes the size description: these arecompact emergency spare wheels at high tirepressure, to be used only temporarily in anemergency.Tire width: tire width: shows the nominaltire width in millimeters.Nominal aspect ratio: aspect ratio; is thesize ratio between the tire height and the tirewidth and is shown in percent. The aspect

ratio is calculated by dividing the tire width bythe tire height.Tire code: tire code= specifies the tire type."R" represents radial tires; "D" representsdiagonal tires; "B" represents diagonal radialtires.Optionally, tires with a maximum speed ofover 149mph (240km/h) may have "ZR" inthe size description, depending on themanufacturer (e.g. 245/40 ZR 18).Rim diameter: rim diameter? is thediameter of the bead seat, not the diameterof the rim flange. The rim diameter isspecified in inches (in).Load bearing index: load bearing indexAis a numerical code which specifies themaximum load-bearing capacity of a tire.Do not overload the tires by exceeding thespecified load limit. The maximumpermissible load can be found on thevehicle's Tire and Loading Informationplacard on the B-pillar on the driver's side(Y page 329).Example:A load-bearing index of 91 indicates amaximum load of 1,356lb (615kg) that can becarried by the tires. For further information onthe maximum tire load in kilograms andpounds, see (Y page 333).For further information on the load-bearingindex, see Load index (Y page 338).Speed rating: speed ratingB specifies theapproved maximum speed of the tire.

G WARNINGExceeding the stated tire load-bearingcapacity and the approved maximum speedcould lead to tire damage or the tire bursting.There is a risk of accident.Therefore, only use tire types and sizesapproved for your vehicle model. Observe thetire load rating and speed rating required foryour vehicle.

Regardless of the speed rating, alwaysobserve the speed limits. Drive carefully and

336 Tire labelingWheelsandtires

adapt your driving style to the trafficconditions.

Summer tires

Index Speed rating

Q up to 100mph (160 km/h)

R up to 106mph (170 km/h)

S up to 112mph (180 km/h)

T up to 118mph (190 km/h)

H up to 130mph (210 km/h)

V up to 149mph (240 km/h)

W up to 168mph (270 km/h)

Y up to 186mph (300 km/h)

ZR...Y up to 186mph (300 km/h)

ZR...(..Y) over 186mph (300 km/h)

ZR over 149mph (240 km/h)

ROptionally, tires with a maximum speed ofover 149 mph (240km/h) may have "ZR" inthe size description, depending on themanufacturer (e.g. 245/40 ZR 18).The service specifications consist of loadbearing indexA and speed ratingB.RIf the size description of your tire includes"ZR" and there are no servicespecifications, ask the tire manufacturer inorder to find out the maximum speed.If a service specification is available, themaximum speed is limited according to thespeed rating in the service specification.Example: 245/40 ZR 18 97 Y. In thisexample, "97 Y" is the service specification.The letter "Y" represents the speed ratingand the maximum speed of the tire islimited to 186 mph (300km/h).RThe size description for all tires withmaximum speeds of over 186mph(300km/h) must include "ZR", and the

service specification must be given inbrackets. Example: 275/40 ZR 18 (99 Y).The speed rating "(Y)" indicates that themaximum speed of the tire is over 186mph(300km/h). Ask the tire manufacturerabout the maximum speed.

All-weather tires and winter tires

Index Speed rating

Q M+S5 up to 100mph (160 km/h)

T M+S5 up to 118mph (190 km/h)

H M+S5 up to 130mph (210 km/h)

V M+S5 up to 149mph (240 km/h)

i Not all tires with theM+Smarking providethe driving characteristics of winter tires.Winter tires have, in addition to the M+Sidentification, thei snow flake symbolon the tire sidewall. Tires with this markingfulfill the requirements of the RubberManufacturers Association (RMA) and theRubber Association of Canada (RAC)regarding the tire traction on snow. Theyhave been especially developed for drivingon snow.

An electronic speed limiter prevents yourvehicle from exceeding a speed of 130mph(210km/h).The speed rating of tires mounted at thefactory may be higher than the maximumspeed that the electronic speed limiterpermits.Make sure that your tires have the requiredspeed rating, e.g. when buying new tires. Therequired speed rating for your vehicle can befound in the "Tires" section (Y page 346).Further information about reading tire datacan be obtained from any qualified specialistworkshop.

5 Or M+Si for winter tires.

Tire labeling 337

Wheelsandtires

Z

Load index

In addition to the load bearing index, loadindex: may be imprinted after the lettersthat identify speed indexB(Y page 336) onthe sidewall of the tire.RIf no specification is given: no text (as in theexample above), represents a standardload (SL) tireRXL or Extra Load: represents a reinforcedtireRLight Load: represents a light load tireRC, D, E: represents a load range thatdepends on the maximum load that the tirecan carry at a certain pressure

i Tire data is vehicle-specific and maydeviate from the data in the example.

DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN)

Canadian tire regulations prescribe that everynew tire manufacturer or retreader has toimprint a TIN in or on the sidewall of each tireproduced.

The TIN is a unique identification number. TheTIN makes it easier for tire manufacturers orretreaders to notify customers of recalls orother safety-related matters. It makes itpossible for the purchaser to easily identifythe affected tires.The TIN consists of the manufactureridentification code;, tire size=, tire typecode? and manufacturing dateA.DOT (Department of Transportation): tiresymbol: indicates that the tire complieswith the requirements of the CanadianTransport Ministry.Manufacturer identification code:manufacturer identification code; providesdetails on the tire manufacturer. New tireshave a code with two symbols. Retreadedtires have a code with four symbols.Further information about retreaded tires(Y page 318).Tire size: identifier= describes the tire size.Tire type code: tire type code? can beused by the manufacturer as a code todescribe specific characteristics of the tire.Date of manufacture: date of manufactureA provides information about the age of atire. The first and second positions representthe week of manufacture, starting with "01"for the first calendar week. Positions threeand four represent the year of manufacture.For example, a tire that is marked with"3208", was manufactured in week 32 in2008.

i Tire data is vehicle-specific and maydeviate from the data in the example.

338 Tire labelingWheelsandtires

Tire characteristics

This information describes the tire cord andthe number of layers in sidewall: and undertire tread;.

i Tire data is vehicle-specific and maydeviate from the data in the example.

Definition of terms for tires andloading

Tire ply composition and materialusedDescribes the number of plies or the numberof layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tiretread and sidewall. These are made of steel,nylon, polyester and other materials.

BarMetric unit for tire pressure.14.5038 pounds per square inch (psi) and100 kilopascals (kPa) are the equivalent of1 bar.

DOT (Department of Transportation)DOT marked tires fulfill the requirements ofthe Canadian Transport Ministry.

Normal occupant weightThe number of occupants for which thevehicle is designed multiplied by68 kilograms (150 lb).

Uniform Tire Quality GradingStandardsA uniform standard to grade the quality oftireswith regards to tread quality, tire tractionand temperature characteristics. Ratings aredetermined by tire manufacturers using U.S.government testing procedures. The ratingsare molded into the sidewall of the tire.

Recommended tire pressureThe recommended tire pressure applies tothe tires mounted at the factory.The Tire and Loading Information placardcontains the recommended tire pressures forcold tires on a fully loaded vehicle and for themaximum permissible vehicle speed.The tire pressure table contains therecommended pressures for cold tires forvarious operating conditions, i.e. differingload and speed conditions.

Increased vehicle weight due tooptional equipmentThis is the combined weight of all standardand optional equipment available for thevehicle, regardless of whether it is actuallyinstalled on the vehicle or not.

RimThis is the part of the wheel on which the tireis mounted.

Definition of terms for tires and loading 339

Wheelsandtires

Z

GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)The GAWR is the maximum gross axle weightrating. The actual load on an axle must neverexceed the gross axle weight rating. Thegross axle weight rating can be found on thevehicle identification plate on the B-pillar onthe driver's side.

Speed ratingThe speed rating is part of the tireidentification. It specifies the speed range forwhich the tire is approved.

GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight)The gross vehicle weight includes the weightof the vehicle including fuel, tools, the sparewheel, accessories installed, occupants,luggage and the drawbar noseweight, ifapplicable. The gross vehicle weight must notexceed the gross vehicle weight rating GVWRas specified on the vehicle identification plateon the B-pillar on the driver's side.

GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)The GVWR is the maximum permissible grossweight of a fully loaded vehicle (the weight ofthe vehicle including all accessories,occupants, fuel, luggage and the drawbarnoseweight, if applicable). The gross vehicleweight rating is specified on the vehicleidentification plate on the B-pillar on thedriver's side.

Maximum loaded vehicle weightThe maximum weight is the sum of:Rthe curb weight of the vehicleRthe weight of the accessoriesRthe load limitRthe weight of the factory installed optionalequipment

Kilopascal (kPa)Metric unit for tire pressure. 6.9 kPacorresponds to 1 psi. Another unit for tirepressure is bar. 100 kilopascal (kPa) is theequivalent of 1 bar.

Load indexIn addition to the load-bearing index, the loadindex may also be imprinted on the sidewallof the tire. This specifies the load-bearingcapacity more precisely.

Curb weightThe weight of a vehicle with standardequipment including the maximum capacityof fuel, oil and coolant. It also includes the air-conditioning system and optional equipmentif these are installed in the vehicle, but doesnot include passengers or luggage.

Maximum load ratingThe maximum load rating in kilograms orpounds is the maximum weight for which atire is approved.

Maximum permissible tire pressureMaximum permissible tire pressure for onetire.

Maximum load on one tireMaximum load on one tire. This is calculatedby dividing themaximum axle load of one axleby two.

PSI (pounds per square inch)A standard unit of measure for tire pressure.

340 Definition of terms for tires and loadingWheelsandtires

Aspect ratioRelationship between tire height and tirewidth in percent.

Tire pressureThis is pressure inside the tire applying anoutward force to each square inch of the tire'ssurface. The tire pressure is specified inpounds per square inch (psi), in kilopascal(kPa) or in bar. The tire pressure should onlybe corrected when the tires are cold.

Tire pressure of cold tiresThe tires are cold:Rif the vehicle has been parked withoutdirect sunlight on the tires for at least threehours andRif the vehicle has not been driven furtherthan 1 mile (1.6 km)

TreadThe part of the tire that comes into contactwith the road.

BeadThe tire bead ensures that the tire sitssecurely on the wheel. There are several steelwires in the bead to prevent the tire fromcoming loose from the wheel rim.

SidewallThe part of the tire between the tread and thebead.

Weight of optional extrasThe combined weight of those optional extrasthat weigh more than the replaced standardpart and more than 2.3 kg (5 lbs). These

optional extras, such as high-performancebrakes, level control, a roof rack or a high-performance battery, are not included in thecurb weight and the weight of theaccessories.

TIN (Tire Identification Number)This is a unique identifier which can be usedby a tire manufacturer to identify tires, forexample for a product recall, and thus identifythe purchasers. The TIN is made up of themanufacturer's identity code, tire size, tiretype code and the manufacturing date.

Load bearing indexThe load bearing index (also load index) is acode that contains themaximum load bearingcapacity of a tire.

TractionTraction is the result of friction between thetires and the road surface.

Treadwear indicatorsNarrow bars (tread wear bars) that aredistributed over the tire tread. If the tire treadis level with the bars, the wear limit ofá in(1.6 mm) has been reached.

Occupant distributionThe distribution of occupants in a vehicle attheir designated seating positions.

Total load limitNominal load and luggage load plus68 kilograms (150 lb) multiplied by thenumber of seats in the vehicle.

Definition of terms for tires and loading 341

Wheelsandtires

Z

Changing a wheel

Flat tireYou can find information on what to do in theevent of a flat tire in the "Flat tire" section(Y page 301). Information on driving withMOExtended tires in the event of a flat tirecan be found under "MOExtended tires (tireswith run-flat characteristics" (Y page 301).

Rotating the wheels

G WARNINGInterchanging the front and rear wheels mayseverely impair the driving characteristics ifthe wheels or tires have different dimensions.The wheel brakes or suspension componentsmay also be damaged. There is a risk ofaccident.Rotate front and rearwheels only if thewheelsand tires are of the same dimensions.

! On vehicles equipped with a tire pressuremonitor, electronic components arelocated in the wheel.Tire-mounting tools should not be usednear the valve. This could damage theelectronic components.Only have tires changed at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

Always pay attention to the instructions andsafety notes when changing a wheel(Y page 342).The wear patterns on the front and rear tiresdiffer, depending on the operating conditions.Rotate the wheels before a clear wear patternhas formed on the tires. Front tires typicallywear more on the shoulders and the rear tiresin the center.If your vehicle's tire configuration allows, youcan rotate the wheels according to theintervals in the tire manufacturer's warrantybook in your vehicle documents. If nowarranty book is available, the tires should berotated every 3,000 to 6,000 miles (5,000 to

10,000 km), or earlier if tire wear requires. Donot change the direction of wheel rotation.Clean the contact surfaces of the wheel andthe brake disc thoroughly every time a wheelis rotated. Check the tire pressure and, ifnecessary, restart the tire pressure losswarning system or the tire pressure monitor.

Direction of rotationTires with a specified direction of rotationhave additional benefits, e.g. if there is a riskof hydroplaning. You will only gain thesebenefits if the correct direction of rotation ismaintained.An arrow on the sidewall of the tire indicatesits correct direction of rotation.

Storing wheelsStorewheels that are not being used in a cool,dry and preferably dark place. Protect thetires from oil, grease, gasoline and diesel.

Cleaning the wheels

G WARNINGThe water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirtblasters) can cause invisible exterior damageto the tires or chassis components.Components damaged in this way may failunexpectedly. There is a risk of an accident.Do not use power washers with circular jetnozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damagedtires or chassis components replacedimmediately.

Mounting a wheel

Preparing the vehicleX Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery andlevel ground.

X Apply the electric parking brake manually(Y page 158).

342 Changing a wheelWheelsandtires

X Bring the front wheels into the straight-ahead position.

X Move the DIRECT SELECT lever to positionP.

X Switch off the engine.X Remove the SmartKey from the ignitionlock.

X If included in the vehicle equipment,remove the tire-change tool kit from thevehicle.

X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rollingaway.

Securing the vehicle to prevent it fromrolling away

If your vehicle is equippedwith awheel chock,it can be found in the tire-change tool kit(Y page 300).The folding wheel chock is an additionalsafety measure to prevent the vehicle fromrolling away, for example when changing awheel.X Fold both plates upwards:.X Fold out lower plate;.X Guide the lugs on the lower plate fully intothe openings in base plate=.

Securing the vehicle on level groundX On level ground: place chocks or othersuitable items under the front and rear ofthe wheel that is diagonally opposite thewheel you wish to change.

Securing the vehicle on slight downhill gradientsX On light downhill gradients: placechocks or other suitable items in front ofthe wheels of the front and rear axle.

Raising the vehicle

G WARNINGIf you do not position the jack correctly at theappropriate jacking point of the vehicle, thejack could tip over with the vehicle raised.There is a risk of injury.Only position the jack at the appropriatejacking point of the vehicle. The base of thejack must be positioned vertically, directlyunder the jacking point of the vehicle.

Changing a wheel 343

Wheelsandtires

Z

The following must be observed whenraising the vehicle:Rto raise the vehicle, only use the vehicle-specific jack that has been tested andapproved by Mercedes-Benz. If usedincorrectly, the jack could tip over with thevehicle raised.Rthe jack is designed only to raise and holdthe vehicle for a short time while a wheelis being changed. It is not suited forperforming maintenance work under thevehicle.Ravoid changing the wheel on uphill anddownhill slopes.Rbefore raising the vehicle, secure it fromrolling away by applying the parking brakeand inserting wheel chocks. Neverdisengage the parking brake while thevehicle is raised.Rthe jack must be placed on a firm, flat andnon-slip surface. On a loose surface, alarge, load-bearing underlay must be used.On a slippery surface, a non-slip underlaymust be used, e.g. rubber mats.Rdo not use wooden blocks or similarobjects as a jack underlay. Otherwise, thejack will not be able to achieve its load-bearing capacity due to the restrictedheight.Rmake sure that the distance between theunderside of the tires and the ground doesnot exceed 1.2 in (3 cm).Rnever place your hands and feet under theraised vehicle.Rnever lie under the raised vehicle.Rnever start the engine when the vehicle israised.Rnever open or close a door or the trunk lidwhen the vehicle is raised.Rmake sure that no persons are present inthe vehicle when the vehicle is raised.

! The jack is designed exclusively forjacking up the vehicle at the jacking points.Otherwise, your vehicle could be damaged.

Steel wheel with wheel trimX Vehicles with steel wheels: carefullyreach into two of the wheel trim openingsand remove the wheel trim.

X Using lug wrench:, loosen the bolts onthe wheel you wish to change by about onefull turn. Do not unscrew the boltscompletely.

The jacking points are located just behind thewheel housings of the front wheels and justin front of the wheel housings of the rearwheels (arrows).

344 Changing a wheelWheelsandtires

Covers, front (example: vehicles with AMGequipment)

AMG vehicles and vehicles with AMGequipment: to protect the vehicle body, thevehicle has covers next to the jacking pointson the outer sills.X AMG vehicles and vehicles with AMGequipment: fold cover; upwards.

X Take the ratchet wrench out of the tire-changing tool kit and place it on thehexagon nut of the jack so that the lettersAUF are visible.

X Position jack= at jacking point;.

X Make sure the foot of the jack is directlybeneath the jacking point.

X Turn ratchet wrench? until jack= sitscompletely on jacking point; and thebase of the jack lies evenly on the ground.

Removing a wheel! Do not place wheel bolts in sand or on adirty surface. The bolt and wheel hubthreads could otherwise be damaged whenyou screw them in.

X Unscrew the wheel bolts.X Remove the wheel.

Mounting a new wheel

G WARNINGOiled or greased wheel bolts or damagedwheel bolts/hub threads can cause the wheelbolts to come loose. As a result, you couldlose a wheel while driving. There is a risk ofaccident.Never oil or grease wheel bolts. In the eventof damage to the threads, contact a qualifiedspecialist workshop immediately. Have thedamaged wheel bolts or hub threadsreplaced/renewed. Do not continue driving.

G WARNINGIf you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nutswhen the vehicle is raised, the jack could tipover. There is a risk of injury.Only tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nutswhen the vehicle is on the ground.

Always pay attention to the instructions andsafety notes in the "Changing a wheel"section (Y page 342).Only use wheel bolts that have been designedfor the wheel and the vehicle. For safetyreasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends thatyou only use wheel bolts which have beenapproved forMercedes-Benz vehicles and therespective wheel.

Changing a wheel 345

Wheelsandtires

Z

! To prevent damage to the paintwork, holdthe wheel securely against the wheel hubwhile screwing in the first wheel bolt.

X Clean the wheel and wheel hub contactsurfaces.

X Place the new wheel on the wheel hub andpush it on.

X Tighten the wheel bolts until they arefinger-tight.

Lowering the vehicle

G WARNINGThe wheels could work loose if the wheel nutsand bolts are not tightened to the specifiedtightening torque. There is a risk of accident.Have the tightening torque immediatelychecked at a qualified specialist workshopafter a wheel is changed.

X Place the ratchet wrench onto the hexagonnut of the jack so that the letters AB arevisible.

X Turn the ratchet wrench until the vehicle isonce again standing firmly on the ground.

X Place the jack to one side.X Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in acrosswise pattern in the sequenceindicated (: toA). The tightening torquemust be 96 lb-ft (130 Nm).

X Turn the jack back to its initial position.X Stow the jack and the rest of the vehicletools in the vehicle again.

X Check the tire pressure of the newlymounted wheel and adjust it if necessary.Observe the recommended tire pressure(Y page 322).i Vehicles with tire pressure monitor: allwheels mounted must be equipped withfunctioning sensors.

Wheel and tire combinations

General notes! For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benzrecommends that you only use tires andwheels which have been approved byMercedes-Benz specifically for yourvehicle.These tires have been specially adapted foruse with the control systems, such as ABSor ESP®, and are marked as follows:RMO = Mercedes-Benz OriginalRMOE=Mercedes-BenzOriginal Extended(tires featuring run-flat characteristics)RMO1 = Mercedes-Benz Original (onlycertain AMG tires)

Mercedes-Benz Original Extended tiresmay only be used on wheels that have beenspecifically approved by Mercedes-Benz.Only use tires, wheels or accessoriestested and approved by Mercedes-Benz.Certain characteristics, e.g. handling,

346 Wheel and tire combinationsWheelsandtires

vehicle noise emissions or fuelconsumption, may otherwise be adverselyaffected. In addition, when driving with aload, tire dimension variations could causethe tires to come into contact with thebodywork and axle components. This couldresult in damage to the tires or the vehicle.Mercedes-Benz accepts no liability fordamage resulting from the use of tires,wheels or accessories other than thosetested and approved.Information on tires, wheels and approvedcombinations can be obtained from anyqualified specialist workshop.

! Retreaded tires are neither tested norrecommended by Mercedes-Benz, sinceprevious damage cannot always bedetected on retreaded tires. As a result,Mercedes-Benz cannot guarantee vehiclesafety if retreaded tires are mounted. Donot mount used tires if you have noinformation about their previous usage.

Overview of abbreviations used in thefollowing tire tables:RBA: both axlesRFA: front axleRRA: rear axleThe recommended pressures for variousoperating conditions can be found:Ron the Tire and Loading Information placardwith the recommended tire pressures onthe B-pillar on the driver's sideRin the tire pressure table on the inside ofthe fuel filler flap

Observe the notes on recommended tirepressures under various operating conditions(Y page 322).Check tire pressures regularly, and only whenthe tires are cold. Comply with themaintenance recommendations of the tiremanufacturer in the vehicle document wallet.

Notes on the vehicle equipment – alwaysequip the vehicle with:Rtires of the same size on a given axle (left/right)Rthe same type of tires at a given time(summer tires, winter tires, MOExtendedtires)Exception: it is permissible to install adifferent type or make in the event of a flattire. Observe the "MOExtended tires (tireswith run-flat characteristics" section(Y page 301).

Vehicles equipped withMOExtended tires arenot equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory.It is therefore recommended that youadditionally equip your vehicle with a TIREFITkit if you mount tires that do not feature run-flat properties, e.g. winter tires. A TIREFIT kitmay be obtained from a qualified specialistworkshop.

i The following pages contain informationon approved wheel rim and tire sizes forequipping your vehicle with winter tires.Winter tires are not available at the factoryas standard equipment or optional extras.If you want to equip your vehicle withapproved winter tires, it may be necessaryto obtain wheel rims in the correspondingsize. The size of the approved winter tiresmay differ from the standard tires. This isdependent on the model and theequipment installed at the factory.The tires and wheel rims, as well as furtherinformation, can be obtained at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

In the following table, the wheel/tirecombinations are assigned to the vehiclemodels through variants, e.g. V1, V2 etc.:

V1 CLA 250

V2 CLA 45 AMG 4MATIC

i Not all wheel and tire combinations areavailable at the factory for all countries.

Wheel and tire combinations 347

Wheelsandtires

Z

Tires

Summer tires Alloy wheels V1 V2

BA 225/40 R18 92 W XL6, 7, 8 7.5 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 2.05 in (52 mm)

# —

BA 235/40 ZR18 95 Y XL6 8.0 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.89 in (48 mm)

— #

BA 235/35 ZR19 91 Y XL6 8.0 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.89 in (48 mm)

— #

All-weather tires Alloy wheels V1 V2

BA 225/45 R17 91 H M+S6, 7 7.5 J x 17 H2Wheel offset: 2.07 in(52.5 mm)

# —

Winter tires Alloy wheels V1 V2

BA 205/50 R17 93 H XL M+Si7 6.5 J x 17 H2Wheel offset: 1.93 in (49 mm)

# —

BA 215/45 R18 93 V XL M+Si 7.5 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.73 in (44 mm)

— #

BA 235/40 R18 95 V XL M+Si6 8.0 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.89 in (48 mm)

— #

6 Use of snow chains is not permitted. Observe the notes in the "Snow chains" section.7 Also available as MOExtended tires.8 Observe the notes on "Large wheels" in the "Wheel/tire combination" section.

348 Wheel and tire combinationsWheelsandtires

Useful information ............................ 350Information regarding technicaldata .................................................... 350Warranty ............................................ 350Identification plates ......................... 350Service products and filling capaci-ties ..................................................... 351Vehicle data ...................................... 357

349

Technicaldata

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optionalequipment of your vehicle available at thetime of publication of the Operator'sManual. Country-specific differences arepossible. Please note that your vehicle maynot be equipped with all featuresdescribed. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions.

i Read the information on qualifiedspecialist workshops: (Y page 25).

Information regarding technical data

General informationi The data stated here specifically refers toa vehicle with standard equipment. Consultan authorized Mercedes-Benz Center forthe data for all vehicle variants and trimlevels.

Warranty

The Service and Warranty Informationbooklet contains detailed information aboutthe warranties covering your vehicle.Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center willexchange or repair any defective partsoriginally installed in the vehicle inaccordance with the terms of the followingwarranties:RNew Vehicle Limited WarrantyREmission System WarrantyREmission Performance WarrantyRCalifornia, Connecticut, Maine,Massachusetts, New York, Pennsylvania,Rhode Island and Vermont EmissionControl System WarrantyRState Warranty Enforcement Laws (LemonLaws)

Replacement parts and accessories arecovered by the Mercedes-Benz Parts andAccessories warranties. You can obtaininformation about this from any authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.

i Should you lose your Service andWarranty Information booklet, have anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center arrangefor a replacement. It will be mailed to you.

Identification plates

Vehicle identification plate withvehicle identification number (VIN)

X Open the driver's door.You will see vehicle identification plate:.

Example: vehicle identification plate (USA only); VIN= Paint code

350 Identification platesTechnicaldata

Example: vehicle identification plate (Canada only); VIN= Paint code

i The data shown on the vehicleidentification plate is used only as anexample. This data is different for everyvehicle and can deviate from the datashown here. You can find the dataapplicable to your vehicle on the vehicleidentification plate.

VIN

X Slide the right-hand front seat to itsrearmost position.

X Fold up floor covering: in front of theright-hand front seat.You will see VIN;.

The VIN can also be found in the followinglocations:Ron the lower edge of the windshield(Y page 351)Ron the vehicle identification plate(Y page 350)

Engine number

: Emission control information plate,including the certification of both federaland Californian emissions standards

; VIN (on the lower edge of the windshield)= Engine number (stamped into the

crankcase)

Service products and fillingcapacities

Important safety notes

G WARNINGService products may be poisonous andhazardous to health. There is a risk of injury.Comply with instructions on the use, storageand disposal of service products on the labelsof the respective original containers. Alwaysstore service products sealed in their originalcontainers. Always keep service products outof the reach of children.

H Environmental noteDispose of service products in anenvironmentally responsible manner.

Service products and filling capacities 351

Technicaldata

Z

Service products include the following:RFuelsRLubricants (e.g. engine oil, transmission oil)RCoolantRBrake fluidRWindshield washer fluidRClimate control system refrigerantComponents and service products must bematched. You should therefore only useproducts that have been tested and approvedby Mercedes-Benz.Information about tested and approvedproducts can be obtained from an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center or on the Internet athttp://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.You can recognize service products approvedby Mercedes-Benz by the followinginscription on the containers:RMB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51)RMB Approval (e.g. MB Approval 229.51)Other designations or recommendationsindicate a level of quality or a specification inaccordance with an MB Sheet number (e.g.MB 229.5). They have not necessarily beenapproved by Mercedes-Benz.

Fuel

Important safety notes

G WARNINGFuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuelincorrectly, there is a risk of fire andexplosion.You must avoid fire, open flames, creatingsparks and smoking. Switch off the engineand, if applicable, the auxiliary heating beforerefueling.

G WARNINGFuel is poisonous and hazardous to health.There is a risk of injury.You must make sure that fuel does not comeinto contact with your skin, eyes or clothing

and that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuelvapors. Keep fuel away from children.If you or others come into contact with fuel,observe the following:RWash away fuel from skin immediatelyusing soap and water.RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes,immediately rinse them thoroughly withclean water. Seek medical assistancewithout delay.RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medicalassistance without delay. Do not inducevomiting.RImmediately change out of clothing whichhas come into contact with fuel.

Tank capacity

Model Totalcapacity

AMG vehicles 14.8 US gal(56.0 l)

All other models 13.2 US qt(50.0 l)

Model Of whichreserve

AMG vehicles Approx.2.1 US gal(8.0 l)

All other models Approx.1.6 US qt(6.0 l)

Gasoline

Fuel grade! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with agasoline engine. Do not switch on theignition if you accidentally refuel with thewrong fuel. Otherwise, the fuel will enterthe fuel system. Even small amounts of thewrong fuel could result in damage to the

352 Service products and filling capacitiesTechnicaldata

fuel system and the engine. Notify aqualified specialist workshop and have thefuel tank and fuel lines drained completely.

! Only refuel using unleaded gasoline witha minimum octane rating of 91.

! Only use the fuel recommended.Operating the vehicle with other fuels canlead to engine failure.

! Do not use the following:RE85 (gasoline with 85% ethanol)RE100 (100% ethanol)RM15 (gasoline with 15% methanol)RM30 (gasoline with 30% methanol)RM85 (gasoline with 85% methanol)RM100 (100% methanol)RGasoline with metalliferous additivesRDieselDo not mix such fuels with the fuelrecommended for your vehicle. Do not useadditives. This can otherwise lead to enginedamage. This does not include cleaningadditives for the removal and prevention ofresidue build-up. gasoline may only bemixed with cleaning additivesrecommended by Mercedes-Benz; see"Additives". You can obtain furtherinformation fromany authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.

! To ensure the longevity and fullperformance of the engine, only premium-grade unleaded gasoline must be used.If standard premium-grade unleadedgasoline is unavailable and unleadedgasoline of a lower grade is used forrefueling, observe the followingprecautions:Ronly fill the fuel tank to half full withregular unleaded gasoline and fill the restwith premium-grade unleaded gasolineas soon as possible.Rdo not drive at the maximum speed.

Ravoid sudden acceleration and enginespeeds above 3000 rpm.Rnever refuel using fuel with an octanenumber lower than 87. Otherwise,engine failure could occur.

Usingmixtures ofmethanol and ethanol is notpermitted. E10 fuel or E15 fuel (unleadedgasoline with 10% or 15% ethanol) can beused.Youwill usually find information about the fuelgrade on the pump. If you cannot find thelabel on the pump, ask the staff forassistance.

i For further information, consult aqualified specialist workshop or on theInternet at http://www.mbusa.com (USAonly).

Information on refueling (Y page 155).

AMG vehicles

Additives! Operating the engine with fuel additivesadded later can lead to engine failure. Donot mix fuel additives with fuel. This doesnot include additives for the removal andprevention of residue buildup. gasolinemust only be mixed with additivesrecommended by Mercedes-Benz. Complywith the instructions for use on the productlabel. More information aboutrecommended additives can be obtainedfrom any authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter.

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you usefuel brands that have the additives.The quality of the fuel available in somecountries may not be sufficient. Residuecould build up as a result. In such cases, andin consultation with an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, the gasoline may be mixed withthe cleaning additive recommended byMercedes-Benz (part no. A000989254512).Youmust observe the notes andmixing ratiosspecified on the container.

Service products and filling capacities 353

Technicaldata

Z

Engine oil

General notes! Never use engine oil or an oil filter of aspecification other than is necessary tofulfill the prescribed service intervals. Donot change the engine oil or oil filter inorder to achieve longer replacementintervals than those prescribed. You couldotherwise cause engine damage or damageto the exhaust gas aftertreatment.Follow the instructions in the serviceinterval display regarding the oil change.Otherwise, youmay damage the engine andthe exhaust gas aftertreatment.

When handling engine oil, observe theimportant safety notes on service products(Y page 351).The engine oils are matched to theperformance of Mercedes-Benz engines andservice intervals. You should therefore onlyuse engine oils and oil filters that areapproved for vehicles with maintenancesystems.For a list of approved engine oils and oil filters,consult an authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter. Or visit the websitehttp://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.The table shows which engine oils have beenapproved for your vehicle.Missing values were not available at time ofgoing to print.

Model Enginemodel

MBApproval

CLA 250 270 229.5

CLA 45 AMG4MATIC

133

Use only SAE 0W-40 or SAE 5W-40 engine oilsfor AMG vehicles.

i MB approval is indicated on the oilcontainers.

Filling capacitiesThe following values refer to an oil changeincluding the oil filter.

Model Capacity

CLA 250 5.9 US qt (5.6 l)

CLA 45 AMG 4MATIC 5.8 US qt (5.5 l)

Additives! Do not use any additives in the engine oil.This could damage the engine.

Engine oil viscosity

Viscosity describes the flow characteristicsof a fluid. If an engine oil has a high viscosity,this means that it is thick; a low viscositymeans that it is thin.Select an engine oil with an SAE classification(viscosity) suitable for the prevailing outsidetemperatures. The table shows you whichSAE classifications are to be used. The low-temperature characteristics of engine oilscan deteriorate significantly, e.g. as a resultof aging, soot and fuel deposits. It is thereforestrongly recommended that you carry outregular oil changes using an approved engineoil with the appropriate SAE classification.

Brake fluid

G WARNINGThe brake fluid constantly absorbs moisturefrom the air. This lowers the boiling point of

354 Service products and filling capacitiesTechnicaldata

the brake fluid. If the boiling point of the brakefluid is too low, vapor pockets may form in thebrake system when the brakes are appliedhard. This would impair braking efficiency.There is a risk of an accident.You should have the brake fluid renewed atthe specified intervals.

When handling brake fluid, observe theimportant safety notes on service products(Y page 351).The brake fluid change intervals can be foundin the Maintenance Booklet.Only use brake fluid approved by Mercedes-Benz according to MB Approval 331.0.Information about approved brake fluid canbe obtained at any qualified specialistworkshop or on the Internet athttp://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.

i Have the brake fluid renewed regularly ata qualified specialist workshop.

Coolant

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf antifreeze comes into contact with hotcomponents in the engine compartment, itmay ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.Let the engine cool down before you addantifreeze. Make sure that antifreeze is notspilled next to the filler neck. Thoroughlyclean the antifreeze from components beforestarting the engine.

! Only add coolant that has been premixedwith the desired antifreeze protection. Youcould otherwise damage the engine.Further information on coolants can befound in the Mercedes-Benz Specificationsfor Service Products, MB Specifications forService Products 310.1, e.g. on theInternet athttp://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. Orcontact a qualified specialist workshop.

! Always use a suitable coolant mixture,even in countries where high temperaturesprevail.Otherwise, the engine cooling system is notsufficiently protected from corrosion andoverheating.

i Have the coolant regularly replaced at aqualified specialist workshop and thereplacement confirmed in theMaintenanceBooklet.

Complywith the important safety precautionsfor service products when handling coolant(Y page 351).The coolant is a mixture of water andantifreeze/corrosion inhibitor. It performsthe following tasks:Rcorrosion protectionRantifreeze protectionRraising the boiling pointIf the coolant has antifreeze protection downto -35 ‡ (-37 †), the boiling point of thecoolant during operation is approximately266 ‡ (130 †).The antifreeze/corrosion inhibitorconcentration in the engine cooling systemshould:Rbe at least 50%. This will protect the enginecooling system against freezing down toapproximately -35 ‡ (-37 †).Rnot exceed 55% (antifreeze protectiondown to -49 ‡ [-45 †]). Otherwise, heatwill not be dissipated as effectively.

If the vehicle has lost coolant, add equalamounts of water and antifreeze/corrosioninhibitor.Mercedes-Benz recommends an antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor concentrate inaccordance with MB Specifications forService Products 310.1.

i When the vehicle is first delivered, it isfilled with a coolant mixture that ensuresadequate antifreeze and corrosionprotection.

Service products and filling capacities 355

Technicaldata

Z

i The coolant is checked with everymaintenance interval at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

Filling capacitiesMissing values were not available at time ofgoing to print.

Model Capacity

CLA 250 Approx. 8.2 US qt(7.8 l)

CLA 45 AMG4MATIC

Approx. 8.3 US qt(7.9 l)

i Use antifreeze/corrosion inhibitoraccording to MB approval 325.0 or 326.0.

Windshield washer system

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWindshield washer concentrate is highlyflammable. If it comes into contact with hotengine components or the exhaust system itcould ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.Make sure that no windshield washerconcentrate is spilled next to the filler neck.

! Do not add distilled or de-ionized water tothe washer fluid container. Otherwise, thelevel sensor may be damaged.

! Only MB SummerFit and MB WinterFitwasher fluid should be mixed together. Thespray nozzles may otherwise becomeblocked.

When handling washer fluid, observe theimportant safety notes on service products(Y page 351).At temperatures above freezing:X Fill the washer fluid reservoir with amixtureof water and windshield washer fluid, e.g.MB SummerFit.

Add 1 part MB SummerFit to 100 parts water.At temperatures below freezing:X Fill the washer fluid reservoir with amixtureof water and washer fluid, e.g. MBWinterFit.

Adapt the mixing ratio to the outsidetemperature.RDown to 14 ‡ (Ò10 †): mix 1 part MBWinterFit to 2 parts water.RDown to Ò4 ‡ (Ò20 †): mix 1 part MBWinterFit to 1 part water.RDown to Ò20.2 ‡ (Ò29 †): mix 2 parts MBWinterFit to 1 part water.

i Add windshield washer fluid, e.g. MBSummerFit or MB WinterFit, to the washerfluid all year round.

Climate control system refrigerant

Important safety notesThe climate control system of your vehicle isfilled with refrigerant R-134a.The instruction label regarding the refrigeranttype used can be found on the radiator crossmember.

! Only the refrigerant R-134a and the PAGoil approved by Mercedes-Benz may beused. The approved PAG oil may not bemixed with any other PAG oil that is notapproved for R-134a refrigerant.Otherwise, the climate control system maybe damaged.

Service work, such as topping-up refrigerantor replacing components, may only be carriedout by a qualified specialist workshop. Allapplicable regulations must be adhered to,SAE standard J639 included.Always have work on the climate controlsystem carried out at a qualified specialistworkshop.

356 Service products and filling capacitiesTechnicaldata

Refrigerant instruction label

Example: refrigerant instruction label: Warning symbol; Refrigerant filling capacity= Applicable SAE standards? PAG oil part numberA Type of refrigerant

Warning symbols: indicate:Rpossible dangersRhaving service work carried out at aqualified specialist workshop

Filling capacities

All models Capacity

Refrigerant 650 ± 10 g(22.9 ± 0.4 oz)

PAG oil 120 g(4.2 oz)

Vehicle data

General notesPlease note that for the specified vehicledata:Rthe heights specified may vary as a resultof:- tires- load- condition of the suspension- optional equipmentRoptional equipment reduces the maximumpayload.

Dimensions and weights

Model :: Openingheight

CLA 250 68.9 in(1749 mm)

CLA 45 AMG 4MATIC 68.0 in(1727 mm)

Missing values were not available at time ofgoing to print.

CLA 250

Vehicle length 182.3 in (4630 mm)

Vehicle widthincluding exteriormirrors

80.0 in (2032 mm)

Vehicle height 56.5 in (1436 mm)

Vehicle data 357

Technicaldata

Z

CLA 250

Wheelbase 106.3 in (2699 mm)

Turning radius 36.1 ft (11 m)

Maximum roofload

CLA 45 AMG4MATIC

Vehicle length 184.7 in (4691 mm)

Vehicle widthincluding exteriormirrors

80.0 in (2031 mm)

Vehicle height 55.8 in (1416 mm)

Wheelbase 106.3 in (2699 mm)

Turning radius 36.1 ft (11 m)

Maximum roofload

358 Vehicle dataTechnicaldata

359

360